MCWP 3-15.

1

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

U.S. Marine Corps
PCN 143 000014 00 MCWP 3-15.1 Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY Headquarters United States Marine Corps Washington, D.C. 20380-0001 1 September 1996 Foreword 1. PURPOSE Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 3-15.1, Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery, describes how various machine guns are maintained and employed by the U.S. Marine Corps' machine gun crews. It also provides the principles and techniques for their use in engaging and destroying enemy targets. 2. SCOPE This reference publication is designed for machine gunners, platoon commanders, platoon sergeants, S-3 officers and chiefs, armorers, and ammunition technicians. It outlines a standardized way to train Marine machine gunners through the use of gunnery tables. 3. SUPERSESSION FMFRP 6-15, Machineguns and Machinegun Gunnery, dated 17 August 1988. 4. CHANGES Recommendations for improving this manual are invited from commands as well as directly from individuals. Forward suggestions, using the User Suggestion Form format, to— Commanding General Doctrine Division (C 42) Marine Corps Combat Development Command 3300 Russell Road Suite 318A Quantico, Virginia 22134-5021

5. CERTIFICATION Reviewed and approved this date. BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

PAUL K. VAN RIPER Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps Commanding General Marine Corps Combat Development Command Quantico, Virginia DISTRIBUTION: 143 000014 00

User Suggestion Form
From: To: Subj: Commanding General, Doctrine Division (C 42), Marine Corps Combat Development Command, 3300 Russell Road Suite 318A, Quantico, Virginia 22134-5021
RECOMMENDATIONS CONCERNING MCWP 3-15.1,MACHINE GUNS AND MACHINE GUN GUNNERY

1. In accordance with the foreword to MCWP 3-15.1, which invites individuals to submit suggestions concerning this FMFM directly to the above addressee, the following unclassified recommendation is forwarded:

____ Page Nature of Change:

__________________ Article/Paragraph No. Add Delete Change Correct

_______ Line No.

______________ Figure/Table No.

2. Proposed new verbatim text: (Verbatim, double-spaced; continue on additional pages as necessary.)

3. Justification/source: (Need not be double-spaced.)

Note: Only one recommendation per page.
iii (reverse blank)

MCWP 3-15.1

Record of Changes Change No. Date of Change Date of Entry

Organization

Signature

v

(reverse blank)

MCWP 3-15.1

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery
Table of Contents
Page

Chapter 1. Introduction to Machine Guns Chapter 2. Machine Gun, Light, Squad Automatic Weapon, M249
Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Introduction Disassembly and Assembly Functioning Malfunctions and Stoppages Mounts and Accessories Maintenance Ammunition Operation and Firing Qualification Firing 2-5 2-8 2-20 2-24 2-27 2-29 2-37 2-40 2-45 3-5 3-7 3-19 3-23 3-27 3-38 3-41 3-45 3-50 3-56 3-62 4-5 4-7 4-26 4-29 4-35 4-39 4-43 4-47 4-53 4-56 4-64

Chapter 3. Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240G
Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Introduction Disassembly, Assembly, and Nomenclature Functioning Malfunctions and Stoppages Mounts and Accessories Maintenance Ammunition Operation and Firing Gun Drill Qualification Firing Firing with Blank Ammunition Introduction Disassembly, Assembly, and Nomenclature Headspace and Timing Functioning Malfunctions and Stoppages Mounts and Accessories Maintenance Ammunition Operation and Firing Gun Drill Qualification Firing

Chapter 4. Machine Gun, Caliber .50, Browning, M2HB

vii

MCWP 3-15.1

Chapter 5. Machine Gun, 40mm, MK-19 MOD 3
Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Introduction Disassembly, Assembly, and Nomenclature Functioning Malfunctions and Stoppages Mounts and Accessories Maintenance Ammunition Operation and Firing Gun Drill

5-5 5-7 5-15 5-20 5-22 5-30 5-32 5-36 5-40

Chapter 6. Employment and Gunnery
Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section Section 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Introduction Characteristics of Fire Classes of Fire Range Determination Traversing and Elevating Mechanism Fire Control Methods of Target Engagement Overhead Fires Techniques of Predetermined Fire Final Protective Lines Range Cards Firing From Defilade Position Machine Gunner's Mathematics Antiaircraft Gunnery Firing Positions Wire Communications

6-5 6-9 6-12 6-16 6-18 6-21 6-25 6-36 6-42 6-46 6-49 6-53 6-60 6-64 6-72 6-75

Appendices

Appendix A. M60E3/M240G Firing Tables Appendix B. M2 .50 Cal Firing Tables Appendix C. MK-19 MOD 3 Firing Tables Appendix D. Destruction of Machine Guns Appendix E. Infantry Plotting Board M17 Appendix F. Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire Appendix G. Final Protective Lines Appendix H. Acronyms and Abbreviations Appendix I. References and Related Publications

A-1 B-1 C-1 D-1 E-1 F-1 G-1 H-1 I-1 Note-1

Notes

viii

Guns that have not fired have not attacked. Bullet weights for LMGs normally range from 45 to 72 grains. 1002. this is no excuse for a failure to exact the utmost from them in support of advancing troops. the basic considerations for their employment remain constant.”5 Though the weapons themselves have changed over the years and will continue to do so.45mm to 6mm) automatic weapons. They are optimally employed against exposed and lightly protected personnel at ranges less . The machine gun became the keystone of the infantry defense and a major supplier of organic firepower in the offense. but to counter the enemy’s machine gun employment capabilities. serve as reminders of this fact. Maximum usefulness is obtained only when every gun within range of the enemy is firing effectively against him. These lessons remain applicable and are still studied today. The impact of this weapon can be seen not only in military writings of that period. An LMG typically weighs between 15 and 30 pounds. almost 70 years later. The proper employment of machine guns has won many a battle at the company and platoon level. Neither a tripod nor a spare barrel is normally used with an LMG when it is manned by a single individual. and the lessons contained in them are just as applicable today as when they were first written. provides a wealth of knowledge concerning the employment of machine guns. or heavy.22 to . Military history is filled with examples of the impact that machine guns and their gunners have had in turning the tide of battle: “Machine guns affect the outcome of battle by fire power alone. The effects on employment of these new weapons systems altered the doctrinal way of waging war for both Allied and Axis powers. and a well rehearsed. weapon system weight. medium. The machine gun changed the face of modern warfare just as surely as the development of aircraft and precision indirect fire artillery. listed above.”4 “Although machine guns lend themselves more readily to the defense than to the attack. FMFRP 12-2. Light Machine Guns/Automatic Rifles. a.Chapter 1 Introduction to Machine Guns 1001. a compilation of lessons learned from World War I. Types of Machine Guns Machine guns are classified as light. but in the principles of employment still in use today. crew size. Properly employed machine guns proved to be devastating to massed infantry formations and paved the way for the creation of a whole new methodology of warfighting.”3 “The machine gun acts by fire alone. The excerpts from FMFRP 12-2. Infantry in Battle. complete. proficient machine gun team can sometimes make the difference between success and failure on the battlefield.250 caliber (5. The light machine gun (LMG) classification generally includes . no matter how many times they have been placed in position. movement of this weapon has no other purpose than to secure positions from which more effective fire can be delivered. modern machine guns didn’t begin to exhibit their full potential in battle until World War I. Classifications are determined by a combination of weapon caliber. An LMG is normally manned by a crew of one or two individuals depending on the accessories being used. New tactics were being developed by both sides to not only exploit the effects of the machine gun. and the primary type of intended target. The handicaps to their effective employment in the attack can be and must be overcome. History Despite their post-Civil War development.

Operation Desert Shield. In this category. and aircraft. Heavy Machine Guns. Remaining ammunition. spare barrel.50 caliber or larger (12. Introduction to Machine Guns c. Figure 1-1. M240G machine gun. A MMG generally uses bullets that weigh between 140 and 220 grains. Figure 1-2 show Marines training with a MMG.50. In a ready to fire configuration using a ground tripod.7mm to 15mm) automatic weapons. 5. Medium Machine Guns. The machine guns from this category currently employed by the Marine Corps are the caliber . vehicles. MK-19 MOD 3 machine gun.000 meters. M2HB. They are generally effective against these types of targets at ranges of 1. HMGs are primarily employed against field fortifications.264 to . In this category. ground tripod. Figure 1-1 provides an example of a Marine using an LMG. The common bullet weight of an HMG is 700 grains or larger. The system weight of a heavy machine gun is substantial. This medium machine gun (MMG) classification generally includes . An HMG is normally manned by a crew of four or more personnel (although a crew of three may be sufficient if motor vehicles or draft animals are employed for transportation over distance). Browning. b. motor vehicles) at ranges of 1500 meters or less. Optimally. the Marine Corps employs several variants of the 7. 1-4 .. Marine Automatic Rifleman. the Marine Corps employs the squad automatic weapon. M249.62mm. Figure 1-3 portrays a HMG squadron during Operation Desert Shield.000 meters or greater.MCWP 3-15. The heavy machine gun (HMG) classification generally includes .5mm to 8mm) automatic weapons. The MMG is generally employed by a crew of three.56mm. machine gun and the 40mm.g. they are employed against personnel and light materials ( e. Typical MMG weights are 25 pounds or more when loaded with 50 rounds of ammunition. and other accessories can add another 25 pounds or more to the overall weight of MMG systems. an HMG without ammunition can weigh more than 125 pounds.1 than 1.33 caliber (6.

in actuality. In the offense. Marines From the Enlisted Instructor Company Train New Lieutenants in the Field. however. close defensive. However. that should be understood and considered by all personnel involved in the operation and employment of machine guns. These principles are not meant to serve as absolutes.1 1003. proven in combat. Figure 1-2. Quantico. The Basic School.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. the machine gun can add firepower to the assault. They are. In addition. 1-5 . 1004. Most tactical situations would benefit from the employment of all eight principles simultaneously. the machine gun is used effectively in convoy security. the machine gun provides a high volume of accurate fire in support of the infantry in both the offense and defense. Principles of Machine Gun Employment Maximum efficiency in the tactical employment of all types of machine guns can be reached by applying the following principles during planning. Virginia. point defense of rear area facilities. but it is often best employed to suppress or neutralize the objective from a base of fire. HMGs may also be used to destroy lightly armored vehicles or as defense against slowmoving. Chapter 6 addresses detailed employment of today’s weapons. The long-range. Machine Gun Employment Properly employed. sound ideas. low-flying aircraft. and final protective fires of the machine gun provide an integral part of the defense against infantry attack. these principles are prioritized according to the tactical situation and some may be abandoned in favor of others that are more crucial. and other rear-area security missions.

Mutual Support. Since machine gun positions inflict devastating fire upon the enemy. b. c. Ensure machine gun fire is coordinated with the fires of other machine guns and other weapons. well-placed riflemen. other fires are then Figure 1-3. or perhaps even larger element.1 a. For example. and/or automatic riflemen are placed so they can cover approaches that the enemy may use to attack the guns. No machine gun should be placed in isolation. fires of one machine gun can help defeat attacks on another machine gun. In the defensive. In some instances. This securely “tucks” the machine guns into the defense. they should not be placed in the last position out since this leaves them Introduction to Machine Guns vulnerable to a flanking attack. the machine gun forms the backbone around which other infantry weapons are organized. Employment in pairs also provides the opportunity for continued fire from one machine gun while the other machine gun is reloading or clearing a malfunction or stoppage.MCWP 3-15. To provide protection and security. should be positioned outboard of the gun position. it may be necessary to have other weapons (AT-4 or M203) provide covering fire. An important facet of the principle of mutual support is security. Heavy Machine Gun Squad in Training During Operation Desert Shield. Protection of machine guns should be of primary concern. although machine guns should be placed on the flanks to provide defense. 1-6 . Coordination of Fire. Another reason to place guns so that they cover each other is so one gun can fire directly at the other position if it is overrun. Employing machine guns in pairs ensures a continuous. Machine guns should be placed where they can cover each other by fire. they will come under concentrated attacks by the enemy in his attempt to stop the attack. Employed in Pairs. It also gives the guns the capability of efficiently engaging targets of larger width or depth than one machine gun could effectively engage alone. high volume of fire. A fire team. The machine gun fire plan must be studied by the leader.

This provides cover and some concealment. hitting him when he seeks cover. gun positions should be in defilade. the enemy will quickly target gun positions. i. Economy. For example: Dead space in a machine gun’s final protective line (FPL) is covered by other indirect and/or direct fire weapons. Well planned and prepared alternate and supplementary positions that provide cover and concealment for machine guns are essential. called enfilade fire..1 mented with obstacles and other weapons effects. a detailed. Employ machine guns from a covered and concealed position and do not open fire until necessary. should form a “wall of steel” between friendly positions and the enemy. terrain. d. Machine gun fire. e. position it so that the long axis of the beaten zone coincides with the long axis of the target. Indirect fire planned to concentrate along the line where the machine gun’s FPL is expected to stop the enemy. If at all possible. gunners can be taught to count the length of the burst and to time the pause in between bursts. accurate mission analysis plans to use only those types and amounts of ammunition that will effectively cripple or destroy the enemy. trying to neutralize or destroy them. Once machine gun positions are located.e. To achieve the greatest effect from the machine gun. employ machine guns from a defilade or partial defilade position. Once machine guns open fire they may be located by the enemy. g. The use of cover and concealment protects the guns and their crews. weather.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery planned to complement the machine gun fire plan. In alternating fires. Interlocking Fire. Machine guns fire at high rates making excessive ammunition consumption a concern. Enfilade fire is normally associated with flanking fire. Positioned in Defilade. h. In the offensive. Wasteful use of ammunition can severely jeopardize the success of an operation if resupply is slowed or halted by enemy action. as one machine gun finishes its burst and is about to pause. final assault. consolidation. the other machine gun opens fire This technique is known as “talking guns”. Cover and Concealment. causes the maximum amount of rounds to be concentrated on the maximum amount of targets. Positioned to Produce Enfilade Fire. When tactically feasible. machine gun fire must be coordinated with other weapons systems to ensure complementary or additive effects against the enemy during all phases. Another way to conserve/regulate ammunition expenditure is to employ machine guns in pairs or to use alternating fires. and pursuit by fire. preparation firing. Placing the machine guns in defilade provides them with some substantial cover between them and the enemy’s direct fire weapons. To conserve ammunition. f. these techniques also reduce the wear and tear on a machine gun’s operating parts and prevent overheating and damage to barrels. significantly increasing the chances of hitting targets. properly aug- MCWP 3-15. Therefore. Rates of fire are used when determining a mission analysis. This could be essential to their survival. 1-7 . Ensuring that fire from one machine gun position interlocks with the fires of other machine gun positions prevents gaps through which the enemy can easily close with and attack friendly positions. In addition to controlling ammunition consumption. they become a high priority target for the enemy. As previously discussed. This type of fire. and/or other factors beyond friendly control.

The bipod gives the weapon the stability needed to engage targets at its maximum effective range. ammunition is fed into the weapon from a 200-round ammunition box containing a disintegrating metallic split-link belt. air-cooled. M249 Section 1 of feeding. The SAW can be fired from the hip. Squad Automatic Weapon. the preferred method of employment is to fire from the bipodsteadied position. The SAW has a spare barrel to allow quick barrel changes during employment. As an emergency means Figure 2-1. . however. or underarm using assault fire techniques. It has a maximum rate of fire of 850 rounds per minute. Light. automatic weapon that fires from the open-bolt position (see figure 2-1). squad automatic weapon. M249 (SAW) is a gas-operated. belt or magazine-fed. The SAW (Left and Right Sides). the SAW can use a 20 or 30 round M16 rifle magazine.Chapter 2 Machine Gun. however. barrels must not be interchanged with those from other SAW’s unless the headspace has been set for Introduction The machine gun. Primarily. light. but this will increase the chance of stoppages.

........... The automatic rifleman’s weapon (the M16A1) was the same weapon carried by the other members of the fire team. which is .. Squad Automatic Weapon......... There is also a windage sliding scale marked with index lines for centering the rear sight aperture......... no barrel changes Rapid . The rear sight assembly (see figure 2-2B) mounts on the top of the cover and feed mechanism assembly.................. a detailed... 850 rounds per minute................... 4 to 5 seconds between bursts....87 inches Muzzle velocity Ball ammunition . 6.... blank. Safety The safety (figure 2-3) is in the trigger housing. Light.......... Ball.... 2 to 3 seconds between bursts.56 millimeter Types in use .......... 17 pounds With 200 round drum .. 800 meters Area targets .. Rotation of the rear sight aperture (peep sight) is used for fine changes in elevation or range adjustments....600 meters Maximum effective Point targets ....... 5... 2101..... 3............... Sights The SAW has a hooded and semi-fixed front sight (see figure 2-2A)............... tracer...870 feet per second Rifling ...... pocket-sized reference manual for operators of the SAW.......................000 meters Grazing fire . Standard right hand twist one turn in 7 inches Ranges: Maximum ........ The safety is pushed from right to left (red ring visible) to render the weapon ready to fire....... and the bolt cannot be released to go forward. 2102.........92 pounds 2104... Ammunition: Caliber .. Roles of the SAW From the mid-1960s to the mid-1980s the Marine Corps operated with an automatic weapon at the squad/fire team level that was extremely limited.. 23......... This shortfall was remedied with the introduction of the SAW in the late 1980s. The safety is pushed from left to right (red ring NOT visible) to render the weapon SAFE. 3..... 40......5 cm at 10 meters.... The Marine Corps has never had a more capable and versatile weapon at the squad level.......000 meters.......................92 pounds Measurements: Length ... Each automatic rifleman and assistant automatic rifleman should have ready access to TM 08671A-10/1A.... barrel change every 2 minutes Cyclic . continuous burst.. barrel change every minute 2-6 .................. The elevation knob drum has range settings from 300 meters to 1.............. “clip on” bipod for his weapon.. M249 that weapon by ordnance personnel........... the Browning automatic rifle had been the last Rates of fire: Sustained .......... The cocking handle on the right side of the weapon is used to pull the bolt to the rear.... fired in 6 to 8 round bursts...... The sight adjusts for windage by rotating the windage knob. and dummy Basic allowance ..... Prior to the fielding of the SAW.... fired in 3 to 5 round bursts..MCWP 3-15.... Each click of windage adjustment also equals a one-half-mil change..... 1.. such as during zeroing............. 85 rounds per minute.. Each click of the peep sight (180-degree turn) equals a one-half-mil change in elevation.. General Data Weight of SAW: With bipod and tools ... 600 meters 2103........ 200 rounds per minute....5 cm at 10 meters... The automatic rifleman had no unique capabilities or equipment except that he was given a removable......... which is .. 2.1 Machine Gun......... Range changes are made on the SAW sight by rotating the elevation knob to the desired range setting........025 feet per second Tracer ammunition . 600 rounds per SAW................ carried by the automatic rifleman and assistant automatic rifleman Weight of full 200 round drum ...

1 Figure 2-2. 2-7 . Front and Rear Sights. Figure 2-3.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Safety.

but this may also be conducted in a field environment when necessary. 2-8 . Various models of the Browning automatic rifle were used by Marine units from World War I to the early 1960s. The SAW’s presence. Its presence in large numbers (e. more times than not. Even the much respected Browning automatic rifle. Disassembly and assembly may be divided into two categories.. Although employed as an automatic rifle by the Marine Corps. The introduction of the SAW into those units has changed that. general and detailed.g. nine per rifle platoon) at the small unit level has significantly increased the combat power of those units. Because of this. when the situation and conditions permit. M249 additional flexibility to the unit leader in terms of weapons employment options. Complete general and detailed disassembly is normally the expected routine in garrison after the completion of firing and/or field training. This is also known as field stripping and is a practice that stems from past experience in combat situations. the use of force is not necessary and no special tools are required. that served the Corps so well for over 40 years. These included a limited ammunition supply (only a 20 round box magazine).1 Machine Gun. Light. and a limited maximum effective range. General disassembly involves separation of the weapon into main groups. to ensure the proper functioning and maintenance of the weapon. As such it has design features that make it a more versatile weapon. In the past. The SAW also has greater effective range and a higher rate of fire than any other weapon in the present rifle squad. To prevent unnecessary wear. more out of concern over the lack of fire power in those small units than for sound tactical reasons. involves the removal of some of the component parts and assemblies from the main groups. for the operator. such as. disassembly should be kept to the minimum. The Browning was an automatic rifle and it had some design limitations common to other rifles of its day. in a general or direct support role. Squad Automatic Weapon. the SAW is designed like a medium machine gun. The SAW can provide a heavy volume of continuous. consistent with maintenance and training requirements. it can be belt or magazine fed thus providing more continuous fire before reloading and it has a quick change barrel feature which allows barrel changes during periods of continuous firing without taking the weapon out of action for more than a few seconds. medium machine guns were often attached to platoons or squads. The idea here is that. Detailed disassembly. This reduces the possibility of losing a part and aids in assembly. problems with overheating during continuous firing (because of a fixed barrel that could not be changed by the operator). The idea is to disassemble the weapon just far enough to conduct basic cleaning without having to contend with numerous assemblies and parts. The intent behind designating main groups for a weapon and the practice of field stripping is to allow the operator to quickly break the weapon down into a set of major components that can be hastily cleaned to keep the weapon ready for action. automatic weapon used by the Corps that provided significant fire power to the rifle squad beyond the capabilities of the other small arms carried within it. increases the available fire power and provides Section 2 Disassembly and Assembly The SAW is designed for easy disassembly and assembly. the operator can then take the time to more fully disassemble and thoroughly clean the weapon. rather than attached out. except by qualified ordnance personnel. had limitations that the design of the SAW has overcome. as all parts are replaced in reverse order. the company’s machine gun section can now be employed as a section. As the weapon is disassembled.MCWP 3-15. accurate fire in support of offensive or defensive operations. Disassembly of the weapon beyond that described in this publication is not authorized. in any type of unit. place the parts (in the order in which they are removed) on a clean. The SAW provides the platoons with significant fire power against enemy personnel and light equipment. flat surface.

With the right hand. the barrel group. The first step in disassembly is to clear the weapon (see figure 2-5). a. Insert two fingers of the left hand in the magazine well to extract any ammunition or brass. make sure the weapon is on the ground away from your face. Check the feed pawl assembly under the feed cover. 4. Press the trigger and at the same time ease the bolt forward by manually riding the cocking handle forward.) Return and lock the cocking handle in the forward position. possible injury could occur if a round goes off when the cover is raised. 2-9 . To clear the SAW. The automatic rifleman must always assume the SAW is loaded. palm up. This applies in all situations.1 2201. and the receiver group. With the right hand. 2. Five Main Groups (General Disassembly). They are the operating group. links. not just after firing. General Disassembly General disassembly is the separation of the SAW into five main groups (see figure 2-4). move the safety to the SAFE position by pushing it to the right until the red ring is not visible. 3 Lift the feed tray assembly and inspect the chamber. or ammunition. return the cocking handle to the rear position. 1. pull the cocking handle to the rear. perform the following procedures: Move the safety to the FIRE position by pushing it to the left until the red ring is visible. 5. locking the bolt in place. the buttstock and buffer group.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. the trigger group. CAUTION Figure 2-4. (The weapon cannot be placed on safe unless the bolt is locked to the rear. Raise the cover and feed mechanism assembly and conduct the five-point safety check for brass. Check the space between the bolt assembly and the chamber. While holding the resistance on the cocking handle. palm up. Close the cover and feed mechanism assembly and move the safety to the FIRE position. With the weapon on your shoulder. Clearing the Weapon. When opening the feed cover. Check the feed tray assembly.

Light. M249 Figure 2-5. 2-10 .MCWP 3-15. Squad Automatic Weapon.1 Machine Gun. Clearing Procedures.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Clearing Procedures–Continued. 2-11 .1 Figure 2-5.

Removing the Operating Group. Removing the Operating Group.1 Machine Gun.MCWP 3-15. With the right hand. Return b. M249 To release the operating rod assembly from the positioning grooves inside the receiver. Once the weapon is clear. slide assembly. Hold the buttstock assembly with the left hand to stabilize the weapon. Figure 2-6. Rotating the Buttstock Down. Light. Removing the Operating Rod. To remove the operating group. See figure 2-6. Step 3. The operating group consists of the spring guide rod. Step 2. Allow the buttstock to pivot downward and place it on a surface to support the weapon for disassembly. first pull the upper retaining pin at the rear of the receiver that holds the buttstock to the left. piston assembly. Removing the Piston. and Bolt Assemblies. See figure 2-6. general disassembly begins by removing the operating group. Slide. step 1. Step 1. hold the weapon with one hand on the buttstock assembly and use the thumb of the other hand to push in and upward on the rear of the operating rod assembly. pull the cocking handle to the rear to lock the bolt. Squad Automatic Weapon. Pull the operating rod and spring from the receiver group and separate the parts. step 2. operating rod spring. and bolt assembly. 2-12 .

CAUTION 2202. it is not removed. Removing the Barrel Group. slide. and gas regulator collar. step 3. To remove the buttstock and buffer assembly (see figure 2-8). e. General Assembly The SAW is assembled in reverse order of the disassembly. push the lowermost retaining pin that was used to release the buttstock all the way to the left and remove the trigger assembly from the bottom of the receiver. gas regulator. depress the barrel locking lever with the left hand. Removing the Trigger Group. Figure 2-8. Figure 2-7. It is a captured pin. d. See figure 2-6. Removing the Barrel Group. use a cartridge or the spring guide rod to push the lowermost retaining pin on the rear of Once the trigger group has been removed general disassembly is complete.1 the receiver to the left. CAUTION The upper and lower retaining pins in the rear of the receiver are captured pins. The barrel group consists of barrel. c. Do not attempt to remove them completely. heat shield. close the cover and feed mechanism assembly. Removing the Buttstock and Buffer Group. Hold the slide assembly while pulling the moving parts out the rear of the receiver. a. To remove the barrel from the receiver. Removing the Buttstock and Buffer Group. flash suppressor. Align the trigger mechanism with the slot on the bottom of the 2-13 . This leaves the piston. and bolt assemblies exposed. front sight. See figure 2-9. lift the carrying handle using the right hand.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery the cocking handle to the forward position. Replacing the Trigger Group. while supporting the trigger mechanism. Remove the buttstock and shoulder assembly by pulling it rearward. Barrels must not be interchanged with those from other SAWs unless the headspace has been certified for that weapon by ordnance personnel. To separate the trigger group. MCWP 3-15. and push the barrel forward. Place a finger on the face of the bolt and push until the finger makes contact with the bridge at the end of the receiver. See figure 2-7.

Check the barrel to ensure it is locked into the receiver by pulling or lifting on the carrying handle. 2-14 Figure 2-11. Replacing the Operating Group Open the cover assembly on the receiver. Figure 2-10. Replacing the Trigger Group. Squad Automatic Weapon. then push the lower retaining pin to the right. align the gas regulator with the gas cylinder and lock it by releasing the barrel locking lever. Insert the face of the piston into the receiver.MCWP 3-15. aligning the bolt lugs onto the receiver rails. See figure 2-12. Depress the barrel locking lever to the rear with the left hand. Align the lower hole in the buttstock and buffer group with the rear hole in the trigger mechanism. receiver. Pull the trigger and push the moving parts forward until the bolt is seated into the chamber. Replacing the Buttstock and Buffer Group. Removing the Trigger Group. d. Hold the trigger mechanism in position to accomplish the next step. Pull the barrel rearward and push downward. Light. . Replacing the Buttstock and Buffer Group. while holding the carrying handle with the right hand. c. See figure 2-10.1 Machine Gun. b. Replacing the Barrel Group. See figure 2-11. M249 Figure 2-9.

Conducting a Function Check. are— Grasp the cocking handle with the right hand. If the weapon fails the function check. locking the buttstock to the receiver. Push the cocking handle forward into the forward lock position. palm up. use the left hand to pull the trigger and ease the bolt forward to prevent it from slamming into the chamber area and damaging the face of the bolt. e. Pull the trigger. See figure 2-13. and pull and hold it to the rear. palm up. Then. and pull the bolt to the rear locking it in place. use the left hand to move the safety to the SAFE position. Pivot the buttstock upward into position and push the upper retaining pin to the right. Replacing the Barrel Group.) Grasp the cocking handle with the right hand. insert the free end of the operating rod and spring into the rear of the piston. Depress the rear of the operating rod assembly until the two lugs on the buffer are positioned in the receiver grooves. in order. Replacing the Operating Group.1 Figure 2-12. Figure 2-13. A function check must be performed to ensure that the SAW has been assembled correctly. check for missing parts or the reassembly procedures. While continuing to hold the resistance on the cocking handle. While continuing to hold resistance on the cocking handle. The procedures. Place the operating rod tip into the operating rod spring.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. 2-15 . (The weapon should not fire. Move the safety to the FIRE position.

Step 2. 2-16 . Operating Group (1) Detailed disassembly (Before disassembling the weapon. Separating the Slide Assembly From the Piston. Light.MCWP 3-15. The other three groups can be further disassembled by the operator as described below: a. Squad Automatic Weapon. and rotate the bolt to disengage the bolt from the slide assembly. hold the piston assembly in one hand. This is known as “riding” the bolt forward. as it is used in this manual. This is not to be confused with procedures authorized for 2d echelon maintenance (unit armorers) or above. Step 1. Figure 2-14.1 Machine Gun. Detailed disassembly of any of the groups beyond that described in this document is NOT AUTHORIZED except by qualified ordnance personnel. NOTE The cover and feed mechanism assembly can be closed with the bolt in either the forward or the rearward position.) The bolt must be eased forward to prevent damage to the cover and feed mechanism assembly and operating rod group. Removing the Bolt from the Slide. M249 authorized for the operator level. The operator is not authorized to detail disassemble the trigger group or the buttstock and buffer group. refers only to those disassembly procedures To separate the operating group (see figure 2-14). Separating the Operating Group. make sure it is positioned where the guide rod and spring cannot cause bodily harm if the bolt is locked to the rear. CAUTION 2203. place the other hand on the bolt assembly. Detailed Disassembly and Assembly The term detailed disassembly.

To separate the slide assembly from the piston. Apply pressure to the face of the bolt to compress the firing pin spring. Place the bolt on the slide assembly. rotate the bolt to hook the driving lug into the slide assembly. See figure 2-15. 2-17 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. This locks the piston assembly and the slide assembly together. press the retaining pin at the rear of the slide assembly to the left and lift the slide assembly. With the other hand. Then. This completes detailed disassembly of the operating group. place the barrel with the muzzle end on a hard. Detailed Disassembled.) To remove the heat shield. Operating Group. (2) Detailed assembly Push the slide assembly retaining pin to the right. aligning the driving lug of the bolt with the slot of the slide assembly. Barrel Group (1) Detailed disassembly Hold the piston in one hand with the face of the piston facing outward and the sear notches downward. place the slide assembly onto the rear of the piston with the firing pin toward the front of the piston. Removing the Heat Shield.1 Figure 2-15. b. (Check the slide assembly retaining pin to make sure it is out. flat surface with the Figure 2-16.

) Rotate the collar counterclockwise over the concave portion of the tip on the scraper and heat shield facing away from the body. Step 2. To remove the gas regulator and collar. Removing the Collar. (Be careful not to use too much pressure.MCWP 3-15. rotate the gas collar pin out of the notch. See figure 2-16.1 Machine Gun. M249 scraper. Light. Placement of the Scraper Tool. Rotating the Collar. Use the thumbs to push up on the top clip. so as not to break the tip of the Step 1. 2-18 . Squad Automatic Weapon. Place the index fingers of each hand inside the chamber. Place the tip of the scraper with the concave side facing the pin of the collar inside the notch. Figure 2-17.

past the notch until the collar slides off. place. To remove the gas regulator (see figure 2-18). Barrel Group. Push the gas regulator collar firmly downward and rotate it until it slips into place. place the gas regulator collar onto the protruding end of the body and align the spring with the stud. Receiver Group (1) Detailed disassembly CAUTION Removing the handguard.1 Insert the gas regulator into the gas block and align the notch on the gas regulator with the notch of the gas block. step 1. The handguard retaining pin is a captured pin. See figure 2-17. This completes detailed disassembly of the barrel group.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery (2) Detailed assembly MCWP 3-15. The handguard assembly consists of the handguard. Figure 2-19. Removing the Gas Regulator. With the gas regulator installed and supported on a firm surface. page 2-21). Do not attempt to remove it completely. See figure 2-19. page 2-17). 2-19 . then pull the handguard down (see figure 2-21. Push the handguard retaining pin to the left using a length of cleaning rod (see figure 2-21. Then. step 2. separate it from the gas block. and cleaning equipment retaining clip. Replace the heat shield by placing the hook end of the heat shield under the front sight post and press down until the clamps lock on the barrel. See figure 2-20. press it in and rotate it to lock it in Figure 2-18. handguard retaining pin. Detail Disassembled. c.

To replace the handguard.MCWP 3-15.1 Machine Gun. place it on the receiver from the bottom and push it to the rear until it stops. Once the gas cylinder is removed. Using the guide rod. grasp the gas cylinder at the top of the bipod legs. To remove the gas cylinder from the receiver (see figure 2-22. Turn the cylinder until the spring clicks into the recess at the rear of the gas cylinder. See figure 2-21. Removing the gas cylinder. See figure 2-25. Light. remove the bipod (see figure 2-23. See figure 2-24. Push the cylinder to the rear while countering the pressure of the locking spring and guiding the end of the cylinder into the receiver with the other hand applying downward pressure. Squad Automatic Weapon. This completes detailed disassembly of the receiver. M249 (2) Detailed assembly Replacing the bipod. Replacing the Collar. turn it to the left or right to release the locking spring. Figure 2-20. 2-20 . Replacing the handguard. Removing the bipod. Replacing the gas cylinder. push the handguard retaining pin to the right. page 2-22. page 2-18) by pulling it away from the receiver. Place the bipod on the receiver group with the bipod legs open and pointed downward. which locks the handguard into position. Position the recess in the cylinder near the spring. Push the gas cylinder through the bipod yoke into the receiver. See figure 2-23. and then pull it away from receiver. Push the handguard down to make sure it is locked. page 2-22). page 2-22.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. The cycle is started by putting the first round of the belt in the tray groove or by inserting the magazine into the magazine well. This allows the piston and bolt to be driven forward by the expansion of the operating rod spring. Section 3 Functioning The cycle of functioning is broken down into eight basic steps. ejection. unlocking. By understanding how the SAW functions. Step 2. More than one step may occur simultaneously during the cycle of functioning. it will be easier to recognize and correct malfunctions and stoppages which occur during firing. These steps are feeding. releasing the sear from the sear notch. locking. chambering. Figure 2-21. extracting. When the trigger is pulled to the rear. the rear of the sear is lowered and disengaged from the sear notch.1 Step 1. Handguard Retaining Pin. The cycle 2-21 . firing. Removing the Handguard. and cocking. Then the trigger is pulled. Removing the Handguard.

The feed lever is forced to turn.1 Machine Gun. 2-22 . Light. This forces the feed-pawl assembly over the next round in the belt. the upper locking lug engages the rim of the round. Feeding As the bolt starts its forward movement. Figure 2-23. Squad Automatic Weapon. M249 Figure 2-22. stops when the trigger is released and the sear again engages the sear notch on the piston. The pressure of the 2301. The sequence of functioning is as follows: 2302. Removing the Bipod. and it is ready to place the next round into the tray groove when the rearward action occurs again. Removing the Gas Cylinder. the feed lever is forced to the right. moving the feed pawl to the right. the feed roller forces the feed lever to the left. As the bolt moves to the rear after firing.MCWP 3-15. This places a round in the tray groove. Chambering As the bolt travels forward. causing the feed-pawl assembly to turn in the opposite direction.

The upper locking lug carries the round forward. lug of the bolt. Locking As the round is chambered. When the round is fully seated in the chamber. Detail Disassembled. The action of the bolt into the slide assembly. Receiver Group. 2303. the bolt enters the barrel socket. Replacing the Gas Cylinder. The front cartridge guide prevents forward movement of the link as the round is stripped from the belt. turns the bolt to complete its 90 degree (onequarter turn) clockwise rotation.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. the extractor snaps over the rim of the round. Figure 2-25.1 Figure 2-24. and the ejector on the rail inside the receiver is depressed. Locking is now complete. The chambering ramp causes the nose of the round to be crammed downward into the chamber. The upper and lower locking lugs contact the bolt camming surfaces inside the barrel and start turning the bolt clockwise. front and rear cartridge guides holds the round so that positive contact is made with the upper locking 2-23 . as the piston continues forward.

part of the expanding gases go through the gas plug into the gas regulator.MCWP 3-15. the cycle of functioning is stopped and the weapon is cocked. causes the bolt to begin its counterclockwise rotation. Light. The upper and lower locking lugs of the bolt contact the bolt camming surfaces inside the barrel socket and. independent of the bolt. To prevent undue wear to the sear and sear notch. Firing After the bolt is fully forward and locked. forcing the piston to the rear. The slide assembly carries the firing pin through the face of the bolt. The firing pin strikes the primer of the round and the primer fires the round. 2307. As long as the trigger is held to the rear. Unlocking After the round is fired and the bullet passes the gas port. continuing to the rear with the firing pin. Malfunctions. the SAW will continue to complete the eight steps of functioning automatically. 2306. 2305. Extracting Extracting begins during the unlocking cycle. This causes the ejector clip to expand. the piston continues to go forward. When the trigger is released and the sear again engages the sear notch. As the piston continues to the rear. The rotation of the bolt loosens the cartridge case in the chamber. As the piston and bolt move to the rear. Cocking The piston assembly acts against the firing pin. M249 the extractor pulls the cartridge case from the chamber. 2308. 2304. The action of the piston assembly. The extractor grips the right side of the cartridge and causes it to spin from the weapon as it reaches the ejection port. it completes a one-quarter turn counterclockwise. the bolt passes by the ejector. The rapidly expanding gases enter into the gas cylinder from the gas regulator. releases the compression of the firing pin spring. the automatic rifleman must hold the trigger firmly to the rear during firing. forcing the ejector to push the expended cartridge. pulling the firing pin from the primer of the spent cartridge case. for a short distance. Ejecting As the cartridge case is pulled from the chamber.1 Machine Gun. Figure 2-26. Squad Automatic Weapon. also moving to the rear. 2-24 . The rotation and movement to the rear unlocks the bolt from the barrel socket. as the bolt continues toward the rear. The empty belt links are forced out the link ejection port as the rearward movement of the bolt causes the next round to be positioned in the tray groove. the slide assembly.

Stoppages.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Figure 2-27. 2-25 .

Stoppages are classified by their relationship to the cycle of functioning. A hang fire occurs when the cartridge primer has detonated after being struck by the firing pin but some problem with the propellant powder causes it to burn too slowly and this delays the firing of the projectile. do not open the cover.) 2403. lubricate. Light. the sear shoulder is unable to grab the operating rod and hold it to the rear. the automatic rifleman or the assistant automatic rifleman twist and break the belt of ammunition. An excessively worn sear notch on the operating rod could also be responsible. The action taken to reduce sluggish operation is to move the regulator setting to the high position. Immediate Action Immediate action is that action taken by the automatic rifleman to reduce a stoppage. Instead of firing at its normal rate. Two terms used to describe ammunition condition should be understood in conjunction with immediate action procedures. A cook off occurs when the heat of the barrel is high enough to cause the propellant powder inside the round to ignite even though the primer has not been struck. what those parts do during functioning. Runaway Gun. which places the weapon on SAFE. This knowledge ensures that those problems can be assessed quickly and corrective action taken. the gun will fire. and what mechanical problems may be encountered during firing. Stoppages A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of functioning caused by faulty action of the weapon or deIf nothing is ejected and the barrel is hot (200 or more rounds fired in 2 minutes or less). Keep the weapon pointed downrange and remain clear for 15 minutes. Excessive friction is usually due to lack of lubrication or excessive dirt/carbon in the gas system or on the bolt and receiver rails. This is the case when a gun continues to fire after you have released the trigger.1 Machine Gun. Push the safety to the right (red ring not visible). A runaway gun is usually caused by a worn. and quickly return the weapon to action. their probable causes. M249 Section 4 2402. broken. The remedy for continued sluggish operation is to clean. and the corrective actions. When the round fails to extract/eject. The remedy for runaway gun is to replace worn parts. Figure 2-27 shows types of interruptions or stoppages. further action is delayed . Excessive loss of gas is usually due to loose connections in the gas system. without investigating its cause. WARNING 2401. then clear the weapon. b. 2-26 fective ammunition. Malfunctions and Stoppages Automatic riflemen must have a detailed understanding of the many component parts of their weapon. or burred sear. Squad Automatic Weapon.MCWP 3-15. Stoppages must be reduced quickly and the weapon returned to action. firing is uncontrolled. but fires improperly. Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the gun to function satisfactorily. Sluggish Operation. Defective ammunition or improper operation of the gun by a crew member is not considered a malfunction. Apply immediate action. tighten. or replace parts as required. a. To stop a runaway gun. Time (5 seconds) is allotted for this malfunction before investigating a stoppage further because injury to personnel and damage to equipment could occur if the round went off with the cover of the weapon open. a sluggish gun fires very slowly. Two of the more common malfunctions are sluggish operation and runaway gun. Immediate action is completed in a total of 10 seconds to ensure that the round is extracted prior to the heat of the barrel effecting it. Further information on these two malfunctions is listed in figure 2-26. It can be due to excessive friction or loss of gas. (See paragraph 2403 below.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery (15 minutes) if the barrel is hot because the gunner must assume that a round is still in the chamber and could cook off at any time prior to the barrel cooling off. let the weapon cool for 15 minutes. and use the same procedures as outlined for cold weapon procedures. MCWP 3-15. If the weapon does not fire. See figure 2-27. If a cartridge case. belt link. Cold Weapon Procedures. CAUTION 2-27 . grasp the cocking handle with the right hand. Within the next 5 seconds (to guard against a cook off) pull and lock the cocking handle to the rear while observing the ejection port to see if a cartridge case. If a cartridge case. This action is taken only after immediate action did not remedy the problem. take remedial action. clear the weapon and inspect it and the ammunition. If it does not fire. Reload and continue to fire. or a round is ejected. palm up. the screw will strip the threads in the screw hole of the AN/PVS-4 and prevent use with the SAW. pull the cocking handle to the rear locking the bolt. open the feed cover. take aim on the target. Ensure that the bolt remains to the rear to prevent double feeding if a round or cartridge case is not ejected. When mounting an AN/PVS-4 to the mounting bracket. move the safety to SAFE. While holding the resistance on the cocking handle. If not. move the safety to SAFE and return the cocking handle forward. The bipod provides a stable platform that best enables the automatic rifleman to accurately engage targets at the maximum effective range of the Figure 2-28. and press the trigger. use the following procedures: While the weapon is on the shoulder. 2404.1 Remedial action is any action taken to determine the cause of a stoppage and to restore the weapon to an operational condition. When a stoppage occurs with a cold weapon and immediate action has failed. belt link. Remedial Action Section 5 Mounts and Accessories The SAW is best employed using the bipod for support. make sure that the hole for the screw in the AN/PVS-4 is aligned and flush against the bracket screw. take remedial action. and perform the fivepoint safety check (page 2-9). or round is not ejected. The immediate action procedures for the SAW are— Wait 5 seconds after the misfire to guard against a hang fire. a. or round is ejected. b. push the cocking handle to its forward position. Lowering the Bipod. belt link. Place the weapon on the ground or away from the face. Hot Weapon Procedures. If the stoppage occurs with a hot weapon (200 or more rounds in 2 minutes or less).

The shoulder rest on the buttstock provides support for the SAW when fired in the bipod mode. Folding of Bipod Under the Handguard. It has an attached carrying strap and . pull back under the handguard. Light. M249 Figure 2-29.MCWP 3-15. the bipod can also be removed from the receiver. Release the legs so that they lock in the vertical 2-28 2502. Fold the bipod legs when transporting the weapon. weapon. 2501. Squad Automatic Weapon. and release so that the hooks on the legs grip the handguard. The gas cylinder holds the bipod in place. position. Spare Barrel Bag The spare barrel bag is used to carry a spare barrel for each SAW. To retract the bipod legs. grasp the foot of each leg and pull down. See figure 2-28. Hold the two legs together. push in the latches and push in the legs. The bipod can be folded only when the legs are in the closed position. Once the gas cylinder is removed.1 Machine Gun. In some situations. To lower the bipod legs. of this chapter for more detail. Bipod The bipod is used to fire from the prone position or from a fighting hole. hold the legs together and pull down and away from the handguard. it may be necessary to employ the weapon using assault fire techniques. Operation and Firing. See section 8. however. See figure 2-29. To extend the bipod legs.

b. if necessary. d. Zeroing aligns the AN/PVS-4 to the SAW. Remove the screw cover behind the rear sight assembly. it is best done at 300 meters and at night. the daylight cover must be used. If done during daylight. He checks the device to ensure it is settled and securely fastened and tightens the mounting knob. Mounting the Bracket and the Device . He does not fire at the boresight target during this procedure. checks and tightens the mounting knob.) To obtain a precise zero. there may be some changes in zero when the objective focus is adjusted to engage targets at various ranges and when the diopter focus is adjusted for the vision of different firers. because the strike of the round can be easily observed with an AN/PVS-4. The sight may be zeroed during daylight or darkness. Night Vision Sights The principal night vision sight used with the SAW is the AN/PVS-4. Once the device is mounted. Spare Barrel Bag. Zeroing the AN/PVS-4. Once an AN/PVS-4 has been zeroed on an SAW. However. Centering the Reticle in the Field of View. the automatic rifleman fires a three-round burst to seat the device.1 Figure 2-30. A metal target is excellent for zeroing purposes. Place the mounting bracket on top of the feed cover mechanism assembly so that the two forked ends are secured around the headless pins. The automatic rifleman turns the device on and 2-29 2503. Turn the mounting knob clockwise until the AN/PVS-4 is tight. c. See figure 2-31. and screw the bracket knob in until it is tight. a. and then fires another three-round burst. Seating the Device. Position the AN/PVS-4 on top of the bracket so that the mount of the AN/PVS-4 is aligned with the mounting knob of the bracket. See figure 2-30. anyone who knows how to use the reticle should fire the weapon effectively. zippered exterior pocket for carrying additional cleaning gear or accessories.5855-238-10. (TM 11.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

M249 Figure 2-31. 2-30 .MCWP 3-15. Squad Automatic Weapon. Mounting the Bracket and the Device.1 Machine Gun. Light.

The azimuth actuator has the right direction marked with RT with an arrow. Then. Confirming the Boresight. centers the reticle pattern in the field of view by using the azimuth and elevation actuators. Centered Reticle Pattern. (The elevation actuator has the down direction marked DN with an arrow. page 2-32). If the round impacts anywhere near the aiming point. He divides the number of clicks for each by two and moves the elevation and azimuth actuators that number of clicks. The automatic rifleman places the reticle aiming point on the 25-meter zero target aiming point (see figure 2-33. This provides a large. 2-31 . To be accurate. To do this.1 Figure 2-32. he fires two more rounds to establish his group. he does this by rotating the elevation and azimuth actuators from one side to the other and from top to bottom while counting the number of clicks.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. This enables the automatic rifleman to reach an accurate boresight between the point of aim (reticle) and the center of the bore. This also moves the strike of the round. clear surface for identifying the strike of the round. and fires a single round. This manually centers the reticle in the field of view horizontally and vertically. he emplaces the target 10 meters from the firing position. See figure 2-32. the automatic rifleman centers and affixes a 25-meter (M16A2) zero target to the back of a basic machine gun paster target. e. This moves the strike of the round.

MCWP 3-15. Light. rust. and inspection of a weapon and its accessories determine whether or not it will function correctly when needed. M249 Figure 2-33. care. during. correctly lubricated. Because of the close fit of working surfaces and the high speed at which the gun operates. There are certain actions that must be taken before. Section 6 Maintenance Proper maintenance.1 Machine Gun. Squad Automatic Weapon. Reticle Aiming Point and the Target Aiming Point. The bore and chamber must be properly maintained to preserve accuracy. and dirt to ensure proper. 2-32 . and after firing to properly maintain the SAW. efficient functioning. the receiver and all moving parts must be kept clean. and free from burrs. cleaning.

Every 90 days during inactivity.1 Inspect the weapon periodically to ensure that it remains lubricated. the SAW should be inspected daily and cleaned and lubricated when necessary. When malfunctions or stoppages occur. This lubricates and preserves the exposed metal parts during all normal temperature ranges.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery Lubricate the weapon. a. Cleaning. Cleaning the Gas Vent Hole. b. clean and lubricate the weapon unless inspection reveals more frequent servicing is necessary. RBC. follow the procedures in section 4. and dry cleaning solvent. Dry cleaning solvent will dry out the metal and Figure 2-34. Before Firing Wipe the bore dry. Cleaning material authorized for use on the SAW by the operator is CLP. c. Figure 2-35. During Firing MCWP 3-15. 2-33 . Inspect the weapon as outlined in the operator’s technical manual. SAW Tool Storage. 2601. Use CLP or RBC for daily maintenance and to remove minor carbon buildup after firing. Figure 2-36. Care and Cleaning Before. and After Firing a. Cleaning the Central Hole. During. a thin coat of CLP is applied by rubbing with a cloth. 2602. When not in use. It should be detail disassembled before cleaning. After it has been cleaned and wiped dry. Normal Maintenance Procedures The SAW should be cleaned immediately after firing. After Firing Immediately clear and clean the weapon.

See figure 2-34. The same procedure is used to clean the receiver. See the text below for details. (1) Bore and chamber. Never mix CLP with RBC or LSA. grooves and recesses of the gas cylinder. Just as its name implies it is used to scrape carbon buildup out of the various ports. scraper. block. is recommended for cleaning when changing from one type of lubricant to another. Cleaning the Grooves of the Body.MCWP 3-15. Squad Automatic Weapon. All metal components and surfaces that have been exposed to powder fouling should be cleaned using CLP on a bore-cleaning patch. Cleaning the Front Interior and Internal Grooves of the Gas Cylinder. CAUTION Figure 2-38. M249 Figure 2-37. is used to clean the gas system. When using CLP. This tool is carried in the handguard along with the other SL-3 cleaning components for the weapon.1 Machine Gun. Use CLP and fresh swabs. piston. 2-34 . The special tool. no other type cleaner can be used. Light. and collar.

Remove all carbon dust. See figure 2-36. Cleaning the Grooves of the Piston. and after firing (see paragraph 2601). Cleaning the Hole in the Front of the Piston. (3) Gas cylinder and piston. (4) All other parts. Clean the central hole with the appropriate part of the scraper by turning it clockwise and pushing it inward toward the bottom of the housing. See figure 2-38. except insert the scraper farther into the gas cylinder. See figure 2-40. b. (scraper). Figure 2-40. Do not use CLP on the collar. They are used to lubricate certain parts of the weapon before. during. See figure 2-35. Clean the gas vent hole. See figure 2-37.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. The lubricants authorized for field use on the SAW are CLP and LAW. Each type is best used in specific climatic and environmental conditions (see paragraph 2602). Use the special tool (scraper). Lubricating.1 Clean the front interior of the gas cylinder (repositioned in receiver with bipod in place) by inserting and turning the flat side of the scraper in a 360 degree circular motion. Clean the hole in the front of the piston by inserting and turning the flat side of the scraper in a 360 degree circular motion. Remove all carbon dust from the piston inside and out. Clean carbon and dirt from all Figure 2-39. gas block. NOTE A cloth saturated in CLP is used on exterior surfaces to prevent corrosion. or body. (2) Gas regulator. 2-35 . See figure 2-38. Use the special tool other parts of the weapon. Clean the three grooves of the piston using a 360 degree circular motion (see figure 2-39). Use the protruding tips of the scraper to clean the two grooves of the body. Clean the internal grooves of the front side of the gas cylinder the same as described in the preceding bullet. Do not use CLP on the gas cylinder or piston.

This lubricates and preserves the exposed metal parts during all normal temperature ranges. Use CLP on the cam surfaces of the bolt-locking lugs. Squad Automatic Weapon. In temperatures between 10 degrees Fahrenheit (-12 degrees centigrade) and -10 degrees Fahrenheit (-23 degrees centigrade). Use CLP on all moving parts on the cover assembly and the receiver rails. In sustained temperatures below -10 degrees Fahrenheit (-23 degrees centigrade) use LAW only. After lubricating. and lubricate with a light coat of CLP. In cold climates. allow the SAW to come to room temperature. rub the components by hand to spread the CLP. all of which can freeze and cause the weapon to operate sluggishly. a thin coat of CLP is applied by rubbing it with a cloth. the SAW must rod and spring. the feed roller. 2-36 . wipe completely dry. cleaners. the heat shield.1 Machine Gun. and moisture. Climatic Conditions (1) Cold climates. and the bolt-locking lug. Special Maintenance Procedures a. the SAW should be lubricated with CLP.MCWP 3-15. (3) Receiver group. or LAW. If brought indoors. and along the outer surfaces of the barrel clamp. M249 After the SAW is cleaned and wiped dry. the slide assembly. Use CLP on the operating 2603. The moving parts are lubricated with CLP. be kept free of excess lubricants. Light. (2) Barrel group. (1) Operating rod group.

1 a. and it should be fastened securely. 2604. 2-37 . If the weapon is contaminated. or cracked. and dust must be kept from collecting in working parts. The front sight post and front sight base must not be bent. The operating rod spring should not have kinks or separated strands or broken strands. b. NBC Decontamination. and Chemical (NBC) Conditions. In hot. then clean and lubricate. or pits in the chamber or bore. sand MCWP 3-15. cracked. or broken retaining clamps. The cartridge extractor should not be cracked or chipped. Generally a heavier application of lubricant is required. apply lubricant to all outer surfaces of the weapon (do not lubricate ammunition). Keep the weapon covered as much as possible. dry climates. bends. Inspection Inspection begins with the weapon disassembled in its major groups. The heat shield assembly is inspected for damage. The Teflon coating left by the CLP will be sufficient to keep the parts working smoothly. The firing pin spring should not be crushed or bent. inspect more frequently for rust and keep free of moisture. b. The gas plug is checked for obstructions. The feed roller is checked for spring tension when compressed and that the pivot slide is locked onto the slide assembly. In hot. Barrel Group The flash suppressor should not be cracked. Slight rotation of the piston on its housing is normal and is not cause for rejection. Clean the weapon daily with CLP. decontaminate by following the procedures outlined in FM 3-5. The following parts of the weapon and related equipment are inspected for the conditions indicated. humid climates. cracks. or broken. Wipe dry. Lug pins should protrude equally on both sides of the buffer spacer. The bolt assembly is checked for visible damage. The firing pin is checked for straightness and cracks and that the tip is completely rounded. obstructions. dry climates. broken. Operating Rod Group The operating rod should not be bent. Any broken or missing parts should be repaired or replaced according to TM 9-1005-201-10. The beveled end should not be stretched. Biological. Shiny surfaces do not mean the parts are unserviceable. (3) Hot. humid climates. and bulges.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery (2) Hot. Weapons already zeroed should not be adjusted. The barrel is checked for bulges. cracks. It can have a maximum of one break on any one strand. Ensure that the SAW is lubricated properly with CLP. If contamination is anticipated. The buffer spring should not have breaks. The slide assembly is checked for visible damage. cracks. The sear notch on the piston assembly is checked for signs of excessive wear or burring. Nuclear. The gas regulator and collar are checked for cracks or burrs.

The carrying handle is checked to ensure it is not cracked. M249 Figure 2-41. . broken. Squad Automatic Weapon. Light. Handguard Group The handguard should not be cracked or broken. and that it remains locked in an upright position.MCWP 3-15. Buttstock and Buffer Assembly Group Figure 2-42. d. or missing. Cartridges in Metallic Belt. c.1 Machine Gun. that it can be folded under spring pressure to the right and left. The retaining clip must be attached to the handguard retaining pin. Cartridges for the SAW.

It is checked for linkage and tension on the buffer rod. Ballistic Data for 5. All spot welds are checked for cracks. Bipod Group The bipod group should not be cracked. and freely when the safety is on FIRE). All parts inside the cover assembly should move under spring tension. because fragments of a closure wad or particles of unburned propellant can cause injury. or broken. The safety should function properly. bent. h. bent.1 The sear pin should not protrude from the trigger mechanism.56mm Ammunition. e. bends. Receiver Group The cover latch should work properly. Trigger Mechanism Group The shoulder of the sear should not show excessive wear. Do not fire blank ammunition at any person within 20 feet. f.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery The buttstock is checked for cracks. or breaks. The gas cylinder should not be cracked. (The sear should move only slightly when the safety is on SAFE. The bipod legs should extend and collapse easily. Gas Cylinder Group. MCWP 3-15. Figure 2-43. or broken. and for missing components. WARNING The shoulder rest is checked to ensure it is not bent or broken and that it locks in both positions. 2-39 . because the trigger mechanism will not go back in place. g.

Squad Automatic Weapon.MCWP 3-15. c. The cover assembly should remain open without support. The cover is closed. The M855 round is identified by a green tip.56mm standard military ammunition used in the SAW (see figure 2-41). The M855 cartridge has a gilding. a. The receiver should not be bent or cracked. the painting of the bullet tip. the manufacturers initial and year of manufacture on the base of the cartridge case. the cartridge may be identified by its physical characteristics. Blank. Ball. M856 (DODAC 1305-A064). incendiary effects. b. The cartridge description and characteristics are as follows. The belt-holding pawl must be under spring tension.56mm NATO cartridge is completely identifiable by its appearance. The windage and elevation knobs on the rear sight should be movable and legible. Dummy.1 Machine Gun. and signalling. has a projectile weight of 62 grains. Section 7 Ammunition This section covers the several different types of 5. The feed tray is clear of ammunition and/or no magazine is inserted. When removed from the original packing container. The primer and case are waterproof. model. Condition Codes for the SAW. metal-jacketed. and during marksmanship training. Marines should become familiar with and recognize the appropriate ammunition types. and ammunition lot number. 5. caliber. The cover is closed. b. arms ammunition. CONDITION 2: Not applicable to the M249. 5. The feed tray is clear of ammunition and/or no magazine is inserted. d. The ammunition is linked by a disintegrating metallic split-linked belt for firing from the ammunition box (see figure 2-42). and marking targets. The standard 5. Cartridge. Used during training such as gun drill. and is 2. and the markings on the packing containers. Ammunitions is one the feed tray or a magazine is inserted. It is effective against personnel and light materials. signalling. 2702. Used against targets of light material. the M855 round can also be loaded and fired from the SAW using a 20 or 30 round magazine from an M16. The cover is closed. It is identified by an orange tip. In an emergency. lead alloy core bullet with a steel penetrator. and loading and unloading practice. The safety is not engaged. are necessary for the complete identification of small 2-40 . The windage scale screws should not be worn or burred.3 cm long. personnel. The cocking handle should slide freely within its guide and lock in its forward position. Light. When 2701. The safety is engaged. Used for observation of fire. Cartridge. Used during training when simulated fire is desired.56mm Ball M855 (DODAC 1305-A059). This cartridge has a 63. The tracer is used for adjustments after observation. This is the NATO standard round. Figure 2-44. CONDITION 4: The bolt is forward.7 grain bullet without a steel penetrator. M249 CONDITION 1: The bolt is locked to the rear. The safety is engaged. including the symbol of the manufacturer. Tracer. CONDITION 3: The bolt is locked to the rear.56mm Tracer. Identification The type. Classification Ammunition for the SAW is classified as listed: a.

they are mixed with ball ammunition in a ratio of four ball rounds to one tracer round. which caused malfunctions. c. Only the violet-tipped M200 cartridge should be used. The dummy round is used during mechanical training.1 Figure 2-45.56mm cartridges can be fired with the SAW.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. The original M200 blank cartridge had a white tip. The case mouth is closed with a sevenpetal rosette crimp and has a violet tip. 5. Cartridge. This cartridge can be identified by the six grooves along the side of the case beginning about one-half inch from its head. Loading. tracer rounds are fired. therefore. The primer well is open to prevent damage to the firing pin.56mm Dummy M199 (DODAC 1305-A060). It contains no propellant or primer. An M15A2 blank-firing attachment must be used to fire this ammunition. it should only be used in emergency situations when the new M855 or Before raising the feed cover. The blank round is used during training when simulated live fire is desired. 5. d. but accuracy is degraded. The blank cartridge has no projectile. The DODAC for ball and tracer mix is A064. Field use of this cartridge resulted in residue buildup. NOTE The older issue M193 (ball) and M196 (tracer) 5. M856 ammunition described on page 2-33 is not available. CAUTION 2-41 . and function checks. DODAC 1305-A075).56mm blank M200 (M2 link. move the weapon away from your face so that you are not exposed to the open chamber. dry-fire exercises. Cartridge.

the ammunition must be wiped off before using. Care. 2704. Handling. dirt. Heavily corroded.56mm ball round when fired from the SAW. heaters. Storage Store ammunition of all classes away form heat sources such as. it must be kept at least 6 inches above the ground and covered with a double thickness of tarpaulin. Squad Automatic Weapon. may corrode. Light. If ammunition is in the open. 2706. M249 Figure 2-46. Ammunition must be protected from mud. Ammunition is stored under cover. 2705. Ballistic Data Figure 2-43 shows some examples of the penetration capability and other ballistic data for the M855 5. If it gets wet or dirty. 2-42 . radiators. Trenches are dug to divert water from flowing under the ammunition.MCWP 3-15. Each box contains 200 rounds and weighs 6. Lightly corroded cartridges are wiped off as soon as the corrosion is discovered. or loose projectiles should not be fired.1 Machine Gun. Loading an Ammunition Belt. dented. Ammunition removed from the airtight containers. Ammunition Packaging The ammunition can contains two plastic ammunition boxes. and hot water pipes. and moisture.92 pounds. open flame. 2703. and Preservation of Ammunition Ammunition should not be removed from the airtight containers until ready for use. The cover must be placed so that it protects the ammunition yet allows ventilation. Dummy ammunition (M199) is packed in boxes of 20 rounds each. particularly in damp climates.

The firing operation works on gas pressure created as a fired round passes through the barrel. NOTE The ammunition box. should be attached to the underside of the weapon in all three applicable conditions to allow faster transition from one condition to another. is to the rear the weapon is ready to fire so the weapon must be placed on SAFE to prevent firing. while Conditions 3 and 4 place the weapon in a less ready status.1 Figure 2-47. When the trigger is pulled. They are described in figure 2-44. Section 8 Operation and Firing The SAW squad automatic weapon fires from the open bolt position to facilitate cooling. the bolt and operating rod start forward initiating the firing sequence. Oil should never be used on ammunition. Whenever the bolt 2801. Excessive pressure from the heat may cause premature detonation. make sure the weapon is cleared. fired. Oil collects dust and other abrasives that may possibly damage the operating parts of the weapon. and cleared from the open. Loading a Magazine. The weapon will continue to fire as long as the trigger is held to the rear and it is supplied with ammunition. (With the feed cover 2-43 . The safety is not designed to be engaged when the bolt is forward. if used. The SAW is loaded.bolt position. Loading To load the SAW.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. unloaded. Ammunition must also be protected from the direct rays of the sun. Condition Codes are applied when carrying the SAW. As with other small arms. In Condition 1 the weapon is ready to fire when taken off SAFE. as described in Section 2.

With the left hand. When closing the feed cover. Prone Position. Load the 20 or 30 round magazine by inserting it into the magazine well on the left side of the receiver. Magazine-Fed. Bipod-Supported. When loading belted ammunition. See figure 2-47. raised.1 Machine Gun.) See figure 2-45. and place the lead link tab or first round of the belt in the tray groove against the cartridge stop (see figure 2-46). can also be used but care must be taken to keep the ammunition as clean as possible during firing to ensure smooth feeding of the rounds. Push the magazine firmly into the well until it seats and the release tab clicks into the recess on the magazine. is attached to the weapon by sliding the flanges on the top of the box into the grooved tracks on the bottom of the receiver until the holding lever on the box snaps into place. if used. b. Make sure the open side of the links are facing down. Belt-Fed. A loose belt of ammunition.MCWP 3-15. make sure your face is not exposed to the open chamber area when loading. NOTE The 20 or 30 round magazine is for emergency use only when linked ammunition is not available. Figure 2-49. Squad Automatic Weapon. and at the same time close the feed cover with the right hand. The ammunition box. Light. without the ammunition box. M249 Figure 2-48. always place your hand in front of the rear sight to prevent accidentally changing the sight adjustment. a. (Preferred Assault FireTechnique.) 2-44 . Firing From the Hip. always cant the weapon to the right. count five to six rounds down to hold ammunition in place on the feed tray. The rounds should be placed flat across the feed tray.

Using his toes. Major changes require him to redistribute his weight to his elbows and toes and raise his body off the ground. Raise the feed cover and remove any ammunition or links from the feed tray. pull the bolt and lock it in the rear position if it is not already there. This gives the rifleman control of the number of rounds fired in each burst. he shifts his body to the right or left to be in the opposite direction of the target. Trigger Manipulation. b.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Magazine-Fed. the rifleman shifts his shoulders to the right or left to select successive aiming points in the target area. Traverse and Search 2802. The trigger is pulled to the rear and then released. allowing the sear to move downward when the trigger is pulled. and pivots on his elbows until he is once again aligned with the target. Figure 2-50. The rapid rate of fire (200 rounds per minute) is delivered in bursts of 6 to 8 rounds which are fired 2 to 3 seconds apart. b. Unloading To unload the weapon. the cutaway portion of the safety bar is aligned with the safety lug on the sear. Perform the five-point safety check. To make minor changes in direction. the sear cannot rotate downward and the operating group cannot move forward. the cutaway portion of the safety bar is not aligned with the safety lug of the sear. Belt-Fed. Raise the feed cover and perform the five-point safety check. Push the magazine release tab down and pull the magazine from the magazine well. 2803. releasing the operating group and initiating the cycle of function. When the safety is placed in the FIRE position. Place the safety on SAFE. Operation of the Safety When the safety is on. He rapidly assumes a steady 2-45 . When the trigger is pulled.1 a. The sustained rate of fire (100 rounds per minute) is delivered in bursts of 3 to 5 rounds which are fired 4 to 5 seconds apart. or traverse. use the following procedures. Depending on whether belt-fed or magazine-fed ammunition is used. 2804. Firing the SAW a. Firing From Under the Arm. The weapon is not designed to be placed on SAFE with the bolt forward.

2-46 . Spread the legs a comfortable distance apart with heels as close to the ground as possible and yet still be comfortable. Assault Fire Techniques. assault fire techniques may be used for initial bursts of suppression fire prior to assuming the prone position. This position provides the most stable platform for firing the weapon and affords the automatic rifleman the best opportunity to provide the most accurate fire possible out to the maximum effective range of the weapon. Place the cheek against the forefinger of the nonfiring hand to form a stock weld. An imaginary line drawn through the weapon should bisect the firing shoulder and buttock and continue through the heel of the foot. Relax the neck so that the cheek rests on the forefinger naturally. squeezes them together. it may sometimes be necessary to employ the weapon from more hasty positions. Squad Automatic Weapon.1 Machine Gun. Place the non-firing hand on the small of the stock with the thumb curled underneath. To make changes in elevation. Grasp the pistol grip with the firing hand with the fleshy end of the index finger resting lightly on the trigger. and engages the target. This is the preferred position for employment of the SAW. For example. the automatic rifleman grasps the bipod legs close to the receiver. The bipod supported prone position is the preferred firing position for the SAW. See figure 2-48. d. The stock weld should provide for a natural line of sight through the center of the rear sight aperture to the front sight post and to the target. steady pressure rearward and down.MCWP 3-15. Sight Picture. Bipod-Supported. With either technique he places the buttstock firmly against his hip and holds it there by steady inward pressure from his right forearm while firmly gripping the trigger assembly with his right hand. In the preferred assault fire position. He leans forward at the waist and bends his Figure 2-51. so the aiming point will always be the same. holding the weapon tightly into the hollow of the shoulder while aiming and firing. Light. Try to position the non-firing hand and cheek at the same spot on technique. M249 the stock each time the weapon is fired. Prone Position. Assume a prone position to the rear of the weapon and place the shoulder rest on the firing shoulder. obtains the proper sight picture. maintaining pressure down and to the left. Gross errors in range are corrected by adjusting the range setting with the elevation knob. Keep the shoulders level and elbows about an equal distance from the receiver of the weapon. This should only be done when absolutely necessary because the accuracy of the fire is greatly diminished. Slide the non-firing hand forward until the little finger touches the receiver. (1) Firing from the hip. Apply a firm. however. c. or for suppression fire as the automatic rifleman moves quickly through an objective toward consolidation. and maintains pressure on them downward and to the left as he fires. A search is movement of the weapon’s muzzle up or down to distribute fire in depth. the rifleman moves his elbows closer together to lower the muzzle or farther apart to raise the muzzle. in a chance encounter with the enemy. Another technique is to grasp the handguard assembly.

The weapon does not necessarily need to be unloaded. he manipulates the SAW until the rounds do strike the target. 2805. and pulls to the rear on the barrel changing handle to fully seat the new barrel. The automatic rifleman releases the barrel release latch and the assistant gives a quick tug on the barrel to verify that it is locked in place. He places the buttstock firmly under his arm and holds it in place with steady inward pressure from his upper arm while firmly gripping the trigger assembly with his right hand.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery knees slightly as he fires. He leans forward at the waist and bends his knees slightly as he fires. Barrels should be changed when they are beginning to overheat. As a guide. It allows one barrel to be used while the other is cooling. set the sights. in observing and using tracers. Accurate Initial Burst. Changing a barrel only takes a few seconds and significantly improves rate of fire and accuracy. This requires the automatic rifleman to estimate range to the target. The automatic rifle- MCWP 3-15. b. and apply the fundamentals of marksmanship while engaging targets. He must be proficient in observing the strike of rounds. The automatic rifleman can now relay on target and continue to fire.1 Section 9 Qualification Firing 2901. and ensures a continuous rapid rate of accurate fire. 2-47 . Sliding Scale on Sight. The automatic rifleman can easily change barrels by himself if the situation precludes the assistant from helping him. See figure 2-50. The assistant automatic rifleman grasps the barrel changing handle. however. His feet should be kept shoulder width apart when firing. The automatic rifleman must observe the strike of the rounds when the initial burst is fired. Speed. change barrels after firing the rapid rate for 2 minutes. Fundamentals of Marksmanship a. it must be placed on SAFE when the bolt is to the rear. (2) Firing from under the arm. c. ensures that the gas system is aligned. it is attained by practice in both dry-fire and live-fire exercises. The barrel can be changed with the bolt forward or to the rear. and in rapidly laying the SAW on the target during firing. pulls forward and up and removes the barrel from the receiver. Change Barrel Procedures The ability to change the barrels of the SAW quickly provides a great advantage. If not on target. It is an acquired skill gained through extensive training that combines other skills man grasps the handguard maintaining pressure downward and to the left during firing. The automatic rifleman depresses the barrel release latch and holds it down. While the automatic rifleman continues to hold down on the barrel release latch the assistant inserts the new barrel into the receiver. Speed is also essential to good marksmanship. Obtaining an accurate initial burst of fire on the target is essential to good marksmanship. Adjustment of Fire. Figure 2-52. His feet should be kept shoulder width apart when firing. See figure 2-49. increases the life of each barrel.

Then. g. His cheek rests against the buttstock directly or on his hand as it grips the buttstock. The sight picture consists of sight alignment and placement of the aiming point on the target. His body. Breath control is practiced during aiming and firing. d. says PRESS. while an imaginary vertical line through the center of the rear peep sight should bisect the front sight post. Squad Automatic Weapon.1 Machine Gun. He exerts a firm pressure to the rear with both hands while aiming and firing. serves as the foundation. 2902. A good firing position places the eye directly on line with the center of the rear sight. and properly applies a steady hold in firing a burst of three rounds. When firing single shots. Align the top of the front sight post on the center base of the target. A correct sight picture has the when delivering fire. Pressing the trigger straight to the rear and releasing it helps control the number of rounds in each burst and prevents disturbing the lay of the weapon. and releases the trigger. The relationship between the point of impact of the first and subsequent rounds of the burst depends on the stability of the automatic rifleman’s position. as in zeroing. During automatic fire. the automatic rifleman must align the sights. M249 (3) Sight picture. position is the most important aspect of marksmanship. the first round of that burst will hit the target at the point of aim. Speed should not be stressed to the detriment of accuracy. The better the body alignment and the steadier the grip. Align the rear sight aperture target. Trigger Control. Steady Position. control his breathing. the automatic rifleman presses the trigger to the rear. the automatic rifleman exhales and stops his breath when pressing the trigger. the automatic rifleman stops breathing after most of the air has been exhaled during the normal breathing cycle. If the automatic rifleman has a good zero. (1) Sight alignment. He must hold his breath before each burst or adapt his breathing by taking quick shallow breaths or taking deeper breaths between several bursts. RELEASE. The first round hits the aiming point the same as when a round is fired singularly. Align the tip of the front sight post in the center (see figure 2-51) of the rear peep sight and then align the sights with the target.MCWP 3-15. (peep sight) with the sight post of the hooded front sight. Focus on the tip of the front sight post. aims his weapon correctly. Light. and rear sight aligned. e. ideally. His right hand is on the trigger assembly with his index finger on the trigger. f. 2-48 . He fires before he feels any discomfort. Aim. Breath Control. An imaginary horizontal line drawn through the center of the peep sight should touch the top of the front sight post. front sight post. The rifleman’s left hand grasps the top of the buttstock or the hand guard assembly. However. directly behind the weapon. His legs are comfortably spread and his heels are down (if possible). and his grip serves as a lock to hold the weapon against the foundation. align the front sight post in the center of the rear peep sight. this is not necessarily true of the second and third rounds. A straight line extending through the barrel and receiver passes through his right shoulder and hip. In automatic fire. The recoil from the first and subsequent rounds will progressively disturb the lay of the weapon with each round of the burst. To aim the SAW. The natural ability of the eye to center objects in a circle and to seek the point of greatest light (center of peep sight) aids in providing correct sight alignment. Position and Grip The rifleman is in a prone position to the rear of the gun with his right shoulder against the buttstock group. the less dispersed the rounds of a burst of automatic fire will be. Two types of breath control are used. He does not have time to take deep breaths between bursts. For a three-round burst. obtain a correct sight picture. focus his eye. (2) Focus of the eye. and maintain trigger control.

Clockwise (to the right) rotations decrease elevation. 800. Adjustments for windage are made by traversing the rear sight right and left along the sliding scale. The sliding scale is marked or graduated with index lines. 500.000 meters). See figure 2-52. Rotation of the elevation knob toward the muzzle (counterclockwise) increases the range. Rotation of the windage knob (closest to the muzzle end) toward the muzzle 2-49 . which represent 300. Rotate elevation knob four turns toward the buttstock (clockwise) to lower the strike of the round. and 1. Adjustments for elevation (range) require the automatic rifleman to turn the elevation knob (closest to the buttstock) on the rear sight to the desired range setting. two clicks on the windage knob in either direction moves the strike of the round left or right 1 cm and two turns on the peep sight moves the strike of the round up or down 1 cm. Whenever readjusting the range. respectively. Therefore. Fine adjustments. Odd numbered settings are on the right side of the scale wheel and marked with the number 3 and three index lines. the point of aim is never changed. At a 10-meter target. sight corrections are made by correcting windage first.000 meters. Windage. 6. To make the peep sight easier to grasp. It also includes information on how to make corrections if the initial setting on the windage knob or peep sight is not accurate. Even numbered settings are on the left side of the scale wheel and are numbered 4. For example: If the shot group was 2 cm above and 1 cm to the right of the paster. are made by adjusting the peep sight. each paster is 1 cm. The peep sight can be turned nine 180-degree turns from top to bottom. Zero Group Size. 700.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. b. Each 180-degree turn equals a 1/2-mil change in elevation which equals a 1/2-cm change in impact at a range of 10 meters. Each index line is equal to 1/2-mil change in direction or 1/2-cm change of impact at 10 meters. rotate the windage knob two clicks toward the buttstock (clockwise). a. respectively.1 Figure 2-54. and then the sight is returned to the desired range. 10 which represent 400. while counterclockwise (to the left) rotations increase elevation. 2903. the elevation knob is turned to its highest point (1. Sight Settings and BZO Procedures This paragraph provides information on how to set the sights for elevation and windage for the SAW. 8. 900 meters. Elevation. The point of aim is the center base of the target. Range settings are graduated increments from 300 to 1. while rotation toward the buttstock (clockwise) decreases the range. 600. In this case. like zeroing.000 meters. The appropriate adjustment is made for the peep sight.

the automatic rifleman moves downrange and places the grid square overlay over pasters 1 and 2. He ensures that he aligns the overlay with the pasters and squares. while counting the clicks. M249 to the right. One click of the windage knob or peep sight moves the strike of the round 1/2 cm at a range of 10 meters or 1/2 meter at 1. Squad Automatic Weapon. To do . Corrections. To center the sight. The shot group must be about a 4-cm circle or smaller to establish the center of the group in relation to the center base of the aiming paster. because the SAW is an openbolt weapon. Zeroing aligns the sights with the barrel so that the point of aim equals the point of impact. He fires the three rounds without making any adjustments to the sights. Zeroing. while rotation toward the buttstock (clockwise) moves the aperture left. which moves the strike of the rounds left. The automatic rifleman fires (counterclockwise) moves the rear sight aperture right. If a group is too loose.MCWP 3-15. set the sights (mechanical zero). check your position and grip.) (1) 10-meter zeroing. Sight alignment is disturbed somewhat as the bolt moves forward during firing. Light. Range (Meters) 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Sight Adjustment One click moves strike 5 cm (2 inches) One click moves strike 10 cm (4 inches) One click moves strike 15 cm (6 inches) One click moves strike 20 cm (8 inches) One click moves strike 25 cm (10 inches) One click moves strike 30 cm (12 inches) One click moves strike 35 cm (14 inches) One click moves strike 40 cm (16 inches) One click moves strike 45 cm (18 inches) three single rounds loaded individually at the center base of the aiming points on the basic machine gun marksmanship target. c. He centers the rear peep sight by rotating it clockwise (right) as far as it will go. d. Each sight may vary as to how many clicks are needed. return to the firing line to make corrections to the weapon. He divides the clicks by two. If the center of the group elevation knob on a range of 700 meters. the automatic rifleman turns in the weapon for maintenance. If more or less are showing. (3) Grid square overlay. To make corrections. then rotates the windage knob toward the buttstock 12 clicks to the left. The automatic rifleman indexes or places the ment. Ten-meter zeroing is for conducting 10-meter fire only and has no further application. (Zeroing at range or field zeroing is the automatic rifleman’s battlesight zero and must be recorded. For a more accurate adjust- Figure 2-53. (4) Windage correction. then rotating counterclockwise (left) 5 clicks or half-turns. the automatic rifleman starts with the sight all the way to the right and. he rotates the windage knob toward the center (right) while counting the appropriate number of clicks. rotates the windage knob until it stops on the left side. He adjusts the sliding scale at the rear of the sight to center the large index line under the zeroed windage mark on the sight. Figure 2-54 illustrates a zero group size on which adjustments can be made and a group that is too loose for adjustments. figure 2-53 is used as a reference.1 Machine Gun. (2) Three-round group. Windage and Elevation (Peep Sight) Correction Chart. He rotates the windage knob toward the muzzle until the peep sight is completely 2-50 is to the left or right of the black aiming paster. Count the number of squares it will take to move the shot group to the aiming paster. If it is an uneven number. Upon completion. the automatic rifleman must correct for windage.000 meters. which moves the strike of the rounds right. To check the sight. Two threads should be showing on the front sight post. he rounds it up. Establishing a smaller shot group is difficult. This places the peep sight in the approximate center of the sight.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. 2-51 . Grid Square Overlay. Basic Machine Gun Target.1 Figure 2-55. Figure 2-56.

Figure 2-59. M249 Figure 2-57. Light.MCWP 3-15. Shot Group on Basic Machine Gun Target. 2-52 . Overlay Placed Over Pasters.1 Machine Gun. Squad Automatic Weapon. Common Errors of Marksmanship. Figure 2-58.

(7) Recording. Therefore. the automatic rifleman rotates the peep sight clockwise to lower the strike of the round or rotates the peep sight counterclockwise to raise the strike of the round. (1) Set the sights. rotate the windage knob toward the buttstock [clockwise] to move the strike of the round to the left). It is difficult to determine fully where the center of the beaten zone is in relation to the target as range increases. Firing Table I. For example. Before making elevation MCWP 3-15. One 180-degree turn 10-meter zero.1 in either direction moves the strike of the round 1/2 cm at 10 meters. 2-53 . There is no reason to record the adjustments. He should select a known distance target between 300 and 700 meters. because it applies only to firing at the 10-meter basic machine gun target.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery this. Field Zeroing. If the center of the group is still off the aiming point. The automatic rifleman fires an- other three-shot group (loaded singly) after making his corrections for windage and elevation. (5) Elevation correction. Automatic riflemen must know how to zero the SAW at distance. the 300-meter target on the transition range is recommended because of the ease of determining adjustments. e. One click in either direction moves the strike of the round 1/2 cm at 10 meters. If the center of the shot group is above or below the aiming point. he adjusts further until the group is centered on the point of aim. if the automatic rifleman sees that the center of the shot group is 2 cm (two black aiming pasters) to the left of the aiming point. The automatic rifleman uses the same procedures as for 10-meter zeroing are used Figure 2-60. he adjusts the point of impact four clicks in the direction of the aiming point (to the right) by rotating the windage knob toward the muzzle. he must rotate the windage knob to move the peep sight in the direction of the desired change (rotate windage knob toward the muzzle [counterclockwise] to move the strike of the round to the right. (6) Confirmation. the range knob must be at its highest setting.

except the material can be made of plastic or view graph transparency. and count the number of clicks it will take for rounds to impact on the black aiming paster. This series of targets uses a series of aiming points to disburse fire across the target and in depth by using body position changes. The following explanation of the target. he repeats the procedures. he records UP 2. he tightens the screws. Targets and Scoring. and 7 through 8 of sections A. The grid square overlay is used the same as an M16A2 25-meter zero target. Each square is equal to 1 cm.1 Machine Gun. Because determining that relationship is difficult. and D. The target is used to score two automatic riflemen—one uses sections A and B. Light. instead. then fire a three-round shot group. Firing at point targets exposes the automatic rifleman to zeroing techniques and controlledburst fire techniques. Each space is 4 cm wide and 5 cm high. 3. After making corrections for windage and elevation. B. Each click moves the strike of the rounds 1/2 mil or 6 inches at 300 meters. M249 lettered A. including the size of the aiming pasters and scoring spaces. and D. Set the sights for 10-meter zeroing. if he made two half-turns up. (3) Grid square overlay. Target group 7 through 8 provides the automatic rifleman with linear targets with depth. he corrects for windage. and 4. 10-Meter Firing a. Each section has four point targets numbered 1. Targets 1 through 4 can also be used for qualification. he loosens the windage sliding scale screws and aligns the scale so that the large index line is under the windage mark on the sight. aids in zeroing the M249s and facilitates control during the 10-meter firing exercises. he re- gun target consist of pasters 5 through 6. He adjusts the windage knob accordingly. Upon confirming the zero. and the other automatic rifleman uses sections C and D. C.) 2904. (3) Correct for windage. After firing the second three-round shot group (see figure 2-57). B. If the center of the beaten gun target are pasters 1 through 4 of sections A. C. Area targets on the basic machine zone is high or low in relation to the target. he corrects for elevation. (1) Point targets. (2) Area targets. The target consists of four sections 2-54 . C. (6) Record zero. This device assists the cords it by counting the number of clicks (half-turns) he moved the peep sight for elevation in relation to the initial setting of 5. automatic riflemen rely on trial and error to gain sufficient experience in making reliable estimates. (2) Fire a three-round burst. The black aiming paster within the numbered scoring spaces is 1 cm square. place the grid square overlay over the pasters 1 and 2 (see figure 2-58). The automatic rifle- man assumes a good stable position and fires a three-round burst at the center base of the target and notes where the burst strikes. If the target is not hit. If the center of the beaten zone is to the left or right of the target. and D. Adjustments for the windage scale are not recorded. Then. The recommended range is 300 meters. he records DOWN 2. 2. automatic rifleman in zeroing his weapon at 10 meters. Point targets on the basic machine except he places the elevation knob on the range to the target. (4) Correct for elevation.MCWP 3-15. The basic machine gun target (FSN 6920-078-5128) is used for the 10-meter firing exercise (see figure 2-55). (Corrections for figure 2-57 would be turn the windage knob toward the muzzle (clockwise) two clicks. B. (5) Confirm. while using the basic machine gun target (see figure 2-56). If he made two halfturns down. He makes corrections in the same manner as 10-meter zeroing. he fires a confirming burst of three rounds. and two sets of area targets numbered 5 through 6 and 7 through 8. For example. Target group 5 through 6 provides the automatic rifleman with targets in depth and allows him to use a series of aiming points to disburse fire across the target by using body position changes. Squad Automatic Weapon.

The command COMMENCE FIRING is given. When firing at pasters 5 through 6. Sight adjustments using the rear peep sight and windage knob are made at this time if the shot group is tight enough. the maximum score the automatic rifleman can receive is 12 points. 2-55 . and uses traverse and search techniques of fire at area targets. The automatic riflemen are instructed on the objectives and fundamentals of firing from the bipod-supported prone position. When firing at 1 through 4 with a belt of 12 rounds. The seven tasks are fired in the following manner. Each automatic rifleman learns to zero his SAW. repeat each element of the fire command as it is given. a target is best analyzed by considering the common errors of SAW marksmanship. mark. The 10-meter firing is conducted in accordance with Firing Table I (figure 2-60). The 10-meter firing is conducted on a 10-meter range or a multipurpose range using the basic machine gun target. The number of rounds fired is used instead of the rate for METHOD OF FIRE. The 10-meter firing exercises are for practice as well as part of record qualification. When ready. NOTE Throughout all firing exercises. If not. It familiarizes the Marine with the weapon’s characteristics. fire another 3 rounds to ensure the fundamentals are mastered before adjusting the sights. 5 through 6. These exercises are fired with the bipod from the prone position.1 commands used on the basic range. All 10-meter firing exercises are recorded and scored to provide the automatic rifleman an assessment on his performance. The unit is organized in firing orders based on range constraints. on fire Prepare the rear sight for zeroing and check the front sight. b. ONE ROUND (Method of fire) COMMENCE FIRING (Fire on command but when ready) Load one round. and give an UP to safety personnel. It instills in the automatic rifleman confidence in his weapon. zeroing target. the automatic rifleman engages the eight scoring spaces with 24 rounds with a maximum score of 24 points. obtain the proper sight picture.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery (4) Target analysis. engage paster 1 with 3 single shots. he engages the five scoring spaces with a 15-round belt. When the following fire command is given. The maximum score possible is 15 points. See figure 2-59. Move downrange to observe. Prepare a single round. The 10-meter firing trains automatic riflemen to apply the fundamentals of automatic rifle marksmanship in live-fire exercises. the automatic rifleman performs the appropriate tasks during each element of the fire command. The maximum point value is 3 points for each scoring space. A minimum of 35 points is required to qualify on the 10-meter course of fire. (5) Scoring procedures. When firing at pasters 7 through 8. Conduct of Fire. (Omitting the rate specifies RAPID fire which is not desirable for the tasks. and triangulate the shot group. and recoil. the trainer scores all scoring spaces (1 through 4. During firing with a zeroed weapon. and 7 through 8). Rounds touching the line on the paster are considered a HIT. on the basic machine gun marksmanship target. When scoring the 10-meter MCWP 3-15. This is for control.) (1) Task 1. Assume a good position. and on analyzing and scoring the target. AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN (Load and move safety to FIRE) FRONT (Focus on target or target area) PASTER ONE (Locate target) SEVEN HUNDRED (Adjust sights and acquire sight picture) FIXED. Targets are analyzed and scored to determine the automatic rifleman’s proficiency and to reinforce the fundamentals of marksmanship. noise. One point is given for each round impacting within each scoring space. The total possible score is 51 points. conducts controlled-burst fire at point targets.

(4) Task 4. Once complete. firing a 3-round burst for each paster. When the following fire command is given. repeat each element as it is given: AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN FRONT PASTERS FIVE THROUGH SIX SEVEN HUNDRED TRAVERSE AND SEARCH. but fire at paster 2. If he is unable to zero with 12 rounds. THREE-ROUND BURSTS AT MY COMMAND Prepare a 24-round belt. he uses the remaining 3 to confirm his zero. AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN FRONT PASTER THREE SEVEN HUNDRED FIXED. Light. repeat each element as it is given. he is removed from the firing line for remedial training. (2) Task 2. M249 The command to FIRE is given. traverse and search fire Prepare a 6-round belt. THREE-ROUND BURSTS AT MY COMMAND Acquire the proper sight picture and give an UP to safety personnel. The command to FIRE is given. The order to mask is given by stating GAS. firing a 3-round burst at each paster. THREE-ROUND BURSTS AT MY COMMAND Acquire the proper sight picture and give an UP to safety personnel. THREE-ROUND BURSTS AT MY COMMAND Acquire the proper sight picture and give an UP to safety personnel. (5) Task 5. Squad Automatic Weapon. NOTE If the automatic rifleman zeros his weapon using 9 rounds. 2-56 . AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN FRONT PASTERS ONE THROUGH FOUR SEVEN HUNDRED FIXED. Engages pasters 7 through 8. repeat each element as it is given. the fire command is given. Restore mask to the carrier and move down range to observe and analyze the targets. When the following fire command is given. engage pasters 5 through 6. but fire at paster 4. Move downrange to observe and analyze the targets. (3) Task 3. NBC traverse and search fire Prepare a 15-round belt. AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN FRONT PASTERS SEVEN THROUGH EIGHT SEVEN HUNDRED TRAVERSE AND SEARCH. Fire the first burst of 3 rounds at paster 3. Machine Gun. When the following fire command is given.MCWP 3-15. the shooters are given the order ALL CLEAR. Once the shooters are masked. repeat each element as it is given. Repeat the steps above. When the following fire command is given. using the traverse and search technique.1 Repeat the steps above. controlled-burst firing Using the traverse and search technique. traverse and search fire Prepare a 12-round belt.

firing a three-round burst at each paster. (6) Task 6.1 Figure 2-61. When the following fire command is given. Move downrange to observe and analyze the targets. THREE-ROUND BURSTS AT MY COMMAND Figure 2-62. Acquires the proper sight picture and give an UP to safety personnel. NBC traverse and search fire Prepare a 24-round belt. Firing Table II. Engage pasters 1 through 4 in 20 seconds. The order to mask is given by stating GAS. Once the shooters are masked the fire command is given.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. The command to FIRE is given. 2-57 . repeat each element of as it is given. AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN FRONT PASTERS SEVEN THROUGH EIGHT SEVEN HUNDRED TRAVERSE AND SEARCH. Single E-Type and Double EType Silhouette Targets.

completes zeroing before record firing. raise hand and await assistance. Squad Automatic Weapon. and the penalties imposed. page 2-53. Automatic riflemen do not score their Restore the mask to the carrier and move downrange to observe and analyze the targets. If a stoppage occurs that cannot be reduced by immediate action. (7) Task 7. task 6 in 40 seconds. all automatic riflemen must be familiar with the tasks. Qualification consists of firing tasks 2 through 4 of Firing Table I for practice. the ammunition allowances. Task 5 is fired in 20 seconds. If it is necessary to replace the SAW. During qualification firing. If a stoppage occurs. Move downrange to observe. Targets and Scoring. page 2-53). the shooters are given the order ALL CLEAR. he continues to fire the course. the automatic rifleman must apply immediate action. Individual fire commands are given for each task.MCWP 3-15. traverse and search fire Prepare a 15-round belt. or from the bipod in a fighting position. complete firing beginning with the next task. If the stoppage is reduced. own targets when firing for qualification. AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN FRONT PASTERS FIVE THROUGH SIX SEVEN HUNDRED TRAVERSE AND SEARCH. (3) Scoring. at least 35 points must be achieved on Firing Table I. The automatic rifleman experiences and learns the characteristics of fire. Transition firing provides the automatic rifleman the experience necessary to progress from the 10-meter firing to field firing at various types of targets at longer distances. and range determination. firing a 3-round burst at each paster. When the following fire command is given. Using the traverse and search technique. M249 (1) Time and ammunition. the time allowed. Using the traverse and search technique. and tasks 5 through 7 of Firing Table I for record (Firing Table I. Transition Firing a. These firing exercises are conducted from the bipod in the prone position. Before firing. He uses the adjusted aiming point method of fire adjustment. firing a 3-round burst at each paster. 10-Meter Qualification Firing. (2) Stoppages. the engage pasters 5 through 6 in 40 seconds. If a stoppage is caused by an error. additional time is not permitted. Automatic riflemen who cannot fire a task or cannot complete firing in the time allowed (because of malfunctions) can finish the exercise in an “alibi run” after all other automatic riflemen complete firing. THREE-ROUND BURSTS AT MY COMMAND Acquire the proper sight picture and give an UP to safety personnel. engage pasters 7 through 8 in 40 seconds. Once the stoppage is reduced. Light. Transition firing is conducted and scored for 2-58 .1 Machine Gun. 2905. and task 7 in 40 seconds. The command to FIRE is given. field zeroing. analyze and score the target. repeat each element as it is given. c. They fire only those tasks they failed to engage because of the malfunction. Once complete. Each automatic rifleman Acquire the proper sight picture and give an UP to safety personnel. The score will be the one earned before the stoppage occurred. Transition firing should take place on available field firing ranges. the procedures to follow in the event of a stoppage. zero the new weapon and refire the exercise.

The coach assists the automatic rifleman. After adjustments have been made. The COMMENCE FIRING command is given. The preferred range is 300 meters. Five points are given for each target hit. Record the zero. One coach per automatic rifleman is desirable. The automatic rifleman must hit at least 7 (35 points) targets out of 11 exposures to qualify. Table I (page 2-53) qualification firing apply to transition firing. either the single or double (see figure 2-62). obtain the proper sight picture. as needed. single Etype silhouette Prepares the rear sight for field zeroing and check the front sight post. Targets should be placed at various ranges that an automatic rifleman might engage. repeat steps 8 through 9 with the remaining rounds until the rounds are impacting on the target. If the rounds miss the target.1 Load one 12-round belt of ammunition. THREE ROUND BURSTS COMMENCE FIRING 2-59 . Assume a good position. The same procedures used in Firing MCWP 3-15. Fire a 3-round burst at the target when ready. Sets the range to the zero target on the elevation knob. prepare a 12-round belt. and announce “up” to the coach. (1) Stoppages.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery practice and qualification. All targets should be clearly visible from the firing positions. DA Form 7304-R is used to record scores. The unit is organized in firing orders based on range constraints. repeat each element as it is given: AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN FRONT TROOPS IN THE OPEN THREE HUNDRED FIXED. The total possible points is 55. Conduct of Fire. Electrical targets that provide feed back to the shooter and range personnel are desirable. It consists of eight tasks. Two “E” type target configurations should be used. Observe the beaten zone. b. make adjustments for windage and elevation. whether hit with the first or second burst. (2) Scoring. Firing Table II is used (see figure 2-61). The eight tasks are fired in the following manner: (1) Task 1. field zeroing the 300-meter. The coach relays the READY signal to safety personnel controlling the range. in all aspects of the transition course except during qualification. When the following firing command is given. On command.

GAS. fire another 3-round burst using the adjusted aiming point method of fire adjustment. and fire a 3-round burst If the target is not hit. If the target is not hit. assume the proper position. A 100 meter and 300 meter.MCWP 3-15. 100-meter. assume the proper position. 400-meter. The command to FIRE is given. A 300 meter. (5) Task 5. 100-meter and 300-meter. Determine the range. 300-meter. fire another 3-round burst using the adjusted aiming point method of fire adjustment. If the target is not hit. and fire a 3-round burst. (6) Task 6. . load one 66-round belt. place the proper setting on the rear sight. When the following fire command is given. Determine the range. A 100 meter. place the proper setting on the rear sight. obtain the correct sight alignment and sight picture. double E-type silhouette Continue to scan the sector. place the proper setting on the rear sight. and fire a 3-round burst. single E-type silhouette Announce “up” to the coach. 2-60 Continue to scan the sector. AUTOMATIC RIFLEMAN FRONT TROOPS IN THE OPEN ONE HUNDRED TO FOUR HUNDRED METERS FIXED. and fire a 3-round burst. assume the proper position. The coach gives the READY signal to the person controlling the line. Don field protective mask and gloves. obtain the correct sight alignment and sight picture. Light. Continue to scan the sector.1 Machine Gun. If the target is not hit. single E-type silhouette On command. single E-type target is exposed for 15 seconds. It is only given once for tasks 2 through 8. (3) Task 3. Determine the range. M249 (2) Task 2. obtain the correct sight alignment and sight picture. obtain the correct sight alignment and sight picture. single E-type target are exposed for 20 seconds. Scan the sector. double E-type target is exposed for 10 seconds. 200-meter. while in field protective mask and gloves. repeat each element as it is given. assume the proper position. (4) Task 4. fire another 3-round burst using the adjusted aiming point method of fire adjustment. THREE ROUND BURSTS AT MY COMMAND Range personnel give the order to mask by sounding off. place the proper setting on the rear sight. Determine the range. single Etype silhouettes Continue to scan the sector. Squad Automatic Weapon. single E-type silhouette. single E-type target is exposed for 10 seconds. fire another 3-round burst using the adjusted aiming point method of fire adjustment. while in field protective mask and gloves. A 200 meter single E-type target is exposed for 5 seconds. A 400 meter.

Determine the range. assume the proper position. If the target is not hit. single. place the proper setting on the rear sight. fire another 3-round burst using the adjusted aiming point method of fire adjustment at each target.1 correct sight alignment and sight picture. Continue to scan the sector. Range personnel give the ALL CLEAR order. If the target is not hit. and fire a 3-round burst at each target. and fire a 3 round burst at each target. assume the proper position. and fire a 3-round burst at each If the target is not hit. place the proper setting on the rear sight. Return field protective mask to its carrier and remove gloves. The 200 meter single E-type and the 400 meter double E-type targets are exposed for 20 seconds. E-type and 400-meter double E-type silhouettes Continue to scan the sector. 100. obtain 2-61 . Determine the range. (7) Task 7. assume the proper position. (8) Task 8. obtain correct sight alignment and sight picture. fire another 3-round burst using the adjusted aiming point method of fire adjustment at each target. The 100 meter and 200 meter single E-type and 400 meter double E-type targets are exposed for 25 seconds. 200-meter single 400-meter double E-type silhouettes E-type and MCWP 3-15. fire another 3-round burst using the adjusted aiming point method of fire adjustment. obtain the correct sight alignment and sight picture.and 200-meter. place the proper setting on the rear sight.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery Determine the range.

Bipod Mounted. belt-fed. Left Side. controlled volume of accurate. Thus. The gas from firing one round provides the energy for firing the Figure 3-1. long-range fire that is beyond the capabilities of individual small arms. gas-operated automatic weapon. Bipod Mounted. Right Side. 7. The weapon fires from the open-bolt position and is fed by a disintegrating belt of metal links. . The tripod provides the most stable base for the weapon. It is able to provide a heavy.62mm. enabling the gunner to maximize its range capabilities and deliver a high degree of accurate fire on target. Figure 3-2. The traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism permits controlled manipulation in both direction and elevation and makes it possible to engage predetermined targets during darkness or periods of reduced visibility. the gun functions automatically as long as it is supplied with ammunition and the trigger is held to the rear. M240G Section 1 next. Each member of the gun crew should have access to TM 08670A-10/1A Introduction The M240G machine gun (see figures 3-1 and 3-2) is an air-cooled.Chapter 3 Machine Gun. It can be fired utilizing either the attached bipod mount or by mounting the M240G on the tripod.

...... or range changes can be made by raising the sight to its upright position and Ranges Maximum ...... 25. 996 mils Limits of traverse (tripod mount): Using traversing bar ............ It can also be raised to a vertical position for sighting on targets at greater ranges (more than 800 meters)...... Ball.. 450 right) On the traversing handwheel ................. dummy. 100 rounds per minute fired in 6 to 8 round bursts 4 to 5 seconds between bursts barrel change every 10 minutes Rapid ..........6 pounds Weight of machine gun . This sight leaf slide rides on a range plate with a graduated scale which is attached to the weapon by a hinged mount........................ 12...........800 meters Grazing fire ......6 pounds Weight of barrel .... 6400 mils 3102................................ tracer.....62mm........................ These settings are normally used only when the gun is employed on the tripod............ 400 rounds Weight of a 100 round assault pack (2 per can) .... 200 mils Free gun .................................................... pocket-sized reference manuals for operators of the M240G..725 meters Maximum effective .... 6.. is marked at 100 meter intervals from 200 meters to the maximum effective range of 1........... located on both sides of the range plate... 3... M240. blank.......................6 pounds Weight of spare barrel case............ 17 inches Muzzle velocity ..... 650 to 950 rounds per minute continuous burst barrel change every minute (depending on gas setting) 3101......MCWP 3-15............ 996 mils Limits of depression with T&E mechanism .......... 7.. 7........... front sight adjusting...................... 2.....................90 pounds Weight of tripod........................... 600 meters Ammunition Caliber ...... The gun can be used with the sight in this position to engage close in targets (800 meters or below) from the bipod or tripod. 20 pounds Length of machine gun ..... complete with spare barrel and all SL-3 components .................... 875 mils (425 left..................... one turn in 12 inches Manipulation (tripod mount): Limits of elevation with T&E mechanism ..... The gun is normally carried with the sight in its horizontal position.... combination................ 45........... The range plate scale.................. 7 pounds Rates of fire Sustained .......... and armor-piercing Basic allowance per gun ...... See figure 3-3..............800 feet per second Rifling ..800 meters...................1 and TM 08670B-23&P/2 SUPPLEMENT 01 which are detailed. 1. complete with flex-mount including T&E mechanism ..... 100 mils Free gun ......................... 200 rounds per minute fired in 10 to 12 round bursts 2 to 3 seconds between bursts 3-6 .. The rear sight consists of a peep sight aperture on an adjustable sight leaf slide... and M240C.......... Machine Gun......... Range changes can be made by moving the rear sight slide horizontally along its graduated steps for range settings from 200 meters to 800 meters... 247 mils Free gun ............ which provides the stable platform necessary to accurately engage targets at these greater ranges..... M240E1........62 millimeter Types in use ............. M240G barrel change every 2 minutes Cyclic ... 49 inches Height of machine gun on tripod ..... Four grooves with a uniform right hand twist... Sights The M240G has a front sight post which can be adjusted using the tool............ General Data Weights/Measurements Total system weight (gun and tripod complete) ............ This is normally only done to zero the weapon (see paragraph 31003)....................

and combat service support units. Roles of the M240G The M240G is a versatile weapon that can support both offensive and defensive operations. the safety is defective and should be inspected by ordnance personnel. (This is known as riding the bolt home. If it moves. place the weapon on F. pull the trigger. when employed as final protective fires. pull the trigger. Slowly release rearward tension on the cocking handle and allow the bolt to move all the way forward. first make sure the weapon is clear. assault.) 3104. To test the safety. forms an integral part of a unit’s defensive fire plan and can effectively break up and stop an enemy Section 2 Disassembly. Finally. Place the weapon on S. and while holding the cocking handle to the rear.800 meters. and Nomenclature Figure 3-3 Rear Sight Assembly. 3103. It is set on SAFE (S) by pushing it to the right and to FIRE (F) by pushing it to the left. In the F position a red ring is visible around the safety. It can provide a heavy volume of close. This is done to minimize the wear and tear on parts that would result from repeatedly allowing the bolt to spring forward completely during non-firing function testing. 3-7 . Assembly. combat support. The weapon cannot be set on S unless it is cocked (bolt to the rear). That same heavy volume of fire. The bolt should not move forward. The M240G can be found in combat.1 moving the rear sight slide vertically for range settings from 800 meters to 1. accurate. then pull the bolt to the rear using the cocking handle.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. and continuous fire support to suppress and destroy enemy personnel in support of an attack. The bolt should move forward. Safety The M240G safety is located on the trigger housing assembly. and while holding the cocking handle to the rear.

Place the gun on S. Before the weapon is disassembled. as all parts are replaced in reverse order. Disassembly of the weapon beyond that described in this publication is not authorized. the use of force is not necessary. Grasp the cocking handle. b. See figure 3-4. When the situation and conditions permit. and inspect the chamber both visually and physically. but it can also be conducted in a field environment when necessary. Removing the Operating Group. See figure 3-6. To prevent unnecessary wear. This reduces the possibility of losing a part and aids in assembly. M240G Figure 3-4. c. a. step 1. disassembly should be kept to a minimum. consistent with maintenance and training requirements. The M240G is designed for easy disassembly and assembly.1 Machine Gun. They are the buttstock group. for the operator. 7. squeeze the trigger. Removing the Buttstock Group Bring the bolt forward and raise the cover. Open the cover. barrel group. As the weapon is disassembled. it must be cleared: Grasp the cocking handle and pull the bolt to the rear. 3-8 .62mm. It allows the operator to quickly break the weapon down into a set of major components that can be hastily cleaned to keep the weapon ready for action. Complete general and detailed disassembly is normally the expected routine in garrison after the completion of firing and/or field training. operating group. No special tools are required. See figure 3-6. Clearing Procedures. See figure 3-5. raise the feed tray. and receiver group. This is a practice that stems from past experience in combat situations. Place the gun on F. place the parts (in the order in which they are removed) on a clean. which is also known as field stripping. Cutaway View. 3201. flat surface. General Disassembly General disassembly (field stripping) is the separation of the M240G into five main groups. step 2. Depress the buttstock latch located on the underside of the buttstock where it joins the receiver. to ensure the proper functioning and maintenance of the weapon. except by qualified ordnance personnel. Slide the buttstock upward and remove it from the receiver. trigger housing group. bolt. The operating group consists of the operating rod. involves the removal of some of the component parts and assemblies from the main groups. General disassembly involves separating the weapon into main groups. Detailed disassembly. and slowly allow the bolt to return to its forward position. Disassembly and assembly are divided into two categories—general and detailed. and drive spring rod assembly. the operator can then take the time to more fully disassemble and thoroughly clean the weapon.MCWP 3-15.

3-9 . Step 1. Depressing the Buttstock Latch. Five Main Groups. Figure 3-6. Removing the Buttstock Group.1 Figure 3-5. Step 2. Sliding the Buttstock Off the Receiver.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

step 1. See figure 3-9. steps 1 and 2. See figure 3-7. Figure 3-7. separating the barrel from the receiver. Grasp the barrel changing handle and rotate it to an upright position. Receiver Group. feedtray. Pushing In and Up on the Base of the Driving Spring Guide.MCWP 3-15. Removing the Trigger Housing Group. Removing the Drive Spring Rod Assembly. step 2. General Assembly . and barrel changing handle. cover. 3-10 3202. Removing the Barrel Group. e. See figure 3-9. step 1. Then remove it from the rear of the receiver. See figure 3-10. steps 1 and 2. step 2. Step 2. The barrel group consists of the barrel with attached gas system. Then push forward and pull up. flash suppressor. Rotate the rear of the trigger housing assembly down. The receiver group consists of the receiver with rear sight. adjustable front sight assembly. first push in against its base. To remove the drive spring rod assembly. Depress the barrel locking latch located on the left side of the receiver where the barrel joins the receiver. d. then lift up and outward so that it clears its retaining studs inside the receiver. M240G Pull the cocking handle to the rear to start the rearward movement of the bolt and operating assembly inside the receiver. 7. See figure 3-8. f. Remove the trigger housing assembly spring pin. step 3. The trigger housing group consists of the trigger housing assembly and the trigger housing assembly spring pin. With the index finger. disengage the holding notch at the front of the assembly from its recess on the bottom of the receiver. Pulling the Driving Spring Guide From the Receiver. Step 1. See figure 3-10. reach inside the top of the receiver and push rearward on the face of the bolt until the bolt and operating rod assembly are exposed at the rear of the receiver.62mm.1 Machine Gun. General disassembly is completed after the removal of the other main groups from the receiver group. See figure 3-8. and remove the assembly from the receiver. and bipod assembly. Grasp the bolt and operating rod assembly and remove them from the rear of the receiver.

Remove the Trigger Housing Assembly Spring Pin. Step 1. Grasping the Operating Group and Removing it From the Receiver. Figure 3-8. Step 2. Pushing Against the Face of the Bolt. Disengage the Holding Notch from the Receiver. Removing the Bolt and Operating Assembly.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Removing the Trigger Housing Group. Step 3. 3-11 . Step 2. Figure 3-9. Pulling the Cocking Handle to the Rear.1 Step 1.

trigger housing. M240G Step 1. Removing the Barrel Group. b.MCWP 3-15.1 Machine Gun. Step 2. operating. and barrel groups on the receiver group. Replacing the Barrel Group Insert the barrel socket into the receiver forward of the cover and align the rear of the gas plug with the gas cylinder tube in front of the bipod. Release the barrel locking latch and rotate the barrel changing handle down to its lowered position to lock the barrel in place. Replacing the Trigger Housing Group Insert the holding notch on the front of the trigger housing into its recess on the bottom of the . a. General assembly involves replacing the buttstock. 3-12 Depress the barrel locking latch and fully seat the barrel in the receiver.62mm. Figure 3-10. Rotating Barrel Changing Handle Upright and Pulling Forward to Remove Barrel From Receiver. It is done in reverse order of disassembly. Depressing the Barrel Locking Latch. 7.

See figure 3-12. Replacing the Trigger Housing Group. Extend the bolt to the unlocked (forward) position and then push the entire bolt and operating rod assembly inside the receiver. Figure 3-12. securing the assembly to the receiver. It can be inserted from the left or right. Replacing the Bolt and Operating Rod Assembly. Then lower it so that its base seats against the retaining studs inside the receiver that holds it into place. See figure 3-11. aligning the slots along their sides with the rails inside the receiver.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery receiver. Pull the trigger so that the assembly can slide all the way into the receiver. Replacing the Operating Group Insert the bolt and operating rod into the receiver. Insert the drive spring rod assembly into the receiver. c. Rotate the rear of the trigger housing upward and align the hole of the trigger housing with the mounting bracket on the receiver. MCWP 3-15.1 Figure 3-11. Insert the trigger housing assembly spring pin into the hole. 3-13 . sliding it all the way forward against the recess in the rear of the operating rod.

Slide the buttstock downward until it locks in place on the receiver. M240G Pull the trigger. Machine Gun. 3203. This is not to be confused with procedures authorized for 2D echelon maintenance (unit armorers) or above. Removing the Spring Loaded Pin. Pull the cocking handle to the rear. e. Conducting a Function Check. 7. 3-14 . refers only to those disassembly procedures authorized for the OPERATOR level. Detailed Disassembly and Assembly The term detailed disassembly. Step 1. Figure 3-13. Sliding the Bolt Forward Off Firing Pin.1 d. with the safety on F and ride the bolt home by maintaining rearward pressure on the cocking handle as the bolt goes forward. To check for correct assembly— Pull the cocking handle to the rear and return it to its forward position and close the cover. Detailed disassembly of ANY of the groups beyond that described in this document is NOT AUTHORIZED except by qualified ordnance personnel. as it is used in this manual. Replacing the Buttstock Group Align the recessed grooves at the front of the buttstock with the vertical rails at the rear of the receiver.62mm. Separating the Bolt and Operating Rod. Step 2.MCWP 3-15.

remove the spring-loaded pin that To join the bolt and operating rod. See figure 3-16. 3-15 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery Detailed disassembly and assembly involves removing and replacing component parts of some of the main groups. To separate the operating MCWP 3-15. thus disengaging the bolt from the operating rod (see figure 3-13. step 1. then position the rear of the bolt and slide it over the firing pin. steps 1 and 2). barrel. hold the rod in one hand. (2) Detailed assembly rod and bolt. Barrel Group (1) Detailed disassembly Figure 3-14. The pin can be inserted from the left or right. step 2. Although further disassembly of the operating. Detailed Disassembly. These parts are removed by ordnance personnel only (see figures 3-14 and 3-15). Then. b. Operating Group (1) Detailed disassembly. Remove Figure 3-15. Align the holes on the bolt with those on the operating rod and push the spring-loaded pin through them to secure the two assemblies together. and receiver groups is authorized at the unit level. This completes detailed disassembly of the operating group. Grasp and rotate the collar clockwise until it releases from the gas plug. The firing pin remains affixed to the operating rod and the ejector and extractor remain affixed to the bolt. a. Hold the barrel at the point where the gas system attaches to it. Operating Group.1 holds them together. it should be kept to a minimum to reduce the possibility of damaging or losing parts. Bolt Face. pull the bolt forward until it is clear of the firing pin. See figure 3-16. The buttstock and trigger housing groups will not have a detailed disassembly performed by the operator.

1 Machine Gun. (2) Detailed assembly c. This completes detailed disassembly of the barrel group (see figure 3-18). Pull on the collar to ensure it is in the locked position. To remove the cover and feedtray. Step 2. Push against face of the collar while rotating counterclockwise until it locks into place. Assembling the Bolt and Operating Rod. step 3). 7. See figures 3-19. See figure 3-17.MCWP 3-15. Place the collar over the forward end of the plug. Then. Then pull the hinge spring pin out and lift the cover and feedtray from the receiver. This completes detailed disassembly of the receiver group. Inserting the Spring Loaded Pin. See figure 3-20. steps 1 and 2. M240G Step 1. lay Insert the gas plug into the gas regulator. and push it down into its closed position. Figure 3-16. Slide the gas plug to the rear out of the gas regulator (see figure 3-17. See figure 3-21. first raise the cover straight up. the collar from the gas plug. insert the cover hinge . (2) Detailed assembly. Receiver Group (1) Detailed disassembly. 3-16 the feedtray on the receiver so that the feedtray guides are aligned with the receiver brackets. steps 1 and 2. To replace the feedtray.62mm. place the cover onto the receiver aligning its mounting holes with the mounting brackets on the receiver. To replace the cover. Sliding the Bolt Over Firing Pin.

Removinng Collar From Gas Plug. Rotating Collar Clockwise. Step 3. Disassembly of the Gas System. Figure 3-18. 3-17 . Step 2.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Barrel Group. Sliding Gas Plug Out of Gas Regulator. Figure 3-17.1 Step 1. Detailed Disassembly.

Receiver Group. Step 2. Detailed Disassembly. Removing the Cover and Feed Tray. Removing the Hinge Spring Pin. Removing the Cover and Feed Tray. Figure 3-20. M240G Step 1.62mm. 3-18 .1 Machine Gun. Figure 3-19.MCWP 3-15. 7.

(See figure 3-19 . it will be easier to recognize and correct malfunctions and stoppages which occur during firing. disengaging it from the sear notch on the bottom of the operating rod. See figure 3-22. Feeding When the bolt is to the rear. and cocking. Section 3 Functioning The cycle of functioning is broken down into eight basic steps. ejection. These steps are feeding. the outer feed pawls are outside the first round of ammunition. By understanding how the M240G functions. Figure 3-22. firing. locking. More than one step can occur simultaneously during the cycle of functioning. which then holds the bolt to the rear in its open or ready to fire position. The cycle begins by loading a round in the feedtray groove and then pulling the trigger. 3301. The sear is pulled down by the trigger. Aligning the Feed Tray Guides.1 Figure 3-21. Trigger Pull Releasing the Operating Group. chambering.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. extracting. and initiating forward movement of the operating group under the force of the expanding drive spring. spring pin into the holes to affix the cover and feed tray to the receiver. It ends when the trigger is released and the rear of the sear raises up reengaging the sear notch. unlocking.

It moves up and over the second round in the belt of ammunition and is now in position to drag the second round into the feedtray groove (see figure 3-22). As the bolt moves to the rear after firing. The chambering ramp angles downward and forces the round toward the chamber along with the spring tension of the cartridge guide Figure 3-23. 3302.62mm. 3-20 . Chambering This is the process of stripping a round from the belt and seating it in the chamber. Inside the cover the cam roller. As the bolt travels forward. Feeding.1 Machine Gun.) The inner feed pawls are between the first and second rounds (see figure 3-21). Cover Parts. the belt feed pawl moves to the right. and pivot arm exist only so the feed pawls can move back and forth. The bolt strips the round from the belt link.MCWP 3-15. feed arm fork. the upper locking lug of the bolt contacts the base of the cartridge. Figure 3-24. dragging rounds into position to be chambered (see figure 3-24). feed arm with control spring. dragging the second round into the feedtray groove. As the bolt moves forward to fire the round in the feedtray groove. the belt feed pawl moves to the left. M240G 3-23. 7.

the extractor snaps over the extractor rim of the cartridge. Firing After the bolt reaches its locked position.1 spring and the locking lever. it should be noted that in the M240G the bolt and barrel do not physically interlock. Locking. Although the term locking is used here. MCWP 3-15. striking and detonating the primer of the cartridge.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery pawl (see figure 3-25). the operating rod moves forward. swings forward pushing the bolt forward and locking it to the barrel socket. When the round is fully seated in the chamber. Figure 3-27. Chambering. Locking During chambering. 3303. Figure 3-25. It carries the striker of the fixed firing pin through the aperture in the face of the bolt. Figure 3-26. This is why the barrel can be removed even when the bolt is forward (see figure 3-26). independent of the bolt (see figure 3-25). and the ejector is depressed. The cartridge guide pawl also holds back the belt link. 3-21 . Firing. See figure 3-27. which the bolt is riding on. the bolt enters the barrel socket as the operating rod is driven forward by the drive 3304.

The operating rod now moves rearward. 3-22 Figure 3-30. the locking lever begins to swing toward the rear.MCWP 3-15. At approximately the same time. At this point. 3306. Ejecting As the case is withdrawn from the chamber. and the extractor exerts a pull from the bottom. M240G Figure 3-28. independent of the bolt. providing the power for the last four steps in the cycle of functioning (see figure 3-28). the empty link is forced out of the link ejection port between the cartridge stops on the feedtray by the next round moving into the feedtray groove. 3307. for a short distance. Extraction and Ejection. Unlocking. Action of the Gas. See figure 3-30. 7. Unlocking After the cartridge ignites and the projectile passes the gas port.1 Machine Gun. and clears the barrel socket (see figure 3. the ejector exerts a push from the top. 3305.62mm. Figure 3-29. The rapidly expanding gases enter the hollow end cap of the gas piston and force the operating assembly to the rear.29). The casing falls from the gun as soon as it reaches the cartridge ejection port (see figure 3-30). carrying the bolt with it into its unlocked position. . Extracting The extractor grips the rim of the cartridge as the bolt and operating rod pull the case from the chamber. part of the gases enter the gas cylinder.

3401. Malfunctions Figure 3-32. the gun will fire. the firing pin striker is withdrawn from the face of the bolt. During the rearward independent movement of the operating rod. broken. tighten. a. Defective ammunition or improper operation of the gun by a crew member is not considered a malfunction. Sluggish Operation. or burred sear. clean. A malfunction is a failure of the gun to function satisfactorily. a sluggish gun fires very slowly. This knowledge ensures that those problems can be quickly assessed and corrective action taken. Excessive friction is usually due to lack of lubrication or excessive dirt/carbon in the gas system or on the bolt and receiver rails. the sear shoulder is unable to grab the operating rod and hold it to the rear. Gas Regulator Settings. An excessively worn sear notch on the operating rod could also be responsible. move the regulator setting to the number 2 or 3 position (see figure 3-32).) to excessive friction or loss of gas. Instead of firing at its normal rate (approximately 9 to 10 rounds per second). Runaway Gun. It can be due b. is for the team leader to twist and break the 3-23 . what those parts do during functioning. (See figure 3-31. To remedy continued sluggish operation. and what mechanical problems may be encountered during firing. Cocking. or replace parts as required. for both tripod and bipod mounted guns. Two of the more common malfunctions are sluggish operation and runaway gun. This is when a gun continues to fire after the trigger is released. firing is uncontrolled. A runaway gun is usually caused by a worn. Section 4 Malfunctions and Stoppages Machine gunners must have a detailed understanding of the many component parts of their weapon. but fires improperly. Cocking This is the process of placing the parts of the gun in position to fire the next round. The action taken to stop a runaway gun. Excessive loss of gas is usually due to loose connections in the gas system. 3308. To reduce sluggish operation. When the bolt has moved far enough to the rear to pick up the next round for chambering.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. lubricate.1 Figure 3-31. cocking is completed.

the gun stops firing. Time (5 seconds) is allotted for this malfunction before investigating a stoppage further because injury to personnel and damage to equipment could occur if the round goes off with the cover of the weapon open. 3404. 7. 3402. remedial action must be taken. Remedial Action When immediate action fails to reduce the stoppage. Stuck Cartridge.62mm. and quickly return the gun to action. The remedy for runaway gun is to replace worn parts. Stoppages must be cleared quickly and firing resumed. Two common causes of a stoppage that may require remedial action are failure to extract due to a stuck or ruptured cartridge. without investigating its cause. Some swelling of the cartridge occurs when it fires. In addition. If the swelling is excessive. it may swell as described above. Once the bolt is locked to the rear. it may fail to extract the round when the bolt moves to the rear.1 belt of ammunition. This involves investigating the cause of the stoppage and may involve some disassembly of the weapon and replacement of parts to correct the problem. In this case. and take the appropriate steps as outlined in figure 3-33. a length of cleaning rod should be inserted into the muzzle to push the round out through the chamber. further action is delayed (15 minutes) if the barrel is hot because the gunner must assume that a round is still in the chamber and could cook off before the barrel cools down. If the extractor spring has weakened and does not tightly grip the base of the cartridge. Within the next 5 seconds (to guard against a cook off). A hang fire occurs when the cartridge primer detonates after being struck by the firing pin but some problem with the propellant powder causes it to burn too slowly and delays the firing of the projectile.MCWP 3-15. Immediate action is completed in a total of 10 seconds to ensure that the round is extracted before the heat of the barrel affects it. if brass was seen ejecting. When the round fails to extract/eject. and the barrel has been allowed to cool. See figure 3-34. Ruptured Cartridge. place the weapon on S. and. M240G Immediate action procedures for the M240G are as follows: Wait 5 seconds after the misfire to guard against a hang fire. the weapon is placed on S. 3403. a properly functioning extractor may sometimes tear the 3-24 . Hang fire and cook off are two terms that describe ammunition condition and should be understood in conjunction with immediate action procedures. Apply immediate action (see paragraph 3403). a. Machine Gun. observe the ejection port. Immediate Action Immediate action is that action taken by the gunner/ crew to reduce a stoppage. pull the charging handle to the rear. determine if the barrel is hot (200 rounds or more fired in the last 2 minutes) or cold. Stoppages A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of functioning caused by faulty action of the gun or defective ammunition. the cartridge will be fixed tightly in the chamber. A cook off occurs when the heat of the barrel is high enough to cause the propellant powder inside the round to ignite even though the primer is not struck. in short. b. Sometimes a cartridge is in a weakened condition after firing. If brass did not eject. attempt to fire again.

Immediate Action.1 Figure 3-33.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. 3-25 .

1 Machine Gun.62mm. 7.MCWP 3-15. M240G Figure 3-34. 3-26 . Chamber Condition During Immediate Action.

Lowering. To raise the bipod legs. Bipod Assembly. Detailed instructions for its employment are contained in chapter 6. The traversing portion of the mechanism consists of the traversing handwheel. In this configuration. Proper utilization of the bipod and the tripod are discussed in this section. and traversing slide with lock lever. The tripod assembly provides a stable and relatively lightweight base that is far superior to the bipod.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery base of the cartridge off as the bolt moves to the rear. See figure 3-37. allowing quick and easy right or left lateral movement of the weapon by the gunner. The traversing bar connects the two rear legs. As the handwheel is turned. MCWP 3-15. It is numbered every 100 mils from 0 in the center to 450 mils on the left side and 425 mils on the right side (see figure 3-39). the M240G’s potential for continuous. The bipod is held in position by the ball joint that joins it to the bottom of the receiver. accurate fire and controlled manipulation can be maximized. It is hinged on one side with a sleeve and on the other side with a sleeve latch. It is graduated in 5-mil increments. Raising. The tripod may be extended and collapsed easily. Lateral Movement. Engraved on the bar is a scale that measures direction in mils. and a traversing bar (see figure 3-38). the gunner can use the bipod mount. however. The purpose of the T&E mechanism is to provide controlled manipulation and the ability to engage predetermined targets (see figure 3-41). the M240G can be best utilized when fired from a tripod mount. This allows the tripod to collapse to a closed position for carrying or storage or to lock in an open extended position for use. The traversing bar also supports the T&E mechanism. traversing screw.1 b. Tripod Mount. . To lower the bipod legs. locking them in position. Bipod The bipod mount is part of the receiver group. 3503. offset head. Section 5 Mounts and Accessories In most cases. squeeze them together and rotate the legs rearward and upward into the slot on the bottom of the receiver until the bipod latch engages. It joins the gun and T&E to the tripod. a. The M240G’s bipod pivots on the ball joint. push in on the bipod latch and rotate the legs down and forward (see figure 3-36). 3501. The barrel must be removed and the extractor inserted into the chamber where it can grip and remove the remains of the cartridge. 3502. the offset head will appear to 3-27 Figure 3-35. It cannot be removed by the operator. In some situations. See figure 3-35. one front and two rear legs. c. The ruptured cartridge extractor must be used in this instance to remove it. It consists of a tripod head. The flex-mount enhances the stability of the tripod platform and dampens the recoil of the weapon (see figure 3-40). Release the legs and they will automatically spring outward into their open and locked position. leaving the rest of the cartridge wedged inside the chamber. M122 The M122 tripod mount consists of the tripod assembly and flex-mount with the T&E mechanism. Flex-mount The flex-mount consists of the mount itself and the (T&E) mechanism.

7.MCWP 3-15.1 Machine Gun. Lowering the Bipod.62mm. 3-28 . M240G Figure 3-36.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Tripod.1 Figure 3-37. M122 Tripod and Flex-mount. 3-29 . Figure 3-38.

62mm. Flex-mount. Traversing Bar. 3-30 . 7. M240G Figure 3-39.1 Machine Gun. Figure 3-40.MCWP 3-15.

and rotate the traversing handwheel until the offset head is centered on the traversing screw. The scale on the upper elevating screw is graduated in 50-mil increments from 0 to +200 and 0 to -200. Each click of the handwheel indicates a 1 mil change in direction of the muzzle: 1 click = 1 mil. See figure 3-42. Prepare the tripod. T&E Mechanism. and the muzzle of the weapon will move to the right or left. for a total of 400 mils of elevation change. steps 1 and 2. This slide is locked to the traversing bar by the slide locking lever while firing. rotate the traversing slide until approximately two fingers are visible on the lower elevating screw. The elevating portion of the mechanism consists of the upper elevating screw with scale. The T&E is now roughly centered. Notice that the traversing slide is a U-shaped projection near the bottom of the T&E mechanism. There is a total of 100 mils traverse on the traversing screw. Insert the flex-mount’s pintle into the tripod’s pintle bushing and then engage the pintle locking lever to hold it in place. Prepare the T&E mechanism for mounting: rotate the elevating handwheel until approximately 1 1/2 inches (two fingers) are visible on the upper elevating screw. The preferred method of mounting the gun is to first attach the flex-mount to the tripod and then mount the gun on the flex-mount. The elevating handwheel also has a scale. move along the traversing screw. a. 3-31 . One click on the elevating handwheel indicates a 1 mil change in elevation of the barrel: 1 click = 1 mil. locking them open. It is marked in 1 mil increments from 0 to 50. elevating handwheel. See figure 3-38.1 Figure 3-41. Mounting the Gun. and lower elevating screw.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. extend its legs until the sleeve latch engages. Beneath the elevating handwheel is the lower elevating screw.

62mm. 3-32 . Figure 3-42.1 Machine Gun. 7. Attaching the Flex-mount to the Tripod. M240G Step 1. Inserting the Pintle into Pintle Bushing.MCWP 3-15. Lowering the Traversing Slide Over Traversing Bar. Step 3.

Step 4. Attaching the Flex-mount to the Tripod—Continued. 3-33 . Figure 3-42. Locking Down the T&E.1 Step 2.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Engaging the Pintle Lock.

MCWP 3-15. To remove the flex-mount from the tripod.1 Machine Gun. Attaching the Gun to the Flex-mount. Secure it by turning the locking lever clockwise. b. flex-mount. Figure 3-43. Rotate the rear of the gun down to the mount and insert the retaining pin forward of the trigger housing assembly to lock the weapon in place (see figure 3-43. disengaging it from the mount’s forward bushing. The preferred method of dismounting the gun is to first remove the flexmount’s rear retaining pin. 3-34 . complete. See figure 3-42. and all user maintenance equipment and other accessories (SL-3 components) (see figure 3-45). Then disengage the pintle lock and raise the pintle and entire mount up and off the tripod. and then pull the gun back. This completes mounting (see figure 3-44). tripod. The complete gun bag is used to carry the machine gun. and a complete set of user maintenance equipment and accessories (SL-3 Step 1. step 1). It consists of a large outer bag and a smaller. Attach the gun to the flex-mount by pushing the recesses on the forward portion of the receiver on the bottom of the receiver against the forward bushings on the flex-mount (see figure 3-43. M240G Lower the traversing slide over the traversing bar with the traversing slide to the rear and the traversing wheel to the left. 3504. removable spare barrel bag inside. 7. Affixing the Gun to the Flex-mount’s Forward Bushing. raise up on the rear of the gun.62mm. The removable spare barrel bag is designed for field use and will carry the spare barrel. steps 3 and 4. This will keep the gun and all its components together and protected during events such as unit movements for embarkation on ships or aircraft. first unlock the traversing slide lock (turn the lever counterclockwise). spare barrel. Dismounting the Gun. step 2). Gun Bag The gun bag is used to carry and protect the M240G machine gun system.

existing NVE can be redistributed or its use modified to meet mission needs in regard to M240G employment at night. AN/PVS-7B. image intensified night vision devices. allowing Marines to operate effectively at night. AN/PVS-5 night vision goggle (NVG). MCWP 3-15. Night Vision Goggles. The IAL is visible only with an image intensification device. use of these devices in any combination deemed appropriate by the unit commander will ensure adequate night vision capabilities within M240G squads and teams. The first three are passive image intensifiers. so it is invisible to the naked eye. Until a sight mounting system is fielded Step 2. The machine gun squad leader can use the AN/PVS-7B NVG to detect. and AN/PAQ-4B infrared aim light (IAL) provide the M240G with the required night vision capability. 3-35 . either instead of or in addition to the squad leader or team 3505. The machine gun team leader can also use the AN/PVS-7B NVG in the same manner to aide in the employment of his machine gun team. a. In the interim. AN/PVS-4 individual served weapon sight (ISWS). and adjust his guns onto targets. and infrared aim lights to be employed in a complimentary manner. AN/PVS-7B NVG. and the last one is a device that will place an aim point on a target out to 600M. Night Vision Equipment Mounting hardware required to mount night vision equipment (NVE) on the M240G is under development. Procurement of thermal sights for the medium machine gun is a high priority. identify. It can also be carried by a fixed carrying strap. The team leader spots and adjusts for the gunner at night just as he does during daylight engagements.1 for the M240G. The gunner could also be equipped with the AN/PVS-7B. The spare barrel bag has adjustable shoulder straps and can be worn like a pack. Locking the Gun in Place with the Flex-mount’s Rear Retaining Pin. This will improve their mobility and ability to detect and engage the enemy. Figure 3-43. The overall NVE concept of employment is for thermal sights.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery components) (see figure 3-46). Attaching the Gun to the Flex-mount—Continued.

3-36 .62mm. Figure 3-45. Gun Bag.MCWP 3-15. M240G Figure 3-44.1 Machine Gun. The Tripod-Mounted Gun. 7.

The AN/PVS-7B NVG can be hand-held or worn with a head mount. and easy to carry and use. Spare Barrel Bag. b.1 Figure 3-46. and adjust his own fire onto targets. Individual Served Weapon Sight.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. See figure 3-47. identify. AN/PVS-7B.5 lbs. This is important when considering the load already carried by machine gun teams.). The AN/PVS-7Bs are lightweight (1. small. AN/PVS-4. The AN/PVS-4 is the currently fielded Figure 3-47. This would enable the gunner to detect. NVG. The AN/PVS-7Bs have a range of 250 meters in moonlight and 200 meters in starlight. 3-37 . This is important if issued to the gunners because gunners need both hands free to operate the weapon and manipulate the T&E. leader.

See figure 3-50. The AN/PVS-4 ISWS weighs 3. and dirt to ensure proper. rounds because his view is not being disrupted by Section 6 Maintenance the flash and recoil of the weapon. M240G AN/PVS-7B NVG although the range is less. See figure 3-49. lightweight device that boresights to the M240G and emits a beam of infrared light that is used in conjunction with a night vision device to acquire and engage targets at night. Proper maintenance. Night Vision Goggles. Infrared Aim Light. and 400 meters in starlight. The AN/PVS-4 can be used in this manner by the machine gun squad leader and/or the team leader. The AN/PAQ-4B IAL is a small. all accessories and Figure 3-49. Maintenance of the mount used with the weapon is no less important. and AN/PVS-7B NVG. efficient functioning. 3-38 . the receiver and all moving parts must be kept clean. The functioning of the gun and mount together as a weapons system determines its overall effectiveness.48. AN/PVS-5. the AN/PVS-7B NVG will begin to augment/replace it in the future. including the medium machine gun. c. Because of the close fit of working surfaces and the high speed at which the gun operates. AN/PVS-5. The IAL allows the gunner to aim and maintain fire on the target without the sighting process being disturbed by the recoil of the weapon system. fires. AN/PAQ-4B. rust. however. See figure 3. The gunner puts the aim point on the target. There is no mount to attach the AN/PVS-4 to the gun. The bore and chamber must be properly maintained to preserve accuracy. The IAL is visible only when viewed with image intensified NVE such as the AN/PVS-4 ISWS. and free from burrs. AN/PAQ-4B. however. IAL. care. He can readily see the impact of the Figure 3-48. ISWS. Finally. d.5 lbs and has a range of 600 meters in moonlight Machine Gun. NVG. AN/PVS-5 NVG. and adjusts the point of impact. The AN/PVS-4 could also be mounted on the squad leader’s or team leader’s M16 rifle. the AN/PVS-4 can be hand-held and would serve more as a monocular night vision device than as a sight in this configuration.1 night sight used with various weapons.62mm. 150 M moonlight and 50 M starlight. AN/PVS-4. correctly lubricated. however. The AN/PVS-5 NVG is the currently fielded NVG.MCWP 3-15. The NVG functions and is used in basically the same way as the Figure 3-50. the team leader must ensure employment in this manner does not interfere with his duties as the assistant gunner. and inspection of a weapon and its accessories determine whether or not it will function correctly when needed. cleaning. 7.

3602. MCWP 3-15. chamber. apply a line of CLP on either side of the bolt. b. See paragraph 3604. With the bolt to the rear. During. The lubricants authorized for field use on the M240G are CLP. LAW. and other moving parts. Remove excess oil from the bore. and LSAT. LSA. To do this. but not more than seven. during. must be properly maintained. Lubricate the gun by placing a light coat of CLP on the following parts: (1) Operating rod. Care and Cleaning Before. Lubricants. and dry cleaning solvent. the roller. the 3-39 . They are used to lubricate certain operating parts before. A very small amount of CLP should be placed on the spring pin. (2) Bolt. Cleaning Materials. 3601. barrel socket. The only authorized cleaning materials for use at the unit level are CLP. Before Firing. Each type is best used in specific climatic and environmental conditions. Use CLP or bore cleaner for daily maintenance and to remove minor carbon buildup after firing. Manually pull the bolt back and forth. Dry cleaning solvent will dry out the metal and it is recommended for cleaning during change from one lubricant to another. If this is not the case. and missing or broken parts. Headspace should also be checked before firing. rotate the barrel changing handle and count the number of clicks heard.1 weapon should not be fired. and face of the bolt. There must be a minimum of two clicks. including ammunition. It should be turned in for higher echelon maintenance/inspection. (3) Receiver.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery equipment used with the gun and mount. Cleaning Materials and Lubricants a. RBC. Apply CLP on those recesses along the side that make contact with the receiver rails. so that CLP is spread over the bolt and receiver rails. Inspect for cleanliness. and After Firing a. and after firing. proper mechanical condition.

In hot. whether or not it has been fired. clean the gun with CLP. If the gun is fired daily. 7.MCWP 3-15. or LAW. humid climates. Change barrels when necessary. sand and dust must be kept from collecting in working parts. inspect the gun daily for rust and maintain a light coat of CLP on all metal parts. In temperatures between 10 degrees Fahrenheit (-12 degrees Centigrade) and -10 degrees Fahrenheit (-23 degrees Centigrade). 3603. After Firing. LSA. and lubricated in a clean. Wipe dry. and lubricate with a light coat of CLP. During normal training conditions.1 b. c. The T&E mechanism should be centered. In combat conditions the gun should be cleaned and lubricated daily. Machine Gun. therefore. keep the gun covered with a canvas. it is necessary to clean the gun for 3 consecutive days after firing. It is essential to perform detailed disassembly only after prolonged firing. and nonabrasive brushes can be used to remove dirt from the nonmetallic portions of the gun. Ensure that cleaning materials such as CLP and RBC are not used on the nonmetallic portions of the gun. If possible. Clean the gun daily with CLP. or CLP. In cold climates. Climatic Conditions (1) Cold climates. (2) Hot. The teflon coating left by the CLP or LSA-T will be sufficient to keep the parts working smoothly. LSA-T. The bolt should be forward and the cover raised. then clean and lubricate. Special Maintenance Procedures a. Generally a heavier application of lubricant is required. the M240G must be kept free of excess lubricants. Biological. in his absence. M240G 3604. by the unit leader. when the gun is not used and is kept in a clean place. dry location where it is least exposed to dirt and moisture. tarpaulin. Always check for 3-40 . During firing. dry climates. In ideal conditions. inspect more frequently for rust and keep free of moisture. especially to the sleeve and sleeve latch. remember that repeated detailed disassembly will cause unnecessary wear. b. Ensure that the gun is lubricated properly with LSA. such as the buttstock. cleaned. In sustained temperatures below -10 degrees Fahrenheit (-23 degrees Centigrade) use LAW only. NBC Decontamination. Adequate cleaning can be performed on a gun that has been disassembled into its five main groups. Nuclear. and moisture. cleaners. After firing. If the gun is contaminated.62mm. If brought indoors. and Chemical Conditions. apply lubricant to all outer surfaces of the machine gun (do not lubricate ammunition). it may only be necessary to disassemble and clean it every 3 to 5 days. Keep the gun covered as much as possible. After cleaning each day. all of which can freeze and cause the gun to operate sluggishly. and ensure that the gas system's connections remain tight. RBC. humid climates. The M122 tripod should be cleaned to remove all dirt. In hot. Hot water. The exact position of the gun and contents of the spare barrel case may be specified by the inspecting officer or. Even the most careful initial cleaning will not remove all carbon deposits. wipe completely dry. 3605. wipe off all cleaning materials and place a light coat of CLP on all metal parts. Inspection The gun should be mounted on the M122 tripod and placed on a poncho with the spare barrel case. dry climates. rags. or dry cleaning solvent. If contamination is anticipated. (3) Hot. or poncho when not in use. Normal Maintenance Procedures Each gun should be cleaned as soon after firing as possible and each time it is exposed to field conditions. then a light coat of CLP should be applied. allow the gun to come to room temperature. decontaminate by following the procedures outlined in FM 3-5. the M240G should be lubricated with CLP. maintain a light coat of CLP on the parts listed in paragraph 3602a. The gun should be disassembled. During Firing.

but it may be convenient to first inspect the gun. or burred parts.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery cleanliness. Run your finger over the receiver rails to check for carbon. See if the drive spring is rusted. pull the trigger and ride the bolt home slowly by holding the cocking handle. Ensure the weapon is on F. cover raised). Manipulate the T&E handwheel to examine the cleanliness of the far ends of the T&E screws. pull the bolt all the way to the rear. If the bolt went forward. then the mount. Ensure that the bolt moves freely between its locked and unlocked positions. Push the feed pawls up against the plate to test their spring tension. If the bolt did not remain to the rear. specifically the safety. Inspect one side of the receiver. b. the face of the bolt. To see if the gas system is relatively free of carbon. and bore for cleanliness. but also carefully check parts and components for serviceability and proper functioning. the sear shoulder or sear notch is excessively worn. Make sure the gas plug and collar fit together tightly. that the tripod is extended fully. Determine if the scales can be read without difficulty. Always look for cleanliness. Replace the barrel. Check for tight spring tension on the feed arm control spring. Figure 3-51. The gun should be inspected in an orderly. pull the trigger. set sequence so no part is overlooked and no time is wasted. and release the cocking handle. Return the gun to its original position (bolt forward. take it apart and inspect the gas portals on the plug to MCWP 3-15. then remove the barrel.1 Test the mechanical condition of the trigger housing group. the bolt should remain to the rear. At the same time. . Test the spring tension of appropriate parts. and the chambering ramp in the receiver. chamber. burrs. Each inspector will develop the exact sequence. With the weapon on S and bolt to the rear. examine the rear sight. The following is a suggested sequence (only the main points are outlined): a. missing. Next inspect the forward portion of the receiver rails. Inspection of the Mount Check the pintle to see that it is attached properly. Riding the bolt home slowly will prevent damage to the cam roller and feedtray. Verify that the extractor and ejector are present. and cracks. perform a function check by testing for dead 3-41 Section 7 Ammunition ensure that they are clear. Inspection of the M240G Start with the cover. the safety is defective. Inspect the bipod assembly by lowering and raising the legs. Examine the barrel socket. and perform appropriate checks to determine if the gun functions properly. With the weapon on F and the cover closed. Examine the T&E mechanism. Pull the feed arm back and forth to make sure that the fork and pivot arm freely move along with the outer and inner feed pawls. but also look for broken. and inspect the other side of the receiver. Belt of Disintegrating Link Ammunition. and that the T&E mechanism is not positioned backwards.

and the T&E should be replaced... while turning either handwheel. and examine the spare barrel as described above. Tracer Cartridge. the painting of the bullet tip..... Used during training when simulated fire is desired. Full metal jacket on bullet... including the symbol of the manufacturer. there is no primer or vent hole in the primer pocket. but simulates service ammunition for practice in loading the gun. and gently pull the gun back and forth to test for inordinate play in the M122 mount. Ball (M80) . Tip of bullet is painted black... Blank (M82) . Before moving to another display. 3702... This ammunition is not authorized for training purposes. and during marksmanship training.. Ammunition is issued as complete rounds consisting of the projectiles (bullets).. Dead clicks are present when. such as gun a drill. One particular spot to check is inside the shoes of the tripod legs.62mm. personnel.... Armor-Piercing Cartridge. Dummy (M63) . Used against lightly armored targets where armor-piercing effects 3-42 3703. Ball Cartridge.. Machine Gun.. Examine the tripod and flex-mount for rust. d... Ammunition is issued in a disintegrating metallic split linked belt (see figure 3-51).. cartridge cases.62mm NATO cartridge is completely identifiable by its appearance.. the barrel does not move.. The members of machine gun teams must be able to recognize the types of ammunition and know how to care for them. make sure the gun is displayed as you found it. and primers... Used for observation of fire. Tip of bullet is painted orange. Used against targets of light material. One-piece metal cartridge from its base to its nose... .. Also see appendix A for further ballistic data.. c.. grasp the stock.. the cartridges may be identified by the following physical characteristics (also see figure 3-52): Tracer (M62) .. incendiary effect. It is completely inert........... Six longitudinal corrugations (flutings) on the cartridge. Used during training. and ammunition lot number. model. It means the gears inside the T&E are excessively worn. Classification Ammunition for the M240G is classified as listed: a. Determine if the slide lock lever firmly holds the T&E to the traversing bar.... Blank Cartridge.. Also.... 3701... This section describes the ammunition used with the M240G.. Double tapered neck and no bullet. the manufacturer’s initial and year of manufacture on the base of the cartridge case... Plain bullet tip.. and the markings on the packing containers.. Tracer (M62 Overhead Fire) . Armor-Piercing (M61) ..... Identification The type.. Ballistic Data Figure 3-53 shows the armor penetration capability and other ballistic data for the M80 ball round and the M61 armor piercing round. 7... signaling.... The 7. caliber...1 clicks. propellant powder. When removed from their original packing containers.MCWP 3-15.... M240G are desired. Ensure that the spare barrel bag contains all required SL-3 components.. Tip of bullet is painted red. Inspect the gun bag and spare barrel bag for signs of deterioration and wear.. b.... are necessary for complete identification of small arms ammunition... Dummy Cartridge... Also. e. and marking targets...

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. 3-43 .1 Figure 3-52. Ammunition for the M240G.

M240G Figure 3-53 Ballistic Data for 7. Ammunition should be stored under cover.62mm Ammunition. Each box weighs approximately 16 pounds. If it is necessary to leave ammunition in the open. Figure 3-54. 3704.MCWP 3-15. Place the tarpaulin so it gives maximum protection and allows free circulation of air. heaters.1 Machine Gun. keep it at least 6 inches from the ground and covered with a double thickness of tarpaulin. The bandoleer is made up of a cardboard carton held inside a cloth bag with a carrying strap. and hot water pipes. or the bandoleers may be removed for firing. Each bandoleer contains 100 linked rounds and weighs approximately 7 pounds (see figure 3-54). 3-44 3705. radiators. Storage Store ammunition of all classes away from heat sources. such as open flame. 7. Ammunition Packaging Ammunition is packaged in a metal box containing two bandoleers. Dig suitable trenches to . Issue 100-Round Bandolier.62mm. Ammunition in the bandoleers may be hooked together and fired from the metal containers.

Firing From the Open Bolt Position. is likely to corrode. particularly in damp climates. and Preservation of Ammunition Figure 3-55. Wipe off light corrosion as soon as it is discovered. Section 8 Operation and Firing prevent water from flowing under the ammunition pile. wipe it off prior to use. Heavily corroded cartridges should be replaced.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Ammunition containers should not be opened until the ammunition is to be used. Protect ammunition from mud. Feed Tray. dirt. 3706. Use caution during firing to ensure that ammunition is kept out of the dirt. Ammunition removed from the airtight containers. Opening the Cover. and water. Care. 3-45 . If the ammunition gets wet or dirty. Figure 3-56. Handling. Dirt picked up during firing will act as an abrasive in the chamber and could cause a malfunction that can result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment. Figure 3-57.

MCWP 3-15.1

Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240G

Step 1. Aligning the First Round Against the Cartridge Stop.

Step 2. Closing the Cover.

Figure 3-58. Loading, Cover Open. DO NOT expose ammunition to direct rays of the sun. If the powder is hot, excessive pressure may be developed when the gun is fired. DO NOT oil or grease ammunition. Dust and other abrasives will collect on it and could damage the operating parts of the gun. DO NOT fire dented cartridges, cartridges with loose projectiles, or other defective rounds. DO NOT fire over friendly troops any ammunition graded and marked FOR TRAINING USE ONLY. Only specially approved lots of ammunition can be used for overhead fire. The packaging of this ammunition is clearly stamped FOR OVERHEAD FIRE. DO NOT fire ammunition (other than blank ammunition) until it has been positively identified by ammunition and grade.

Figure 3-59. Loading, Cover Closed.
3-46

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

b. Closed Cover. To load with the cover closed and the bolt forward, the safety must be on F. The team leader takes a belt of ammunition with the open side of the links down and forces the first The weapon should NOT be half-cocked. Halfcocking is pulling the bolt to the rear just far enough to engage the safety, then returning the bolt forward. If the bolt is pulled to the rear while the gun is on S, the safety will prevent the bolt from being pulled back far enough to lock it to the rear. If the operator inadvertently lets it slip forward again, the drive spring has the strength to send the operating group forward to feed, and then to chamber and fire the next round, even though the bolt was not all the way to the rear. The weapon must be on F, the bolt pulled and LOCKED to the rear, and then the safety engaged in order to prevent inadvertent discharge of the weapon. round into the feedway until the holding pawl engages it and holds it in place. See figure 3-59. The gunner pulls the cocking handle to the rear and returns the handle forward. The gun is loaded and ready to fire.

CAUTION

Figure 3-60. Inspecting the Chamber.

The M240G fires from the open bolt position to facilitate cooling (see figure 3-55). When the trigger is pulled, the bolt and operating rod start forward. A round is chambered, locked, and fired, all without another action by the gunner. Whenever the bolt is to the rear, the weapon is ready to fire, so ensure the safety is on S.

3802. Unloading and Clearing the Gun
a. Unloading. Whether or not the belt is expended, unloading procedures are essentially the same: all ammunition must be removed, and the chamber must be checked. The gunner pulls the bolt to the rear (in case all rounds in the belt have been expended), places the weapon on S, raises the cover, and the team leader clears the feedtray of ammunition and links. The gunner inspects the chamber by lifting the feedtray (see figure 3-60). If the chamber is clear, unloading is completed. b. Clear Gun Procedure. To ensure the gun is safe, perform the clear gun procedure. This is done after the gun has been unloaded properly and is similar to the unloading procedure.

3801. Loading
a. Raised Cover. To load with the cover raised, the bolt must be to the rear and the safety lever on S. See figure 3-56. The team leader, who is the assistant gunner, takes a belt of ammunition with the open side of the links down and places the first round against the cartridge stops, aligning it with the feed aperture. See figures 3-57 and 3-58, step 1. The gunner closes the cover (while the team leader holds the belt to ensure that the first round does not slip away from the cartridge stops) (see figure 3-58, step 2) and places the safety on F. The gun is loaded and ready to fire.

3-47

MCWP 3-15.1

Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240G

Figure 3-61. Operation of the Safety. After the gun is properly cleared, the gunner puts the safety on F, pulls the cocking handle to the rear, pulls the trigger, and rides the bolt home. Then the gunner pulls the bolt to the rear and returns the safety to S. The team leader runs a cleaning rod down the bore. When the gunner sees the tip of the cleaning rod in the chamber, he sounds off “gun clear,” and the team leader removes the cleaning rod. The gunner then places the gun in a safe position; bolt forward, safety on S, and cover raised. The result of properly executing the clear gun procedure is a safe gun. When the safety is on, the cutaway portion of the safety bar is not aligned with the safety lug of the sear. When the trigger is pulled, the sear cannot rotate downward and the operating group cannot move forward. See figure 3-61.

3803. Operation of the Safety

3-48

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 3-62. Bipod Position. When the safety is placed in the F position, the cutaway portion of the safety bar is aligned with the safety lug on the sear. This allows the sear to move downward when the trigger is pulled. manipulates the trigger. Place the left hand on the comb of the stock, palm down, with the cheek resting lightly against the cover and/or the left hand (see figure 3-62). Both hands exert a firm, steady pressure to the rear during aiming and firing. Unlike the tripod, the bipod mount is relatively unstable (elbows and upper torso may move). A good sight picture must be regained before firing each burst.
(1) Changing direction. To manipulate the gun for

3804. Firing the M240G
a. Trigger Manipulation. The trigger is not squeezed as with other small arms; it is pulled to the rear and then released. This enables the gunner to control the number of rounds in each burst and prevents excessive wear to the sear and sear notch. Bursts of less than six rounds should not be fired. The rapid rate of fire of 200 rounds per minute is delivered in bursts of 10 to 12 rounds, which are fired 2 to 3 seconds apart. The sustained rate of fire of 100 rounds per minute is delivered in bursts of six to eight rounds, which are fired 4 to 5 seconds apart. b. Firing From the Bipod. When firing from the bipod, the rear sight is raised. Assume a prone position behind the gun with the right shoulder into the weapon. The right hand grasps the pistol grip and

minor changes in direction (moving the muzzle to the right or left), shift the shoulders and upper torso slightly. The weapon’s bipod is mounted on a ball joint, allowing relatively easy minor changes in direction through approximately 45 degrees. To make a major change in direction, the entire body must be moved until it is realigned directly behind the weapon. Thus, rapid, major changes in direction are difficult with the bipod.
(2) Changing elevation. To manipulate the gun in

elevation (moving the muzzle up or down), move the elbows closer together or farther apart. c. Firing From the Tripod. When firing from the tripod, the rear sight is lowered. Assume a prone position behind the gun with the right shoulder into the weapon. Manipulate the trigger with the right hand and the T&E with the left. Exert a steady
3-49

MCWP 3-15.1 rearward pressure during firing with both hands (left hand on the elevating handwheel, palm down).
(1) Firing. Point the muzzle of the gun in the general

Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240G To traverse, place the left hand on the traversing handwheel, thumb up. To move the muzzle to the right, the gunner pushes away with the thumb: PUSH RIGHT. To move the muzzle to the left, the gunner pulls to the rear with the thumb: PULL LEFT. To search, rest the left hand on the elevating handwheel. To move the muzzle up, the gunner pushes away with the thumb: PUSH UP. To move the muzzle down, the gunner pulls to the rear with the thumb: PULL DOWN.

direction of the target by releasing the slide lock lever and pulling the T&E along the traversing bar. Secure the slide lock lever and raise the rear sight. Place the estimated range on the rear sight, and manipulate the gun until there is a good sight picture. The assistant gunner then lowers the rear sight and begins firing. Unlike the bipod, the M122 tripod provides a stable base and controlled manipulation, making the use of the sight not only redudant, but it also blocks the gunner’s view of the target and impacting rounds.

Section 9

Gun Drill
(2) Manipulation. All manipulation is accomplished

by turning the two handwheels with the left hand. If both direction and elevation changes are required to engage a target, manipulate direction first, then elevation.

Figure 3-63. Changing Barrels.
3-50

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery NOTE The key words, or thumb rule, are similar to those used in reading map coordinates. They are PUSH RIGHT UP. Push on the traversing handwheel to go right, and push on the elevating handwheel to go up.

MCWP 3-15.1 the bolt is to the rear. The gunner depresses the barrel locking latch with his left hand and keeps his hand at that position (see figure 3-63). The team leader grasps the barrel by the changing handle, rotates it to its upright position, pushes forward and pulls up, separating the barrel from the receiver. He then grasps the spare barrel by the changing handle, and with the gunner again depressing the barrel locking latch, inserts the barrel socket into the receiver, aligns the gas plug with the gas cylinder, and pulls to the rear until the barrel is fully seated. The gunner then releases the barrel release latch. Once the barrel is fully seated, the team leader lowers the barrel changing handle, counting the clicks (minimum two, maximum seven) to ensure proper headspace. A gun drill gives team members training in machine gun operation and can help develop confidence in their ability to put the machine gun into action with precision and speed. Rotation of duties during training ensures that every member becomes well trained in each position. Precision is obtained by strict adherence to prescribed procedures. Speed is acquired after precision has been developed. Leaders must remember that a gun drill is simply a means of improving crew functioning. It is not an end in itself.

3805. Change Barrel Procedures
The ability to change the barrels of the M240G quickly provides a great advantage. It allows one barrel to be used while the other is cooling. This increases the life of each barrel and ensures a continuous rapid rate of accurate fire. Barrels should be changed when they are beginning to overheat. Changing a barrel only takes a few seconds and significantly improves the rate of fire and accuracy. As a guide, a barrel change is required after firing the sustained rate for 10 minutes and after firing the rapid rate for 2 minutes. The procedures outlined below are for a tripod-mounted gun; however, they are very similar to those for a bipod-mounted gun. The barrel can be changed with the bolt forward or to the rear. The weapon does not necessarily need to be unloaded; however, it must be placed on S when

Figure 3-64. Team Formed on Line With Equipment.
3-51

MCWP 3-15.1

Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240G The team leader carries the tripod and one box of ammunition. The gunner carries the machine gun with one bandoleer of ammunition. The ammunition bearer carries the spare barrel case, flex-mount with T&E mechanism, and one box of ammunition.

The machine gun squad consists of a squad leader and two 3-man machine gun teams. Each team operates one M240G and is composed of a team leader, a gunner, and an ammunition bearer. A gun drill, as discussed here, is limited to the squad leader and one machine gun team (team leader, gunner, and ammunition bearer). Of course, the squad leader may conduct a gun drill for both of his teams simultaneously and the section leader may do likewise for two or all three squads.

3902. Form for Gun Drill
The squad leader commands FALL IN, and the team forms on line with five paces between team members (see figure 3-64). The team leader repeats all commands. The squad leader then gives the command TAKE EQUIPMENT. Team members take one step forward and pick up their equipment. The squad leader commands FORM FOR GUN DRILL. The team forms in a column with five paces between men. The team leader is five paces from, and facing, the

3901. Crew Equipment
In addition to their individual arms and equipment, machine gun team members carry the following: The squad leader carries the binoculars and compass.

Figure 3-65. Team in Prone Position.

3-52

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery squad leader. Team members assume the prone position. See figure 3-65.

MCWP 3-15.1 then examines the tripod. He assures that the legs are folded closely together and, with his right hand, checks the sleeve latch to ensure that it has tension and will function. This completes his examination of equipment. b. Gunner Examination. Remaining in the prone position, the gunner first examines his ammunition as did the team leader. The gunner then examines his gun. He pulls the bolt to the rear, places the safety on S, raises the cover, and checks the chamber to ensure that the gun is clear. He crawls forward to the front of the gun and looks through the barrel to ensure that the bore is clean. The gunner then checks the flash suppressor for cracks and the front sight for tightness and damage to the blade. Next, he checks the gas system, ensuring the collar is properly affixed to the plug. He checks to ensure that the barrel changing handle moves freely. He ensures that the feed arm, pivot arm, and feed arm fork move freely and are properly lubricated. He pushes on the feed pawls to ensure they have spring tension. He lowers and latches the cover, places the safety on F, and pulls the trigger, riding the bolt forward. He sets the rear sight on 500 meters. This

3903. Examination of Equipment Before Firing
A thorough examination of equipment is made before each exercise. After the team is formed, the squad leader commands EXAMINE EQUIPMENT. At this command, each team member examines his equipment as explained in the following paragraphs: a. Team Leader Examination. The team leader examines his ammunition first. (Linked dummy ammunition should be used for this training.) To do so, he opens the can, releases the cloth flaps, and pulls out the cardboard flaps of the bandoleer. He ensures that the ammunition is properly linked, free of dirt and corrosion, and that the double link is up and ready for loading. Ammunition belts should not be removed from the bandoleer for examination. After he examines the ammunition, he reinserts the cardboard flaps in the bandoleer, closes the cloth cover, puts it back in the ammunition can and closes its cover. He places the ammunition to his left. He

Figure 3-66. Team Leader Moving to Position.
3-53

Team Leader Mounting the Flex-mount. He checks the accessory pocket to ensure the required SL-3 components are present. M240G by examining the ammunition as did the team leader. completes the gunner’s examination of equipment. He resumes his position parallel to the gun with his head in line with the feedway. He then removes the flex-mount from the spare barrel case and inspects the T&E mechanism. Report of Examination. He then centers the offset head. Figure 3-68.62mm.MCWP 3-15. The ammunition bearer removes the spare barrel from its case and performs the same checks listed for the gunner. Extending the Tripod. each team member reports as follows: The ammunition bearer reports AMMUNITION BEARER CORRECT . He also checks the barrel socket to ensure its cleanliness. If there are no discrepancies. c. Remaining in the prone position. The ammunition bearer has completed his examination of equipment when he returns the spare barrel and flex-mount to the spare barrel case. discrepancies that cannot be corrected by the individual team member will be reported to the squad leader. the ammunition bearer begins d. He checks the locking lever on the traversing slide to ensure that it moves freely. Upon completion of the examination of equipment. He centers the elevating handwheel so that about 1 1/2 inches of thread are exposed above and below the handwheel.1 Machine Gun. Figure 3-67. 3-54 . He also inspects the rest of the flex-mount ensuring that the locking pin is present and that the pintle is clean and free of burrs. 7. Ammunition Bearer Examination.

Gun Team Ready to Fire. 3-55 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Figure 3-70. Gunner Mounting Gun.1 Figure 3-69.

The gunner times himself to arrive at the gun position as the team leader receives the flex-mount from the ammunition bearer. The team leader rises to his feet. On arrival at the gun position. and raises the tripod to a vertical position. and moves forward to the gun position. the ammunition bearer places the spare barrel case approximately on line with where the muzzle of the gun will be when it is mounted. Then the ammunition bearer turns and moves to the flank to provide security. NOTE Live ammunition is never used while conducting the gun drill. He then assumes a prone position on his left hip at the left of the tripod. rotates the gun down into position on the rear of the mount and inserts the locking pin to secure the gun to the mount (see figure 3-69). He slides the recesses in the receiver into the mount’s forward bushings. He then places the tripod on the ground with the front leg pointing in the direction of fire. He then opens the spare barrel case. While the team leader is affixing the flex-mount to the tripod. who immediately inserts the pintle into the pintle bushing and locks it down (see figure 3-68). the squad leader commands CHANGE BARREL. and places it on top of the case with the muzzle pointing down range and the sight toward the gun. The gunner assumes the prone position and. 7. and places the ammunition box one pace to the left and on line with the spare barrel case. locking the tripod in its open position (see figure 3-67). He kneels on his right knee and rests the shoes of both tripod legs on the ground with the mount in a vertical position. Barrel Change When the team leader has reported UP. he raises the front leg with his left hand. keeping his hand on the barrel release latch throughout the barrel change. Machine Gun.1 The gunner reports AMMUNITION BEARER AND GUNNER CORRECT . FRONT. The team leader reports ALL CORRECT. and locks it down. He moves forward to the gun position and places his ammunition to the left of the tripod. He rises to his feet and stamps the rear legs into the ground. If the bolt is to the rear. ACTION. and grasps the ammunition box with his left hand. he removes the flexmount from the spare barrel case and hands it to the team leader. grasps the barrel changing handle in his right hand and his bandoleer of ammunition in his left hand. and moves up to the gun position. Placing the Gun into Action To place the gun in action. 3904. He rises. He rises to his feet. The gunner depresses the barrel locking latch. takes the spare barrel out. On arrival at the gun position. . when ready to fire. M240G slide over the traversing bar of the tripod. the left leg shoe with his left hand. centers it on the 0 graduation line of the traversing bar. the gunner places the weapon on S. He grasps the right leg shoe with his right hand. chest high. ensuring the sleeve latch engages. the team leader places his ammunition to his front so that it will be approximately on line with the tripod head when the tripod is opened. Steadying the mount with his right hand near the tripod head. See figure 3-66.MCWP 3-15. He separates the tripod legs with a quick jerk. takes the spare barrel case by the handle with his right hand and the ammunition box with his left hand.62mm. grasps the right leg of the tripod near the tripod head with his right hand. The ammunition bearer times himself to arrive at the gun position at the time the team leader assumes his position. The team leader then lowers the traversing 3-56 Section 10 Qualification Firing 3905. the squad leader gives the command GUN TO BE MOUNTED HERE. left leg up. reports UP to the team leader who reports UP to the squad leader (see figure 3-70). He rotates the tripod onto his right hip.

After machine gunners become proficient in mechanical training and gun drill. pulls the trigger. and resumes his firing position. turns to his left.1 tripod with his right hand near its head. raises the gun.7-meter qualification course. He grasps the left leg near the shoe with his left hand and closes it to the right. When the team members move. and removes the flexmount from the tripod. grasps the carrying handle with his right hand. and 12. MCWP 3-15. Rotation Duties are rotated during a gun drill to ensure that all members of the team can perform all duties within the team. The gunner depresses the barrel locking latch to assist the team leader in securely seating the barrel. The team leader unlocks the traversing slide. grasps it with his right hand. Machine gunners learn the fundamentals of marksmanship. and places the safety on S. they fire the 12. Qualifying on the 12. The ammunition bearer times himself to arrive at the gun position before the team leader removes the flex-mount. The team leader rises. Grasping the ammunition with his left hand. and places it in the spare barrel case. unlocks the pintle latch. GUNNER. closes the cover. He lowers the rear sight. the members assume their new positions and call out their new duties in order: AMMUNITION BEARER. To rotate duties. and rises to his feet. and returns to his original position. They become familiar with the operation and noise of the M240G during firing. and he returns to his original position. He places the tripod in a vertical position with the rear shoes on the deck. He grasps his ammunition with his left hand. Sliding his right hand down the right leg of the tripod. he releases the sleeve latch. He reaches up with his left hand and lowers the front leg. He places it on the deck to the left of the spare barrel case. and he assumes the prone position and reports UP. and returns to his original position. supporting the 3907.7-meter course instills confidence in the gunner's ability to effectively operate their machine guns. he pivots to his right. The team leader secures his ammunition. The ammunition bearer places the spare barrel in its case. 3906 Taking the Gun Out of Action At the squad leader’s command OUT OF ACTION— The gunner raises the cover and inspects the receiver and chamber to ensure they are clear. He places his ammunition on the deck and drops to his right knee. 3-57 . their position and grip. He then places the safety on F. grasps the tripod near its head. He closes the spare barrel case. elevates the rear of the gun. the squad leader commands FALL OUT SQUAD LEADER. The team leader grasps the spare barrel by the changing handle and inserts it into the gun. The team leader reports UP to the squad leader. He lowers the tripod to the deck with its head to the front. SQUAD LEADER. and rotates it up onto his right hip so that the left tripod leg is uppermost.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery The team leader grasps the barrel changing handle and removes the barrel from the machine gun. receives the flex-mount from the team leader. The gunner removes the locking pin from the flex-mount. grasps the ammunition box with his left. TEAM LEADER. and removes it from the mount. At this command the team members rise and move up one position.7-meter zeroing.

Having traversed the gun. Mechanical Skill in Manipulation. 31001. the traverse is accomplished first. 7.62mm. b. c. The team leader and the gunner observe the strike of the bullets when the initial burst is being fired. Accurate Initial Burst. If it is not on target. To move the gun to the left.1 Machine Gun. Skill in the use of the T&E mechanism will be gained from practice. M240G Figure 3-71. he pulls his hand down. by correctly setting the sights on the machine gun. 3-58 . the gunner moves his left hand to the elevating Figure 3-72. When both traverse and search are necessary. the machine gun is manipulated until the line of aim intersects the target at its center base. Adjustment of Fire. To move the barrel of the machine gun to the right. After the estimated range has been set on the rear sight. the gunner places his left hand on the traversing handwheel with his thumb uppermost. Adjustment of fire is another fundamental of good marksmanship. Mechanical skill in manipulation is required to engage targets that have depth or width. the gunner pushes his thumb up and away from himself. and by properly laying the gun with the T&E mechanism. Combination Front Sight Adjusting Tool. Basic Machine Gun Qualification Target. To traverse the weapon. This is accomplished by correctly estimating the range to the target. Obtaining an accurate initial burst of fire on the target is fundamental to good marksmanship. the gun is manipulated until the bullets hit the target. Fundamentals of Marksmanship a.MCWP 3-15. One click of either the traversing or elevating handwheel moves the muzzle of the gun 1 mil.

Figure 3-75. Speed is a basic fundamental of good marksmanship. or skill in manipulation. Proper mechanical manipulation of the machine gun can be remembered by the phrases PUSH RIGHT UP. palm down. The team leader assumes a prone position on his left side to the left of the gun. Speed should not be stressed to the detriment of accuracy. Unlocking the Front Sight Retaining Strap. PULL LEFT DOWN.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. 31002. In order to elevate the weapon. His right hand is on the grip with his index finger on the trigger. Gunner. placing it on top of the handwheel with his thumb to the rear. Team Leader. Position and Grip a. His cheek rests against the cover. 3-59 . Correct Sight Picture. adjustment. He d. pulling his thumb back toward himself. the gunner turns the handwheel clockwise. b.1 Figure 3-73. Speed. handwheel. A straight line extending through the barrel and receiver passes through his right shoulder and hip. Correct Sight Alignment. It is attained by practice and a thorough understanding of the other fundamentals of machine gun marksmanship. Figure 3-74. The gunner exerts a firm pressure to the rear with both hands while aiming and firing. His legs are comfortably spread. His head and eyes are even with the feedway. The gunner’s left hand grasps the elevating handwheel. and his heels are down (if possible). To depress the gun. Breath control is practiced during aiming and firing. the gunner turns the handwheel counterclockwise. The gunner is in a prone position to the rear of the gun with his right shoulder against the butt stock group. moving his thumb to the right.

7 meters in preparation for qualification firing as described in this reference (see paragraph 31104). point of impact sight picture (see 3-60 .MCWP 3-15. Apply two to three drops of lubricant (CLP. Set the rear sight elevation at 500 meters. If the shot group is above or below the aim point. Sight Setting and Battlesight Zero Procedures.7 meters. the front sight needs adjustment. BZO is normally established at 12. With a target at 12. the M16A2 BZO target). a. If the post blade is required to be rotated counterclockwise to a point where its base is more than half way out of the assembly. do not unlock or change the elevation setting of the front sight post.g. unloads. Begin with the front sight post set at the position in which it is delivered.62mm. Machine Gun. or LSA-T) around the base of the front sight to lubricate the threaded shaft of the front sight post. This avoids accidental loss of zero through inadvertent manipulation during cleaning or inspections. In addition. (e. The combination front sight adjusting tool is used for elevation and windage adjustments (see figure 3-72). At a range of 12. One full turn of the post blade will move the strike of the bullet by approximately 3/8 of an inch (10mm). one round at a time. CAUTION The windage adjustment screws will break with the slightest over torquing. For the initial firing groups. it should not be used for this unless it fits the socket heads of the windage screws tightly. If the shot group is above the aim point. Unlock the retaining strap and rotate it upward. lower the retaining strap. Adjusting for Elevation BZO. a hex wrench is included on another section of the tool. LSA. 7. After rotating the post blade the required amount. all adjustments (windage and elevation) are made to the front sight assembly. However. rotate the sight post counterclockwise as if it were being unscrewed. This tool unlocks the front sight blade retaining strap and has a special slotted end piece to turn the front sight blade for elevation changes. and changes barrels from this position. but do not lock it down until the BZO elevation is confirmed. The combination tool is used to unlock the front sight retaining strap (see figure 3-75). The advantage of this system is that it allows each spare barrel to be individually zeroed to the machine gun and then locked down with the adjustment tools. any point of aim–point of impact type of target can be used as a field expedient. The upper row of aiming points (A-D) on the qualification target is designed for this purpose (see figure 3-71). When setting battlesight zero (BZO). Be careful not to over tighten the adjustment screws. Once BZO elevation is confirmed. while rotating the front sight post clockwise brings the point of impact up on the target.1 loads. If the group is below the aim point. it should be replaced with a Number 2 front sight blade which is taller than the Number 1 or normal sight. will move the strike of the bullet by approximately 1/5 of an inch (5mm). NOTE Rotating the front sight post counterclockwise brings the point of impact down on the target. rotate the sight post clockwise as if it were being screwed in or down. lock the retaining strap down to its detent. then hold a tight/well-supported point of aim. first correctly align the sights (see figure 3-73). Continue the above procedure until the elevation BZO is confirmed. This will make it easier to rotate. one half turn of the post blade. This hex wrench is designed to turn the socket head windage adjustment screws.7 meters. taking time to realign the sight picture between shots. The front sight post is now free to rotate. M240G figure 3-74) and fire three rounds. NOTE The following sight adjustments are given from the gunner's perspective at the rear of the machine gun with the individual in a normal firing position or positioned above the gun. Adjusting for Windage BZO 31003.. b. however. The sights of the M240G are rugged and reliable.

As the adjusting screws are turned. At a range of 12.7 meters. set the range on the rear sight and mount the weapon on the tripod or use a good field firing position with the bipod. Note that wearing a flak jacket or gas mask by the gunner may change the mean point of impact. the windage adjustment is completed. check for play in the front sight assembly by lightly clamping between finger and thumb and attempting to move the sight assembly laterally.clockwise) the adjusting screw on the left side of the front sight assembly the desired amount. At 200 meters. one-half turn. If the group is to the right of the point of aim. NOTE Moving the front sight post to the right moves the strike of the projectile to the left on the target.1 the opposite one must be tightened exactly the same amount. loosen (turn counter. This is especially true if shot groups are just slightly low on a target at 200 or 300 yards. complete rotation (360 degrees) of the adjusting screws will move the point of impact approximately 1/3 inch (8mm). the estimated range to any other target should be placed on the rear sight and a good sight picture obtained before firing. moves the point of impact up or down approximately 4 1/4 inches (108mm). the front sight protector must be moved to the right to shift the point of impact to the left (towards the point of aim).7-meter qualification course is fired with the BZO established as above with the rear sight set for 500 meters. Moving the front sight post to the left moves the strike of the projectile to the right on the target. If this is not the case. the front sight protector assembly must be moved to the left to shift the point of impact to the right (towards the point of aim). If confirmation of the BZO is desired. If play is evident. carefully check both screws for looseness. add yards to meters elevation change to the front sight in. To move the group to the right. and then taking up that slack from the opposite side.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Then tighten (turn clockwise) the opposite side screw (the one on the left side) exactly the same amount. Each time one screw is loosened. If there is no play evident. fire a group(s) to determine if a windage adjustment is required. using ranges estimated in meters taken from a map or range finder. use a tight fitting hex wrench to loosen (turn counterclockwise) the adjusting screw on the right side of the front sight assembly the desired amount. this is easily done from the 200. do not be overly concerned if the point of impact is slightly above the point of aim. load and fire one ball round at a time. Then tighten (turn clockwise) the opposite side screw (the one on the right side) exactly the same amount. Once the shot group is confirmed to be centered. or clockwise. To move the group to the left. If firing confirmation zero on a range laid out in yards.or 300-meter line at a rifle range to disk the target shot group once it is fired. If this is the case always add the one-half turn yards to meters elevation change. 3-61 . the front sight protector assembly should always be clamped tight between the heads of the two opposing screws. If the dispersion of the shot group is too large to calculate the mean center of impact. The 12. Since the BZO procedure above calibrates the rear sight for all targets within the effective range of the machine gun. When firing. noticeable clicks (eight per revolution) should be detected. NOTE The front sight windage adjustment procedure is the combination of creating slack on one side. At a range of 12. in either direction.7 meters. At 200 meters. one complete rotation (360 degrees) of the adjusting screws will move the point of impact approximately 1/3 inch (8mm). as the beaten zone of a normal burst will cover most targets. Therefore. one-half turn of the front sight blade. If the group is to the left of the point of aim. an armorer should replace the protector assembly or the detente spring. If a large number of very distant targets is to be attacked. one-half turn (four clicks) of the windage As above.

he then traverses two clicks right. These firing exercises teach the gunner the fundamentals required to achieve the primary goal of every machine gun team. Section A 3-62 pasters 7 to 8 and requires proper mechanical manipulation of the machine gun. Practice Firing. AT MY COMMAND. 500. 7. sight alignment and sight picture. and 1 belt of 30 rounds. for a total of 156 rounds. gunners are given the opportunity to qualify with the M240G. ending the string of fire on paster number 8. using the three single rounds. 3. firing three rounds on paster 1 to establish his zero and a three round burst on paster 2 to confirm his zero. ter each 6-round burst. The gunner then zeroes his machine gun. FIRE. 500. the following commands are given: WITH A 6-ROUND BELT. The next three squares require traverse and search manipulation. The following actions are accomplished prior to commencing the practice firing exercise: After the conduct of a safety brief applicable to the range to be used. LOAD. The unit is organized based on pasters 1 through 4 in sections B. Finally. and introduces him to the strings of fire that will be utilized for qualification. a gunner and assistant gunner are assigned to each firing position to be used. (3) Second string. The gunner aims at paster 7 and fires his initial 6-round burst.1 screws will move the point of impact left or right approximately 3 1/8 inches (80mm). which is an accurate initial burst on target each time they open fire. These fundamentals include position and grip. afCAUTION Live ammunition or any other type of ammunition different from the M82 blank should NEVER be used when the weapon is equipped with the BFA. after completion of practice firing exercises. Machine Gun. (4) Third string.MCWP 3-15. The gunner aims at paster 6 . 6-ROUND BURSTS. and fires another 6-round burst.7 meter firing. two clicks right and one click up. and proper trigger manipulation. PASTER NUMBER 1 (2. TRAVERSE AND SEARCH. Once zeroing is complete. with no manipulation of the T&E conducted other than to obtain proper sight alignment and picture before firing the 6-round burst. 4 belts of 6 rounds each. (1) Conduct of fire. the gunner familiarizes himself with the weapon. 6-ROUND BURST. The first string of fire will utilize 31004. FIRE. M240G Section 11 Firing with Blank Ammunition of the target is normally used for zeroing. (2) First string. manipulation of the T&E. the gunner is ready to commence practice firing. C. These exercises/qualification firings will only be conducted upon completion of all non-live fire training/exercises. the following fire command is given: WITH A 48-ROUND BELT. The exercises also teach the importance of proper zeroing techniques. and the techniques required to properly manipulate the T&E mechanism for accurate searching and traversing fire. They then set up their guns and perform pre-firing checks. a. 1 belt of 3 rounds. OR 4). To engage these pasters. AT MY COMMAND. A 6-round belt is loaded and fired at each fixed-fire paster. These are fixed-fire pasters. The gunner will not continue until zeroing has been mastered. 12. PASTER NUMBER 7. LOAD. A 48-round belt is loaded and fired at these pasters. repeating this traversing action four times. To engage pasters 7 to 8.7 Meter (500 Inch) Firing In 12. each gunner is issued 3 single rounds. The second string of fire utilizes the constraints of the range to be used. or D. There are no time limits on any of the strings of fire during practice. FIXED. Next. This exercise familiarizes the gunner with the firing characteristics of the machine gun. 2 belts of 48 rounds. A 30-round belt is loaded and fired at pasters 6 through 5.62mm.

The 1 through 4. A bullet hole on the line between two squares may be counted in either square. LOAD. (six points for six hits plus two bonus Figure 3-77. traversing and searching manipulation is then required for subsequent bursts. Thus.7 . and 30 rounds for 6-5). a gunner may receive a maximum of eight points per b. 96 rounds for 7-8. AT MY COMMAND. points). The fire command is— WITH A 30-ROUND BELT. It should be scored in the square which will give the higher score. Installing the Blank Firing Adapter. A total time of 60 seconds is alloted to engage pasters 6 through 5. one click left and two clicks down after each 6-round burst. Timed Firing Practice. but not in both squares. MCWP 3-15. square. He repeats this action four times. and a total time of 60 seconds is allotted to engage pasters 7 through 8. FIRE. Qualification utilizes the same strings of fire outlined above in practice firing. Pasters 1 through 4 may receive a total of 24 points (4 scoring squares 3-63 c. with the additional requirement to zero the weapon.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery and fires his initial 6-round burst. There are a total of 156 rounds fired in the 12. This is a timed exercise to practice operating the weapon with greater speed and to prepare for the timed strings of fire that will be encountered in qualification. The gunner fires a total of 150 rounds for this exercise (24 rounds for 1-4. TRAVERSE AND SEARCH. It should be fired immediately following the practice firing exercise. Blank Firing Adapter Assembly. 7 through 8. ending the string of fire on paster 5. including zeroing. PASTER NUMBER 6. and 6 through 5 strings of fire are scored for qualification. Qualification Firing. One point is scored for each bullet hole in a scoring square up to a total of six holes per square. 3-76. 500.1 meter qualification course. A bonus of two points is awarded for hitting any scoring square. 6-ROUND BURSTS. A time limit of 30 seconds per square is allotted for each string of fire to engage pasters 1 through 4.

The following classifications may be achieved by machine gunners: SCORE 150 and over 130 through 149 105 through 129 104 and below Machine Gun. which can allow high pressures to build behind the exiting round. M240G CLASSIFICATION Expert gunner First class gunner Second class gunner Unqualified The ability to fire blank ammunition adds realism to nonlive fire training. See paragraph 3201a for clearing procedures. 31103. The BFA captures the propellant gases released by the blank cartridge’s firing and use them to cycle and fire the follow-on rounds until pressure is released from the trigger.62mm. it must be inspected for cleanliness and serviceability (see figure 3-76). 7. 7. Pasters 6 to 5 may receive a total of 40 points (5 scoring squares with a possible total point value of 8 points per square). The locking bolt head is serviceable and capable of being hand tightened with a 3/4” wrench.62 mm. 31101. and it will not fire more than one blank without the operator manually cycling the weapon. blank rounds use a reduced powder charge and will exit quickly through an open barrel. Inspection Before installing the BFA. the BFA can be installed. An MK 164 MOD 1 blank firing adapter (BFA) must also be installed before using M82 blank ammunition. The total possible score for the 12. Pasters 7 to 8 may receive a total of 64 points (8 scoring squares with a possible total point value of 8 points per square each). Hand tighten the locking bolt until a snug fit is achieved. it will fail to properly cycle and chamber the next round. Assembly Install the BFA over the flash hider on the M240G barrel. 31102. blanklinked cartridges.1 with a total possible point value of 8 points per square). Unlike live rounds. the operator must ensure that he has cleared the weapon and that there are no live rounds present. The BFA should be free from cracks or damage and that the locking bolt is present and turns freely within the threads. The discriminator assembly is free of cracks or warpage. When the M240G loses propellant gas. Safety Prior to installing a BFA on an M240G. When the M240G is fired without a BFA. The wire lead is not frayed or detached from either the discriminator assembly or the BFA. Once it is established that the weapon is safe. NATO. The M240G can be configured to fire standard M82. then tighten securely with a 3/4” 3-64 .7 meter qualification course is 200 points (counting 6 zeroing rounds). propellant gases exit out of the muzzle.MCWP 3-15.

7 meters of the M240G. Ensure that the wire lead from the discriminator assembly is securely attached to the BFA.1 the M240G jams. See figure 3-77. MCWP 3-15. Do not use the M240G’s regulator setting #3 once the BFA is installed. as it may loosen during firing and cause the M240G to jam. insert the discriminator assembly into the feed tray. 31104. the M240G can be loaded and operated with M82 blank ammunition. Next. since propellant gases can injure other personnel. Operation Once the BFA is properly installed. do not operate the M240G if personnel are within 12.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery wrench. If regulator setting #3 is used. Also. Periodically check to ensure that the locking bolt is tight. 3-65 .

is a belt-fed. Browning. M2HB Section 1 (am- Introduction The machine gun. M2HB (M2 . Caliber .50 cal. aircooled. a. Each member of the gun crew should have ready access to TM-9-1005-213-10.50. . recoil-operated. pocket. The gun is capable of single shot as well as automatic fire (see figure 4-1). Browning. crew-served machine gun.50 cal). the gun is capable of alternate feed Figure 4-1.Chapter 4 Machine Gun. caliber . M3. By repositioning some of the component parts.sized reference manual for operators of the M2 .50. a detailed. Belt Feed.50 Cal on Tripod Mount. M2 .

...... Cal .......... Maximum surface of the barrel and receiver is exposed to permit air cooling.... Air Cooling...... The force for recoil operation is furnished by expanding powder gases which are controlled by various springs.... b...... 65 inches 4-6 .. 24 pounds Weight of tripod mount M3 Figure 4-2...... and tripod complete) ... 44 pounds Length of gun ..... cams.........50....... A disintegrating metallic link belt is used in feeding.... Browning... 128 pounds Weight of receiver ............ however.. Perforations in the barrel support allow air to circulate around the breach end of the barrel and help in cooling the parts.. Leaf Sight. (w/traversing and elevating mechanism and pintle w/bolt) .... Recoil Operation.... c..1 munition can be fed into the weapon from the right or the left side of the receiver)................ the infantry generally uses only left side feed...... and levers... M2HB 4101..... Machine Gun... 60 pounds Weight of barrel .... General Data Weights/measurements: Total system weight (gun.........MCWP 3-15. The heavy barrel is used to retard early overheating.......

........... Eight lands and grooves with a right hand twist... sabot light armor penetrator............. Front Sight.. approximately 35 pounds Rates of fire: Sustained ........................050 feet per second Rifling .......... 400 rounds Weight of 100 rounds in ammunition can ...... and plastic practice (ball and tracer) Basic load of ammunition per gun (vehicle mount) .. 3... and Blade...1 Section 2 Disassembly.830 meters Grazing fire .. tracer. 100 mils Depression ............. Assembly..... Cover..................Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15.................400 meters (approximate) Maximum effective ......... 800 mils (400 left/400 right) Figure 4-3.... armor-piercing-incendiary-tracer.... Length of barrel ....... armor-piercing-incendiary. sabot light armor penetrator-tracer. 50 caliber Types in use ............................ tripod controlled): Elevation .......................... 450-550 rounds per minute Manipulation (tripod mount.. More than 40 rounds per minute Cyclic .... 1.. 250 mils 4-7 ........................ 700 meters Ammunition: Caliber ............. 7............. 45 inches Muzzle velocity (M2 ball) ............... incendiary.. and Nomenclature Traverse .. dummy................ Ball......... blank.. 40 rounds or less per minute Rapid .. one turn in 15 inches Ranges: Maximum (M2 ball) ...... armor-piercing......................................

M2 .1 Machine Gun. Figure 4-4. graduated in both yards and mils for ranges from 100 to 2600 yards. and from 0 to 62 mils. 4102. Figure 4-6. 4103. Safety Care must be taken to prevent the bolt from slamming forward with the barrel removed. A windage knob permits deflection changes of 5 mils right or left of center (see figure 4-2). Browning.50 Cal Link. Once the weapon has been loaded and charged (bolt to the rear with a round on its face) caution must be 4-8 CAUTION . The M2 . The front sight is a semi-fixed blade type with cover (see figure 4-3). M2HB Figure 4-5. Cal . Sights The gun has a leaf-type rear sight.50 cal does not have a mechanical safety. Raising the Cover.MCWP 3-15.50. Aligning Barrel Locking Spring Lug With the 3/8-inch Hole.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15.1 Figure 4-7. Figure 4-8. Figure 4-9. Removing the Back Plate. Bolt Latch Release Free of the Bolt Latch Release Lock. 4-9 . Removing the Barrel.

50 Cal This machine gun supports both the offense and defense. Removing the Bolt Stud. accurate. The idea is to disassemble the weapon just far enough to conduct basic cleaning without having to contend with numerous assemblies and parts.50 cal is also used to— If the back plate is off and the driving spring assembly is compressed. The idea here is that. Destroy lightly armored vehicles. Detailed disassembly. Role of the M2 . general and detailed. The long range. Provide reconnaissance by fire on suspected enemy positions. but this may also be conducted in a field environment when necessary. and train bivouacs. Disassembly and assembly may be divided into two categories. when the situation and conditions permit. This is also known as field stripping and is a practice that stems from past experience in combat situations. Cal . the operator can then take the time to more fully disassemble and thoroughly clean the weapon. Provide protection for motor movements.1 observed by the gunner as the weapon is ready to fire once the trigger is depressed. Browning. Never attempt to cock the gun while the back plate is off and the driving spring assembly is in place. M2HB Defend against low-flying hostile aircraft. Driving Spring Rod Assembly. involves the removal of some of the component parts and assemblies from the main groups. It provides the heavy volume of close. close defensive. Provide final protective fires.MCWP 3-15. to WARNING Figure 4-10. General disassembly involves separation of the weapon into main groups. and continuous fire support necessary to suppress and destroy enemy fortifications. The M2 . 4-10 . and final protective fires delivered by this gun form an integral part of the unit’s defensive fires. 4104. vehicle parks. Machine Gun. The intent behind designating main groups for a weapon and the practice of field stripping is to allow the operator to quickly break the weapon down into a set of major components that can be hastily cleaned to keep the weapon ready for action. for the operator. the retaining pin on the driving spring rod can slip from its seat in the side plate and cause serious injury to anyone behind the gun. CAUTION Figure 4-11.50. vehicles and personnel in support of an attack. Complete general and detailed disassembly is normally the expected routine in garrison after the completion of firing and/or field training.

palm up. and pull the recoiling parts to the rear until the lug on the barrel locking spring aligns with the 3/8-inch hole in the right side plate of the receiver (just below the feed way exit). Removing the Bolt from the Receiver. between the trunnion block and the barrel extension (see figures 4-5 and 4-6). Unscrew the barrel from the receiver (see figure 4-7). Freeing the Bolt. Figure 4-13. Barrel Group. Grasp the retracting slide handle with the right hand.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. 4-11 Figure 4-12.1 Figure 4-14. free of the bolt latch release lock. 4201. Place the smallest link of the M2 . General disassembly for the M2 .50 cal consists of removing groups and assemblies for inspection or cleaning. If it is not in an upright position. the gun must be cleared as prescribed in paragraph 4903. Before disassembly can be conducted. General Disassembly . This holds the barrel locking spring lug aligned with the 3/8-inch hole in the right side plate. Ensure that the bolt latch release is in the upright position.50 caliber link. The barrel can be turned only when the lug is aligned with the 3/8-inch hole. Disassembly of the weapon beyond that described in this publication is not authorized. Back Plate Group. Removing the Barrel Buffer Group and Barrel Extension Group. Clearing the Gun. or suitable spacer. c. Be careful not to damage the threads or barrel locking notches when setting the barrel down. Pull back slightly on the retracting slide handle and remove the link or spacer from the receiver. a. except by qualified ordnance personnel. b. ensure the proper functioning and maintenance of the weapon. Turn the cover latch and raise the cover (see figure 4-4).

Separating the Barrel Buffer Assembly From the Barrel Buffer Body Figure 4-17. Browning. Separating the Groups. Cal .1 Machine Gun.50. Figure 4-16.MCWP 3-15. The Eight Major Groups and Assemblies. M2HB Figure 4-15. 4-12 .

4-13 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner push down on the bolt latch release and turn the buffer tube sleeve to the right to free it (see figure 4-8). The bolt must be forward before the back plate MCWP 3-15.1 is removed. Joining the Barrel Extension Group and Barrel Buffer Group. push down on the bolt latch release allowing the bolt to go forward. Figure 4-18. If the bolt is to the rear.

Push in and to the left on the head of the driving spring rod to remove it. The inner and outer driving springs and driving spring rod are located inside the receiver next to the right side plate (see figure 4-10). raise the bolt latch (left of the trigger lever) and push the bolt forward to align the bolt stud with the clearance hole (see figure 4-12). Machine Gun. If this occurs. d. After freeing the bolt. 4-14 .1 Use the retracting slide handle to ease the bolt forward after the bolt latch is released. remove the back plate by lifting straight up (see figure 4-9). Exploded View. Pull the driving spring assembly to the rear and out of the receiver. and remove the bolt stud (see figure 4-11). The back plate latch lock and latch are below the buffer tube. Bolt Group. Bolt Group. the bolt latch will engage in the bolt latch notches in the top of the bolt. f. Figure 4-19. freeing the bolt from the barrel extension. NOTE If the bolt is accidentally moved all the way to the rear. Grasp the retracting slide handle and give it a quick jerk. Push to the left to remove the driving spring rod retaining pin from its seat in the right side plate. Driving Spring Rod Assembly. Pull out on the lock and up on the latch. Place the bolt down on its right side (with the extractor arm up).MCWP 3-15. Bolt Stud. Browning. Align the shoulder on the bolt stud with the clearance hole in the bolt slot on the right side plate. M2HB e. so that the extractor will not fall from the bolt. slide it to the rear and out of the receiver (see figure 4-13). Cal .50.

Insert the drift of a combination tool. At the same time. Removing the Bolt Switch and Bolt Switch Stud. Removing the Extractor.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. or other pointed instrument. g. Push in on the buffer body lock. through the hole in the lower rear corner of the right side plate. place one hand in the receiver and push the barrel extension group and barrel buffer group to the rear (see figure 4-14). Barrel Buffer Group and Barrel Extension Group.1 Figure 4-20. Remove the barrel buffer group and the barrel Figure 4-21. 4-15 .

Figure 4-23. Cal . Prying the Accelerator Stop Lock into the Center Recess.MCWP 3-15.50.1 Machine Gun. Drifting the Sear Stop Pin Free From Engagement with the Firing Pin Spring. Removing the Cocking Lever and Cocking Lever Pin. Browning. Figure 4-24. M2HB Figure 4-22. Figure 4-25. Prying the Sear Stop into the Center Recess. 4-16 .

Removing and Replacing the Sear Slide. Removing the Accelerator Stop Lock. Figure 4-29.1 Figure 4-28. Removing the Accelerator Figure 4-30. 4-17 . Figure 4-27.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. Removing and Replacing the Sear and Sear Spring. Removing the Firing Pin Extension Assembly and Firing Pin. Figure 4-26.

The stud on the tube lock will now engage the serrations in the barrel buffer tube to keep the tube from turning. Separate the two groups by pushing forward on the tips of the accelerator (see figure 4-15). with the index finger supporting the accelerator. hold the barrel buffer group in the right hand. Turn the barrel buffer tube until the screwdriver slot (in the rear of the tube) is vertical. align the breech lock depressors with their guideways in the sides of the 4-18 Figure 4-32. The barrel buffer assembly will not be disassembled (see figure 4-16). look into the side plate of the re- 4202. a. ceiver. barrel extension. the tor As the Bolt Group. replace the groups and assemblies in reverse order from disassembly. Place the bolt in the receiver with top of the cocking lever forward and the extracdown. Push the bolt forward into the receiver.1 Machine Gun. Barrel Buffer Assembly. Barrel Buffer Assembly and Barrel Buffer Body Group. the front end of the bolt approaches the tips of accelerator. M2HB Figure 4-31. This key must fit in its slot in the right side of the barrel buffer body.MCWP 3-15. and push them forward until the barrel buffer body spring lock snaps into position. claws against the shank (see figure 4-18). Replacing the Sear Stop and Pin. h. Push the groups together. Join the notch on the shank of the barrel extension group with the cross groove in the piston rod of the barrel buffer assembly. When the parts are properly locked in place. the barrel buffer tube should protrude about 1 1/8 inches from the rear of the barrel buffer body group. General Assembly To assemble the gun. To join the two groups together. Pull the barrel buffer assembly from the rear of the barrel buffer body group. This completes general disassembly (see figure 4-17). extension group through the rear of the receiver. Place the groups in the receiver.50. Browning. arrow pointing to the right. Replacing the Firing Pin and Extension Assembly. c. Barrel Buffer Group and Barrel Extension Group. and press down on the rear end of the bolt to . At the same time. b. Replace the barrel buffer assembly in the barrel buffer body group with the key on the spring guide to the right. Push the barrel buffer assembly fully forward. ensuring that the tips of the accelerator are against the rear end of the barrel extension. Cal . press down its tips to ensure positive locking of groups. As the accelerator rotates to the rear.

barrel buffer. NOTE The barrel extension. place the back plate guides in their guideways. Driving Spring Rod Assembly. the barrel buffer should be completely inside the receiver. f. Pull the retracting slide handle to the rear until the lug on the barrel locking spring is Figure 4-33. If not. Replacing the Bolt Switch and Stud. Exploded View. Back Plate Group. g. Press in and to the right on the head of the driving spring rod and place the retaining head in its seat in the right side plate. Release the latch lock. Bolt Stud. Place the end of the driving spring rod in its hole in the rear of the bolt. and pull up on the back plate group to ensure it is firmly seated. Raise the rear of the bolt and continue to push it forward until the bolt latch release engages the notches in the top of the receiver.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. ensuring that the shoulder of the stud is inside the side plate. Hold the back plate with the latch down and the trigger up.1 d. 4-19 . Press up on the bolt latch and push the bolt all the way forward by pushing on the bolt and stud only. and bolt groups may be assembled and returned to the receiver together Figure 4-34. Hold out on the latch lock and tap the back plate into position until the latch snaps into place. ensure the front end of the bolt clears the accelerator tips. NOTE At this time. Barrel Group. and push forward on the driving spring group and the barrel buffer tube. e. the barrel buffer body spring is not properly seated. Align the stud hole with the clearance hole and replace the bolt stud. Barrel Buffer Body Group.

Detailed Disassembly and Assembly The term detailed disassembly. Remove the link and close the cover. Browning. and returns it to the forward position. refers only to those disassembly procedures authorized for the operator level. receiver. 4-20 . With the bolt latch release lock engaged (up position). The gunner returns the retracting slide handle to the forward position and releases the firing pin. Screw the barrel all the way into the barrel extension. Barrel Extension Group with New Type Breech Lock. as it is used in this manual. and back plate groups. Detailed disassembly of any of the groups beyond that described in this document IS NOT AUTHORIZED except by qualified ordnance personnel. This completes the function check and indicates that the gun is correctly assembled.1 visible through the 3/8-inch hole in the right side plate. Place the smallest loop of a caliber . the gunner ensures that the bolt is forward and the cover is closed. M2HB maintenance (unit armorers) or above. h. between the trunnion block and the barrel extension. To check for correct assembly. This is not to be confused with procedures authorized for 2d echelon Figure 4-35. Cal . pulls the retracting slide handle to the rear. The bolt will be engaged by the latch assembly and held to the rear. cover. 4203. barrel extension. This completes general assembly.50. The gunner then disengages the bolt latch release lock (down position). the gunner pulls the retracting slide handle to the rear. knowledge of detailed disassembly and assembly is required. Function Check. then unscrew the barrel two notches. or suitable spacer. Machine Gun. Detailed disassembly and assembly involves the bolt. barrel buffer.MCWP 3-15.50 link. To replace damaged or broken parts within major groups or assemblies.

Removing the Belt Feed Lever. Figure 4-37.1 Figure 4-36. The Cover Group. Removing the Cover Group. Exploded View.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. 4-21 . Figure 4-38.

Lift out the cocking lever. (b) Bolt Switch and Bolt Switch Stud. Figure 4-39. See figure 4-22. Removing the Shoulder Headless Pin and Spring. freeing the bolt switch. (1) Detailed Disassembly Machine Gun. (c) Cocking Lever Pin and Cocking Lever. 4-22 . On some models the bolt switch stud may be staked so that it cannot be removed. Cal . Lift out the bolt switch and pull out the bolt switch stud. M2HB (a) Extractor. Belt Feed Slide.MCWP 3-15. See figure 20.1 a. Bolt Group. The ejector and ejector spring are not removed from the extractor. and remove it from the bolt.50. See figure 4-21. Rotate the extractor upward. Browning. NOTE The rounded nose of the cocking lever is down and to the rear of the bolt Figure 4-40. Figure 4-19 shows a detailed disassembled bolt group. Rotate the top of the cocking lever toward the rear of the bolt and remove the cocking lever pin.

Lift out the sear and remove the sear spring. (g) Firing Pin Extension Assembly and Firing Pin.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. (f) Sear and Sear Spring. Figure 4-41. 4-23 . Turn the bolt over and lift the sear stop and pin from the bolt (see figure 4-27). Removing the Belt Feed Pawl and Arm. Press down on the sear and withdraw the sear slide. against the pin. To prevent loss of the sear spring. Figure 4-43. and pry it out of the bolt. place the thin end of the cocking lever under the sear stop. Raise the front end of the bolt and allow the firing pin extension assembly and firing pin to fall into Figure 4-42. Withdraw the square end first. If the pin does not come out freely. Before removing the sear stop and pin (on some models the accelerator stop and lock). insert the thin end of the cocking lever between the coils of the sear spring. Figure 4-44. Disengaging the Belt Feed Pawl Arm From the Belt Feed Pawl. (e) Sear Slide.1 (d) Sear Stop and Pin. Removing the Cover Extractor Spring. See figure 4-28. Drifting Out the Belt Feed Pawl Pin. and into the center recess (see figures 4-23 and 4-24). Leave the spring on the cocking lever. Turn the bolt over and drift the sear stop pin free from engagement with the firing pin spring (shake out the accelerator stop lock) (see figures 4-25 and 4-26). See figure 4-29. Use the thin end of the cocking lever to pry the sear stop (accelerator stop lock) out of its groove in the bolt. press down on the top of the sear to release the firing pin.

(2) Detailed assembly Machine Gun.1 your hand (see figure 4-30). Make sure the sear spring is properly seated in its recess in the bolt and the bottom of the sear.50. With the sear spring still wedged on the cocking lever. Figure 4-47. In that case. Replacing the Cover Latch Spring. Seating the Belt Feed Pawl Spring (Left-Hand Feed). (d) Sear Stop and Pin. Push the extension assembly into the bolt. Replace the cocking lever. Engage the rear end of the firing pin in its seating groove in the front end of the firing pin extension assembly. replace the spring. M2HB (a) Firing Pin and Extension Assembly. Swing the sear stop into its groove in the bolt. unless the gun is to be fired by the side plate trigger. 4-24 . and insert the sear in its slot. sear notch down (see figure 4-31). (b) Sear Spring and Sear. Separate the firing pin from its extension. To Figure 4-45. (c) Sear Slide. Replace the cocking lever pin from the left side of the bolt. This completes detailed disassembly of the bolt. the rounded nose down and to the rear. Insert the firing pin and extension assembly in the bolt. Replace the sear stop and pin (accelerator stop and lock). Figure 4-46.MCWP 3-15. Press down on the head of the pin (base of the accelerator stop) to force it into place (see figure 4-32). Cal . stud up. the top of the cocking lever to the rear. Press down on the sear and replace the sear slide in its guideways. striker first. Browning. Replacing the Belt Feed Slide in its Guideways (Left-Hand Feed). and notch to the front. (e) Cocking Lever and Pin. The slide may be inserted from either side. and tilt the front end down until the striker protrudes through its aperture in the face of the bolt. the square end must be to the left.

With the extractor arm vertical. This should release the firing pin. (1) Detailed disassembly Figure 4-48. Pry up the latch end of the assembly.1 Figure 4-49. (c) Accelerator Pin and Accelerator. so that the groove marked L is continuous from the left-hand feed (see figure 4-33).Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. (g) Extractor. Hold the assembly against the barrel buffer body. In most cases. Snapping the Belt Feed Lever Lug to Seat the Shoulder Headless Pin. (b) Barrel Buffer Body Spring Lock. lug down. so that the lug will clear the barrel buffer body. replace the extractor stud in the extractor pivot hoe of the bolt. the barrel buffer body spring lock is staked and will not be removed. then rotate it to the rear and depress the sear. With the other hand. Replace the bolt switch and stud with the smaller end up. test for correct assembly. ensure that the collar is engaged in its slot in the bolt. (b) Barrel Buffer Tube Lock Assembly. b. Turn the accelerator back to push the barrel buffer tube assembly out of its slot. Rotate the extractor forward. (2) Detailed assembly (a) Accelerator and Accelerator Pin. The wider portion of the bolt switch will be to the front. Replace the accelerator pin so that the ends are flush with the sides of the barrel buffer body group. Pry up on the barrel buffer tube lock latch to disengage the latch before moving the lock body to the rear. Barrel Buffer Body Group. See figure 4-34. Turn the barrel buffer body group upside down. Place the bolt switch over the bolt switch stud. raise the rear of the assembly enough to lift 4-25 . Replace the accelerators with the tips up and the claws to the rear. cock the firing pin by rotating the top of the cocking lever toward the front of the bolt. At the same time. Drift the accelerator pin out and remove the accelerator. (a) Barrel Buffer Tube Lock Assembly. (f) Bolt Switch Stud and Bolt Switch. This completes detailed disassembly of the barrel buffer body group. With the thumb of one hand press the forward winged part into the circular opening in the slot. press down on the front of the lock body to keep it from springing out. Removing the Trigger Lever Pin Assembly. Turn the barrel buffer body upside down.

Barrel Extension Group (1) Detailed disassembly. Trigger Lever Replaced (Rear View). Drift the lock pin out and remove the breech lock from the bottom of the barrel extension group. Headspace and Timing be flat. See figure 4-35. Cover Group (1) Detailed disassembly. Unlatch the cover and rotate it up and forward to remove the cover from the trunnion block (see figure 4-37).MCWP 3-15. Replace the breech lock from the bottom of (a) Breech Lock Pin and Breech Lock. The barrel locking spring should already be staked to the barrel extension. This completes assembly of the barrel buffer body group. Figure 4-51. Replace the breech lock pin so that the ends of the pin are flush with the sides of the barrel extension. This completes detailed disassembly of the barrel extension group. Guns currently manufactured have the breech lock with the slot on top for use with the accelerator stop and lock. (a) Cover Pin. or a double beveled edge. The top of the breech lock may have a wide. Place the cover group (top up) on a flat. it should not be removed. 4-26 . In earlier models the top may Section 3 the barrel extension. Trigger Lever and Trigger Lever Pin Assemblies. When the accelerator stop and lock replaces the sear stop and pin. single beveled edge (double beveled edge) is up and to the front. the lug over the buffer body. c. Browning.1 Machine Gun. the newer models may have a large slot. This completes assembly of the barrel extension group. (b) Barrel Locking Spring. d. See figure 4-36. Push the assembly forward until the rear winged part (barrel buffer tube lock latch) snaps into the circular opening in the slot. Make sure that the wide. The breech lock will be correctly positioned in its slot when the beveled edge is up and to the front and the hole for the breech lock pin is toward the bottom of the barrel extension. Cal . (2) Detailed assembly of breech lock and breech lock pin.50. With the cover closed. single beveled edge. the breech lock with the slot will be used. M2HB Figure 4-50. remove the cotter pin and drift the cover pin out of the receiver.

This completes detailed disassembly of the cover spring. Inserting the Headspace Gage. (e) Cover Latch Spring. Remove the belt feed lever pin (cotter pin). (2) Detailed assembly (a) Cover Extractor Spring. When the enlarged hole in the spring meshes with the cover latch spring stud. See figure 4-40. Disengage the opposite end of the spring from the cover extractor spring stud. the hooked end down (resting on the cover extractor spring). Remove the belt feed pawl spring. (c) Belt Feed Slide. Pry up on the latch end of the spring so that it rides up over the projecting wing of the cover latch. with the latch end to the front and the hinged end toward you. This spring. Lift the belt feed lever off its pivot stud. Snap the hooked end of the spring into its groove in the cover. maintaining pressure on the belt feed pawl to prevent the spring from flying out. (b) Belt Feed Lever and Lock Pin. See figure 4-43. Make sure that it rides on the top of the cover extractor spring. See figure 4-38. Place the cover in the same position as for detailed disassembly. remove the spring from its stud. See figure 4-45. until the toe end of the belt feed lever (engaging the slide) is in line with the slot in the cover. Push the belt feed lever to the right. Remove these from their seat in the side of the belt feed lever.1 figure 4-44).Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner sturdy surface. Ensure the shoulder headless pin and spring do not fly out. To remove the belt feed slide: Remove the belt feed slide from either side. press down. Place the cover latch spring inside the cover with the enlarged hole meshing with the cover latch spring stud. Slowly release pressure and remove the belt feedpawl and arm. 4-27 . can cause injury.50 cal combination as shown in figure 4-41. See figure 4-39. (b) Cover Latch Spring. Pry the hooked end of the spring out of its groove in the cover. Disengage the belt feed pawl arm from the belt feed pawl. Hook the slotted end of the spring under the cover extractor stud with the projection pointing in the direction of its recess. (d) Belt Feed Slide. and shift it to the left until it rests on the cover extractor spring. MCWP 3-15. To reassemble the belt feed slide: The firing pin should never be released with the gage in the T-slot as this could damage the firing pin and gage Drift the belt feed pawl out. Press down on the cover latch spring and slide it away from the cover latch. See figure 4-42. Exercising caution. Use any available punch or M2 . (c) Shoulder Headless Pin and Spring. (f) Cover Extractor Spring. and seat the projection of the spring in its recess in the cover extractor cam. if not handled carefully. Press down on the cover latch spring and slide it toward the latch. Press down on the cover extractor spring and pry the end of the spring out of its recess in the cover extractor cam (see CAUTION Figure 4-52.

For a left-hand feed. arm toward the latch. Place the small end of the belt feed pawl spring over the belt feed pawl spring stud (inside the belt feed slide). and slide. Replace the lock pin (cotter pin) in the pivot stud. Make sure that the pin is flush with the sides of the slide. CAUTION Figure 4-53. Replace these in their seats in the side of the belt feed lever. and snap the lug end all the way to the left so that the shoulder headless pin is properly positioned in the cover (see figure 4-48). Machine Gun. M2HB (d) Shoulder Headless Pin and Spring.MCWP 3-15. Press the lever down as far as it will go. See figure 4-43. replace the belt feed pawl pin. Browning. the belt feed pawl arm must be placed over the pins so that the belt feed pawl arm is toward the latch end of the cover. with the projecting oval (loop) of the spring away from the belt feed pawl arm. See figure 4-47. See figure 4-46. the smaller is the belt feed pawl arm locating pin. Cal . See figure 4-46. Align the pinholes in the pawl. Rotating the Timing Adjustment Nut to the Left. .50. press down and turn the lever until the shoulder headless pin is against the inside of the cover. 4-28 Figure 4-54. (e) Belt Feed Lever and Lock Pin. when the assembled slide is returned to the cover. the spring and pin are seated in the hole nearest the belt feed lever lug. NOTE There are two pins on each side of the belt feed pawl. Pivot the lever until it is aligned with the slots of the cover and slide. arm. Place the assembled pawl and arm over the spring so that the large end of the spring is seated in the recess in the pawl. The larger is the belt feed pawl arm pin. lug up and to the left. With a thumb at either end of the lever. For left-hand feed. Maintain a downward pressure. Move the lug end all the way to the right. Replace the belt feed slide in its guideways. Inserting the Timing Gage. Make sure Do not attempt to cock the gun with the back plate off. Place the belt feed lever over the pivot stud.1 Replace the belt feed pawl arm on the belt feed pawl. with the belt feed pawl to the left.

place the latch end of the cover in position. Insert the cotter pin in the cover pin and spread the ends. tap the hinged end downward into position. 4-29 . Receiver Group (1) Detailed disassembly (a) Belt Holding Pawl.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. connected by a belt holding pawl sleeve. Align the pin holes and replace the cover pin.1 (f) Cover Pin. Feeding (Rear View). Guns of earlier manufacture use a single belt holding pawl adapted for either one or two springs. Depressing the Trigger. Remove the cartridge stop assembly (or rear cartridge stop and link stripper on guns of earlier manufacture) and front cartridge stop from the right side of the receiver. This completes assembly of the cover group. two belt holding pawl springs are used. being careful not to loose the springs. Spring(s). (b) Cartridge Stop Assembly. with the latch engaging the top plate. To replace the cover group on the receiver. that the toe end of the lever moves laterally in its slot without binding. With the heel of your hand. Front Cartridge Stop. and Pin. Remove the belt holding pawl and springs. The split belt holding pawl assembly includes a left-hand and a right-hand holding pawl. e. and Belt Holding Pawl Pin. Section 4 Functioning Figure 4-56. Withdraw the belt holding pawl pin from the right side of the receiver. Figure 4-55. Press down on the spring belt holding pawl and withdraw the belt holding pawl pin to the rear.

Figure 4-59. Figure 4-58. M2HB Figure 4-57. Browning. Belt Feed Pawl Behind the First Round. Feeding (Top View). Belt Feed Slide Moving Out of the Side of the Cover.50. . 4-30 Figure 4-60. Belt Feed Pawl Riding Over the First Round. Cal .1 Machine Gun.MCWP 3-15.

f. 4-31 . between the top plate bracket and the bolt latch bracket (see figure 4-51). Remove the trigger lever from inside the receiver. Install the cartridge stop assembly (or rear cartridge stop and link stripper) and front cartridge stop. (b) Cartridge Stop Assembly. The back plate assembly is not disassembled by the operator. Place the belt holding pawl in position on the left side of the receiver. Replace the trigger lever in the receiver. Turn the lock flat against the side of the receiver (with the lock without the hinge. Chambering. Spring(s). Front Cartridge Stop. or counterclockwise. Push the trigger lever pin assembly all the way in and turn the pin 90 degrees to the left. (c) Belt Holding Pawl. Depress the pawl and insert the belt holding pawl pin. Belt Feed Slide Moving Inside the Cover. with the long end forward and the bowed surface upward. turn the lock counterclockwise until the lock fits in the small hole in the side plate). and Pin. first seating the springs. Align the hole in the trigger lever with the holes in the receiver. Figure 4-62. This completes assembly of the receiver group. Withdraw the pin to the left (see figures 4-49 and 4-50). This completes detailed disassembly of the receiver group. on the right side of the receiver.1 (2) Detailed assembly (a) Trigger Lever and Trigger Lever Pin Assembly. Release the hinged lock from the left side plate.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner (c) Trigger Lever Pin Assembly and Trigger Lever. and Belt Holding Pawl Pin. Position the trigger lever pin assembly so that the key on the pin will pass through the keyway in the left side plate. Guns of earlier manufacture may have a trigger lever pin assembly without the hinged lock. lift the lock of the pin out of the small hole in the left side plate and rotate the lock end downward 90 degrees until it is just forward of a vertical position. Figure 4-61. In this case. Replace the belt holding pawl pin. MCWP 3-15. Back Plate Assembly. The trigger lever should project about 1/8 inch beyond the timing adjustment nut. Turn the pin clockwise and withdraw the pin to the left.

Correctly set headspace and timing is essential for the safe and effective operation of the weapon. If the pin is forward the gage cannot be inserted in the T-slot far enough to give an accurate determination. 4403). Machine Gun. Headspace adjustment is correct when the recoiling groups are fully forward and there is no independent rearward movement between the bolt. Pull the retracting slide handle all the way to the rear and then return it to its most forward position. This will ensure that the locking surfaces of the breach lock and the bolt are in proper contact. See figure 4-52. This prevents the driving spring group and weight of the parts from giving a false determination. NOTE Be careful not to depress the trigger because this will cause the firing pin to be released. If the GO end of the gage enters 4301. the distance between the face of the bolt and the chamber end of the barrel can be accurately determined by following these procedures: Raise the cover. when the barrel or any major group or assembly within the receiver is replaced. Pull the retracting slide handle back until the barrel extension is about 1/16 inch from the trunnion block. 4-32 . Insert the GO end of the headspace gage in the Tslot. Headspace is checked and set prior to firing when the gun is assembled. and when there is any doubt that correct headspace is set. between the face of the bolt and the rear end. of the barrel. injury to personnel and/or damage to parts. and screw the barrel all the way into the barrel extension.50. Browning. Using the gage. Headspace Headspace is the distance between the face of the bolt and the base of the cartridge case fully seated in the chamber. barrel. Then unscrew the barrel two notches. The headspace and timing gage consists of a headspace gage and two timing gages. frequently. NOTE Figure 4-63. Cock the gun.1 The M2 .MCWP 3-15.50 cal’s headspace and timing must be set manually by the operator. These gages provide an accurate means of checking the adjustment of headspace and timing. and barrel extension. Locking. This section describes the procedures required for proper adjustment of headspace and timing. Cal . retract the recoiling parts (described in para. Correct headspace is important because improper adjustment can cause improper functioning of the gun and. M2HB The headspace and timing gage should be kept with the gun at all times.

headspace is too tight. Timing Timing is the adjustment of the weapon so that firing takes place when the recoiling parts are between . headspace is too loose. Timing must be checked and/or set each time headspace is set.1 til the GO end enters and the NO GO end does not. Figure 4-64. Remember to screw the barrel or to unscrew it from the barrel extension. To complete the adjustment. headspace is set. or whenever timing is questionable. attempt to insert the NO GO end of the gage. If the NO GO end of the gage enters the T-slot. 4-33 . Remove the gage. 4302. correct headspace is set. Firing. until the GO end of the gage enters freely. If the GO end of the gage does not enter freely. Timing is correctly set when the recoiling parts are locked together. then attempt to insert the NO GO end of the gage.020 and . un- MCWP 3-15. and when the gun fires on the FIRE gage and does not fire on the NO FIRE gage.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner freely down to the center ring of the gage. if it does not enter correctly. and the NO GO end does not enter. If the GO end enters. The lug on the barrel locking spring must be aligned with the 3/8-inch hole in the right side plate. firing takes place just before the parts are in battery (fully forward). See paragraph 4302b. The barrel must be screwed into the barrel extension (one click at a time) checking with the gage after each click.116 inches out of battery to prevent contact between the front end of the barrel extension and the trunnion block. When this condition exists the barrel must be unscrewed one click (notch) at a time (checking with the gage after every click).

Cock the gun. remove the back plate. Pull the retracting slide handle all the way to the rear and return it to its most forward position. See figure 4-53. attempting to fire. pull the retracting slide handle to the rear and allow the bolt to go forward. the gun is timed to fire too early.50. Unlocking. Barrel and Barrel Extension Stopped By the Barrel Buffer. Insert the first gage. Rotate the timing adjustment nut to the right. M2HB beveled edge of the gage on the barrel notches. turn the timing adjustment nut two additional notches to the right and replace the back plate. When the firing pin is released. one notch at a time. attempting to release the firing pin. and screw the timing adjustment nut to the left until it rests on the trigger lever (see figure 4-54). Press the bolt latch release and allow the bolt to go forward.MCWP 3-15. Insert the NO FIRE timing gage between the barrel extension and the trunnion block. Press firmly UP on the trigger lever. If the firing pin does release. NOTE Do not depress the trigger. placing the Machine Gun.1 The following procedures are used to check and/or set the timing: Ensure that the gun has correct headspace adjustment. attempting to fire the weapon. Step 1. Raise the extractor and pull the retracting slide handle back until the front end of the barrel extension is about 1/4 inch from the trunnion block. Depress the trigger firmly. Figure 4-65. Recoil Movement Complete. Step 2. 4-34 . To correct this. Let the barrel extension close slowly on the gage. firmly pressing up on the trigger lever after each notch. Cal . Browning. The firing pin should not release.

When the bolt is fully forward. By understanding how the M2 . See figure 4-60. As the bolt moves forward. belt feed slide in the cover. With the M2 . unlocking. If the weapon does not fire. As the bolt continues its movement to the rear. as the recoiling parts move to the rear. the cover extractor cam forces the extractor down. The belt is pulled in by the belt feed pawl. firing.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner Cock the weapon and allow the bolt to go forward. the weapon is correctly timed. the belt feed slide is in the cover and the ammunition belt is held in the feedway by the belt holding pawl. Initially. The extractor grips the first round in the feedway and.1 As the bolt moves to the rear. the first round is engaged by the extractor. Near the end of the rearward movement. the extractor lug.50 cal. chambering. belt feed slide in the cover. Figures 4-56 shows the bolt fully forward. NOTE If for any reason a round is not extracted from the belt. pivoting the lever and moving the slide out the side of the cover (see figure 4-58). you will more easily be able to recognize and correct malfunctions and stoppages which occur during firing. holding up the belt feed pawl to prevent double feeding. the round is held by the T-slot and the extractor assembly. When all of the above procedures have been completed. 4401. and rides up over the link holding the first round (see figure 4-59). the cam grooves guide the belt feed lever. and the ammunition belt held in the feedway by the belt holding pawl. When the bolt is all the way to the rear. These steps are feeding. Figure 4-57 shows the bolt fully forward. Insert the NO FIRE gage between the receiver block and the barrel extension and attempt to fire the weapon by depressing the trigger (see figure 4-55). while the belt feed pawl pivots. 4402. causing the cartridge to enter the T-slot in the bolt. the recoiling groups must be manually operated to place the first round in the Section 5 Malfunctions and Stoppages chamber. the extractor lug overrides the end of the switch and the switch snaps back up into position.50 cal functions. The extractor 4-35 . Replace the NO FIRE gage with the FIRE gage and attempt to fire. See figure 4-61. the grip of the extractor is held secure by the downward pressure of the cover extractor spring. The weapon should not fire. The next round rides over the belt holding pawl. the belt feed slide moves out far enough to allow the belt feed pawl spring to force the pawl down behind the first round. MCWP 3-15. a mechanical defect exists and the gunner should notify his organizational ordnance personnel. the slide is back in the cover. the belt feed lever moves the slide back into the receiver. the belt feed pawl arm will ride up over the round. The cycle of operation begins with the first round positioned over the belt holding pawl. More than one step may occur simultaneously during the cycle of functioning. locking. The belt is held stationary by the belt holding pawl. Chambering As the bolt moves forward. and cocking. compressing its spring. ejection. forces the rear end of the extractor switch downward. The recoiling groups are in their forward position. Feeding When the bolt is fully forward. As the extractor is forced down. riding along the top of the extractor switch. compressing its spring and forcing the pawl down until the round has passed over the pawl. withdraws it from the ammunition belt. extracting. The cycle of functioning is broken down into eight basic steps. The weapon should fire. and the ammunition belt held in the feedway by the belt holding pawl .

the front of the accelerator speeds up the barrel extension. forcing the piston rod forward. the accelerator tips slow down the bolt. This unlocks the barrel extension from the barrel buffer 4-36 . At the start of counterrecoil. the round is chambered. As this action takes place. Browning. The breech lock in the barrel extension rides up the breech lock cam in the bottom of the receiver into the breech lock recess in the bottom of the bolt. barrel extension. Locking Initially. the barrel buffer body tube lock keeps the accelerator tips from bouncing up too soon and catching in the breech lock recess in the bolt. Cal . and barrel) are fully forward. Causes of Stoppages. Locking begins 1 1/8 inches before the recoiling groups (bolt. locking the recoiling groups together. the bolt is forced forward in counterrecoil by the energy stored in the driving spring assembly and the compressed buffer disks. at the same time.1 Machine Gun. After the bolt travels forward about 5 inches. body group and releases the barrel buffer spring.50. the lower rear projection of the bolt strikes the tips of the accelerator. As the accelerator rotates forward. As the bolt continues forward. 4403. stop pin (on the left side of the bolt) permits the extractor assembly to go down only far enough to align the round with the chamber. The recoiling groups are completely locked together three-fourths of an inch before the groups are fully forward. M2HB Figure 4-66. Since the cross groove in the piston rod engages the notch on the barrel extension shank. Some of the forward motion of the bolt is transmitted to the barrel extension through the accelerator. the extractor lug rides up the extractor cam. See figure 4-62. the barrel extension and barrel are also forced forward by the action of the barrel buffer spring. See figure 4-63.MCWP 3-15. turning the accelerator forward. The barrel buffer spring expands. compressing the cover extractor spring and snaps into the groove in the next cartridge base through the pressure of the spring.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15.1 Figure 4-67. 4-37 . Immediate Action.

causing the front end of the trigger lever to press down on the top of the sear stud. Each time the bolt travels forward in counter-recoil. That. i. Hold the bolt to the rear. M2HB 4405. in turn. the proper position for firing. The accelerator tips strike the lower rear projection of the bolt. which is on top of the breech lock cam and in the breech lock recess in the bottom of the bolt. As this movement takes place. until they are stopped by the barrel buffer assembly.50. Figure 4-68. independent of the barrel and barrel extension. or held depressed. The barrel and barrel extension continue to travel to the rear an additional 3/8 inch or an approximate total distance of 1 1/8 inches. the barrel extension causes the tips of the accelerator to rotate rearward. The force of recoil drives the recoiling groups rearward. Browning.1 Machine Gun. and ammunition is fed into the gun. The firing pin and firing pin extension are driven forward by the firing pin spring. the bolt is unlocked. Unlocking 4404. At the instant of firing.MCWP 3-15. out of its recess from the bottom of the bolt. The spring is locked in the compressed position by the claws of the 4-38 . firing the round. the breech lock is moved off the breech lock cam stop. The sear is forced down until the hooked notch of the firing pin extension is disengaged from the sear notch. For automatic firing. step 1. See figure 4-65. See figure 4-64. the parts are in battery. At the instant of firing. The striker of the firing pin hits the primer of the cartridge. The trigger is pressed and held down. the bullet travels out of the barrel. pivots on the trigger lever pin assembly.e. the recoiling groups are locked together. the trigger lever depresses the sear. Ruptured Cartridge Case Extractor. allowing the breech lock depressors (acting on the breech lock pin) to force the breech lock down. During the recoil of 1 1/8 inches. as in single shot firing. accelerating the movement of the bolt to the rear. Firing As the trigger is pressed down. the barrel buffer spring is compressed by the barrel extension shank since the notch on the shank is engaged in the cross groove in the piston rod head. The gun fires automatically as long as the trigger and bolt latch are held down. the bolt is locked to the barrel extension and against the rear end of the barrel by the breech lock. releasing the firing pin extension assembly. free to move to the rear. At the end of the first 3/4 inch of recoil. As the recoiling groups move to the rear. the bolt latch release must be locked. Only the first round should be fired with the parts fully forward. During the first 3/4 inch.. Cal . When the cartridge explodes. The firing pin automatically fires the next round when the forward movement of the recoiling groups is nearly completed. so that the bolt latch will not engage the notches in top of the bolt. The gun should fire about 1/16 inch before the recoiling groups are fully forward. it pivots on the trigger pin so that the trigger cam on the inside of the back plate engages and raises the rear end of the trigger lever.

See figure 4-65. The leverage of the accelerator tips on the bolt speeds extraction. has been expanded by the force of the explosion. Ejecting As the bolt starts its forward movement (counterrecoil) the extractor lug rides below the extractor switch. the initial movement of the bolt away from the barrel and barrel extension is gradual. which engage the shoulders of the barrel extension shank. and part is absorbed by the buffer disks in the back plate. Part of the recoil energy of the bolt is stored by the driving spring rod assem- MCWP 3-15. M3.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner accelerator. step 2. The rearward movement of the bolt is stopped as the bolt strikes the buffer plate.1 fits snugly in the chamber. During this movement. for a total of 7 1/8 inches. 4407. Section 6 Mounts and Accessories bly. After its initial travel of 3/4 of an inch. and to ensure slow initial extraction of the case. it may be torn. it Figure 4-69. until the round is in the center of the T-slot. Tripod Mount. To prevent this. the top forward edge of the breech lock and the forward edge of the lock recess in the bolt are beveled. 4-39 . As the breech lock is unlocked. The 4406. by kicking the bolt to the rear to extract the empty case from the chamber. forcing the extractor assembly farther down. The slope of the locking faces facilitates locking and unlocking and prevents sticking. after it is started. Extracting The empty case. therefore. the bolt travels an additional 6 3/8 inches to the rear after it is unlocked from the barrel and barrel extension. If the case is withdrawn from the chamber too rapidly. held by the T-slot. the driving springs are compressed.

The sear spring forces the sear back up after the hooked notch of the firing pin extension has entered the sear notch. Cocking When the recoiling groups are fully forward. Machine Gun. The rounded nose of the cocking lever. Browning. to ensure proper engagement with sear.1 round. the top of the cocking lever rests on the rear half of the Vslot in the top plate bracket. The lower end pivots to the rear on the cocking lever pin. the top of the cocking lever is forced forward. M2HB pressed to the rear. 4-40 .50. forces the extension to the rear. As the bolt moves to the rear. the overtravel is taken up and completed when the cocking lever enters the V-slot of the top plate bracket. T&E Mechanism and Pintle. As the firing pin extension is Figure 4-70. Cal . the hooked notch of the extension rides over the sear notch. forcing the sear down. Pressure on the cocking lever is relieved as the bolt starts forward. and is cammed towards the rear. There is a slight overtravel of the firing pin extension in its movement to the rear. compressing the firing pin spring against the sear stop pin (accelerator stop). As the bolt starts forward. ejects the empty case from the T-slot. 4408. The last empty case of an ammunition belt is pushed out by the ejector. The pressure of the sear and firing pin springs hold the two notches locked together. still gripped by the extractor. which fits through the slot in the firing pin extension.MCWP 3-15.

or by tight headspace adjustment or incorrect timing. Runaway Gun. MCWP 3-15. Sluggish Operation. twist the ammunition belt. A runaway gun may be caused by the following: Bent trigger lever. the gun will start to fire when the recoiling groups move into battery the second time. worn. the gun will continue firing when the trigger control mechanism is released. a sluggish gun fires very slowly. M4 Pedestal Mount With MK64 MOD 5 Cradle. Malfunctions A malfunction is any failure of the gun to function satisfactorily. Figure 4-71. b. lack of proper lubrication. a.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner Machine gunners must have a detailed understanding of the many component parts of their weapon. In an emergency. or burred parts. 4501. Instead of firing at its normal rate. 4-41 . and what mechanical problems may be encountered during firing. forward end of the trigger lever sprung downward. and burred parts. This causes the gun to jam. To remedy uncontrolled automatic fire— Keep the gun laid on target and let the gun fire out all remaining ammunition. This knowledge ensures that those problems can be quickly assessed and corrective action taken. Burred beveled contacting surfaces of the trigger lever and sear.1 Replace broken. what those parts do during functioning. Jammed or broken side plate trigger. HMMWV Mount With MK64 MOD 5 Cradle. Figure 4-72. and may damage the feeding mechanism. Sluggish operation is usually due to human failure to eliminate excessive friction caused by dirt. Check the side plate trigger and trigger control mechanism. If the cause is present before the gun is fired. firing is uncontrolled. A runaway gun is when a gun continues to fire after the trigger is released. when applicable. If the defect occurs during firing.

without investigating its cause.50 cals are failure to feed. Both a hang fire and cook off can cause injury to personnel or damage to the weapon. The immediate action procedures for the M2 . always keep the round locked in the chamber with the cover closed in the first 5 seconds after a misfire occurs. If the barrel is hot and the round cannot be extracted within the 10 second total. In the next 5 seconds. Figure 4-73. causes the unintended firing of a cartridge if it remains in the chamber exposed to that heat for too long. NOTE 4-42 . pull the bolt to the rear (check for ejection and feeding of belt). a hang fire may be causing the misfire. and quickly return the gun to action. M2HB 4502. it must remain locked in the chamber. 4503. as a result of prolonged or rapid firing. the barrel is hot enough to produce a cook off. Hang fire and cook off are two terms used to describe ammunition conditions that should be understood in conjunction with immediate actions.50. however. every crew member must be trained to apply immediate action. Immediate Action Immediate action is that action taken by the gunner and/or crew to reduce a stoppage. A cook off occurs when the intense heat of the barrel. This guards against a cook off occurring with the cover open. release it. Cal . Immediate action is performed by the gunner. A hang fire occurs when the cartridge primer has detonated after being struck by the firing pin but there is some problem with the propellant powder that causes it to burn too slowly creating a delay in firing. The procedures outlined in figure 4-66 will assist in troubleshooting and reducing most stoppages without analyzing their cause in detail. To avoid these. for at least 5 minutes to allow cooling of the barrel. or failure to fire. failure to chamber.MCWP 3-15. the round must be extracted within the next 5 seconds to prevent a cook off.1 Machine Gun. Browning. Stoppages A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of operation caused by the faulty action of the gun or ammunition. This prevents an explosion outside of the gun in the event of a hang fire. If the barrel is hot. Immediate action is required by the gunner to reduce a stoppage (see paragraph 4503). with the cover closed. wait 5 seconds. injury to personnel and damage to the weapon could result.50 cal are as follows (see figure 4-67): If gun fails to fire. When more than 150 rounds have been fired in a 2-minute period. Pintle Adapter. The most common stoppages with M2 . If the cook off did occur with the cover open. Figure 4-74. relay on the target and attempt to fire. M66 Truck Ring Mount.

take action as described above. the bolt goes forward and the weapon should fire automatically. With Figure 4-75. A ruptured (separated) cartridge case may be removed with a cleaning rod or ruptured cartridge extractor. so that it is held in line with the bore by the ejector of the extractor assembly of the gun.50. Removal of a Cartridge From the T-Slot. Place the ruptured cartridge extractor in the T-slot of the bolt in the same manner as that of a cartridge. T&E Mechanism Mount Assembly. Determine if the barrel is hot or cold before continuing. pull the bolt to the rear (engage with bolt latch if applicable). If the gun again fails to fire. use a length of cleaning rod to push the cartridge out the bottom of the receiver. its cause must be investigated. usually by disassembling the weapon and inspecting the appropriate parts (see figure 4-66). open the cover. If the cartridge does not fall out. They are: a. Remedial Action When immediate action fails to reduce a stoppage. If the barrel is cold. the gunner must return the retracting slide handle to its forward position. b. and with the extractor raised. Parts may have to be replaced before the gun can be returned to action. wait 5 seconds. 7160041). remove the belted ammunition and inspect the weapon. When the bolt latch engages the bolt and holds it to the rear. raise the cover and pull the bolt to the rear. Section 7 Maintenance 4-43 . 41-E-557-50.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. Two other problems may be detected and corrected without the need for disassembly. If the barrel is hot. If the bolt latch release and trigger are depressed at the same time. and return the retracting slide handle to its forward position. Removal of a Ruptured Cartridge.1 4504. To remove a ruptured cartridge with the ruptured cartridge extractor (caliber . hold the bolt to the rear.

and the shoulders will spring out in front of the case. This forces the extractor through the ruptured case. M3 . The principal night vision sight used with the M2 .50 cal is the tripod mount.50.50 cal is the AN/TVS-5. M2 . M3. The M2 . the M66 truck ring mount. See figure 4-68. Tripod Mount. The tripod mount.50 cal are the HMMWV mount. Figure 4-77. M2HB Figure 4-76.50 cal is also mounted in the up-gunned weapons station on the AAVP-7A1 and externally mounted on the M1A1 tank. 4-44 4601.1 Machine Gun. The principal ground mount used with the M2 . Cal . Pull the bolt to the rear and remove the ruptured case and extractor.MCWP 3-15. M3 is designed for use against ground targets.50 cal and M85 Reticle Pattern. and M4 pedestal mount. the ruptured cartridge extractor aligned with the bore and held firmly in the T-slot. Always check headspace and timing after a ruptured cartridge occurs. The three principal vehicular mounts used with the M2 . let the bolt go forward into battery. and set if necessary. Browning. Use of Ranging Symbols M2 and M85.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. To extend any of the tripod legs. graduated in 5-mil increments and fits between the trail legs of the tripod. The tripod head furnishes a front support for the mounted gun which is further supported by the short front leg. The traversing bar serves as a support for the T&E mechanism. Tighten the leg clamping handle. The traversing bar. Changes of 50 mils or less in deflection. Release pressure on the indexing lever. slide. The M3 mount is the standard ground mount of the M2 . The total weight of the M3 is 44 pounds. Align the stud on the indexing lever with one of the holes in the tripod leg extension. can be made by turning the traversing handwheel of the screw assembly. with all extensions closed. The two trail legs are joined together by the traversing bar. See figure 4-70. The traversing slide and screw assembly are clamped in place on the traversing bar by the traversing slide lock lever. turn the front leg clamp screw handle counterclockwise to loosen the front leg clamp screw nut. the adjustable front leg should form an angle of about 60 degrees with the ground. unscrew the leg clamping handle. a. Dual-Purpose Sight (Under Development). It is a folding tripod with three telescopic.1 Figure 4-78. and extend the leg to the desired length. This places the gun on a low mount. (1) Traversing mechanism. allowing the stud to fit the desired hole. the traversing handwheel should be centered. Readings on the traversing bar are taken from the left side of the traversing slide. Adjust the leg to the desired angle. which in turn supports the rear of the gun. This permits traverse of 400 mils left or right of the 0 index in the center of the traversing bar. and tighten the front leg clamp. extend the telescopic front and trail legs (enough to keep the tripod level and maintain the stability of the mount). The traversing slide is properly mounted when the lock lever is to the rear and the traversing handwheel is positioned to the left. and screw assembly. loosen the traversing slide lock lever and move the slide along the traversing bar. To raise the tripod farther off the ground. The traversing mecha- nism consists of a traversing bar. which includes the traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism and pintle. about 12 inches above the ground. When the tripod is emplaced on flat terrain. To adjust the front leg. tubular legs connected at the tripod head. The 4-45 . Traversing and Elevating Mechanism .50 cal (see figure 4-69). Each leg ends in a metal shoe that can be stamped into the ground for greater stability. When the traversing slide is locked to the traversing bar. press down on the indexing lever. To make changes in direction.

M3 by a pintle (see figure 4-70). raise the pintle lock. This scale is marked to show 250 mils in depression and 100 mils in elevation from the 0 setting. consists of an upper and lower elevating screw and is connected to the gun by inserting the quick release pin assembly through the holes in the upper elevating screw yoke and the rear mounting lugs of the receiver. The tapered stem of the pintle seats in the tripod head and is held secure by a pintle lock and spring. The M2 . handwheel allows a traverse of 50 mils left or right of center. Pintle. Vehicle Mounts a. Cal . and M66 ring mount. This synchronizes the handwheel graduations with those on the upper elevating screw. During.MCWP 3-15. (2) Elevating mechanism. The elevating mechanism wheel is turned clockwise to depress the barrel and counterclockwise to elevate. b. Each click equals a 1-mil change in elevation. To release the pintle.50 cal can be mounted on the HMMWV armament carrier.50 cal and the MK-19 on the HMMWV armament carrier (see figure 4-71) and on the M4 pedestal mount on M151 series vehicles (see figure 4-72). 4-46 . and After Firing. M4 pedestal mount. It is also found in the turret of the AAVP-7A1. and on the M1A1 tank. The hand- 4602. Types. is fitted to the upper screw to indicate elevation. A spring actuated index device produces a clicking sound when the handwheel is turned. MOD 5 cradle is used to mount the M2 .50. This pintle is attached to the machine gun by a pintle bolt through the front mounting hole in the receiver. The MK64. The elevating handwheel is graduated in 1-mil increments up to 50 mils and is fastened to the elevating screw by a screw lock. M2HB Figure 4-79. A scale. The gun is connected to the tripod mount. graduated in mils. Care and Cleaning Procedures Before.1 Machine Gun. One click in the traversing handwheel signifies 1-mil change in direction. releasing the cam. Browning.

Two positioning clamps are provided to prevent up or down movement of the traversing lock clamp on the M4 pedestal. When used on the HMMWV weapons platform 4-47 . Inspection Checklist. The carriage is guided on the track by rollers. The lower end of the assembly is attached to the pedestal by a train lock clamp.1 Figure 4-80.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. and the M66 ring mount. It may be released for traverse or locked in position by a train lock handle. b. The M66 truck ring mount also uses the MK64 cradle to mount the gun onto the mounts roller carriage which is on a circular track (see figure 4-73). (2) T&E mechanism mount assembly. The adapter is equipped with a quick-release pintle that secures the carriage and cradle. HMMWV weapons platform. The upper end of the pintle Ammunition More information concerning mounting the M2 . The track is secured to the vehicle by supports.50 cal on vehicles: the pintle adaptor and the traversing and elevating mechanism mount assembly. The lower end of the adapter is shaped to fit the mounting hold in the upper end of the M4 pedestal. Section 8 (1) Pintle adapter. adapter has a hole that is shaped to accept the M4 cradle’s pintle. This assembly adapts the T&E so that it secures the carriage and cradle to the M4 pedestal or HMMWV weapons platform pedestal and provides fire control adjustments (see figure 4-75).50 cal on these vehicles is contained in TM 08686A-13&P/1. There are two accessories needed to mount the M2 . The cradle can be rotated in the pintle sleeve of the carriage and can be adjusted for elevation. It is secured by the pintle lock on the vehicle pedestal. Accessories. See figure 4-74.

Swing the three locking cams to the rear to secure the bracket to the weapon side cam first. Browning. M2HB proper reticle must be performed by direct support of higher category maintenance. Because of the close fit of working surfaces and the high speed at which the gun operates.c.50. It will be easier to tighten the lever screw if you place an empty cartridge case over the lever arm to increase the amount of leverage applied.50 cal aiming points for ranges from 400 to 1. See figure 4-78. efficient 4-48 . Cal . The AN/TVS-5 may also be used with the MK19. see chapter 5.50 cal and M85. Position the M2 mounting bracket assembly over the breech of the machine gun and slide it to the rear until it stops. Use of the Reticle Cell. installation of the lines at the top of the reticle indicate range in hundreds of meter to a 6-foot tall standing person.50 cal/M85 reticle pattern. Aiming points are the same as the M2 . Install the sight on the mounting bracket assembly by positioning it in the groove at the top rear of the bracket so that the scribe line on the bracket is aligned with the scribe line in the sight mounting adaptor. AN/TVS-5 The AN/TVS-5 is a portable. Installation. (1) M2 . If not. A standard M2 . rust. c. For more on the T&E mechanism. The range to the target is read at the right edge of the target. the receiver and moving parts must be kept clean. Place the left edge of the target at the left side of the horizontal line. cleaning. estimate the range. b. The sight does not emit visible infrared light that can be detected by the enemy. and skyglow. dirt. see paragraph 2505. and free from burrs. Aiming points for a target moving 10 mph are located vertically to the left and right of the stadia lines. a. The M2 . Tighten the lever screw to secure the sight to the bracket. and adjust the weapon to place the proper aiming point on the target. Manipulate the sight picture so that the target fills the space between the stadia lines in order to determine the corresponding range to the target. correctly lubricated. starlight.50 cal/M85 reticle.50 cal reticle pattern. Machine Gun.MCWP 3-15.200 meters are shown as small dots in a vertical line through the center of the reticle. The AN/TVS-5 may be zeroed during daylight or darkness. Field Zeroing. It is attached to the lower rear holes in the M4 cradle by a retaining pin.50 cal. To install the AN/TVS-5— Release the catch at the left side of the cartridge cover and raise the cover to the UP position. only one clamp is required above the traversing lock clamp. section 5. or grease to ensure proper. followed by the two top locking cams. Locate the target. battery-operated electro-optical instrument used for passive night observation and fire. For more on the AN/TVS-5. MK-19 aiming points for stationary targets are aligned vertically in the center of the reticle. The vertical 4603. and maintenance determine whether or not the gun will function properly when needed. It amplifies natural light such as moonlight. The AN/TVS-5 is normally equipped with a reticle for the M2 . Close the cartridge and secure it with the catch. Measurement is made from the horizontal line to the top or bottom of the vertical line (see figures 4-76 and 4-77). The bore and chamber must be properly maintained to preserve accuracy. see TM 11-5855-214-10. The horizontal line of the range scale indicates the range in hundreds of meters to a 20-foot wide target (such as a tank viewed from the side). Care. Use the center of the horizontal lines for ranges of 0-250 meters. The proper reticle cell must be installed in the AN/TVS-5 before the sight can be used for aimed fire of the M2 . The stadia lines are used to determine range to a 20-foot wide target. (2) MK-19/M2 .50 cal traversing mechanism composes the upper end of the T&E assembly. For the zeroing procedure. Night Vision Sight.1 pedestal.

50 Cal Ammunition. warm or hot. cleaning. This material dries out the metal severely so a thin coat of CLP or lubricating oil should be applied afterwards. This cleaning material is especially useful when cleaning the gun in preparation for changing the type of lubricant used.1 Figure 4-81. LSA is the preferred lubricant for use on all friction producing parts during operation of the gun in normal conditions. CLP is a special cleaning solution and lubricant containing teflon that can be used to clean and preserve all the metal parts of the weapons system. All accessories and equipment used with the gun and mount. Lubricants. Cleaning Materials. lubrication. dry the bore and any parts of the gun exposed to the bore cleaner. Dry cleaning solvent can also be used to 4-49 . however. clean all metal parts of the weapons system. It may be used as a lubricant during normal operation of the gun also. Immediately after using bore cleaner.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. b. The functioning of the gun and mount together determine overall effectiveness. then apply a thin coat of CLP or lubricating oil. functioning. and adjustment of the mounts used with the gun are no less important. Cleaning Materials and Lubricants a. If RBC and CLP are not available. Characteristics and Tip Colors of M2 . The care. including ammunition. soapy water is recommended. RBC can be used to clean the bore of the machine gun barrel after firing. must be properly maintained. LAW should be used during operation of the gun in sustained temperatures below 0 degrees Fahrenheit (-18 degrees 4701. It will not burn off the gun as it heats up during operation nor will rain or excess moisture wash it off. hot or cold water can be used. dry the parts immediately and apply a thin coat of CLP. After using soap and water.

Cal .1 Celsius). 4-50 . M2HB Figure 4-82.50 Cal Ammunition. 4704. M2 . Browning.MCWP 3-15.50. See the cold climate conditions in paragraph. Machine Gun.

M2 .50 Cal Ammunition—Continued. 4-51 .1 4702. During. Care and Cleaning Before. and After Firing Figure 4-82.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15.

If the weapon is brought indoors. hot. and lubricated in a clean. during. dry location where it is least exposed to dirt and moisture. dry. Cal . Gun crews must conduct procedures for the care and cleaning of their weapons system before.1 Machine Gun. tarpaulin. the prescribed lubricants and protected from the elements by some sort of cover if possible. Browning. Ballistic Data. Ammunition Box. The weapon must be kept free of 4704. and then wipe it dry and proceed with cleaning and lubrication. If possible. The gun should be disassembled. Figure 4-86. cleaned. 4703.50. keep the gun covered with a canvas. when the gun is not used and is kept in a clean place. and tropical climates affect the gun and its functioning. During normal training conditions.MCWP 3-15. Special Maintenance Procedures a. it may only be necessary to disassemble and clean it every three to five days. inspect the gun daily for rust. In sustained temperatures below 0 degrees Fahrenheit (-18 degrees Celsius). Extremely cold. M2HB Figure 4-83. Normal Maintenance Procedures Each gun should be cleaned as soon after firing as possible and each time it is exposed to field conditions. In combat conditions the gun should be cleaned and lubricated daily whether or not it has been fired. These procedures are outlined in figure 4-79. In ideal conditions. and maintain a light coat of CLP on all metal parts. . Climatic Conditions. allow it to come to room temperature. or poncho when not in use. Lubricate the gun with LSA or CLP and keep it covered outdoors as much as possible. Care should be taken under these climatic conditions to ensure that the gun is cleaned daily with 4-52 excess lubrication and moisture. (1) Cold climates. the weapon should be lubricated with LAW. and after firing.

If contamination is anticipated. then clean and lubricate. Keep the gun covered as much as possible. Inspection When inspected. Nuclear. dry climates. Biological. Nuclear.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner (2) Hot. Operate the gun manually to ensure that it is functioning properly.1 Section 9 Operation and Firing cant to all outer surfaces of the machine gun (do not lubricate ammunition). the machine gun should be completely assembled and mounted with headspace and timing properly set. cracks. and Chemical Decontamination. Inspect and clean the weapon MCWP 3-15. and rust. b. and Chemical Conditions. Avoid excess lubrication as this will attract dust. apply lubri 4705. grit and sand. The inspection procedures shown in figure 4-80 can be used as a guide for crew members or inspecting personnel to ensure that the gun and equipment are properly maintained. Inspect the gun more frequently for signs of rust. decontaminate by following the procedures outlined in FM 3-5. 4-53 . daily. If the gun is contaminated. Inspecting personnel should look for dirt. humid climates. burrs. (3) Hot. Keep the gun free of moisture and lightly lubricated with CLP. Biological.

craft and lightly armored vehicles.50 cal cartridge consists of a cartridge case. During any temporary cessation of fire. primer. propelling charge. b. and other bullet-resisting targets. Ball. Classification Based on use.MCWP 3-15. the principal classification of the several types of ammunition used with the machine gun are as follows: a.50. The term bullet refers only to the small arms projectile. For use in marksmanship training and against personnel and light material targets. c. the bolt should be latched to the rear to prevent accidental firing. The M2 . M2HB This section describes the ammunition used in the M2 . For use against armored air- Figure 4-87.1 Machine Gun. Clearing the Gun. where it is not necessary to unload to clear the gun. and bullet. To aid in observing fire. CAUTION 4-54 . Armor Piercing.50 cal. The term ball ammunition refers to a cartridge having a bullet that has a metallic jacket and lead core. 4801. Tracer. All machine gunners must be able to recognize the types of ammunition available and know how to care for that ammunition. Secondary purposes are for incendiary effect and for signaling. Browning. concrete shelters. Cal .

Armor-Piercing Incendiary. h. Sabot Light Armor Penetrator-Tracer. Prone Position. Incendiary. especially against aircraft. Also called SLAP. 4-55 . Figure 4-89. Also called SLAP-T i. e. For combined armor-piercing and incendiary effect with the additional tracer feature. Sitting Position.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner d. Blank. j. For example. Ball. MCWP 3-15. Plastic Practice. For use against light armored vehicles and aircraft. For use in scaled range training. For use against light armor vehicles and aircraft with the additional tracer feature. where range restrictions limit Figure 4-88. For incendiary effect. f. Armor-Piercing Incendiary Tracer. For simulated fire (contains no bullet). For combined armor-piercing and incendiary effect.1 g. Legs Crossed. Sabot Light Armor Penetrator.

1 Machine Gun. 4-56 4802. l. by stencil. or prohibit use of one of the other types of live ammunition. b. For use in nonfiring training such as gun drill and to practice loading and unloading procedures. Ammunition can be identified by its physical characteristics.50 cal ammunition are as follows: AC aircraft and antiaircraft machine guns. the code symbol. and the lot number. Browning. Identification Section 10 Gun Drill a. M2HB Figure 4-90. For use with the SLAP-T in scaled range training.50. d. together with the re-packed lot number. To provide proper identification. The code symbols for machine gun ammunition indicate the grade as well as contents and type of inner packing. the caliber. the number of rounds . Plastic Practice. Colors painted on the tips of the bullet aid in this identification. Ammunition Grades.50 cal ammunition types can be found in figure 4-81. The contents of original boxes or containers may be readily identified by markings on the box. The physical characteristics and tip colors used to identify M2 . They indicate. Code Symbol. Sitting Position. in the box or container. Cal . The grades for caliber . k.MCWP 3-15. c. Dummy. A dummy is completely inert. Tracer. MG Ground machine guns. the abbreviated markings are stenciled in yellow on each metal ammunition container. Legs Extended. Ammunition Marking. Marking.

Ballistic Data The approximate maximum range and average muzzle velocity of some of the different types of M2 .50. MCWP 3-15. Crew Formed in Column. fired More than one grade may be authorized for ammunition. It will not be used for overhead fire. not to be issued or used. 4-57 . Ammunition that cannot be identified is considered grade 3. M2. caliber .1 4803. Ammunition placed in grade 3 (due to loss of lot number) and identification as having been in serviceable lots issued to a specific organization. As an example.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner 3 Unserviceable. Figure 4-84 lists the maximum penetration in inches for armor-piercing cartridge. See figure 4-82 on pages 50 and 51. but is not classified unserviceable until every effort has been made to establish its identity. Figure 4-91. may be reissued after visual inspection for local training purposes (graded for training purposes only) in ground machine guns. AC or MG ammunition may be used for both aircraft and antiaircraft machine guns and ground machine guns.50 cal ammunition authorized for use in the machine gun are as shown in figure 4-83.

M2HB Figure 4-92. Figure 4-85 lists the maximum penetration in inches for ball cartridge.50. fired from the 45-inch barrel (muzzle velocity 2. 4-58 .MCWP 3-15.935 feet per second). Screwing the Barrel Into the Barrel Extension. caliber . Machine Gun. Cal . M2.1 from the 45-inch barrel (muzzle velocity 2935 feet per second). Browning.50.

4-59 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. Crew Ready to Place the Gun Into Action.1 Figure 4-93.

5 12 27 1500 M 0.50. INCHES AT: MATERIAL Sand (100 lb dry w/cu ft) Clay (100 lb dry w/cu ft) Concrete 200 M 14 28 2 600 M 1500 M 12 26 1 6 21 1 Figure 4-85.9 14 28 0. . Each box of 100 rounds weighs approximately 35 pounds.1 INCHES AT: MATERIAL Armor plate (homogeneous) Armor plate (face-hardened) Sand (100 lb dry w/cu ft) Clay (100 lb dry w/cu ft) 200 M 600 M 1. M2 . Figure 4-94. Figure 4-84. See figure 4-86.50 Cal.3 0. Squad Leader Moving the Tripod Into Position.7 0. Ammunition Packaging M2 .50 Cal.2 16 21 Machine Gun. Emplacing the Mount.MCWP 3-15. Browning. 4-60 Figure 4-95.50 cal ammunition is packaged in a metal box containing 100 linked rounds. Maximum Penetration for Ball Cartridge. Cal . Maximum Penetration for ArmorPiercing Cartridge. M2 . M2HB 4804.0 0.

radiators.. and hot water pipes.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. If it is necessary to leave ammunition in the open. 4-61 . Place the tarpaulin so it gives maximum protection and allows free circulation of air. Dig suitable trenches to prevent water from flowing under the ammunition pile. Figure 4-97. heaters. Storage Store ammunition of all classes away from heat sources. Ammunition should be stored under cover. i. Mounting the Gun. keep it at least 6 inches from the ground and covered with a double thickness of tarpaulin. 4805.1 Figure 4-96.e. Half Loading the Gun. open flame.

Care. Handling. Figure 4-99. If the ammunition gets wet or dirty. Taking the Gun Out of Action. particularly in damp climates. wipe it off prior to . M2HB Figure 4-98.50. 4806. dirt. Browning. Crew Ready for Action. Cal . Ammunition removed 4-62 from the airtight containers.MCWP 3-15. and Preservation of Ammunition Ammunition containers should not be opened until the ammunition is to be used. Protect ammunition from mud.1 Machine Gun. is likely to corrode. and water.

DO NOT fire over friendly troops any ammunition graded and marked FOR TRAINING USE ONLY. 4-63 . If the powder is hot. excessive pressure may be developed when the gun is fired. cartridges with loose projectiles. Folding the Trail Legs.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner use. Wipe off light corrosion as soon as it is discovered. Figure 4-100. DO NOT fire dented cartridges. The packaging of this ammunition is clearly stamped FOR OVERHEAD FIRE. Dust and other abrasives will collect on it and could damage the operating parts of the gun. DO NOT fire ammunition (other than blank ammunition) until it has been positively identified by ammunition and grade.1 used for overhead fire. or other defective rounds. Only specially approved lots of ammunition can be MCWP 3-15. Use caution during firing to ensure that ammunition is kept out of the dirt. Heavily corroded cartridges should be replaced. DO NOT expose ammunition to direct rays of the sun. DO NOT oil or grease ammunition. Dirt picked up during firing will act as an abrasive in the chamber and could cause a malfunction that may result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment.

the bolt latch will hold the bolt and the retracting slide handle to the rear. clearing the gun. Dragging the Gun Into Position. Figure 4-102.50. the gunner ensures the bolt is forward and the cover is closed. ing slide handle will move forward under pressure CAUTION Section 11 Qualification Firing of the driving spring group. and vigorously jerks the bolt to the rear and releases the retracting slide handle. The squad leader inserts the double loop end of the ammunition belt in the feedway until the first round is engaged by the belt holding pawl. However. Cal . press the bolt latch release. The retracting slide handle must be returned to its most forward position prior to releasing the bolt. Half Loading and Loading To half load the gun. half loading the gun. the procedure is the same as in half loading. palm up. If the bolt latch release lock is engaging the bolt latch release. the bolt latch release must be in the up position. Browning.1 Machine Gun. To complete half loading. and allowing the bolt to go forward. To fully load the gun. 4902. The latch engages the notches on top of the bolt when the bolt is to the 4-64 . Operation includes loading and unloading the gun. The gunner grasps the retracting slide handle with the right hand. M2HB Figure 4-101.MCWP 3-15. the bolt and retractCarrying the gun by the barrel may cause damage to the barrel support and the barrel extension. Two-Man Carry. except it requires the gunner to pull and release the bolt twice. 4901. Single Shot Operation To fire the gun single shot. allowing the bolt to go forward. if the bolt latch release is up and free of the bolt latch release lock.

Thus. allowing the bolt to be driven forward into battery. If the bolt is allowed to go forward with the barrel out of the gun. 4903. If the cover is lowered when the bolt is to the rear. is depressed the latch assembly is raised. In the cover assembly. When the bolt latch release Figure 4-104. Three-Man Carry— Cold Barrel. parts may be damaged when the bolt slams forward. once raised. The added weight and cushioning 4-65 . the belt feed lever lug will not fit into its proper groove in the bolt. The gun may then be fired by pressing the trigger.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. When the bolt latch release is locked down by the bolt latch release lock on the buffer tube sleeve. Precautions During Operation Ensure that the cover. the belt feed lever lug is held to the left by the action of the shoulder headless pin and spring.1 Figure 4-103. before allowing the bolt to go forward. remains in the raised position. with the barrel remaining in the gun. parts may be damaged as the bolt goes forward. the gun functions as an automatic weapon. just above the pivot. Three-Man Carry—Hot Barrel. rear after each round is fired.

a. the gunner is between the trail legs with his body extending 4-66 . b. With the HMMWV. thumb in position to press the trigger. To unload the gun. he can place them under the rear legs of the tripod or over the top of them (see figure 4-90). Machine Gun. Browning. Sitting Position. requires a crew of three to put it into act- 4904. In the sitting position. The inside of his feet are as flat as possible on the ground. a wooden block. the gunner sits directly between the trail legs of the tripod. and immediately removed. The position of the body varies according to the physique of the individual so that the eye is in the proper position to align the sights. additional precautions are taken. the gunner places both hands on the spade grips.MCWP 3-15. The gunner lightly grasps the right spade grip with his right hand. In darkness. thumb in position to press the trigger. is inserted in the receiver between the bolt and the rear of the barrel. palm down. Cal . With his legs crossed. thumbs in position to press the trigger. To allow the bolt to go forward with the barrel out of the gun. pedestal or truck mounts. locks his elbows into the sides of his body with his body forward and chest against his hands. extending above and below the receiver approximately 1 inch. A cleaning rod is then inserted in the muzzle end of the barrel. The M2 . b. The squad leader then removes the round that was ejected out of the bottom of the gun. With his legs extended. His left elbow rests on the ground with the left hand placed on the elevating handwheel. Press the bolt latch release and allow the bolt to ride slowly forward. legs well spread. Unloading. his right foot can be placed on the traversing slide locking lever to ensure that the T&E stays locked down during firing. In the prone position. HMMWV. pushed through the bore until it can be seen in the receiver. Positions for Firing The M2 . c. employed on the M3 tripod.1 effect of the barrel act as a buffer and protect the parts from damage.50. 4905. pull the retracting slide handle all the way to the rear. the gunner unlocks the bolt latch release (if applicable) and then pulls the retracting slide handle to the rear and holds it there. Maintain a steady pressure to the rear on the retracting slide handle. Clearing. Brace the body and arms firmly during firing. Prone Position. If there is a round on the T-slot the gunner pulls the bolt an additional 1/16 inch to the rear and pushes the round up and out of the T-slot by reaching under the gun and forcing the round up the face of the bolt. the gunner must feel the chamber and T-slot to see if it is clear. engaging the bolt stud in the notch in the rear of the retracting slide. Depending on his physique the gunner can sit with his legs crossed right over left (see figure 4-89). M2HB directly to the rear of the gun (see figure 4-88). After the steps above have been accomplished. Unloading and Clearing the Gun a. Pedestal or Truck Mount.50 cal can be fired from the prone or sitting position with the gun mounted on the tripod in low position.50 caliber machine gun. See figure 4-87. palm down. or extended. He lightly grasps the right spade grip with his right hand. To clear the gun. or from a sitting position with the gun mounted on the tripod in high position. toes turned outward. His right arm will be placed on the outside of his right leg pushing to the right to take up slack in the T&E. The gunner then examines the chamber and T-slot. The gunner then raises the cover and the squad leader removes the ammunition belt from the feedway. He grasps the elevating handwheel with his left hand.

MCWP 3-15. Figure 4-106. machine gun crewmen carry the following: Squad Leader Tripod One box of ammuntion Gunner Binoculars M2 compass Receiver w/T&E mechanism and pintle attached Headspace and timing gauge Barrel Barrel cover One box of ammunition Ammunition Bearer 41002. speed and teamwork can be developed. The first command given by the squad leader is FALL IN. Manipulation. NOTE Live ammunition is never used for a gun drill. Only dummy ammunition should be used for this type of training.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner ion and keep it operating. Form for Gun Drill The squad leader gives all commands from the position of attention. Precision is attained by learning and practicing correct procedures.1 41001. Crew Equipment In addition to their individual arms and equipment. At this time the squad members form up on line with five paces between each person and Figure 4-105. Once precision is attained. 4-67 . to include inspecting the gun before firing and observing safety procedures. The squad members repeat all commands from the squad leader. Gun drill gives the gun crew fundamental training in the operations of the machine gun and the confidence in their ability to put the gun into action with precision and speed. Rotation of duties during training is essential so that every crew member becomes familiar with the duties of each position in the gun crew. Correct Sight Picture.

Cal .1 Machine Gun. 4-68 . M2HB Figure 4-107. Sighting Bar. Browning.MCWP 3-15.50.

1 Figure 4-108.50 Cal Targets. and ammunition bearer. their equipment and ammunition one pace to their front. one foot apart. The squad members now take one step forward and pick up their equipment with both hands. The squad then assumes the prone position. a. Squad Leader. gunner. ammunition to his right. and retracting slide handle upward. M2 . The gunner places the receiver across his front. latches to the right front. muzzle to the rear and ammunition box to his left front with latch to the right front. The squad leader inspects the M3 tripod to ensure that— 4-69 . the squad leader gives the command EXAMINE EQUIPMENT BEFORE FIRING. The final command is FORM FOR GUN DRILL. The ammunition bearer places the barrel to his right.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. they place ammunition boxes in front. the squad places the equipment in the following order (see figure 4-91): The squad leader places the tripod to his left (trail legs to the rear. and latch to the front. At this time the squad will face to the right in this order: squad leader. 41003. Examination of Equipment Before Firing Once the squad is in the prone position. front leg uppermost). The next command given is TAKE EQUIPMENT. back plate to the right. If other members are assigned. Once in position.

Pintle bushing is free of dirt and burrs. Barrel carrier assembly is securely attached to the barrel. Ammunition box is closed and locked after ammunition is inspected. When the ammunition bearer completes his inspection. Sleeve lock latch and pintle lock release cam are in working order. Ammunition belt is properly loaded and placed in the box. At the completion of the inspection. Placing the Gun into Action To place the gun into action. Gunner. a report is rendered to the squad leader as follows: The ammunition bearer reports: AMMUNITION BEARER CORRECT (or he states any deficiencies). The ammunition bearer inspects the barrel and ammunition box to ensure that— 4-70 Machine Gun. and ACTION (vigorously pumping his fist in the direction of the designated gun position). windage is zero. front leg clamp is hand tight. Traversing handwheel is centered. Pintle is free of dirt. d. Metallic links of the ammunition are clean (open the ammunition box).000 yards (900 meters). Gunner pulls the bolt to the rear and rides the bolt home. The gunner inspects the receiver group to ensure that— Barrel support and breech bearing are free of dirt. Metallic links of the ammunition are clean (open the ammunition box). c. Browning. At the command/signal ACTION. See figure 4-93. and the legs are in the short (low) position. he moves to the gunners position with the barrel in his right hand and ammunition in his left hand. Bolt latch release is locked in the down position by the bolt latch release lock. double loop end up. T&E mechanism is securely attached to the receiver.1 The indexing levers and clamps on the front and trail legs function properly.50. 41004. Ammunition Bearer. With the aid of the gunner the ammunition bearer screws the barrel into the barrel extension. the squad leader grasps the left trail leg near the center with his left . The gunner reports: GUNNER AND AMMUNITION BEARER CORRECT (or he states any deficiencies). Barrel bearing is free of dirt. Striker projects through the aperture in the face of the bolt (now closes the cover). b. The ammunition bearer remains on the left and on line with the gunner. Feed mechanism and bolt switch are properly assembled to feed from left (raises the cover for proper inspection). The headspace and timing adjustment is now made by the gunner. FRONT (pointing in the direction of fire). Ammunition belt is properly loaded and placed in the box.MCWP 3-15. Elevating screws are equally exposed (about 2 inches) above and below the elevating handwheel. M2HB Barrel is clear. Rear sight is set at 1. Front legs and trail legs are closely folded. the squad leader commands and signals GUN TO BE MOUNTED (pointing to the position where the gun is to be mounted). Reporting. See figure 4-92. Cal . pintle lock release cam is down. the double loop end up. Back plate is latched and locked in place. The ammunition box is closed and latched after the ammunition is inspected. The squad leader would report: SQUAD ALL CORRECT (or he states any deficiencies) if he has to report to a senior.

and with his left hand. he loosens the front leg clamp with his right hand (see figure 4-95). He then aligns the tripod for direction. he places the trail leg shoes on the ground with the front leg pointing upward. The ammunition bearer places this ammunition box to the rear of the ammunition box that he previously placed next to the tripod head. stamps the right and left trail shoes with his right or left foot. He then turns to the left and returns to his original position. The ammunition bearer stamps the front shoe into the ground with his left foot. Both men lift the gun off the ground and move rapidly to the gun position. At the gun position. Steadying the tripod with his left hand on the front leg.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner hand. The squad leader can assist if required. When the gun pintle is fully seated. and tightens the front leg clamp with his right hand. With his right hand on the tripod head. the gunner and ammunition bearer jump to their feet. the ammunition bearer places the ammunition box on the line and two feet to the left of the tripod head. and assumes the prone position behind the mount. releases the carrying handle. Upon arrival at the position. The gunner and ammunition bearer move together. pulls the left leg to the left. MCWP 3-15. then turns to his left and retrieves the ammunition box which the squad leader left in his original location. drops the mount to the ground. latch facing the tripod. The gunner holds the spade grip with the right hand. inserts the pintle into the pintle bushing. and carries the tripod to the desired location (see figure 4-94). See figure 4-96. Jumping to his feet and grasping the tripod head with his right hand. the ammunition bearer grasps the ammunition box with his left hand and the gun carrying handle with his right hand. and lifts the gun pintle lock release cam. with a snapping motion. engaging the sleeve latch. he presses the pintle lock release cam down with his right hand. assisted by the ammunition bearer. The gunner places both hands on the spade grips. positions the front leg with his left hand.1 ensuring that the 4-71 . lowers the T&E mechanism to the traversing traversing bar. latch facing the tripod. he lifts the tripod across the front of his body with the front leg up. he slides his left hand down on the left trail leg and. lowers his right hand. When the tripod is nearly mounted. The gunner.

removes the ammunition belt. Sight Picture With One Target Length Lead. The gunner 4-72 . the squad leader then gives the command OUT OF ACTION. See figure 4-99. head as close to the rear sight as possible. and his head on line with the feedway. he places his right foot on the front leg shoe. 41005. His left hand is on the elevating handwheel. and vigorously jerks it to the rear and releases it. With his right hand. He then assumes the correct gunner’s position directly behind the gun. Cal . and closes and latches the box. pulls the retracting slide handle to the rear with the right hand. They put the gun down. releases it. M2HB Figure 4-109. palm down. palm up. He then rises to his feet. Browning. with his thumb near the slide lock lever. muzzle to the left. handwheel is to the left and the lock lever is to the rear. and inserts the double looped end into the feedway and taps the cover with his right hand to ensure that it is closed. His right hand lightly grasps the right spade grip with the thumb in position to depress the trigger. The squad leader lifts the ammunition out of the feedway. The gunner closes the cover. Taking the Gun Out of Action After the report UP is given. presses the trigger with his right thumb.MCWP 3-15. turn right. and loosens the traversing slide lock lever with his left hand. he reaches down and lifts up the pintle lock release cam and grasps the carrying handle. legs spread and heels down. The gun is half loaded (see figure 4-97). retracting slide handle up. The gunner and ammunition bearer lift the gun from the tripod. Figure 4-110. the gunner grasps the retracting slide handle. The gunner then raises the top cover with his left hand. With his left hand on the ammunition box. grasping both spade handles. He then tells the squad leader UP (see figure 4-98).50. He unlatches and raises the cover of the ammunition box. Aiming Target Used in Tracking and Leading Exercises. He rests on his left elbow. and carry the gun back to their original position.1 Machine Gun. replaces the ammunition in the box. At this time the ammunition bearer arrives at the gun position. With his right hand. The squad leader moves into position to the left of the gun with his feet to the rear. palm up.

He checks his sights to ensure that they are properly set (1. now grasp the front leg of the tripod. trail legs with his left. He turns to the right and returns to his original position. See figure 4-101. 41006. They also each carry an ammunition can in their free hand. then assumes the prone position. As with a hot barrel. At this command— The gunner moves forward toward the new position carrying the receiver on either shoulder. rises to his feet. At this time the ammunition bearer comes forward. and rotates the tripod to its vertical position on the trail legs. the squad leader commands SECURE EQUIPMENT. The squad leader places the tripod on the ground. Dragging. See figure 4-102. The ammunition bearer returns to his original position and assumes the prone position. (2) Cold barrel.50 cal can provide a unit with decisive firepower. and places it to the right of the squad leader. The gunner rotates the bolt latch release lock to the right and releases the bolt latch. each one grasps the front leg of the tripod with their forward hand and trail legs with the other hand just above the traversing bar. Proper training of M2 . or with two or three men carrying it in step.50 cal crew members to 4-73 . the M2 . Carrying the Tripod-Mounted Gun When a gun is mounted on the tripod it can be moved over short distances by dragging it. c. muzzle to the front. on the left. The gunner and squad leader will drag the gun to the desired position. With the gunner on the right and squad leader on the left. Holding the tripod head with his right hand. on the right. The gun is dragged when limited cover or the situation requires the gun to be moved in this manner. The ammunition bearer carries his ammunition box in his left hand. The gunner is in the rear grasping the trail legs of the tripod. grasps the front leg with his left hand.000 yards). With his right hand on the tripod head. and the barrel in his right hand. releases the sleeve latch. muzzle to the rear. folds the front leg down and tightens the clamp. picks up the ammunition box and barrel. latch to the front.1 The squad leader carries the tripod over either shoulder and the ammunition box in one of his hands. however. Three-Man Carry (1) Hot barrel. The ammunition bearer unscrews the barrel from the receiver. Two-Man Carry. See figure 4-103. or on his right shoulder. and aligns the lug on the barrel locking spring with the 3/8 inch hole in the right side of the receiver. and ammunition bearer. the gunner re- 41006.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner kneels down. then pulls the retracting slide handle to the rear. with the front leg up. a. b. FOLLOW ME. latch to the front. and folds the left trail leg against the right with his left hand (see figure 4-100). and remains in a standing position with the ammunition box to his left. See figure 4-104. he rotates the tripod on its right trail leg. picks up the remaining ammunition box. assumes a prone position to the right of the tripod and announces UP. moves five paces to the rear. MCWP 3-15. The squad leader and ammunition bearer. The squad leader assumes a kneeling position behind the tripod and releases the sleeve lock latch with his right hand. mains to the rear grasping the trail legs of the tripod. each grasp the carrying handle.) In the hands of a properly trained Marine. he lifts the tripod across the front of his body. With his right hand he loosens the front leg clamp. spade grips to the front. The squad leader. Duties of Crew To hand-carry gun and equipment.

50. Cal . Training prescribed herein. a Marine should already be qualified on the M60 machine gun. the men are given an examination in order to determine their progress and proficiency. This method permits the M2 .50 cal gunners to receive the maximum machine gun training without excessive expenditure of M2 . it is preferable to assign a coach and four men to one gun. 4-74 . including courses to be fired. In the hands of an untrained person. If a sufficient number of machine guns are available.1 deliver accurate and responsive fires takes time. Machine Gun. M2HB Each exercise is first explained and demonstrated. attention to detail.50 cal ammunitions. It is essential that instructors and demonstration personnel be thoroughly trained and rehearsed in their duties before group instruction commences. Prior to being assigned as a M2 . Finally. this machine gun is a hazard to friendly personnel and units. and hard work. should be conducted on the M60 machine gun prior to training with the M2 .50 cal crewman.MCWP 3-15. Browning. Each man is then given practical work in the exercise and supervised by coaches.50 cal.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. A thorough. Adjustment of fire by the following methods: Observation of strike. The preparatory exercises consists of the following steps: Positions for firing and introductory manipulation with both the tripod. Fundamentals of Marksmanship To become accurate and proficient in machine gun marksmanship. The following must be observed during marksmanship training: 41102.and vehicular-mounted machine gun. Speed in combining these fundamentals when delivering fire. Speed in combining these fundamentals when delivering fire. No man will be allowed to fire on the range until he has received thorough training in preparatory marksmanship. 4-75 . 41101. Preparatory Exercises a. Mechanical skill in manipulating the gun and rapid shifting of fire to new targets. Range firing. and should be taught in the order outlined herein.1 Each student will be proficient in mechanical training and crew drill before he receives instruction in machine gun marksmanship. carefully supervised course in the preparatory exercises conserves time and ammunition during range practice. Phases of Training Marksmanship training is divided into two major phases: Preparatory marksmanship training. Sighting and aiming exercises. 41103. The purpose of the preparatory exercises in marksmanship training is to teach the essentials of marksmanship. Observation of flight of tracer. Frequent relaying of the gun during firing. regardless of previous qualifications. a Marine must be thoroughly trained in the following fundamentals: Accurate delivery of initial round (burst) of fire on either stationary or moving targets. These phases are further broken down into progressive steps. Purpose.

observed by the coach who makes necessary corrections. Cal . the following procedure is used: the coach stands about 10 paces in front of the gun and uses hand signals to indicate the direction in which the gunner is to move the muzzle. Men with an unsatisfactory rating will be given additional instruction until a satisfactory rating is obtained. A M2 . One 1/2-inch aiming paster per gun.1 Sight setting and laying exercises. with the top of the front sight blade just touching the bottom center of the target (see figure 4-106).50 cal and mount complete (tripod and vehicular mounts). One target frame per gun. All men will be required to demonstrate proficiency in obtaining the correct sight alignment and a correct sight picture with a sighting bar (see figure 4-107). Sighting and Aiming Exercises a. The coach uses a demonstration crew of two assistants who are placed at the gun. Positions for Firing The M2 . Tracking and leading will be conducted after 10-meter firing. Second Sighting and Aiming Exercise (With Gun). When the top center of the front sight blade is in the center of the peep sight. The coach checks and critiques the alignment made by the gunner. b. Since range determination is not based on the material covered in any of the other steps. Introductory Manipulation To give the gunner practice in manipulation. They must be taught in that order.50. M2HB 41106.50 cal can be fired from the prone or sitting position as described in paragraph 4806. 41107. Manipulation exercises. but before firing on moving targets. 41105. covered with blank paper and equipped with braces for mounting. Tracking and leading exercises. including those who have previously qualified. See figure 4-105. The purpose of the first sighting and aiming exercises is to teach the correct sight alignment and sight picture. Browning. he is ready to continue his instructions. A correct sight picture is one in which the sights are correctly aligned. and can manipulate the gun as indicated. First Sighting and Aiming Exercise (Sighting Bar). Fire adjustment. The instructor ensures that each man is tested thoroughly and graded in the exercises before he is allowed to fire. The coach then moves the gun off the target and requires the gunner to move the gun back on the correct sight picture using the handwheels. b. When the gunner reacts quickly. Range determination.MCWP 3-15. The coach shows the gunner the correct sight picture. 41104. One 10-meter machine gun target per gun. One acts as the coach and the other as the pupil during the demonstration. it may be taught any time before the examination. Every man who is to fire on the range. Equipment for Training One sighting bar. Material for blackening sights. The first five steps are listed in the order of instruction. The purpose of the second sighting and aiming exercise is to apply the preceding lesson to sight alignment of the machine gun sights on a target. Order of Instruction.50 cal target is placed 10 meters from the pintle (see figure 4-108). the sights are correctly aligned. 4-76 . One vehicle silhouette aiming target per gun. One M2 . Machine Gun. The gunner manipulates the handwheels. will receive complete instructions in the preparatory exercises. Practical work is then conducted using the method demonstrated. The exercise is first explained and then demonstrated. Examination before range firing.

All men go to their groups. See section 5 of chapter 5 for detailed information on the T&E mechanism. he is given instruction in manipulating the gun to obtain an accurate initial lay. The gunner repeats both elements. To demonstrate the exercise. He then assumes the correct gunner’s position and announces UP. the instructor has one demonstrator take the gunner’s position at the gun and another the coach’s position. work in pairs. Sight Setting and Layout. The hair line through the peep sight is used as an index in setting the sight at the desired graduation.800 will not be announced. then assumes the correct gunner’s position and reports UP.1 After giving the first element. (2) Manipulation of the gun for great shifts in direc- tion is obtained by releasing the traversing slide lock lever and moving the slide to the right (left).000 or greater than 1. The purpose of the sight setting and laying exercise is to develop accuracy and speed in laying the gun on an aiming point. a. Manipulation Exercises Manipulation is the process of shifting the direction of the gun from one definite point to another definite point. The exercise is first explained and demonstrated. or 1 centimeter on the target. The coach checks the setting of the slide and points out any errors.. 41108. The exercise is demonstrated as follows: HUNDRED. raises the sight leaf. and can assume a satisfactory firing position. b. and sets the sights.000 yards.g.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. After the gunner understands the principles of sighting and aiming. and instruction is continued. Sight Setting and Laying Exercises a. The coach ensures that the following instructions are understood and followed: (1) A machine gun target is placed out 10 meters All men go to their groups. the instructor has one demonstrator take the gunner’s position at the gun and another at the coach’s position. 41109. 2) ONE TWO HUNDRED. then to shift the direction of the gun to successive points with proficiency. EIGHT The pupil repeats the range. The coach checks the sight setting and lay at the completion of the exercise. he manipulates the gun by turning the T&E handwheels until the sights are accurately aligned on the designated aiming point. The sight slide is set at the desired range by turning the elevating screw knob. Small changes in direction are made by turning the traversing handwheel with the left hand. The purpose of this exercise is to teach the method of setting the rear sight. To demonstrate the exercise. (For example: 1) PASTER NUMBER 5. The exercise is demonstrated as follows: The coach announces an aiming point and range. and go through the exercise until each man has become proficient in accurate and rapid sight setting. Sight Setting Exercise.) from the pintle for this manipulation exercise. The instructor explains that the exercise starts with the sight leaf down and the slide at 1. 4-77 . One click on the T&E handwheel moves the strike 1 mil. sets the sight at the announced range. the coach pauses long enough to permit the gunner to repeat it and then gives the second element. and to develop accuracy and speed in its use. and to give additional practice in sight setting. Manipulation Exercise. (3) Manipulate for elevation by rotating the elevat- ing handwheel with the left hand. The instructor announces the range: e. that ranges less than 1. Upon completing the sight setting.

b. the pupil repeats the command. When firing on the 10-meter range. (6) At the command FIRE.MCWP 3-15.. TRAVERSE AND SEARCH. Adjustment. b. the tracers will allow the gunner or crew to note the strike of the burst in relation to the target. Observation. For example. and elevating six clicks before firing again. 7 to 8. Should the gunner’s initial burst strike the target 2 centimeters (approximately 3/4 inch) to the left and 3 centimeters (approximately 1 1/8 inch) below the aiming paster. should the gunner fire on a target at 500 meters and observe the strike 10 meters to the right of the target and short about 50 meters. The gunner aims at each paster. When firing on the 10-meter range. the strike of the bullet on the ground may cause dust to rise which is visible to the gunner. All major shifts in traverse (e. bullets 4. then shifts to the next paster and simulates firing until the exercise is completed. Using the mil relation. Cal . The gunner determines the number of mils necessary to move the center of the strike into the target and he manipulates the gun the required number of mils. simulates firing two single shots. (5) Upon receiving the command. moving the shot group a required number of centimeters vertically or horizontally until the center of the group is on the aiming paster. lays the gun on the designated paster. When shifting from pasters number 5 to 6. He selects an aiming point plished by laying on the initial aiming paster (number 5 or 6) and then shifting to each of the other numbered pasters in order (5 through 10 or its reverse). and reports UP. one click of the traversing handwheel or elevating handwheel moves the strike of the bullet one half an inch on the target at a range of 10 meters. the distance one click (mil) in the elevating handwheel will move the strike depends on the range to the target and the slope of the ground. the gunner re- peats the instruction. the strike cannot always be seen. adjustment is made by moving the burst into the target. the coach: Checks the sight setting and initial lay. Observation and Adjustment of Fire The purpose of observation and adjustment practice is to teach the adjustment of fire by observing the 4-78 . (7) While the gunner is performing these operations. 5 to 10. a.50. or 1 meter at 1. he would traverse the gun to the left 20 clicks (mils) and add one or more clicks (mils) depending on the slope of the ground. Checks the lay and critiques the exercise at completion. Checks the gunner’s position. or the reverse. and 6. 41110. adjust. Browning. however. When firing at greater distances. One click (mil) on the traversing handwheel will move the strike one half meter at 500 meters. Sees that the gunner simulates firing a shot(s) before manipulating the gun.1 (4) Traversing and searching the target is accom- Machine Gun. however. 5. the instruction proceeds as described in 41109a. This does not require the use of sights. sets the sight. the flight of tracers.g. or by frequent relaying on the target using the sights. Announcement of Instructions (Example) PASTER NUMBER 5 (6) TO PASTER NUMBER 6 (5). In this event. In this method the gunner must use his sights. use the T&E handwheels. during wet weather.000 meters. he adjusts his fire by traversing right four clicks. At the command FIRE. Checks for proper manipulation. the strike of the bullet is visible on the target. The gunner may use the adjusted aiming point method to adjust the fire. 6 to 9. assumes the correct gunner’s position. When firing on field targets. ONE THOUSAND. or the reverse) are done by loosening the traversing slide lock lever. M2HB strike of the bullets.

Battlefield targets may be either moving or stationary.) The lead necessary depends upon range. There are two methods of estimating range by eye—mental unit of measure (yardstick) and the appearance of objects. TARGET SPEEDS IN MPH 7½ 15 30 Figure 4-111. For information on range estimation by eye.1 a. maintains this lead by tracking the target (manipulating the gun at the same angular speed as that of the target). To hit the target. Leads are measured from the center of mass. Target Speeds. he would rapidly select an aiming point approximately 20 meters beyond the target and 10 meters to the left of the target. Tracking consists of maintaining correct alignment of the sights (with or without a lead) on a moving target by moving the gun at the same angular speed as that of the target. The gun must be aimed ahead of the target a sufficient distance to cause the bullet and target to arrive simultaneously at the same point. b. Tracking and Leading Exercises The gunner normally completes a course of instruction in firing a machine gun at stationary targets before instruction is given in firing at moving targets. For example.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner which will place the next burst on the target. The gunner is required to aim at a prescribed point (center of mass) on the target and maintain that aim during uniform movement of the target. frequently practiced. (See figure 4-109. TARGET SPEEDS IN INCHES PER SECOND CORRESPONDING TO— 300 M 6 12 24 500 M 4 8 15 900 M 2 4 9 41111. lay on that aiming point. should the gunner fire on a target at 500 meters and estimate that the strike is 20 meters short and 10 meters to the right of the target. 10-Meter Moving Targets. The movable vehicle silhouette is fabricated from cardboard as shown in figure 4-110. The technique of engaging a moving target differs from that of engaging a stationary target. and then fires. The target handler must have practice in moving the target silhouette across the blank target at the varying speeds. A definite system of range determination. Range Determination and Windage Corrections Range determination is the process of determining distance between two points. The gunner needs training and practice in both methods over varied terrain and under varied conditions of light and weather. Tracking. One target length as seen by the gunner is one lead. The light colored background can be fabricated by tacking cardboard or paper to a standard 12. MCWP 3-15. a target must be fabricated. This distance is measured in target lengths. Target Construction. are shown in figure 4-111. and fire. the gunner aims at a point ahead of the target equal to the estimated number of leads. 41112. In order to perform tracking and leading exercises. chapter 5. speed. speeds used should differ from successive runs of the target. 4-79 . A Marine designated as a target handler moves the vehicle silhouette in front of the light colored background by means of the 18-inch silhouette extension tab. Fire is adjusted by observation of strike and/or tracer.7-meter target frame. As instruction progresses. Speeds. and direction of movement of the target. see section IV. is the only way to make estimation by eye reliable. The target must consist of a light colored background and a movable dark colored vehicle silhouette. at which 10-meter targets should be run to represent speeds at various ranges.

The recommended preliminary gunner’s test has a possible score of 100 points. The simple lead table shown below gives amount of lead necessary to hit a target moving at right angles (0 degrees) to direction to hit at speed and ranges indicated. The gunner then directs the target handler to move the marking silhouette until the center of the target is at the point of aim. The exercise should be conducted for varying right and left leads. traces around it. Following the gunner’s instructions. and range for the vehicle. See figure 4-112. He then places a pencil dot at this point and returns the silhouette to the original position. he moves the marking silhouette until the gunner commands HOLD. use half of the lead shown in the table. M2HB speed. The lower edge is used for longer ranges and for broken ground. Mathematical computation or use of Machine Gun. The three pencil dots for each target should be enclosed in a circle 1 centimeter in diameter. the line of aim is placed similarly on the center or upper edge of the target. Combine tracking and leading exercises at 10 meters. if given. After the gunner has gained proficiency in tracking the target. he is required to repeat the tracking exercises while using the proper lead to simulate firing when his sights are properly aligned. The gunner must make corrections as conditions change. Leads (1) Lead table. Tracking and leading. the line of aim is placed on the center of the lower edge of the target. The gunner is required to take a position at the gun. SPEED IN MPH 15 RANGE OF TARGET 300M ½ target length 500M 1 target length 900M 2 target lengths Figure 4-112. (2) Correction changes. The gunner moves the point of aim through the target silhouette and aims at a point ahead of target equal to the prescribed lead from the center of mass. and at varying speeds that average 15 mph. As a further exercise in tracking and leading. Browning. See figure 4-113.50. The angle at which the target is moving also alters the amount of lead taken. Too much lead is better than too little because the target runs into the fire. Lead Table.50 cal is maintained by all crewmen. Preliminary Gunner’s Test Preliminary gunner’s tests should be held periodically in order to ensure that proficiency with the M2 . double that shown. For a target moving directly away from the gun. This procedure is followed until the gunner has completed three tries for each target announced by the coach. The target handler 41113.1 c. Intelligent use of the lead table includes immediate application of fire with estimated lead followed by necessary corrections based upon observation of strike and/or tracer. and holds it in place for the gunner to aim. depending on range and slope of the ground. The coach designates a direction (right or left).000 yards. 4-80 . Cal . also the observation of a strike is easier. (If the angle between line of fire and line of travel of the target is less than 45 degrees. A score of 80 should be required for satisfactory completion of the test. at 30 mph. If the target speed is 7 1/2 mph. voluminous lead tables to obtain exact leads to be used on a moving target are impractical in combat. He then repeats this procedure three times for each target lead announced.) For a target moving directly toward the gun. the gunner may be required to track and lead moving targets at greater range. should be given prior to range firing. A vehicle can be run at right angles to the line of aim at ranges between 500 and 1. Preliminary gunner’s test. places his marking silhouette on the blank target. (3) Lead exercises (10 meter). d. the amount of lead is half that shown in the table.MCWP 3-15.

Information on field target firing and familiarization firing can also be found in FM 23-65. Assemble the machine gun. range configuration. Once record firing is begun. Range firing begins with instruction firing. mechanical skill in manipulating the gun to engage various types of targets. Demonstrate and explain setting the correct timing. and lubrication of the M3 mount. POINTS 5 5 5 5 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 15 10 10 100 Figure 4-113. Explain how gun is targeted at 10 meters Demonstrate and explain care.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunner MCWP 3-15. and round not pushed fully into the link). procedures to be used. the table is completed before additional instructional firing is undertaken. Caliber . Explain and demonstrate checks to be made before firing. 4-81 . Record firing records results and is used as a basis for a Marine’s classification in marksmanship. Disassemble and assemble the bolt. Demonstrate application of the first phase of immediate action. Instructional firing is practice firing on a marksmanship range with the help of an instructor. loose bullet. Explain one phase of functioning (as directed by the examining officer). Explain why the machine gun will not fire automatically with the cover unlatched. and observation and adjustment of fire within the time prescribed. Demonstrate and explain the setting of correct headspace. bent round. Explain the full care and cleaning of the gun after firing. adjustment. Each student completes instruction firing before firing for record.1 ACTION Remove the groups from the receiver. Inspect a loaded belt and make any corrections necessary to prepare it for firing (belt has at least one of each of the following: short round. Information on the course to be fired. Range Firing The purpose of range firing is to teach the Marine to apply the fundamentals of marksmanship as stated in paragraph 41102. Disassemble and assemble the oil buffer body group. TOTAL 41114. Record firing is a test of the gunner’s proficiency in all phases of instruction in machine gun marksmanship and furnishes the means for classification according to the proficiency attained. The coach and pupil method may be used. Range firing is conducted upon completion of preparatory marksmanship training. broken link. Preliminary Gunner’s Test. Instruction firing teaches the accurate delivery of fire.50 HB. and the duties of range personnel are contained in FM 23-65. Browning Machinegun. M2.

.......... General Data Weights/measurements: Total system weight (gun...... 790 feet per second Rifling . one turn in 48 inches Introduction The MK-19 is an air cooled... 75....................... 44 pounds Length of gun .................... 1... fully automatic weapon (see figure 5-1)..... 2......................... a detailed............ operators reference manual..... The ammunition is fed into the gun by a disintegrating metallic link belt..... and tripod) ......................6 pounds Weight of gun cradle (MK64 MOD5) .. blowback-operated.... A flash suppressor is fixed to the muzzle of the barrel.... MK-19 MOD 3 Section 1 5101.... uniform twist. 140. cradle....... Right hand..... The MK-19 is employed from a tripod or from a variety of vehicles...212 meters Maximum effective Point target ..212 meters Figure 5-1..6 pounds Weight of gun . Each MK-19 machine gun crewman should have ready access to TM 08521A-10/1A... 2.... The slotted configuration suppresses vibration during firing and dissipates flash and smoke.............. 40mm.......Chapter 5 Machine Gun. 21 pounds Weight of M3 tripod ....... The MK-19 MOD 3 Machine Gun............ 43.......1 inches Muzzle velocity .... Ranges: Maximum .......... pocket-size............500 meters Area target .................. The weapon features a barrel which prevents cookoff even after prolonged firing......... ..

............. high explosive....... The rear leaf sight is mounted on a spring-type dovetail base (see figure 5-3). Range changes may be made by either the elevation wheel or the slide release.... dual purpose.MCWP 3-15... windage may be adjusted up to 10 mils either side of zero....... 100 mils Depression ........... tripod controlled): Elevation ...... Figure 5-3................ In addition...500 meters........... 40 millimeter Types in use ........ Generally........... The range plate on the rear sight leaf is marked at each 100 meters.......... two clicks equal 1 mil...... High explosive........ The battle sight enables the gunner to look down the barrel when the leaf sight is in the horizontal position.. 800 mils (400 left/400 right) 5102... Sights The front sight on the MK-19 is a fixed sight (see figure 5-2).............1 Ammunition: Caliber .. Rear Sight.. and dummy Basic load of ammunition per gun (vehicle mount) .. target practice.. major changes in elevation are made with the slide release while minor adjustments are made with the elevation wheel............... When utilizing the elevation wheel............ 40mm...... By turning the windage screw two clicks for each mil............ 400 rounds Weight of 48 rounds (HE or HEDP) in container ..... beginning at 300 meters through 1........... 60 rounds per minute Cyclic .......................... Front Sight.......... MK-19 MOD 3 Rates of fire: Sustained ... 250 mils Traverse .... Manipulation (tripod mount. The night vision sight AN/TVS-5 can be mounted on the rear sight housing..... 40 rounds per minute Rapid .... 5-6 . 325-375 rounds per minute Figure 5-2. 62 pounds Machine Gun............ It can be folded forward to the horizontal when the gun is to be moved or when utilizing the battle sight....... the rear sight may be adjusted for windage........

flat surface to facilitate ease in assembly. Figure 5-4. Complete general and detailed disassembly is normally the expected routine in garrison after the completion of firing and/or field training. Detailed disassembly involves the removal of some of the component parts and assemblies from the main groups. The intent behind designating main groups for a weapon and the practice of field stripping is to allow the operator to quickly break the weapon down into a set of major components that can be hastily cleaned to keep the weapon ready for action.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. fortifications. Assembly. When the situation and conditions permit. 5-7 . general and detailed. With the feedtray cover closed. This is also known as field stripping and is a practice that stems from past experience in combat situations.1 weapon in the defense. and Nomenclature The MK-19 can be disassembled and assembled without the use of force. the operator can take the time to completely disassemble and thoroughly clean the weapon. Section 2 5104. Role of the MK-19 The MK-19 provides support in both the offense and defense. but this may also be conducted in a field environment when necessary to ensure the proper functioning and maintenance of the weapon. Safety. 5103. General disassembly involves separation of the weapon into main groups. Disassembly and assembly can be accomplished by utilizing only an expended casing and a cartridge link. Its capability for both long range and close defensive fires make it an ideal Disassembly. and vehicles in support of an attack. pull the bolt to the rear. Only qualified ordnance personnel are authorized to disassemble the weapon beyond that described in this publication. Safety The safety is located on the sear assembly (see figure 5-4). It has an S (SAFE) and an F (FIRE) position. Put the safety on F and attempt to fire. accurate. Disassembly and assembly may be divided into two categories. Its fragmentation producing effects are devastating against attacking dismounted infantry. The idea is to disassemble the weapon just far enough to conduct basic cleaning without having to contend with numerous assemblies and parts. first ensure the gun is clear. Its capability for a heavy volume of close. and continuous fire support makes it a highly responsive weapon with which to suppress and destroy enemy personnel. place the parts (in the order in which they are removed) on a clean. place the safety on S and attempt to fire. Its ability to effectively penetrate lightly armored vehicles prevents the enemy from remaining mounted and rapidly closing with friendly defensive positions. As the weapon is disassembled. The bolt should not go forward. To ensure the safety functions properly. The bolt should spring forward.

See figures 5-5 and 5-6. See figure 5-8. Five Main Groups. Pull out the assembly until it clicks. a. Remove the secondary drive lever by pushing down on the point post from outside the feed tray cover and pulling the lever to the rear until it disengages. Place the gun on F. barrel. See figure 5-7. and pull rearward to remove. Depress the sear. sight. Move the feed slide assembly to line up the tabs with slots in the tray. These groups include the receiver (with chargers. 5-8 . Lift off the feed tray and feed slide assembly. NOTE It is permissible to separate the feed slide assembly from the feed tray. Lift off the cover. and flash suppressor assembly). sear. Pull the retaining pins straight out from both sides. c. Figure 5-5.1 Machine Gun. See figure 5-11. Removing the Feed Slide Assembly and Feed Tray Hold the top cover straight up. Pull straight out on the bolt and backplate pin utilizing a spent casing. feed tray cover (top cover). support the assembly with both hands.MCWP 3-15. Fold down the feed tray with feed slide assembly. Removing the Sear Assembly 5201. See figure 5-9. Exploded View. then lift off the feed slide assembly. See figure 5-10. MK-19 MOD 3 b. and the bolt and backplate with grips attached. General Disassembly General disassembly separates the MK-19 into five main groups. Removing Assembly the Bolt and Backplate Ensure the gun is clear and ride the bolt forward. 40mm. feed slide assembly and tray.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Removing the Bolt and Backplate Pin. Five Main Groups. Figure 5-8.1 Figure 5-6. Figure 5-7. 5-9 . Removing the Bolt and Backplate Assembly.

.1 Machine Gun.MCWP 3-15. replace the groups in reverse order of their removal. MK-19 MOD 3 Figure 5-9. General Assembly To properly assemble the five major groups of the gun. Attaching the Sear Housing Assembly Figure 5-10. Ensure that the sear spring is held in position and line up the assembly at a 90-degree angle to the barrel centerline. a. 5-10 Turn the receiver on its side and place the safety on F. Press the receiver sear (located under the safety) and rotate the sear housing assembly 90 degrees in either direction. Lift the lockpin with cartridge link. See figure 5-13. b. Put the safety in the S position and lift out the sear housing assembly. Turn the assembly 90 degrees toward the barrel centerline until the assembly locks into position. Removing the Feed Tray Cover Retaining Pin. 40mm. 5202. See figure 5-12. Attaching the Feed Slide Assembly and the Feed Tray Lower the feed slide assembly and tray into position. Removing the Secondary Drive Lever.

See figure 5-14.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Before inserting assembly. Replacing the Secondary Drive Lever Lift the feed slide assembly and the feed tray. Figure 5-12. Attaching the Feed Tray Cover (Top Cover) Align pinholes in feed tray cover with pinholes in feed tray assembly. Press the raised pivot post through the hole in the feed tray cover. Insert the bolt and backplate assembly into the receiver. Press the feed tray firmly against the feed tray cover. Insert the forked end of the secondary drive lever between the feed slide assembly and the feed tray. Insert the Bolt and Backplate Assembly Ensure the cocking lever is forward. put cocking lever in forward position.1 Figure 5-11. Removing the Feed Slide Assembly. Lifting the Locking Pin. d. c. e. Hold the cover straight up and insert the feed tray cover retainer pins into both sides of the cover. CAUTION 5-11 .

Inserting the Bolt and Backplate Assembly Into Receiver. as it is used in this manual. 5-12 Figure 5-15. Slide the lock 1/4 inch to the rear. . See figure 5-17. Insert the backplate retainer pin to lock the assembly in position. Press the receiver sear and slide the bolt assembly forward until the retainer pin holes in the backplate and receiver are aligned. MK-19 MOD 3 Figure 5-13. Reach under the top of the receiver and locate the drive lever lock. Detailed disassembly of the receiver assembly is authorized by operators to the degree shown in this section. Detailed Disassembly and Assembly The term detailed disassembly. See figure 5-16. Rotation of Sear Housing Assembly. 5203. Disassembling the Receiver Group (1) Removing the primary drive lever and vertical cam Figure 5-14. Detailed disassembly of any of the groups beyond that described in this manual is NOT AUTHORIZED except by qualified ordnance personnel. This is not to be confused with procedures authorized for 2d echelon maintenance (unit armorers) or above.1 Machine Gun. See figure 5-15. Depressing the Sear While Sliding the Bolt Assembly Forward.MCWP 3-15. refers only to those disassembly procedures authorized for the operator level. 40mm. a.

1 Figure 5-16. Pull back and lift out the alignment guide. Figure 5-17. See figure 5-19. (3) Removing the ogive plunger . See figure 5-20. Receiver Assembly.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. alignment guide. 5-13 . Insert the cartridge link into the slot in the feeder mouth. Pull out the lever and cam from their respective ends of the receiver. remove ogive plunger by pushing rearward on the forward edge. After removing Depress the alignment guide spring. Retracting the Drive Lever Lock. Press down on the primary drive lever pivot post which releases both the primary drive and the vertical cam. See figure 5-18. Detailed Disassembled. (2) Removing the alignment guide Slide the alignment guide toward the feeder mouth.

Depress the round positioning block and slide it toward the muzzle end of the gun. See figure 5-21. 40mm. Removing the Alignment Guide Assembly.1 Machine Gun. Figure 5-19. Figure 5-20. Slide charger all the way rearward. MK-19 MOD 3 Figure 5-18. Removing the Primary Drive Lever and Vertical Cam. (4) Removing the round positioning block (5) Removing the charger assemblies (both sides). Pull charger away from receiver. Retract lock plunger with link or spent case. 5-14 .MCWP 3-15. Pull the round positioning block away from the receiver. See figure 5-22. Removing the Ogive Plunger.

slide the ogive plunger assembly in the slot. Line up lugs on charger with slots in receiver rails and insert charger lugs into slots.1 (2) Attaching the round positioning block Insert block locks into slots (tang end forward). Once the ogive plunger is in position— Insert alignment guide into slot at mount. Engage forked end in the notch. With the round positioning block in place. (5) Replacing the vertical cam and primary drive lever Slide the vertical cam assembly through the rear of the receiver. Functioning The cycle of functioning is broken down into eight basic steps. These steps are feeding.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Push against block and slide it toward the rear until block locks in place. Figure 5-22. More than one step may occur simultaneously during the cycle of functioning. (4) Inserting the alignment guide assembly. Hold vertical cam in position and insert primary drive lever from the opposite end of receiver. Engage pivot post of lever through holes in receiver and vertical cam. ejection. b. chambering. firing. Detailed Assembly of the Receiver Group (1) Attaching the charger assembly (both sides) Slide the drive lever lock forward. unlocking. Figure 5-21. and cocking. By understanding 5-15 . locking. Hold charger tightly against rail and slide charger forward until it locks in place. (3) Inserting the ogive plunger assembly. extracting. Section 3 Rotate charger handle to the straight up position. Removal of Round Positioning Block. Engage lug on the guide to slot in receiver. Removal of Lock Plunger. Slide the guide toward the ogive plunger until it locks in place.

MCWP 3-15. When the bolt moves forward. it will be easier to recognize and correct malfunctions and stoppages which occur during firing. Machine Gun. the bolt moves to the rear. This causes the pawls of the feed slide assembly to be positioned onto a new round in the feeder. The primary drive lever pulls the secondary drive lever with it. 5-25. Figure 5-24. After the gun is fired. Bolt to Rear. Bolt to Rear. 40mm. The feed assembly moves to the right and the pawls force the new round against the round positioning block in a position ready for feeding (see figure 5-27). Position of Drive Levers. which pivots in the feed tray cover. and 5-26. The secondary drive lever. Round Positioned In Feeder.1 how the MK-19 functions. Simultaneously. 5301. Feeding Feeding is the action of placing the round into position on the face of the bolt in preparation for chambering. pushes the feed slide assembly to the Figure 5-23. It is cammed downward into the extractors on the face of the bolt where it is in position for chambering. MK-19 MOD 3 left along the rails of the feed tray (see figure 5-23). it forces the primary drive lever to move to the right. the primary drive lever is pulled to the left and the secondary drive lever is pulled with it. See figures 5-24. stripping the round from the feeder. 5-16 .

Round Cammed Down Onto Face of Bolt.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. 5-17 . Round Positioned Against Round Positioning Block.1 Figure 5-25. Figure 5-26. Round Picked Up by Extractors. Bolt Forward. Figure 5-27.

MCWP 3-15.1

Machine Gun, 40mm, MK-19 MOD 3

5302. Chambering
Figure 5-28 shows the round positioned on the face of the bolt ready to be chambered. By depressing the trigger, the sear is depressed, permitting the recoil springs to drive the bolt forward on the rails. As the bolt nears the forward end of the rail, the nose of the round enters the rear of the chamber. The round is fully chambered when the leading edge of the casing comes into contact with the rear of the chamber and the bolt is in the forward-most position (see figure 5-29).

5303. Locking
Locking is accomplished when the bolt reaches the forward end of the rail and the round is momentarily held in the forward-most position by the recoil springs. This is not locking as found in the gas or recoil operated weapons. In blowback operation, the only force which holds the bolt and round in position is the spring tension and weight of the bolt. The bolt and round are held in this position until the pressure of the recoil springs is overcome by the

Figure 5-28. Round Positioned on Face of Bolt, Ready to Chamber.

Figure 5-29. Chambering/Locking.
5-18

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery rearward movement of the bolt caused by the expansion of gas during firing.

MCWP 3-15.1

5306. Extraction
The initial rearward movement of the bolt along the rails pulls the casing out of contact with the receiver, then the extraction of the spent casing is accomplished. See figure 5-31.

5304. Firing
As locking occurs, the cocking lever is indexed to the rear. This allows the firing pin mechanism to release the firing pin on the face of the bolt. As the bolt’s forward motion is arrested, the firing pin is driven by the firing pin spring into the primer of the round. See figure 5-30.

5307. Ejection
The vertical cam forces a new round into position on the face of the bolt and ejects the spent casing out through the ejection port. See figure 5-31.

5305. Unlocking
As the round fires, the pressure of the burning powder overcomes the tension of the recoil spring and the bolt moves to the rear.

5308. Cocking
Simultaneously with ejection, the cocking lever is cammed forward by the rail, cocking the firing pin.

Figure 5-30. Firing/Unlocking.

Figure 5-31. Extracting/Ejecting/Feeding/Cocking.
5-19

MCWP 3-15.1

Machine Gun, 40mm, MK-19 MOD 3

Section 4

Malfunctions and Stoppages
Machine gunners must have a detailed understanding of the many component parts of their weapon, what those parts do during functioning, and what mechanical problems may be encountered during firing. This knowledge ensures that those problems can be quickly assessed and corrective action taken.

one hand. With the other hand, he presses the charger handle and locks and lowers one charger handle. This interrupts the cycle of function and the weapon ceases to fire (see figure 5-32). Lowering the charger handle to interrupt the cycle of operation can damage the gun.

5401. Malfunctions
A malfunction is a failure of the gun to function satisfactorily. Defective ammunition or improper operation of the gun by a crew member is not considered a malfunction of the gun. a. Sluggish Operation. Sluggish operation of the gun is usually due to excessive friction caused by dirt, carbon buildup, lack of proper lubrication, or burred parts. To correct the problems, the gunner should inspect the gun for worn and damaged parts and replace them as required. Keep the gun clean, and lubricate as required. b. Runaway Gun. A runaway gun is a gun that continues to fire after the trigger has been released. It may be caused by worn parts or short recoil of the bolt assembly. To correct the problem, hold the fire on the target until feeding is stopped or the ammunition is expended. The best method of stopping the gun depends on several factors such as the amount of ammunition remaining on the belt and how the gun is mounted. If ammunition is not a factor and the gun is employed in the free gun mode, the gunner keeps the rounds on target until the rounds on the belt have been fired. NOTE Do not twist or attempt to break the ammunition belt. If the gun is mounted on either the M3 or vehicle mount with the traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism attached, the gunner holds the grip with
5-20

Figure 5-32. Lowering Charger to Stop Runaway Gun. c. Firing Out of Battery . This is a serious malfunction. A round is being fired before it is fully seated in the chamber. If this occurs, the gunner should see smoke, a flash, or powder blowback from the bottom of the gun. The following safety procedure should be used: Cease fire immediately. Place weapon on S. Clear the area around the gun of all personnel and ammunition. Notify safety and ordnance personnel. Do not attempt to fire the weapon again until it has been inspected and fixed by higher echelon maintenance personnel.

5402. Stoppages
A stoppage is any interruption in the cycle of functioning caused by faulty action of the gun or ammunition. Stoppages must be reduced quickly and firing resumed. This is accomplished by immediate action.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

5403. Immediate Action
Immediate action is that action taken by the gunner/crew to reduce the stoppage, without investigating the cause, and quickly return the gun to action. a. During Peacetime and Training Clear the area of personnel. Wait 10 seconds. Pull bolt to the rear. (Catch the round as it is ejected.)

c. Subsequent Action. Two potentially serious stoppages may occur with the MK-19 that require different procedures from those described above.
(1) Bore Obstruction. This means that part of the

previous round may be lodged in the barrel and could possibly prevent the next warhead from passing safely through it. The gunner/crew should be alert for a muffled report from the gun when it fires, smoke and debris from the bottom of the receiver, and/or the failure of the warhead to leave the muzzle. The safety procedures are as follows: Cease fire immediately. Place the weapon on S. Clear the area around the gun of personnel and ammunition. Notify safety, explosive ordnance disposal, and ordnance personnel.
(2) Jammed Bolt. The bolt may jam as the gunner

If immediate action of a stoppage (bolt forward) results in the extraction of a spent cartridge, the crew will initiate subsequent action for a suspected obstruction in the barrel before attempting to fire again. (See paragraph 5403C[1]).

WARNING

Push charger handles forward and up. Attempt to fire. If nothing happens: Put gun on S. Wait 10 seconds. Pull bolt to the rear. (Catch round as it is ejected.) Open the cover, unload, and clear the weapon. b. During Extreme Combat Situations. Press charger handle locks and rotate charger handles down. Pull and lock the bolt to the rear. Push the charger handles forward and up to their locked position. Relay the gun on target and attempt to fire.

is attempting to pull it to the rear. He will not be able to pull and lock it to the rear or release rearward tension and ride it forward.

WARNING
Do not open the top cover This could allow the bolt to spring forward suddenly with a round on the face of the bolt. If that round fires while the cover is open, serious injury to personnel and damage to equipment could occur. The following safety procedure should be used:

Put the gun on S. Press the charger handle locks and rotate the charger handles down. Pull the charger handles to the rear as far as possible and maintain rearward pressure on the handles while the squad leader/assistant gunner lifts the top cover. Pull the charger handles to the rear until the bolt locks to the rear. Ensure the bolt will stay to the
5-21

MCWP 3-15.1 rear before releasing rearward tension on the charger handles. Rotate them to their upright position. Remove the round from the face of the bolt using a length of cleaning rod. Press the charger handle locks and rotate the charger handles down. Place the weapon on F, depress the trigger, and ride the bolt home. Ensure the feed slide assembly is to the left and that the secondary drive lever is engaged with the feed slide pin. Close the top cover.

Machine Gun, 40mm, MK-19 MOD 3

5502. Gun Cradle
The MK64 MOD 5 cradle is used to support the MK-19, connecting it to either the M3 tripod or to vehicle mounts. The gun is connected to these mounts by the cradle’s pintle. The pintle seats in the tripod head and is held secure by a pintle lock and spring. The pintle is released by raising the pintle lock which releases the cam. The cradle also features a stow bracket to hold the weapon in position during movement (when vehicle mounted) and has a mounting plate on the left side for inserting an ammunition canister mounting bracket (for use when vehicle mounted). As a safety device, the cradle has a safety stop that prevents the gun muzzle from going too low. The T&E mechanism is attached to the cradle and permits accurate delivery of fire. See figures 5-35 and 5-36, page 5-26.

5404. Remedial Action
When immediate action fails to reduce a stoppage, remedial action must be applied. This involves investigating the cause of the stoppage and may require disassembly of the weapon and replacement of parts to correct the problem. See figure 5-33, pages 5-23 through 5-25.

5503. Vehicle Mounts
a. Types. The MK-19 mounts on the M4 pedestal mount, the M66 ring mount, and the HMMWV weapons station.
(1) Pedestal mount, M4. This is designated for in-

Section 5

Mounts and Accessories
The MK-19 can be fired from either a ground or vehicle mount. A set of maintenance equipment and a mount and gun record book are issued with each MK-19 to help care for and operate the weapons system.

stallation on M151 series vehicles; e.g., the fast attack vehicle (see figure 5-37, page 5-27). The mount is composed of a pintle socket, pintle clamping screw, column, and braces. See TM 9-1005-245-14 for information on the pedestal. For information on mounting the MK-19, see TM 9-1010-231-13&P.
(2) M66 ring mount. This mount is designed for in-

5501. Tripod Mount, M3
The M3 tripod provides a stable and durable mount for the MK-19. (The M3 tripod is also used for the M2 .50 cal.) Firing the gun from the tripod permits a high degree of accuracy and control (see figure 5-34, page 5-26). For more information, see chapter 4, section VI, paragraph 4602.

stallation on 2-, 5-, and 10-ton trucks or on combat vehicles (see figure 5-38, page 5-27). It consists of a machine gun mount, pintle socket, pintle clamping screw, ring assembly, brake assembly, and backrest assembly. The multiple-type ring assembly has a fixed ring for mounting to the vehicle. It also has a revolving ring that carries the pintle socket for the stepped type machine gun mount, the pintle shanks, a brake assembly, and the backrest assembly. See TM 9-1003-245-14 for additional M66 ring mount information and TM 9-1010-231-13&P for information on mounting the MK-19.

5-22

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 5-33. Corrective Action for Stoppages.
5-23

MCWP 3-15.1

Machine Gun, 40mm, MK-19 MOD 3

Figure 5-33. Corrective Action for Stoppages—Continued.
5-24

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 5-33. Corrective Action for Stoppages—Continued.
5-25

MCWP 3-15. MK64 MOD 5 Cradle. Figure 5-35. 5-26 . MK64 MOD 5 Cradle Mounted on the M3 Tripod. Figure 5-36.1 Machine Gun. 40mm. M3 Tripod. MK-19 MOD 3 Figure 5-34.

5-27 .1 Figure 5-37.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. M66 Ring Mount. Figure 5-38. Pedestal Mount M4.

MCWP 3-15. For information on weapons stations. b. Pintle Adapter. This assem- bly adapts the T&E so that it secures the carriage and cradle to the M4 pedestal or HMMWV weapons platform pedestal and provides fire control adjustments (see figure 5-41). The adapter is equipped with a quick-release pintle that secures the carriage and cradle. (3) HMMWV weapons station. There are two accessories needed to mount the MK-19 on vehicles. HMMWV weapons platform. HMMWV Weapons Station. (2) T&E mechanism mount assembly. It is secured by the pintle lock on the vehicle pedestal (see figure 5-40). and the M66 ring mount. (1) Pintle adapter. 5-28 . Figure 5-40. The pedestal is detachable with a quick release pin. The upper end of the pintle adapter has a hole that is shaped to accept the M4 cradle’s pintle. The lower end of the adapter is shaped to fit the mounting hold in the upper end of the M4 pedestal. 40mm. Two positioning clamps are provided to prevent up or down movement of the Figure 5-39. It may be released for traverse or locked in position by a train lock handle. This consists of a rotating platform with a pedestal that accepts the MK64 MOD 5 cradle (see figure 5-39). The lower end of the assembly is attached to the pedestal by a train lock clamp. Accessories.1 traversing When Machine Gun. see TM 9-1010-231-13&P. MK-19 MOD 3 lock clamp on the M4 pedestal.

It amplifies natural light such as moonlight. left top cam.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. T&E Mechanism Mount Assembly. The AN/TVS-5 may also be used with the M2. It is attached to the lower rear holes in the M4 cradle by a retaining pin. starlight. battery-operated. Lock down the locking cams of the mounting bracket in the following sequence: side cam. Night Vision Sight. The bracket slides from the muzzle end of the weapon. The sight does not emit visible infrared light that can be detected by the enemy. A standard caliber . The M2 mounting bracket is used to install the AN/TVS-5 on the MK-19. Installation. a.50 traversing mechanism composes the upper end of the T&E assembly. See TM 11-5855-214-10 for more information on the AN/TVS-5. used on the HMMWV weapons platform pedestal. Slide the mounting bracket over the rear sight housing of the gun. right top cam. only one clamp is required above the traversing lock clamp.1 Figure 5-41. and skyglow. With the MK-19 mounted on the tripod— 5-29 . electro-optical instrument used for passive night observation and fire. 5504. AN/TVS-5 The AN/TVS-5 is a portable.

MK-19 aiming points for stationary targets are aligned vertically in the center of the reticle.MCWP 3-15. Sight in on the target with the weapon's zeroed daylight sights. Manipulate the sight picture so that the target fills the space between the stadia lines in order to determine the corresponding range to the target. Use the proper range setting. b. be installed in the AN/TVS-5 before the sight can be used for aimed fire of the MK-19. Use of the Reticle Cell (1) Proper reticle cell. Field Zeroing.1 Place the AN/TVS-5 on the mounting bracket by positioning it in the groove at the top rear of the bracket so that the scribe line on the bracket is aligned with the scribe line in the sight mounting adapter. Insert the lever screw from the bottom of the mounting bracket into the sight mounting adapter. MK-19 MOD 3 (2) Dual-purpose reticle pattern. To field zero— Select a suitable target of known range in the hundreds of meters from 500 to 700. The AN/TVS-5 Section 6 Maintenance should be equipped with a dual-purpose reticle pattern for both the M2 and MK-19. Tighten the lever screw. The M2 aiming points are as on the M2/M85 reticle. 40mm. Aiming points to lead a target moving 10 mi/h are located vertically to the left and right of the stadia lines. Lower the daylight sight without disturbing the alignment of the weapon. The stadia lines are used to determine range to a 20-foot wide target. The proper reticle cell must Machine Gun. 5-30 . c. Installation of the proper reticle must be performed by authorized maintenance personnel.

until the target can be hit using the proper range mark. or grease to ensure proper. The functioning of the gun and mount 5-31 . Place the sight into operation. This cleaning material is especially useful when cleaning the gun in preparation for changing the type of lubricant used. dirt. CLP is a special cleaning solution and lubricant containing Teflon™ that can be used to clean and preserve all the metal parts of the weapons system. Refire on the target. the receiver and moving parts must be kept clean. Immediately after using bore cleaner. The care. Adjust the azimuth and elevation actuators until the proper range mark comes to bear on the target. All accessories and equipment used with the gun and mount. and maintenance determine whether or not the gun will function properly when needed. This material dries out the metal severely so a thin coat of CLP or lubricating oil should be applied afterwards. efficient functioning. cleaning. making any necessary adjustments to the sight. cleaning. 5601. together determine overall effectiveness.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Fire one or two rounds to settle the sight on the weapon. dry the bore and any parts of the gun exposed to the bore cleaner and then apply a thin coat of CLP or lubricating oil.1 Figure 5-42. During. and adjustment of the mounts used with the gun are no less important. must be properly maintained. Procedures Before. including ammunition. rust. Mount the AN/TVS-5. and free from burrs. RBC can be used to clean the bore of the machine gun barrel after firing. Because of the close fit of working surfaces and the high speed at which the gun operates. Cleaning Materials. lubrication. Care. It may be used as a lubricant during normal operation of the gun also. and After Firing. Tighten the sight mounting bracket and the lever screw. Cleaning Materials and Lubricants a. The bore and chamber must be properly maintained to preserve accuracy. correctly lubricated. Dry cleaning solvent can also be used to clean all metal parts of the weapons system.

Lubricate the weapon with LSA-T in temperatures between 0 degrees Fahrenheit and 215 degrees Fahrenheit. Climatic Conditions. In sustained temperatures below 0 degrees Fahrenheit (-18 degrees Celsius). Keep the gun free of moisture and lightly lubricated with CLP. grit. to decontaminate. Nuclear. LAW should be used during operation of the gun in sustained temperatures below 0 degrees Fahrenheit (-18 degrees Celsius). If contamination is anticipated. Extremely cold. MK-19 MOD 3 5604. hot or cold water can be used. In combat conditions the gun should be cleaned and lubricated daily. LSA-T is the preferred lubricant for use on all friction producing parts during operation of the gun in normal conditions. and After Firing Figure 5-42 is an operational checklist for procedures to be followed before. use the procedures outlined in FM 3-5. dry location where it is least exposed to dirt and moisture. clean and lubricate. and tropical climates affect the gun and its functioning. b. Normal Maintenance Procedures Each gun should be cleaned as soon after firing as possible and each time it is exposed to field conditions. the weapon should be lubricated with LAW. cleaned. In ideal conditions. tarpaulin. when the gun is not used and is kept in a clean place. inspect the gun daily for rust and maintain a light coat of CLP on all metal parts. Inspect and clean the weapon daily. humid climates. Machine Gun. and Chemical (NBC) Conditions. Section 7 5603. During normal training conditions. or poncho when not in use. NBC Decontamination. Once decontaminated. quently for signs of rust. 5-32 . Care should be taken under these climatic conditions to ensure that the gun is cleaned daily with the prescribed lubricants and protected from the elements by some sort of cover if possible. The weapon must be kept free of excess lubrication and moisture. Care and Cleaning Before. Keep the gun covered as much as possible. dry the parts immediately and apply a thin coat of CLP. and proceed with cleaning and lubrication. (1) Cold climates. Ammunition b. After using soap and water. During. whether it has been fired or not. and after firing the MK-19. If possible. keep the gun covered with a canvas. hot. as it dilutes the grease in the packed bearings. soapy water is recommended. dry climates. If the gun is contaminated. as this will attract dust. apply lubricant to all outer surfaces of the machine gun (do not lubricate ammunition). Biological. it may only be necessary to disassemble and clean it every 3 to 5 days. Inspection Ensure there are no signs of dirt or corrosion during the inspection and examine each part for serviceability. and sand. Special Maintenance Procedures a. allow it to come to room temperature. Lubricate the gun with LSA or CLP and keep it covered outdoors as much as possible. wipe it dry. Inspect the gun more fre- 5602. See cold climate conditions in paragraph 5604. dry. 5605. Inspection begins with the weapon disassembled into its five main groups. (3) Hot. Lubricants. and lubricated in a clean.MCWP 3-15. however. Avoid excess lubrication. (2) Hot. If the weapon is brought indoors.1 When RBC and CLP are not available. 40mm. The gun should be disassembled. warm or hot. It will not burn off the gun as it heats up during operation nor will rain or excess moisture wash it off. during. At no time should the bolt and backplate assembly be immersed in cleaning solvent.

Barrel must be free from carbon and not show any deformity in the lands or grooves. Feed Slide Assembly Feed pawls and feed tray pawls must not be burred or binding. 40mm Ammunition Box. Feed Tray Cover (Top Cover) Housing must not be cracked.1 d. The dove tail portion must not be dented and the number on the range scale must be visible. Bolt and Backplate Assembly Cocking lever must not be broken or be worn on the rear tip. Cradle should fit snugly onto the M3 or M4 mount. Ogive plunger head and round positioning block springs must not be weak. Aluminum buildup must be removed from vertical cam. Backplate pin must have retaining ring. especially around pivot posts. e. especially on the rear shoulder of the sear. The numbers on the scale should be easily visible. Sear Housing Assembly. armorer can remove it with fine steel wool. Rear sight must move to the horizontal position without difficulty. Flash suppressor must not be dented or cracked. Vertical cam must not be burred or scratched on the chromed edge. MCWP 3-15. Guide rods must not be bent or binding.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery a. Recoil springs must not be weak. bent. Primary drive lever must not be burred. 5-33 . Receiver rails must not be cracked. Retaining ring must be on pivot post. Charger assemblies must not be burred on grooved edges. Identification Figure 5-44. Safety wire must be attached to pin. Guide rails on tray must not be burred. b. Inspect for burrs on any part. f. Feed pawls must not exhibit weak spring action or burrs. or burred. Secondary drive lever must not be burred on the pivot post or forked end. If present. Mounts and T&E Mechanism Clicks should be clearly heard and felt as the T&E mechanism is manipulated. Sleeve latch should function and the traversing bar should be tight and all numbers should be easily visible. c. 5701. Receiver Assembly Housing must not show any cracks. Latch must not be binding or loose.

MCWP 3-15. MK-19 40mm Ammunition. MK-19 MOD 3 Figure 5-43.1 Machine Gun. 40mm. 5-34 .

MK-19 40mm Ammunition—Continued.1 Figure 5-43.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. 5-35 .

smoke. Their arming distance is from 18 to 36 meters. Its effective casualty radius is 15 meters. Dummy. Its arming distance is from 18 to 40 meters. They are used in training. 40mm.1 Forty millimeter ammunition for the MK-19 can be identified by markings on its packaging and by the physical characteristics of the rounds.g. The M922 dummy round (DODAC 1310-B472) is green with a gold ogive and black markings. Packaging HE and HEDP ammunition is packaged in metal cans. Practice ammunition is packaged in metal cans. NOTE In training.. nonexplosive projectile. There are two types of practice rounds: the M918 with a flash charge inside the projectile (DODAC 1310-B584) and the M385 with a solid projectile (DODAC 1310-B480). There are two types of HE rounds: M383 (DODAC 1310-B571) and M384 (DODAC 1310-B470). pages 34 and 35). Practice Rounds. 5704. The casings are olive drab with a yellow ogive and yellow markings. c. High explosive (HE) projectiles are used for fragmentation effect against light materials and fortifications and personnel. The HE ammunition can contains 48 linked rounds (M383 and M430) per can and the HEDP ammunition can contains 50 rounds (M384) per can. unloading. such as color and markings (see text below and figure 5-43. Their fillers and body materials differ. High Explosive Dual Purpose. a gun drill or loading. The M385 can contains 50 rounds. e. Its arming distance is 18 to 30 meters. The M918 is blue with a blue ogive and brown band and black markings. They are used against lightly armored vehicles. These rounds inflict personnel casualties in the target area with ground burst effects. The M918 can contains 40 linked rounds. c. the M918 produces a flash. HE Rounds: M383 and M384. Section 8 Operation and Firing b.MCWP 3-15. Ballistic Data a. A full can weighs approximately 60 pounds (see figure 5-44). In combat. The casings are olive drab with a yellow ogive and yellow markings. A full can weighs approximately 60 pounds. targets should not be engaged at less than 200 meters with HE or HEDP ammunition. b. Practice. and cleaning procedures. the minimum safe distance for target engagement is 75 meters. High Explosive. finger-like tabs holding the rotating band. and personnel. The M385 duplicates the trajectory and time of flight of the HE rounds but is inert and has no blast effect in the target area. 5702. d. Machine Gun. HEDP Round: M430. and a loud report to simulate the explosion of the HEDP round. High explosive dual purpose (HEDP) ammunition has a high explosive projectile with an internally shaped charge capable of armor penetration as well as fragmentation effect. Practice rounds have a solid. Ammunition for the MK-19 is linked with M16A2 links. These links can be identified by four. medium and light materials and fortifications. This round penetrates 2 inches of steel armor at 0 degrees obliquity and inflicts personnel casualties in the target area with ground burst effects. Upon impact. Types a. One type contains a flash charge inside to simulate explosion upon impact. They are used in range gunnery practice. The M385 is blue with a blue ogive and black markings. The M430 HEDP round (DODAC 1310-B542) is the standard round for the MK-19. although performance traits are the same. Dummy rounds are completely inert. Their effective casualty radius is 15 meters. 5-36 . MK-19 MOD 3 5703.

Dirt picked up during firing will act as an abrasive in the chamber and could cause a malfunction that may result in injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment. 5-37 . Only specially approved lots of ammunition can be used for overhead fire. Handling. Placement of Round Across Primary Feed Pawls.. and water. Wipe off light corrosion as soon as it is discovered. and Preservation Ammunition containers should not be opened until the ammunition is to be used. Dust and other abrasives will collect on it and could damage the operating parts of the gun. keep it at least 6 inches from the ground and covered with a double thickness of tarpaulin.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery Dummy ammunition is packaged in small metal cans with 10 linked rounds in each. Storage Store ammunition of all classes away from heat sources.g. Dig suitable trenches to prevent water from flowing under the ammunition pile. DO NOT fire dented cartridges. wipe it off prior to use. Protect ammunition from mud. Figure 5-45. Ammunition should be stored under cover. hot water pipes. The packaging of this ammunition is clearly stamped FOR OVERHEAD FIRE. Care. e. If the powder is hot. Place the tarpaulin so it gives maximum protection and allows free circulation of air. dirt. excessive pressure may be developed when the gun is fired. Ammunition removed from the airtight containers. If it is necessary to leave ammunition in the open. radiators. Figure 5-46. particularly in damp climates. If the ammunition gets wet or dirty. Ammunition Belt With Female Link on First Round. MCWP 3-15. heaters.1 DO NOT expose ammunition to direct rays of the sun. DO NOT oil or grease ammunition. DO NOT fire over friendly troops any ammunition graded and marked FOR TRAINING USE ONLY. cartridges with loose projectiles. 5706. is likely to corrode. Use caution during firing to ensure that ammunition is kept out of the dirt. 5705. or other defective rounds. open flames. Heavily corroded cartridges should be replaced.

Open feed tray cover and inspect the feed 5-38 . Inspecting the Feed Tray Assembly and Chamber. and charging the gun. Attach Feed Throat to Feeder.1 Machine Gun. clearing.MCWP 3-15. Moving Primary Drive Lever to the Right. Functioning Check Prior to operating the gun. Figure 5-48. 5801. unloading. the gunner should conduct a functioning check which includes the following steps: a. Operation of the MK-19 includes loading. DO NOT fire ammunition (other than blank ammunition) until it has been positively identified by ammunition and grade. 40mm. MK-19 MOD 3 Figure 5-47.

Pull the trigger. Clearing Rounds From Gun. b. Figure 5-50. When mounted 5-39 . Move the secondary drive lever back and forth to ensure that it moves freely. Pull the trigger. The bolt should not go forward. Inspect the firing pin and bolt face for signs of worn or damaged parts. tray assembly and chamber to ensure the gun is clear. first attach the ammunition can bracket to the slots on the gun cradle and set the ammunition can on the bracket. 5802. With the bolt forward. d.1 Figure 5-49. Place the safety on F. With the cover closed and the bolt to rear: Place the safety on S. and the cover raised— Insert the first round into the feeder. on the vehicle mount. Closing the Cover. Push the round across the first feed pawl (see figure 5-46). securing with the retaining pin. Checking the Safety. Press the feed pawls to check for spring pressure. Rotating Charger Handles Down and Pulling to Rear. The gunner then squeezes the spring loaded pins on the feed throat and inserts it into the slots on both sides of the feeder. Loading When the gun is mounted on the M3 tripod. The bolt should spring forward. With the bolt forward: Open the feed tray cover. female link first (see figure 5-45). ammunition is fed directly from the can. Checking Under the Feed Tray Cover. To feed the ammunition into the gun. Slide the feed slide to the left and ensure that the bolt is forward before closing the cover. c. start by attaching the feed throat to the feeder.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Ensure that the secondary drive lever is to the right and engaged under the feed tray.

Place hands on the control grips. Close the feed cover. and press the primary and secondary positioning pawls (see figure 5-50). Put the safety on S until ready to fire.MCWP 3-15. 5803. Charging the initial round into the gun begins by attaching the feed throat to the feeder (see figure 5-48). Push down on the casing (the round may be live or spent) forcing it off the face of the bolt and out the bottom of the gun. Fire in 3 to 5 round bursts. Clearing. like the M2 . 40mm. slide the linked rounds out of the feeder and feed tray. Place the safety on F and press the trigger. The squad leader/assistant gunner should catch the round as it falls out. Charging the Gun Place the charger handles in the forward and up position. the bolt will spring forward. Insert the first round. The weapon is prepared to fire. Rotate the charger handles down and pull them to the rear (see figure 5-49). female link first.50 cal. Grasp the charger handles and press the charger handle locks up and in. reach beneath the feeder. Positions for Firing The MK-19. Observe the following procedures: Put the weapon on S and keep it pointed down range. Close the cover. Dispose of the live round per applicable directives. With the bolt forward and the weapon on F. Press the trigger to F. Unloading. Press the locks and push the charger handles forward and up to the original position. Insert a length of cleaning rod through the right hand receiver rail as close to the face of the bolt as possible. Section 9 Gun Drill Charging the gun places the first round in position so it may be fired. can be fired from the tripod mount or vehicle mount. MK-19 MOD 3 5804. At the same time. On the tripod mount. To unload the gun: open the cover.1 Move the feed slide assembly to the left (see figure 5-47). manipulate the feed slide assembly. b. Clearing and Unloading the Gun a. Machine Gun. When fired from the vehicle 5-40 . Push the round across the first pawl until it clicks and move the feed slide assembly to the left. Press the charger handle locks and return the handles to the forward and up position. loading the first round on to the face of the bolt. Charge the weapon and leave the charger handles to the rear and down. Pull the charger handles to the rear which places the bolt and round in position to fire. 5805. Firing To fire the MK-19— Place the safety on F. DO NOT open the cover. 5806. If it does not close easily. thumb(s) on the trigger. it can be fired with the gunner in the prone or sitting position.

Duties should be rotated during a gun drill to allow each member of the crew to become familiar with the duties of the other members. Both the spade and control grips look alike and serve the same function.50 cal are called control grips on the MK-19. The MK-19 machine gun. skill. Generally. 5901.50 cal. What are called spade grips on the M2 . The ammunition bearer carries the MK64 MOD5 cradle with attached T&E mechanism and one box of ammunition. Once precision is attained. speed.50 cal and can be found in paragraph 4906. Precision is stressed. and taking the gun out of action. therefore figures from that chapter will be referred to in this section. the gunner is in the standing position. and binoculars. The gunner carries the MK-19. crew duties in a gun drill with the MK-19 are the same as those for the M2 . speed and teamwork can be developed. The purpose of a gun drill is to develop precision. requires a crew of three to put the gun into action and keep the weapon supplied with ammunition. M2 compass.1 for the M2 . employed on the ground on the M3 tripod. The details of the various firing positions are the same as MCWP 3-15. putting the gun into action. Crew Equipment In addition to individual arms and equipment. 5-41 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery mount. and teamwork in the procedures for examining equipment. crew members carry the following equipment for the tripod-mounted MK-19: The squad leader carries the M3 tripod and one box of ammunition. The only difference between the weapons relative to the firing position is one of terminology.

Attaching the T&E to the Tripod. ammunition box to his left front. There are five paces between men. INSPECT EQUIPMENT BEFORE 5-42 . Figure 5-52. front leg uppermost. Figure 5-53. gunner. the squad leader commands. If other members are present. flash suppressor to the left. one foot apart. latch to the front. pintle and T&E mechanism outboard. FORM FOR GUN DRILL. top cover up. Form for Gun Drill The section or squad leader commands. MK-19 MOD 3 Figure 5-51. latch to the front. Duties are rotated to ensure that each member learns and is capable of performing the duties of the other members. Examination of Equipment Before Firing When the crew is formed and equipped.1 Machine Gun. 40mm. one man in front of the gunner.MCWP 3-15. trail legs to the rear. Gunner Moving into Position. in the following order: squad leader. The ammunition bearer places the cradle to his right. The gunner places the MK-19 across his front. ammunition box to his right. The crew forms in column. and ammunition bearer. ammunition boxes are placed in front. they assume 5903. Mounting the Cradle on the Tripod. latches to the right (front). 5902. one behind. When the crew members reach their correct positions. the prone position with equipment arranged as follows (see figure 4-91): The squad leader places the tripod to his left.

Gunner. and the legs are in the short (low) position. serviceable. Ammunition is clean. FIRING. The squad leader inspects the M3 tripod to ensure that— Indexing levers and clamps on the front and trail legs function properly. Front leg clamp is hand tight.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Pintle lock release cam is down. At this command.1 Figure 5-54. Placing and Securing the MK-19 into the Cradle. Sleeve lock latch and pintle lock release cam are in working order. Squad Leader. Pintle bushing is free from dirt and burrs. the crew proceeds as follows: a. and placed in the box correctly (female link first). Front leg and trail legs are closely folded. The gunner inspects the MK-19 to ensure that— 5-43 . Ammunition box is closed and locked. b.

the squad leader grasps the left trail leg near the center with his left hand. and carries the tripod to the desired location (see figure 4-94). latch facing the tripod. and assumes the prone position behind the mount. with a snapping motion. pulls the left leg (to the left) to engage the sleeve latch. the bolt is forward. 40mm. he loosens the front leg clamp with his right hand. With his right hand on the tripod head. The cover is closed. and the safety is on F. Inserting the First Round into the Feeder. he places the trail leg shoes on the ground with the front leg pointing upward. The T&E mechanism is properly prepared by ensuring that the traversing handwheel is centered and the elevating screws are equally exposed (about 2 inches) above and below the elevating handwheel. the section leader or squad leader commands and signals. Ammunition Bearer. he slides his left hand down on the left trail leg and. MK-19 MOD 3 d. GUN TO BE MOUNTED (pointing to the position where the gun is to be mounted). Reporting. At the completion of the inspection. The gunner reports: GUN AND AMMUNITION CORRECT (or any deficiencies). Placing the Gun into Action To place the gun into action. FRONT (pointing in the direction of fire). The ammunition is clean.1 Machine Gun.MCWP 3-15. He then aligns the tripod for direction. the ammunition bearer jumps to his feet and grasps the ammunition box in his left hand and the cradle with his right hand. a report is rendered as follows: The ammunition bearer reports: AMMUNITION CORRECT (or any deficiencies). The squad leader reports: ALL CORRECT (or any deficiencies). c. and tightens the front leg clamp with his right hand (see figure 4-95). ACTION (vigorously pumping his fist in the direction of the designated gun position). Figure 5-55. At the gun position. Upon arrival at the position. serviceable. stamps the right and left trail shoes with his right or left foot. and placed in the box correctly (female link first). The ammunition bearer inspects the cradle and ammunition box to ensure that— The cradle is properly prepared by checking that the pintle swings freely and is free of dirt. positions the front leg with his left hand. drops the mount to the ground. The ammunition box is closed and locked. he lifts the tripod across the front of his body with the front leg up. 5-44 . and all pins and bolts are properly seated on the cradle. The charger assemblies are forward and locked in the up position. The chamber is clean by inspecting the feed tray assembly and the chamber. When the tripod is nearly mounted. 5904. the ammunition bearer places the ammunition box on line with and 2 feet to the left of the tripod head. Steadying the tripod with his left hand on the front leg. At the command or signal ACTION. Springing to his feet and grasping the tripod head with his right hand.

the ammunition bearer turns to his left and retrieves the ammunition box which the squad leader left in his original location. thus MCWP 3-15. The gunner pulls the charger handles to the rear and returns them to the upright position. He lifts the gun from the ground and moves rapidly to the gun position (see figure 5-53). the gunner opens the top cover.1 5-45 . With his right hand. and when the gun pintle is fully seated. the gunner closes the top cover. The squad leader inserts the pintle into the pintle bushing (see figure 5-51). After he gives the cradle to the squad leader and stamps the front shoe of the tripod.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery The ammunition bearer hands the cradle to the squad leader. Upon arrival. He then turns to the left and returns to his original position. female link first (see figure 5-55). The squad leader attaches the T&E mechanism to the traversing bar on the tripod (see figure 5-52). When the squad leader has completed placing the cradle on the mount. He presses the trigger. he presses down the pintle lock release cam with his right hand. The ammunition bearer stamps the front shoe of the tripod into the ground with his left foot. The ammunition bearer places this ammunition box to the rear of the ammunition box he previously placed next to the tripod head. the squad leader assists in mounting the gun by positioning the cradle and steadying the gun as it is lowered into the cradle. latch facing the tripod. He then pushes the first round across the feed pawl and moves the feeder slide assembly to the left. Then the gun is secured to the cradle (see figure 5-54). The squad leader lifts the gun pintle lock release cam. the gunner grasps the gun with his left hand on the barrel and his right hand on either grip. The squad leader inserts the first round into the feeder.

or by a twoor three-man carry. placing the gun on the ground across his front. picks up the remaining ammunition box. The gunner raises the top cover with his right hand. (In the two. He then assumes the prone position.50 cal. The assistant gunner places the tripod on the ground. he places the ammunition can on the ground to his left. He rises to his feet. The gunner closes the top cover. The squad leader releases the gun from the cradle. the ammunition bearer.) These procedures are similar to those used with the M2 . He then removes the round from the face of the bolt. attaches it to the ammunition belt. the front of the cradle forward. moves forward and kneels to the left of the tripod. The ammunition bearer takes the cradle in his right hand. spade grips to the front. With his right hand on the tripod head. folds down the front leg. 5905. pintle and T&E mechanism outboard. trail legs with his left. He then places the safety on S. each grasps the front leg with his forward hand and a trail leg with the . assumes a prone position to the right of the tripod. a. b. the ammunition bearer comes forward. Duties of Crew To hand carry the gun and equipment. Carrying the Tripod-Mounted Gun When the gun is mounted on the tripod. releases the sleeve latch. With the gunner on the right and squad leader on the left. and places it to the right of the assistant gunner. the gunner moves forward toward the new position carrying the receiver on either shoulder. The gun is dragged when limited cover or the situation requires the gun to be moved in this manner. Holding the tripod head with his right hand. 40mm. grasps the front leg with his left hand. and rotates the tripod to a vertical position on the trail legs. FOLLOW ME. men should move in step to make carrying easier. Machine Gun. picks up the front ammunition box with his left hand. and moves to his original position. Once the gunner has moved away from the tripod. latch to the front. flash suppressor to the left and top cover up. The squad leader raises the rear sight and the gunner announces UP. the squad leader commands OUT OF ACTION. The team gunner and squad leader drag the mounted gun to the desired position. he loosens the front leg clamp. he lifts the tripod across the front of his body with the front leg up. MK-19 MOD 3 figure 4-100). and announces UP. The gunner pulls the charger handles to the rear a second time and returns them to the upright position. With his right hand. He lays the cradle on the ground to his right. it can be moved for short distances by dragging. The squad leader assumes a kneeling position behind the tripod and releases the sleeve lock latch with his right hand.1 positioning the round on the face of the bolt. At this command. 5907.MCWP 3-15. See figure 4-101. Dragging. At this time. Two-Man Carry. The squad leader removes the cradle and gives it to the ammunition bearer. Taking the Gun Out of Action To take the gun out of action.or three-man carry. and then tightens the clamp. the squad leader lifts the ammunition out of the feed tray and places it in the ammunition box. and closes the ammunition box. He remains standing. He turns to the right and returns to his original position. The ammunition bearer carries his ammunition box in his left hand and the cradle in his right hand. latch to the front. The ammunition bearer returns to his original position and assumes the prone position. The squad leader carries the tripod over either shoulder and the ammunition box in one of his hands. he rotates the tripod on the right trail leg. and folds the left trail leg against the right with his left hand (see 5-46 5906. The gunner lifts the gun off the mount and moves to a position 10 paces to the rear of the tripod. the squad leader commands SECURE EQUIPMENT.

the squad leader and ammunition bearer each carry an ammunition box in their free hand. Each grasps the front leg. In addition. The squad leader is on the left and the ammunition bearer on the right. Qualification Firing. Three-Man Carry. The exercises and other information provided there should be used in training Marines with either weapon. The gunner is behind the tripod with a trail leg in each hand.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery other hand. 5908.1 well as the M2 . Marksmanship Training and Qualification Firing The principles discussed in chapter 4. just above the traversing bar.50 cal. section 10. c. See figure 4-102. MCWP 3-15. See figure 4-103. are applicable to the MK-19 as 5-47 .

a machine gun should be employed from a tripod mount on the ground. certain fundamentals must be understood and applied. Predetermined fire. techniques of fire other than direct laying are more appropriate and effective. When delivering overhead fire and fire from position defilade. This technique of fire is called direct laying. Classes of fire. do not stand alone. Methods of engaging targets. Crews should be trained to remove the gun from the vehicle mount and employ it from a tripod even during temporary halts.Chapter 6 Employment and Gunnery Section 1 Firing from position defilade. both as a crew member and as a gunner. Before the machine gun can be employed to the best advantage using any firing technique. Target designation. a. At times. This chapter discusses the above subjects. Range cards. this lessens the accuracy of fire and generally decreases the survivability of the vehicle and personnel. Range determination. They are most effectively employed in concert with other weapons in an attempt to achieve a synergistic effect where the fires of one weapon compliment or augment the fires of another. Employment Considerations To be most effective. the leader seeks a firing position that provides the greatest possible degree of cover for the vehicle and crew. which apply to all phases of techniques of fire and all machine guns. Each member of the machine gun crew must be trained in the standard methods of applying fire. Machine guns. Machine guns have capabilities and limitations just as any weapon system does. When the gun must be employed from a vehicle. While a machine gun may be employed from a vehicle mount while on the move. mounted on its ground or vehicular mounts. Some examples of employment options using the squad automatic weapon (SAW) are as follows: . These include— Characteristics of fire. The capabilities and limitations of every available weapon must be considered in order to achieve this in a tactical plan. Introduction Technique of fire is the method of delivering and controlling effective fire. Mounting and dismounting drills should be standardized and practiced regularly. The Squad Automatic Weapon. Firing positions. The simplest and most effective technique of delivering fire with the machine gun. Final protective fires. and he must perform his assigned task automatically and effectively. Overhead fire. Machine gunner’s mathematics. Fire control and fire commands. using a traversing and elevating (T&E) mechanism. is to align the sights of the gun on the target and properly apply fire. though powerful weapons. 6101. the gunner must use the appropriate techniques described in sections 7 and 11 of this chapter.

employing them in this manner should be carefully considered and used reluctantly. This can weaken part of the defense for the duration that the patrol is out. or as a last resort when some significant problem prevents the use of the tripod. medium machine guns were considered essential to the conduct of a squador platoon-sized ambush. or when vehicles 6-6 employing the M240G is by section from a base(s) of fire from which the guns can mass their fires in a continuous. when small units lacked a weapon with the capabilities of the SAW. provides a high volume of accurate fire beyond the range capabilities of other small arms found in the rifle company. In the defense. Other employment considerations include— (1) Offense. The SAW can also move with assault elements adding considerable firepower in the assault and immediately upon consolidation on the objective. the guns can be used to over watch a unit’s movement especially when negotiating terrain that impedes mobility such as crossing streams or steep draws. More important. SAWs may provide all the fire power to a squad or platoon sized ambush patrol that is needed. An observer(s) should be used to direct and adjust the fires whenever possible so that the guns can be positioned in defilade for greater protection. The M240G. or for some other compelling reason which the commander or unit leader decides is critical to the success of the mission. accurate. and use of the T&E mechanism allows precision manipulation of that fire. employment in pairs. ensuring success through their high volume of accurate fire. The goal is to mass the fires of the guns. The principles of dispersion. such as chance contact. It is best employed tripod mounted. Used in this manner their fires tend to be added in a more piecemeal fashion. The M240G. b. as compared to the weight of fire that can be introduced by the section as a whole. It can be employed from the bipod but this should be done only in hasty situations. which can severely limit their ability to effectively engage targets. Medium or even heavy machine guns may be needed for an ambush in situations such as when fixed fire from a tripod-mounted weapon using a T&E is considered crucial to the successful engagement of targets in the ambush. especially at maximum effective range. The weight of massed medium machine gun fire is significant and must not be underestimated. Medium machine guns have to be pulled out of the defense to go along on ambush patrols. The fire power provided by two or three SAWs can be devastating against personnel caught in an ambush’s kill zone. In some cases machine guns may still be critical to success in an ambush. (2) Defense. Short of situations such as those. as the Corps’ medium machine gun. Tripod mounting the gun provides the most accurate means of delivering fire. Although employing medium machine guns in smaller elements down to squad size is an option in the offense (primarily through attachment to subordinate elements). but unit leaders should carefully consider the mission of the ambush patrol before arbitrarily assigning machine guns to it. is the weapon’s capability for a high volume of accurate fire. however.MCWP 3-15. or they can cover dead space in those FPLs with direct fire. heavy volume that will produce a telling effect against enemy personnel and equipment. In difficult terrain guns can also . adding their high volume of fire to help suppress and destroy enemy personnel on an objective. the SAW can augment a base of fire. The SAW’s lighter weight and easier portability (in comparison to medium or heavy machine guns) make it well suited for ambush patrols because of the need for speed of movement and stealth in those operations. In the offense the preferred method for the final protective line (FPL) and principal direction of fire (PDF) of machine guns. This frees the medium machine gun teams/squads to be more effectively employed in a base of fire rather than trying to keep up with the assault.1 (1) Offense. SAWs can also be assigned their own PDFs to cover likely avenues of approach or other priority targets areas. and cover and concealment need not be violated to achieve the massing of machine gun fire. In the past. Even if guns for ambush patrols can be obtained from units in the reserve or elsewhere. During movement to contact. not the guns themselves. someone’s fire power in the main defense is usually diminished to accommodate the patrol. with reduced effect. In the offense. the SAW can augment Employment and Gunnery or other equipment is to be engaged as well as personnel.

that it is difficult to effectively engage moving vehicles with the MK-19 because its 40mm ammunition has a high angle of trajectory. can be assigned either an FPL or PDF to good effect. advancing by bounds with one squad always in position to fire. These characteristics make the M2 .50 cal well suited for the assignment of an in the defense against infantry attack. Security for the guns must be a matter of priority in these instances.500 meters. that becomes especially pronounced at ranges greater than 1. the force that establishes fire superiority first and then exploits it with a rapid assault. Often a mix of FPLs and PDFs will be assigned to a section of guns in the defense in order to best cover the frontage. The commander considers the following issues when making his decision. It will penetrate 2 inches of homogeneous steel with 0 degrees obliquity out to 2. When contact is initiated.50 Cal and MK-19. once again.50 cal. These heavy machine guns provide high volumes of accurate fire at ranges beyond the capabilities of small arms. It should be noted. however. is not suitable for an FPL in the defense and should normally be assigned a PDF to cover an avenue of approach.50 cal can be effectively employed against moving vehicles. as in the heavy machine gun platoon. a choke point. The MK-19’s high ex- plosive or high explosive. should be assigned per gun squad. lightly armored vehicles. In the defense. and medium machine guns. c.200 meters. In chance contact. The M2 . (2) Effect against personnel. an obstacle. The fires of the machine gun section are controlled by the unit leader. other vehicles. is effective against light armor. most often prevails. such as the rifle company commander. however. is highly effective against light armor targets out to ranges up to 1. When terrain or mission prevent the effective use of an FPL then a PDF will be assigned to M240Gs. The lethality of their ammunition make them ideal for engaging troop concentrations. only one mission. with its high chine gun section should be employed as a whole in general support of the overall unit. with an effective casualty radius of 15 meters. At that range the SLAP round will penetrate 3/4 of an inch of steel armor at 0 degrees obliquity. searching for positions that will allow them to quickly add the weight of their fires against the enemy. the ma- MCWP 3-15. Depending on the protection and mobility of the enemy. (2) Defense. a defile. fortified positions.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery over watch from a moving unit’s flanks. and other equipment. slow time of flight. Tables of organization do not dedicate sufficient personnel to simultaneously operate both weapons provided by tables of equipment. for information on firing from position defilade. Heavy machine guns may be 6-7 . with its high tra- jectory. All dead space in an FPL should be covered by other weapons systems. either an FPL or PDF. The M240G can be employed from defilade firing positions and can effectively engage in indirect fire. The M2 . or dead space in the FPL of a flatter trajectory weapon. however. The M2 . the M240G should be assigned the mission of firing an FPL. The MK-19. the commander must decide what mix of heavy machine guns to employ. machine gunners must move rapidly in the direction of enemy contact. in this chapter. vehiclemounted heavy machine guns may be included in a counter attack force.50 cal are often located in explosive dual-purpose round. aircraft.000 meters (see table 1 in appendix C). weapons company of the infantry battalion. (3) In the defense. appendix A for the pertinent firing tables and appendix H for information on firing and adjusting indirect machine gun fires. The MK-19.50 cal. Consequently.1 the same organization. PDFs are typically designed to cover likely avenues of approach or areas where the enemy may mass.50 cal is also an effective weapon against personnel because of its high volume of fire and 700 meters of grazing fire. See section 13. dual-purpose round make it very effective against personnel. The guns should generally be positioned on the flanks with interlocking FPLs and sectors of fire across the unit’s front. Whenever grazing fire can be attained. The M2 . and can suffer adverse aerodynamics (drift). (1) Effect against armor. who is advised by the machine gun section leader and weapons platoon commander. The MK-19 and the M2 . The M2 . when firing the sabot light armor penetrator (SLAP) round.

6-8 . such as helicopters in a landing zone.MCWP 3-15. The mix of heavy machine guns Employment and Gunnery (7) Indirect firing and fire from defilade. or reinforcing a counter attack force. The CAATs mentioned above can be very useful in the offense also. Because employed in the offense depends on the nature of the enemy—especially the type and degree of protection—and the terrain and vegetation.50 cal can be used to pin the enemy down while the MK-19 is used to drop high explosive (HE) or high explosive dual purpose (HEDP) on top of the enemy.1 employed with anti-armor weapons and other elements in task organized combined antiarmor teams (CAAT) with missions assigned such as. for information on firing from position defilade. conducting anti-armor ambushes forward of the forward edge of the battle area (FEBA). armor piercing incendiary. training in machine gun marksmanship is a prerequisite to instruction in technique of fire. The M2 . The most effective caliber . etc. Sequence of Training Mechanical training.. appendices B and C for the pertinent firing tables. the ammunition’s slow time of flight make the weapon ineffective against moving aircraft. The high angle of fire of the MK-19 and the flatter trajectory of the M2 can be employed effectively in tandem in many situations. or they can conduct a route reconnaissance and provide reports about the trafficability of a unit’s planned route of march. such as with a mechanized unit. 6102. It can also be employed very effectively from defilade firing positions.50 cal. gun drill. creatively task organized with a mix of heavy machine guns. however. or if mobility is not an issue the unit leader may want to dismount them in a base of fire in order to take advantage of the added accuracy of tripod-mounted guns. The M2 . and SLAP.) (8) Complementary effects. proper use of firing tables and indirect fire techniques can yield effective fire against targets at considerably greater distances than the listed maximum effective range of the weapon. cal can be employed effectively through light vegetation. the M2 .50 cal can also be employed from defilade firing positions and can effectively engage in indirect fire. while the 40mm round fired from the MK-19 may detonate prematurely when fired through the same vegetation. supporting a combat outpost.50 ammunition to engage aircraft with are: armor piercing. can be an effective independent maneuver element whose capabilities add flexibility to an offensive plan. For example. In this role they can act as a motorized scout element that seeks to find and maintain contact with the enemy while the unit’s main body maneuvers to engage.50 cal has limited effectiveness against aircraft. and appendix H for information on firing and adjusting indirect machine gun fires. (See section 13 of this chapter. With the M2 . engineers. anti-armor weapons. the MK-19 can effectively employ indirect fire against some defilade enemy positions. forward observers. While the MK-19’s fragmentation producing ammunition could be effective against stationary aircraft. The M2 . (5) Effect against aircraft. Indirect firing requires that the guns be laid for deflection on some reference point other than the target and that there be an observer in communication with the guns who can adjust rounds on the target. For example. and marksmanship are completed before training in technique of fire. A CAAT. using observation posts on the military crest to adjust rounds.50 of its high trajectory compared to most machine guns. (6) Effect of firing through vegetation. the MK-19 can be employed effectively in a reverse-slope defense to engage the advancing enemy on the forward slope. the characteristics of one complementing the other. Some training in range estimation by eye and characteristics of machine gun fire are necessary before conducting range practice. (4) In the offense. Some guns may need to remain mounted in order to keep up with an attack.

cone of fire. when it leaves the muzzle. ground formation. 6-9 . the rotation of the bullet. The highest point on the trajectory (maximum ordinate) is a point approximately two-thirds of the range from the gun to the target. including trajectory. at ranges up to 700 meters over level or uniformly sloping ground. The farther the bullet travels. the projectile. the number of rounds in each burst varies from about 6 to 20 for the heavy machine gun. Cone of Fire When a burst is fired. The amount of elevation for any given range is automatically provided by the graduations on the rear sight of a rifle or machine gun. and beaten zone. Trajectory The trajectory. and the resistance of the air. The major factors influencing the trajectory are the velocity of the bullet.1 fall. variations in ammunition. including the size and shape of the target. the projectile begins to 6203. Because of this elevation of the axis of the bore. 6202. and ammunition supply. To overcome the influence of these factors. Trajectory. it is necessary to elevate the bore above a straight line from the muzzle of the gun to the target. Then. Burst of Fire The number of shots in a burst of fire is limited by several factors. and from 6 to 12 for the medium machine gun. It starts on the prolongation of the axis of the bore and rises above the line of aim. For normal ground targets. does not travel in a straight line to the target. For the M240G. 6201. The resulting group of trajectories is known as the cone of fire (see figure 6-2). the gravity of the earth. the lower Figure 6-1. or path of a projectile through the air.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Section 2 Characteristics of Fire The gunner’s knowledge of the machine gun cannot be complete until he learns something of the action and effect of the projectiles when fired. and conditions of the atmosphere give each bullet a trajectory differing slightly from that of the others. following a curved path until it intersects the line of aim again at the target. under the influence of gravity. This section discusses various characteristics of machine gun fire. is influenced by several factors. the vibrations of the gun and tripod. The curved path followed by the projectile is called the trajectory (see figure 6-1). and the resistance of the air. the greater the curvature of this path.

See figure 6-4. Cone of Fire. When the cone of fire falls on level ground which is at the same height as the gun. Effect of Range. The minimum length occurs where the slope of the ground is perpendicular to the cone of fire at the point of impact. 6-10 . Effective Beaten Zone. The maximum length is obtained when the slope of the ground approximates Figure 6-3.MCWP 3-15. Beaten Zone The beaten zone is the area on the ground upon which the cone of fire falls. the lengths of the beaten zone are as shown in figure 6-3.1 Employment and Gunnery Figure 6-2. These comprise the effective beaten zone.8 meters). See figure 6-5. there is a further rise of the cone above the ground. With each increase in elevation of the gun. As the range increases. the beaten zone becomes shorter and wider. Center of Impact. a. It has been found that 82 percent of the shots are uni. On rising ground. The remaining 6204. bound of the cone of fire does not rise above the height of a standing man (1.formly grouped around the center of impact. the angle of fall of the bursts. the length of the pattern is shortened. b. Effect of Slope of Ground. c. The center of the beaten zone is called the center of impact (see figure 6-3). The beaten zone remains 2 mils wide at any range.

Figure 6-5.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Figure 6-4. 6-11 . Effect of Ground Slopes on the Beaten Zone. Effect of Range on Beaten Zone (Example Shown for the M240G).

however. Danger space should be considered along with grazing fire in assigning an FPL mission to a gun. Danger Space This is the area from the muzzle of the gun. When firing over flat or uniformly slopping terrain at ranges less than 850 meters. somewhere on his body. Danger space is an important tactical consideration when planning the employment Section 3 Classes of Fire Machine gun fire is classified with respect to– The ground. For example.1 18 percent of the shots are so scattered that they are considered to be outside of the effective beaten zone. Danger Space and Dead Space.8 meters is used as an estimate of the height of a standing man in tactical planning. paragraphs 6206 and 6301 and appendix G for more detail. The identification of dead space in the FPL. This figure of 1. The likelihood of enemy casualties can be estimated at various ranges by using the concept of danger space and the appropriate firing tables. The gun. because of the characteristics of the trajectory.50 Cal Firing Tables. M240G Firing Tables or appendix B. 6206.8 meters.MCWP 3-15. Figure 6-6. in ideal conditions on uniformly sloping ground. 350 meters.8 meters. the maximum dead space. M2 . Dead Space Dead space is an area within the maximum range of a weapon which cannot be covered by fire or observation from a particular position because of intervening obstacles. by some part of the cone of fire (see figure 6-6). A man running in a low crouch could get lower than 55 inches and therefore quickly move underneath the cone of fire in this example. is particularly critical. See appendix A. the nature of the ground. where a standing man (measured as 1. for the M240G. or the limitations of the pointing capabilities of the weapon. Dead space in the FPL that is not covered by other weapons systems could provide the enemy the opportunity to penetrate friendly lines. 6-12 . This maximum dead space occurs at approximately 1/2 the range. See figure 6-6. It must be remembered. for the enemy to exploit by crouching down or crawling in order to move under the fire. Beyond 850 meters the gun’s trajectory does rise more than 1.8 meters tall) will be hit. 6205. out to and including the beaten zone. a mission assigned to machine guns in the defense. Even over uniformly sloping terrain sufficient dead space can exist along the line of fire. the characteristics of the trajectory. Employment and Gunnery of machine guns. is 55 inches with the weapon sighted at 700 meters. the M240G’s trajectory does not rise above 1. The target. that effective danger space is based on the height of an average man standing upright.

1 of the cone of fire. On level or uniformly sloping ground danger space exists along the entire range of grazing fire. because it ensures a minimal amount of dead space in the trajectory Figure 6-7. significantly hampering the speed of his advance. Plunging Fire. A man would have to crawl in order to move underneath the cone of fire in this example.50 cal is approximately 680 meters. Fire approximately parallel to the ground where the center of the cone of fire does not rise above 1 meter. The maximum extent of grazing fire obtainable for the M2 . See figures 6-7 and 6-8 and appendix G for more details. in ideal conditions on uniformly sloping ground. Grazing Fire. when firing from low ground into high ground. 6301. See figure 6-8. Grazing Fire. 6-13 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. is 31 inches for a weapon sighted at 600 meters. rounded to 700 meters for the same reasons given for the M240G. For the M240G. Fire in which the angle of fall of the rounds. When firing over level or uniformly sloping terrain. Classes of Fire with Respect to the Ground a. and when firing at long ranges. For example. and the length of the beaten zone is materially shortened. 300 meters. is such that the danger space is practically confined to the beaten zone. the maximum extent of grazing fire obtainable for the M240G is approximately 580 meters. with reference to the slope of the ground. Plunging fire is obtained when firing from high ground into low ground. This figure is rounded to 600 meters to simplify calculations in tactical planning and to accommodate the rear sights of the M240G which are graduated in 100 meter increments. This maximum dead space occurs at approximately 1/2 that range. Grazing fire is the primary consideration when assigning the mission of an FPL to a machine gun. b. the maximum dead space.

but not a right angle. because it makes maximum use of the beaten zone. Traversing Fire. See figure 6-9. The amount of elevation change depends upon the range and slope of the ground. Flanking Fire. Frontal Fire. See figure 6-10. The long axis of the beaten zone is at an angle. See figure 6-10.MCWP 3-15. See figure 6-9. Classes of Fire with Respect to the Gun a. Employed against targets which require major changes in direction but little or no change in elevation. Searching Fire. Classes of Fire with Respect to the Target a. the gunner should select successive aiming points throughout the target area. See figure 6-10. b. Targets may be dense. Delivered against the flank of a target. This class of fire is either frontal or flanking and is the most desirable class of fire with respect to the target. Fire delivered on a point target. to the long axis of the target. d. See figure 6-10. Oblique Fire. It is employed against a target whose long axis is oblique to the direction of the fire. d. 6302. or vehicles or mounted troops moving across the front. in relatively close formations moving slowly toward or away from the gun. b. See figure 6-9. Plunging and Grazing Fire. Fire distributed in depth by successive changes in the elevation of the gun. The long axis of the beaten zone coincides or nearly coincides with the long axis of the target. Fire delivered both in width and depth by changes in direction and elevation. Little or no manipulation is required. c. 6303. When engaging a wide target requiring traversing fire. See figure 6-10.1 Employment and Gunnery Figure 6-8. c. Enfilade Fire. The traversing slide lock lever is loosened enough to permit the gunner to swing the gun laterally. but not so close as to be wasteful of ammunition by concentrating a heavy volume of fire in a small area. Traversing and Searching Fire. Fixed Fire. See figure 6-9. Swinging Traverse. Fire distributed against a wide target requiring successive changes in the direction of the gun. The long axis of the beaten zone is at a right angle to the long axis of the target. e. 6-14 . of considerable width. These aiming points should be close enough together to ensure adequate target coverage. After the initial burst the gunner will follow any change or movement of the target without command.

Examples are aerial targets.1 Figure 6-9. 6-15 . or infantry in close formation moving rapidly toward or away from the gun position. mounted troops. Classes of Fire With Respect to the Target. Fire delivered against moving targets which must be quickly engaged and which require rapid changes in both direction and elevation. Free Gun. vehicles. f.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

In combat. Also. . Estimating by Eye. Objects seem nearer when– 6401. although there is an error in range no greater than 100 meters. correct range determination is highly important for effective machine gun fire. or a uniform surface like a wheat field. or securing the information from other units. Classes of Fire With Respect to the Gun. Therefore. measuring range from a map or aerial photograph. Estimating by eye is the method most often used in the field. Color of the object contrasts sharply with the color of the background. Section 4 Range Determination Under combat conditions. the cone of fire may miss the target completely. stepping off the distance. damp ground or poor visibility often make adjustment of fire by observation impossible.MCWP 3-15. Ranges are determined to the 6-16 Object is in a bright light. The maximum usable range is that amount of range visible to either the leader or gunner but still within the maximum effective range of the machine gun. Some of these are estimating by eye. nearest 100 meters for machine gun firing. the effect of these conditions on the appearance of objects within the first 100 meters is negligible. the observer makes allowances for the following effects.) Whenever the appearance of objects is used as a basis for range estimation. a. Methods of Range Determination There are many methods for determining range. (Although. ranges are seldom known in advance. it is important to realize certain conditions affecting the appearance of objects. Looking over water. the most commonly used methods are estimating by eye and observed fire. Light and terrain can sometimes make objects seem much nearer or more distant than they really are. snow. Under such conditions. First.1 Employment and Gunnery Figure 6-10. firing the gun.

resets the rear sight so that the line of aim is on the target. judging by the appearance of objects. By learning details that can be distinguished on the appearance of a man at 300. notes the sight setting on the rear sight. fire is adjusted on a point which does offer observation and which is known to have the same range as the target. and multiply the estimated distance by 2. 500. The range thus determined is taken as the range to the target. For this reason. moves the center of impact into the target by means of the T&E mechanism. most of which is visible. he can mentally determine how many of these 100-meter units there are between his position and the target. and 1. Looking down a straight road or railroad track. (1) 100-Meter unit of measure method. a fairly reliable range estimation can be made when a man is in the vicinity of the target. the 100-meter unit of measure method and the appearance-of-objects method. and announces it as the range to the target. In training. The gunner announces the range and elevates his gun until it is laid on the target. To use MCWP 3-15. Looking over a depression most of which is hidden. much of the ground between the observer and the target is hidden from view and the application of the unit of measure to the hidden portion of the ground is impossible. All guns are then laid. it is best to estimate the distance to the far edge of the depression. There is poor light or fog. it is better to select a point halfway to the target. b. Objects seem more distant when– Looking over a depression. In determining the range using the observed fire technique. this method. With this distance in mind. Another method of estimating ranges is by memorizing the appearance of objects. apply the 100-meter unit up to that point. the gunner must be able to visualize a 100-meter distance on the ground. There are two methods of estimating by eye. and fire is opened on the unit leader’s command.1 (2) An alternate method of estimation.000 meters. Observed Firing. or when it is desired to obtain surprise. and then to apply the unit of measure over the remaining distance to the target. in ranges over 500 meters. all guns are zeroed previously so that the range determined for one gun may be used for the others. and the amount of detail that can be distinguished at a few key ranges. Only a small part of the object can be seen. the appearance of objects is the only guide. If there is a considerable stretch of visible ground extending from the flat edge of a depression to the target. 6402. fire is adjusted on the ground at the foot of the tree or building where the strike of the bullets is visible. vegetation. When the ground in the vicinity of the target permits no observation of strike. Application of the unit of measure beyond 500 meters is difficult. Familiarity with the 100-meter unit and its appearance on different types of ground and at different distances enables the estimator to apply it with relative accuracy. his estimates should be checked by pacing off the distance. 6-17 . In some cases. When engaging targets in a tree or building. the gunner needs a quick method of measuring lateral distance right or left from a reference point to a target. Looking from low ground toward higher ground.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery Looking from a height downward. In the clear atmosphere of high altitudes. 700. The gunner lays his gun on the target when ordered. To use this method. In such cases. Lateral Distance Measurement In addition to the ability to determine range accurately. the gunner opens fire on the target by the estimated range.

Section 5 Traversing and Elevating Mechanism The T&E mechanism. Each click equals 1 meter at 1. when properly employed. To measure the distance in fingers between a reference point and a target. raise the index finger. The finger measurement method is not a method of range determination but only a method of measuring the lateral distance (in fingers) between two points. and sight along its edge. the machine gun is firmly locked into the desired position. or 1/2 meter at 500 meters. The gunner can apply the data necessary to engage a desired target.000 meters. The Figure 6-11. General guidelines for mil equivalent can be found in figure 6-11. depending on how many fingers are Employment and Gunnery raised to cover this distance. By utilizing the T&E mechanism. the gunner can rapidly and accurately reengage the original target. Note the space remaining between the two points. In addition. 6-18 . the gunner can engage targets from a defilade position and fire on enemy positions on reverse slopes (see section 12. Estimating Angles in Mils With the Hand. placing the edge of the finger along the flank of the target or reference point. counting the clicks from one point of aim to another point of aim. and then fill this space by raising fingers until the space is covered. the fingers cupped. The measurement from the reference point to the target is then stated as being one or more fingers. as well as to engage enemy positions located on reverse slopes.MCWP 3-15. width can be measured by aiming on a point and manipulating the traversing handwheel.1 When the gun is mounted on the tripod. shift to other targets. by calculating and applying the quadrant elevation. and by reapplying the original data. Close one eye. enables the gunner to accurately engage targets during periods of reduced visibility and fire from defilade positions. extend the arm with the palm outward. chapter 6). This method is accurate but time consuming. and the elbow locked.

move the left edge of the traversing bar slide back to the next smaller graduation. the gunner finds that the left edge of the traversing bar slide falls between the LEFT 300 and LEFT 305 graduations on the traversing bar. Pick up the rear legs of the tripod and shift the tripod until the muzzle of the gun points along the FPL.. in laying the gun on target. Once the gun is laid for direction. The left edge of the traversing bar slide is always used as the index. 6501. The technique of moving the traversing bar slide to the next smaller graduation provides for greater simplicity and consistency. then turn it away two complete revolutions. In this case. Preliminary Steps (1) Positioning the traversing mechanism. To lay the gun for direction when an FPL has been assigned. Check the traversing handwheel scale to ensure the 0 on the scale is lined up with the 0 index line before and after the two revolutions. These readings are measured by and recorded from the traversing bar and T&E mechanism. Lock the traversing bar and read the direction reading from the scale on the traversing bar (see figure 6-12). The traversing mechanism can be positioned at night by turning the traversing handwheel toward your body as far as it will go. He moves the left edge of the traversing bar slide back to the LEFT 300 graduations and pulls on the traversing handwheel to center the gun on target. If the left edge of the traversing slide does not fall exactly on a 5-mil graduation (tickmark). Pick up the rear legs of the tripod and shift the tripod until the muzzle of the gun is laid on the center of sector. lock the left edge of the traversing slide on the 0 graduation on the traversing bar. This is done to ensure greater stability and prevent accidental movement of the tripod. Direction Readings. 6-19 . it must be reset to zero before laying on another target. and then turning it away 50 clicks (two revolutions). he would have had to push the traversing handwheel (i. (2) Laying the gun for direction. Turn the traversing handwheel toward your body as far as it will go. The FPL needs no direction reading since the traversing slide is positioned to the extreme right or left of the traversing bar. move the muzzle to the right) 2 mils to center on the same target. the gun will be laid for direction on the center of the primary sector. lock the traversing slide on that end of the traversing bar which is opposite to the direction of the FPL. All measurements are recorded in mils. emplace the tripod firmly by digging in the tripod shoes or by placing sandbags on the tripod legs. Traversing Bar and T&E Mechanism Method Direction and elevation readings constitute the data necessary to engage preselected target areas during periods of limited visibility. To obtain direction readings to targets other than the FPL. MCWP 3-15. Assuming he traversed LEFT 3 mils (clicks) with the traversing handwheel. NOTE When the traversing handwheel is used to lay on a target. This technique will keep the muzzle of the gun moving in the same direction when laying on a target. a.e. If an FPL has not been assigned. loosen the traversing slide lock lever and slide the traversing bar slide along the traversing bar until the gun is laid on the center of a point target and on either flank of a linear target. and use the traversing handwheel to complete the initial lay. Direction readings are obtained and recorded to all targets within the primary sector of fire with the exception of the FPL.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery information contained in this section pertains to the use of the T&E mechanism for all of the machine guns discussed in this manual.1 b. In this case he would have to subtract the handwheel reading of RIGHT 2 from his traversing bar reading of LEFT 305 in order to obtain the proper direction reading of LEFT 303. Had he initially moved the traversing bar slide to the LEFT 305 graduation. his direction reading is LEFT 303 (LEFT 300 on the traversing bar plus LEFT 3 on the traversing handwheel). For example.

the width of the target is measured in mils by traversing across the target using the traversing handwheel. the direction reading is recorded as LEFT that number of mils (the muzzle of the weapon moves to the left). the gun is laid on the base of the target. After taking a direction reading of a linear target. c.MCWP 3-15. To obtain this reading. using the indicator as the index (see figure 6-12). The traversing mechanism must be repositioned before moving to another target. Elevation Readings. After obtaining the direction reading to a target.1 Employment and Gunnery Figure 6-12. Traversing Bar and T&E Mechanism (T&E Reading of L5-50/3). an elevation reading is obtained before moving to another target. The second portion is taken from the engraved scale on the top of the elevating handwheel. The elevation reading is obtained from two scales. When the left edge of the traversing slide is on a graduation to the left of 0 graduation on the traversing bar. The first portion of the reading is taken from the engraved scale on the upper elevating screw plate. The two portions of the elevation reading are separated by a slash (/) when they are recorded. 6-20 .

In using this method. or give the firing position area the section (or squad) occupies and the targets it engages. refer to the appropriate firing tables. the data are only correct if the gunner ensures that the same number of exposed threads is replaced on the mechanism. adjust the fire of his guns upon the target. If data are placed on another mechanism using the same mount and gun. the 6-21 elevation reading to a target. accurate fire cannot be placed on the target. An elevation reading is valid on only one mechanism. and waste of ammunition. premature disclosure of position. this would be a -50 reading.1 when the target is engaged. To replace the elevation reading of -50/3 on the T&E mechanism. with the handwheel indicator on 3. or the sector of fire it covers. Fire control of the machine gun fire unit is executed by the section and squad leaders. 6601. the gunner should fire and adjust on this target. because any discrepancy will cause an error in the elevation . As in figure 6-10. In obtaining the elevation reading. B. manipulate the elevating handwheel until the horizontal line below -50 is visible at eye level. Weapons Platoon Leader. Data may be obtained on targets without firing and adjusting as mentioned in the preceding paragraph. and the exact location of friendly troops that may be endangered by the fire of the section. Locate the graduation on line with the indicator (see figure 6-10). should the base of the T&E mechanism rotate. and C. There is an index line below each number and a PLUS or MINUS sign above each number. regulate the rate of fire. See appendices A.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery The engraved scale on the upper elevating screw plate is graduated in 50-mil increments from -200 mils to +200 mils. The scale on the elevating handwheel is graduated in 1-mil increments for a total of 50 mils. when a gun is freed to engage a secondary sector. The first portion of the reading is the number and plus or minus sign above the first visible index line. the technique used in engaging targets is prescribed. with the exception of the 0 (see figure 6-12). The zero reading has no sign. the gunner should lower his head until his eyes are on line with the top of the elevating handwheel. Chain of Fire Control The chain of fire control follows the chain of command. These orders assign a mission to the section (or squad). Frequently. and cease firing. The dry-fire method of obtaining data is used only when firing is not possible or when the situation is such that firing would disclose the position of the gun. (2) Elevation reading without firing. It implies the ability of the leader to open fire at the instant he desires. Range determination is critical. The direction and elevation readings are then taken. shift fire from one target to another. The number of threads exposed on the lower elevation screw must remain the same both when obtaining and using data (see figure 6-12). This is accomplished using the dry-fire method of laying the gun. To ensure a correct MCWP 3-15. the range to the target is determined by eye. With the section (or squads) widely separated as they may be in a defensive situation. misapplication of fire on unimportant targets. loss of surprise effect. Section 6 Fire Control Fire control of machine guns includes all operations connected with the preparation and actual application of fire to a target. this range is placed on the rear sight and the gun is laid on the center base of the target. a. The entire reading is recorded as -50/3. To check the elevation. or the platoon leader may go to the section leader (or squad leaders) and give them individual orders. If the number of threads is increased or decreased after the data are recorded. Failure to exercise correct fire control results in danger to friendly troops. The ability to exercise correct fire control depends primarily on the discipline and correct technical training of the gun crew. The section leaders (or squad leaders) may be assembled for this purpose. loss of time in securing adjustments. (1) Elevation reading by firing. For example. the data could be inaccurate. Usually the platoon leaders give their instructions orally and directly to the section leaders.

Sectors of Fire A sector of fire is a section of terrain designated by specific boundaries and covered by fire by the unit to which it is assigned. 6604. fires an aimed burst. the squad leader promptly corrects him by announcing or signaling subsequent fire commands.1 platoon leader may send written instructions to the section (or squad) leaders. He adjusts body position for small correction in elevation and deflection. or platoon leader for signals. Employment and Gunnery otherwise ordered.MCWP 3-15. (1) Firing from the tripod. b. the prescribed rate is used. Rates of Fire The greatest surprise and shock effect is obtained by combining the maximum rate of fire with the simultaneous opening of fire of all guns for at least the first few bursts. friendly troops who may be endangered by fire of the section. Fleeting targets are engaged as soon as possible and with the maximum fire available. It is continuous throughout the action. Section Leader. section. when the machine gun is so mounted. Observation and adjustment of fire is the most important element of fire control. Initial Adjustment of Fire. and observes the strike or tracer. and frequently relaying or checking the aim. the number 2 man (ammo man) watches the squad. When the rate of fire is not specified. He is rarely able to issue fire commands orally. When the initial burst is not correctly placed. When the initial burst is 6602. sector of fire. Squad Leader. Sectors of fire vary in size but are generally limited to the area which can be engaged without moving the tripod. unless 6-22 . and to shift his fire to cover any changes in the formation or location of his target. not correctly placed. The initial delivery of fire using the rapid rate facilitates adjustment of fire. He makes larger range corrections by resetting the sights and relaying on the target. the first few bursts are at the rapid rate. The machine gun section leader in the weapons platoon is responsible for both the tactical and technical employment of his section. thereafter. If the gunner fails to do these things. The squad leader concentrates on the observation and adjustment of fire. c. the gunner makes the required corrections or 6603. The squad leader is responsible for picking the exact firing position. Subsequent Corrections and Adjustments. When the initial burst is correct. he continues to fire (manipulating if necessary) until the target is covered. a. When subsequent fire commands are issued. b. This responsibility to adjust fire continues through the chain of command to the platoon leader. Besides assisting in the service of the gun. targets to be engaged. and fire adjustment of the section. In all cases. the rapid rate is used. It is his responsibility to pass on to his squads the information received from the platoon leader as to the firing position area. He is trained to anticipate the action of the enemy after fire is open. (2) Firing from the bipod. The gunner is trained to observe and adjust his own fire without command and to check his laying frequently. He is responsible for fire control and fire discipline within his squad. lays on the target. Adjustment of Fire Fire is adjusted by observation of strike. the gunner determines from the strike or tracer the amount of traverse and search required to place the next burst on the target and manipulates the gun accordingly with the T&E handwheels. or he may select a new aiming point to place the next burst on the target. he cannot do this if he observes the fire. observation of tracers. He makes large range corrections by resetting the sights and relaying on the target. the gunner may either change the elevation and windage on the sights. The number 2 man transmits all commands to the gunner or the squad leader. especially after firing has begun. The gunner sets his sights with the range to the target. The squad leader carries out the instructions of the section or platoon leader.

FIRE MISSION is given. A LERT D IRECTION (ONLY WHEN NOT OBVIOUS) D ESCRIPTION (ONLY WHEN NOT OBVIOUS) R ANGE A SSIGNMENT/METHOD (DIVISION. FIRE. (2) Direction. SEVEN HUNDRED. then NUMBER ONE. It is most improbable that a complete initial fire command would ever be issued during a fire fight. For example: FIRE MISSION. the word TARGET always precedes the target description when a reference point is used. the target may 6-23 . FIRE MISSION is announced for all targets. a. Initial Fire Commands. RATE. Changes in deflection and elevation such as: RIGHT 2. When firing a machine gun on the bipod. The selected reference point must be an easily recognizable terrain feature or object which is in or near the target area. are made with the T&E handwheels. The acronym ADDRAC can be utilized to remember the elements. NUMBER ONE or FIRE MISSION. It contains all necessary elements given in proper sequence. These corrections should be announced as: ADD. and cease fire. etc. Others may be engaged with only the alert. An indistinct target may be indicated by the use of a reference point. When both guns of a squad are to fire. or LEFT so many mils. DROP. subsequent commands are given as corrections in elevation and/or deflection at which the last burst was fired. The procedures outlined are used to accustom machine gunners to issue and execute (1) Alert. If only one gun is to fire. Some targets may necessitate including all elements. but only wants one gun of the squad to fire.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery adjustments and continues to engage the target without further command to fire. For clarity. he announces FIRE MISSION. Fire Commands Fire commands are the means by which fire control is exercised. the squad leader announces FIRE MISSION. These corrections are habitually given in mils and are announced or signaled as: ADD. A good fire command is as brief as clarity will permit. RIGHT (LEFT) FRONT. The alert is the first element of the initial fire command. Direction is given as FRONT. ADD 5. DROP. (2) Firing from the bipod. The following explanation is based on employment of the guns by squad (two machine gun teams). logical sequence. The elements contained in the initial fire command are identical to those utilized for the infantry unit leader. range. ALL ONLY AS REQUIRED) C ONTROL the tripod. MANIPULATION. (1) Firing from the tripod. It is given clearly and at a rate that can be easily understood by the gunners. LEFT. Its purpose is to designate the gun crews and ready them to receive and execute the fire command. RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK. When firing the gun on MCWP 3-15. FIRE MISSION or NUMBER TWO. or RIGHT so many meters. When the target is not obvious. The word meters is omitted as it is the standard unit of measure. RIGHT. 6605. The gunner repeats each element to ensure understanding. When a reference point is used. NUMBER TWO. it is announced as REFERENCE. Fire commands are the instructions issued to the gun crews that enable them to properly engage the desired targets. Subsequent fire commands are issued to adjust fire. Initial fire commands are issued to engage targets and to shift fire to new targets. change the rate of fire. subsequent commands should be given relative to the impact of the previous burst. the gunners must be told to look in a particular direction to see it. When the selected reference point is within the target area. The leader determines which elements of a fire command are obvious to the gunners and which elements must be given to them.1 instructions in a definite. preparing them for fragmentary fire commands in combat. There are two types of fire commands–initial and subsequent. The use of complete fire commands in training makes this sequence second nature for machine gunners. When the squad leader desires to alert both guns. and command to fire.

the interval between the reference point and the target is measured by laying the gun on the reference point and manipulating the designated number of mils to the target. TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING RIGHT TWO FIVE. When using this method. LEFT TWO FIVE. ABOVE GATE. TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING SHORT ONE ZERO. the range to the target is announced.1 be indicated as extending so many mils. the following methods may be used. or fingers from the reference point. TARGET: MACHINE GUN . CENTER OF HEDGE. RIGHT (LEFT) FLANK or NEAR (FAR) END. He fires one or more bursts on the target and completes the designation orally. He then lays one gun on the target and commands WATCH MY BURSTS. However. and accurate method. RIGHT FIVE ZERO. AND REFERENCE: TANK. TARGET: MACHINE GUN IN EDGE OF WOODS. step by step. He designates midpoint and flanks or ends.MCWP 3-15. OVER TWO ZERO. GATE. to the target by naming successive reference points until his attention is directed to the target itself. the gunner must measure this interval in meters or fingers. An obscure target may be identified by first designating an obvious feature (reference point) and then leading the gunner. Examples of the use of reference points within the target area are: Employment and Gunnery REFERENCE: BUNKER. With a tripod-mounted gun. it may cause loss of surprise and premature disclosure of the gun position. When the reference point is outside the target area. the range announced is that to the reference point. meters. a typical command would be: REFERENCE: LONE TREE. The minimum number of bursts necessary will be used. Designating an indistinct target by firing a machine gun is a simple. If the selected reference point is not within the target area. the words mils and meters are always implied for bipod-mounted guns. For example. REFERENCE: RED ROOFED HOUSE. When a reference point within the target area is used to designate the target. RIGHT OF HOUSE. A similar procedure may be accomplished by firing 6-24 . In addition to designating targets orally. MIDPOINT. The leader designating the target announces the general direction of fire if it is not obvious. rapid. HEDGE. depending on the situation: (a) Firing. for example. With the gun on the bipod.

They use the prescribed rate thereafter. and requires the gunners to check the lay. HUN- (5) Assignment/Method. If the target is obvious. rapid. right building. halted column. (4) Range. TRAVERSE AND . they report UP to the team leaders who signal READY to the squad leader. machine gun (any automatic weapon). This element prescribes the class of fire with respect to the gun which is required to effectively engage the target. The rapid rate of fire is measured in rounds per minute and is the rate at which a machine gun may be fired for a limited period of time without danger of damage from overheating. (c) Rate. ONE DRED. This element follows the target descrip- tion and is announced in meters. assign class of fire. tank (any armored vehicle). and that both guns of a pair open fire at the same time. The words range and meters are not used.1 or FREE GUN. The following words are examples of target descriptions: troops (any dismounted enemy personnel). To ensure this. NOTE Fire commands should be as brief and concise as possible. Regardless of the rate of fire announced. For immediate engagement of the tar- two used to inform the gunner of the nature of his target. or NUMBER ONE RIGHT TWO-THIRDS. (b) Laying the Gun. TRAVERSE. (6) Control. The greatest surprise and effect is obtained by a pair of guns opening fire simultaneously at the rapid rate of fire. The sustained rate is directed by announcing SUSTAINED. The sustained rate of fire is measured in rounds per minute and is the rate at which a machine gun may be fired indefinitely without damage from overheating. Methods of Target Engagement portance that machine gun fire be withheld for surprise and maximum effect. NUMBER TWO LEFT TWO-THIRDS. When the gunners are ready to engage the target. This is only given when the required manipulation is not obvious. THREE HUNDRED. The use of tracer ammunition will facilitate observation of fire. (3) Description. hundreds. NUMBER TWO LEFT ONE-THIRD. etc. or cyclic. It is announced as: FIXED. The squad leader then gives the command or signal to fire. or they may announce NUMBER ONE (TWO) UP. The rate of fire to be used may be sustained. The gunners open fire simultaneously on command of the leader. the leader goes to each gun. or NUMBER ONE RIGHT TWO-THIRDS. or thousands. far end. gunners always open and adjust their fire at the rapid rate. or to designate a rate of fire. therefore. To use this method. lays it on the target. For example: FOUR FIVE ZERO. It is often of great im- Section 7 (a) Division. The rapid rate permits a high volume of fire to be delivered for a fixed and relatively short period of time. which is to be engaged may be described as leading truck. The factors influencing the selection of the rate of fire are the size and nature of the target and ammunition supply. Gunners will automatically employ the rapid rate unless another rate is announced. The range is announced in even digits. if several targets are in view. Laying the gun on a target is a simple and accurate method and does not sacrifice surprise. SEARCH. SWINGING TRAVERSE. MCWP 3-15. obvious information is omitted 6-25 (b) Manipulation. This element is utilized only when specific assignments are required to divide the target. This element is given only when required and is discussed in detail under engagement of targets.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery a rifle from the gun positions. the leader may preface the command or signal to commence firing with the words AT MY COMMAND or ON MY SIGNAL. NOTE It is announced as: NUMBER ONE RIGHT HALF. ONE THOUSAND. no description is necessary. the particular target. get. A target description is a word or SEARCH. the command FIRE or the arm-and-hand signal to fire is given without pause. or part of a target. NUMBER TWO LEFT HALF.

Machine Gun Fire Unit. the termination of the alert is announced. the deflection correction must always be given first. deep. searching fire is usually accomplished in 2-mil increments. b. the amount of ammunition required for a wider target is excessive for a single gun. When adjusting fire. A squad of guns is the machine gun fire unit. When possible. END OF MISSION . c. SIX HUNDRED . On level or uniformly sloping ground. Firing is renewed by announcing a subsequent fire command or by announcing a new fire command. the leader will preface it with the words. Whenever practical. Improper distribution results in gaps between beaten zones and allows a part of the enemy to escape or to use his weapons without effective opposition. Subsequent Fire Commands.In fire commands. when the ground is irregular. Manipulation is the process of moving the machine gun between bursts so that fire is distributed over a wide. Also. To allow the gun crew to relax between fire missions. . It indicates that the gun crew will remain on the alert and that additional instructions will follow. the command would be CORRECTION. All initial fire commands must contain ALERT. firing after each manipulation. Manipulation. firing after each manipulation. Firing is resumed with the same data by using the command FIRE. Factors Affecting Distribution. although it is preferable that targets be 100 mils or 6-26 of aiming points along the path of the target and firing a succession of aimed bursts until the assigned portion of the target is covered. For example. he may request a repetition of the element by announcing the misunderstood element with a rising inflection in his voice to denote a question. and reduces the time required to cover the target. to ensure overlap of the beaten zones. targets exceeding the above widths are not assigned to a single gun. although occasions may arise when single guns may profitably be employed. It is CEASE FIRING. Distribution of Fire Fire. and COMMAND. wider targets require appreciable time to traverse and a continuous volume of fire is not placed over the entire target. Repeating and Correcting Initial Fire Commands. This is because the traversing screw on the elevating mechanism of the tripod limits the amount of traverse that can be secured without readjusting the traversing slide lock lever. RANGE. The remaining elements may be omitted only if they are obvious. b. is distributed over the entire target. There is no fixed rule as to the maximum width of a target that may profitably be engaged by a single machine gun. If the gunner fails to understand any element of the fire command. to correct a wrong range command of 500 meters to 600 meters. Traversing fire is accomplished in 2-mil increments. Major shifts in the gunner’s body position are required when firing the gun on the bipod mount. or oblique target. c. When repeating any portion of the fire command. The assignment of a squad of guns to a single mission ensures continuous fire should either gun be put out of action. at least two guns are assigned the same mission. The gunner observes the width and length of the beaten zone of the initial burst and each succeeding aiming point is selected far enough from the preceding burst to allow an overlap of the beaten zones as the target is covered. an incorrect portion is corrected by announcing CORRECTION and then giving the correct command. provides a greater volume of fire on the target. and 50 mils or less in width in the case of the medium gun on the tripod or bipod mounts. THE COMMAND WAS . to be effective. (1) Bipod. .1 when possible. a. (2) Tripod. however. the beaten zone is observed on the ground to . CEASE FIRE Employment and Gunnery less in width in the case of the heavy gun on the tripod. 6701. Finally.MCWP 3-15. . Manipulation is done by selecting a series is announced when the leader wishes to interrupt fire for any reason.

The command for this type of fire is FIXED. An example of a fire command used to engage the type target just described is as follows: FIRE MISSION RIGHT FRONT TROOPS EXTENDING FROM DEAD TREE RIGHT TO CLEARING SEVEN FIVE ZERO TRAVERSE AT MY SIGNAL Figure 6-13. the leader assigns half (or any other 6-27 .1 6702. burst of fire 2 mils outside its corresponding flank of the target. its fire is adjusted on that point.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery determine the amount of search to apply between bursts to ensure overlap of the beaten zones. Wide Targets a. Using a Squad of Guns. When a pair of guns engage frontal targets which are 100 mils or less in Figure 6-14.versed across the target to a point 2 mils outside the other flank. Each gun is traversed back and forth between these two points. the normal traversing method is used. and are also less than the length of the beaten zone in depth. Using a Squad of Guns. and is less than the length of the beaten zone in depth. width for the heavy gun and 50 mils or less in width for the medium gun. and it is tra. Point Targets Targets having a width or depth no greater than the beaten zone for the ground on which they are located are considered as point targets and are engaged by fixed fire. covering the entire target until CEASE FIRING is given (see figure 6-13). Gun crews are trained to follow any movement or change in formation by the enemy after the initial burst of fire.) When the target measures more than 100 mils for the heavy guns and 50 mils for the medium guns in width. Both Flanks Visible to the Gunners. MCWP 3-15. The command for this type of fire is TRAVERSE. Traversing Method. Using a Squad of Guns. Target for Heavy Machine Gun More than 100 Mils in Width (Medium Machine Gun More Than 50 Mils). Each gun delivers the initial (The signal to fire is given after the gunner announces UP. 6703. Traversing Method.

In engaging extremely wide targets. Each squad covers its assigned portion of the target by either of the methods previously described. for example. Both Flanks Invisible to the Gunners.) Figure 6-16. each squad may be assigned one-half (or any other portion) of the target.1 Employment and Gunnery Figure 6-15. portion) of the target to one gun and the remaining half (portion) to the other gun.MCWP 3-15. Using a Squad of Guns. When the flanks of a target are not easily identifiable to the gunner. b. TRAVERSE. Target More Than 100 Mils in Width (Each Squad of Guns Covers the Entire Target). By Section (Minus) Using Four Machine Guns. Traversing Method. Engaging Wide Targets. depending upon the width of the target. LEFT HALF. Traversing Method Using a Section (Minus) of Guns. RIGHT HALF. each gun fires the initial burst 2 mils outside its respective flank and covers its portion as described in subparagraph (1) and as shown in figure 6-14. Flanks of Which are Not Readily Identifiable by the Gunner. laying the guns. EXTENDING FROM DEAD TREE RIGHT TO CLEARING EIGHT HUNDRED NUMBER 1. In either case. NUMBER 1. c. or by using a reference Another example for a fire command used to engage this type of target is as follows: FIRE MISSION RIGHT FRONT TROOPS. 6-28 . The command would be. the target may be identified by firing a gun or rifle. One portion may be much less than the other for purposes of increasing the density of fire on the smaller portion. Each portion is assigned and designated separately as an individual target. LEFT TWO-THIRDS TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND (The command to fire is given when both gunners announce UP. NUMBER 2. RIGHT ONE-THIRD. NUMBER 2. Each squad (pair of guns) engages the entire target as prescribed except when engaging extremely wide targets (see figure 6-15).

The interval over or short between the reference point and the target must be measured with the gun in mils (using computed search method) or by estimating the interval in meters. and shifting the gun the designated number of mils. with the sights set at the range to the target. the gunner lays directly on the designated flank of the target by first measuring the interval between the reference point and that flank of the target (in sights or fingers) and. the gunner measures the interval between the reference point and the flank of the target by laying on the reference point.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. The flanks of an indistinct target may be identified to the gunner as extending so many mils (or so many sights. and traversed to the right or left respectively. its fire adjusted on this point. the prescribed distance to its corresponding flank and then back across the target the total prescribed distance to the other flank. Examples of fire commands that may be used when the flanks of the target are not easily identifiable to the gunner are as follows: point which is visible to the gunner and in the vicinity of the target. With a bipod mount. or yards with the medium gun on bipod mount) from a reference point within the target area.1 estimating the interval over or short between the reference point and the target (in meters). and once the flanks of the target are identified. The reference point method of designating an indistinct target may also be used as described below. by 6-29 . if necessary. When the selected reference point is outside the target area. the target is engaged in the same manner as described for a squad of guns. The first two methods are simple and accurate. the gunner may be directed to the target by announcing the interval to the right or left (over or short) between the reference point and the target. With either the medium or the heavy gun on a tripod mount. The lay of each gun is checked as it passes the reference point (initial aiming point). In this method. Each gun is traversed back and forth across the entire target until cease firing is given. each gun is laid initially on the announced reference point (initial aiming point). fingers. When each gun (on bipod or tripod mount) is laid on the right or left flank respectively. firing after each manipulation (see figure 6-16). and the target is engaged in the same manner as described for either the medium or heavy gun on a tripod mount. its fire is adjusted on the flank.

) RIGHT FLANK TROOPS NINE HUNDRED TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.MCWP 3-15.) Figure 6-17.) LEFT FLANK (Lays and fires gun at right flank. DROP THREE FIVE ZERO METERS TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING. Ends Visible to Gunners.) Employment and Gunnery The leader designates the target by using a reference point outside the target area (machine gun on tripod mounts): FIRE MISSION RIGHT FRONT REFERENCE: DEAD TREE RIGHT ONE SIGHT (FINGER).1 The leader designates the target by firing one gun: FIRE MISSION LEFT FLANK WATCH MY BURSTS (or TRACERS) (Lays and fires gun at left flank. DROP THREE FIVE ZERO METERS (or drop so many mils using computed search) TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING RIGHT FIVE ZERO MILS SIX HUNDRED TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP. 6-30 . Engaging a Deep Enfilade Target With a Pair of Guns. RIGHT ONE SIGHT (FINGER) SIX HUNDRED TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.) The leader designates the target by using a reference point outside the target area (machine guns are on tripod mounts): FIRE MISSION RIGHT FRONT REFERENCE: DEAD TREE RIGHT SIX ZERO MILS.

DEEP TARGETS a. thus taking advantage of the length of the beaten zones to ensure fire on the target with the initial bursts. An example of a fire command for a swinging traverse is as follows: FIRE MISSION LEFT FRONT TRUCKS SWINGING TRAVERSE FIRE (Given after gunner announces UP. the range announced for both guns is that to the midpoint of the target.) When the target is over 200 meters in depth and is to be engaged by a squad of guns. and traversed back and forth. ends visible to gunner. After searching the full extent of the target.) MCWP 3-15. The swinging traverse method used against massed or rapidly moving targets at short ranges is described earlier in this chapter. THREE ZERO MILS SEVEN HUNDRED TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP. If the depth of the target is estimated to be 200 meters or less. covering the entire target until cease firing is given. the fire command may be as follows: FIRE MISSION FRONT HALTED COLUMN SEVEN HUNDRED (midrange) SEARCH AT MY COMMAND FIRE to fire is e. An example of a fire command for a wide target which is to be engaged by a single medium machine gun on a bipod mount is as follows: FIRE MISSION FRONT TROOPS EXTENDING FROM DEAD TREE RIGHT ONE SIGHT (OR FINGER) FIVE HUNDRED TRAVERSE AT MY COMMAND(The signal given after the gunner announces UP. The fires on each gun are adjusted on these initial aiming points and searched to the far and near ends of the target. and both guns are searched up and down between these two limits.) See figure 6-17. the number 1 gun is laid initially on the near end of the target. When the ends are visible to the gunners. and that to the far end for the number 2 gun. In determining the sight setting to be placed on the guns. In other words. Deep targets which are stationary or have limited mobility require only searching fire to cover them effectively. d. When the target is 200 meters or less in depth and is to be engaged by a squad of guns (or by a single gun). Swinging Traverse. its fire adjusted on the flank (or reference point). the fire command may be as follows: FIRE MISSION LEFT FRONT 6-31 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery The leader designates the target by using a reference point within the target area (machine gun on tripod mounts): FIRE MISSION FRONT REFERENCE: LONE TREE TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING RIGHT TWO ZERO MILS. LEFT. the direction of search of each gun is reversed. The leader may designate the flank on which he desires fire to be placed initially. and the number 2 gun is laid initially on the far end. it engages the target in the same manner as either gun of a squad as previously described. If the target extends over 200 meters in depth. The command for this type of fire is SEARCH. covering the entire target until cease firing is given.1 6704. respectively. Using a Pair of Guns (1) Stationary deep target. the depth of the target is considered when firing a squad of guns. The single gun is laid just outside either flank (or on a reference point with the target area). the range to the near end is announced for number 1 gun. Using a Single Gun.

until it has reach the near end of the target as designated in meters (or mils). For example. the target may be identified by firing a gun or rifle (tracer). the leader computes the amount of search from the reference point in mils by the following method: Determine the ranges to the near or far ends of the target. their fires are adjusted individually on those ends. firing after each manipulation. Thus. if necessary. the gunner lays directly on the designated end of the target by first estimating the interval over or short between the reference point and the end of the target (in meters) and.100 meters distance is visible. respectively. or by using a reference point which is visible to the gunner and in the vicinity of the target. A suitable reference point within the target at 1. (computed from firing tables for 7. and the target is engaged in the 6-32 to describe the depth of a target in mils. When it is desired (2) Stationary deep target. until it has reached the far end of the target. In this method. laying the guns. With either the medium or the heavy gun on a tripod mount. by measuring the interval right or left between the reference point and the target (in sights or fingers). the gunner may be directed to the target by announcing the interval over or short (right or left) between the reference point and the target. the number 2 gun is searched up. Once the limits of the target are identified. find the required angles of elevation (AE) in mils for both ranges and determine the difference.1 TROOPS ALONG RIGHT EDGE OF WOODS NUMBER 1. appendix A) a deep target has been sighted. the gunner measures the interval right or left between the reference point and the target by laying on the reference point. From the firing tables. the target is engaged in the same manner as described in subparagraph (1). When the number 1 and number 2 guns (on the bipod or the tripod mount) are laid on the near or far end. with their sights set at the range to the reference point. When designation by tracer (firing a gun or rifle) is likely to disclose the gun position. the amount of search is increased.MCWP 3-15. the direction of search is reversed. both guns are laid initially on the announced reference point (initial aiming point). (3) Computed search method. SIX HUNDRED. with the sights set at the range to the midpoint of the target and shifting the gun the designated number of mils. NUMBER 2. (If the fire is plunging.) Employment and Gunnery same manner as described for either the medium or heavy gun on a tripod mount in subparagraph (1). the reference point method may be used. or otherwise destroy the element of surprise. The limits of an indistinct deep target are identified to the gunners as extending so many meters (or mils) from a reference point within the target area. If the ends of the target are not visible to the gunner. When each gun has reached the near and far end. and both guns are searched up and down between these two limits. it is increased to an even total so that the search can be made in 2-mil increments. The interval over or short between the reference point and the end of the target may be measured with the gun in mils (using computed search method) or by estimating the interval in meters. The difference between the angle of elevation is the amount of search required on level ground with the gun and target at the same elevation. ends invisible to gunner. The number 1 gun is searched down. When the selected reference point is outside the target area. NINE HUNDRED SEARCH AT MY COMMAND FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.) If the computed amount of search is an odd number of mils. the ends of which are not visible to the gunners. The depth of the target is estimated as 200 meters and the reference point appears to be midway between the ends. The first method (firing the gun) is the quickest and simplest method of designating an indistinct target.000 meters and to the . respectively. With the bipod mount. firing after each manipulation. covering the entire target until cease firing is given. the range to the near end is 1. and their fire adjusted on this point.62 ball ammunition.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 6-18. Squad of Guns Engaging a Shallow or Oblique Target. far end is 1,200 meters. The angle of elevation for a range of 1,000 meters is 16.2 mils; for 1,200 meters, 24.1 mils; the difference being 8 mils. This target extends 4 mils over and 4 mils short of the reference point. Searching in 2-mil increments, the gunners cover the target by searching 4 mils over and 4 mils short of the reference point. This target is described to the gunners as follows:
TARGET, TROOPS EXTENDING OVER 4 MILS; SHORT 4 MILS. SIX HUNDRED (range to reference point) SEARCH AT MY COMMAND FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.)

The leader designates the target by using a reference point outside the target area (machine guns on tripod mounts). An example of this type fire command is as follows:
FIRE MISSION LEFT FRONT REFERENCE: DEAD TREE RIGHT THREE ZERO MILS; ADD SIX MILS TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING OVER TWO MILS NINE HUNDRED SEARCH AT MY COMMAND FIRE

When the ends of the target are not visible to the gunners (using a reference point within the target area), the fire command would be as follows:
FIRE MISSION RIGHT FRONT REFERENCE: LONE BUSH TARGET: TROOPS EXTENDING SHORT TWO MILS, OVER FOUR MILS

(Given after gunners announce UP.)

(4) Target moving away from the gun position.

When the target is moving rapidly away from the
6-33

MCWP 3-15.1 guns, both guns are laid on the far end with the range to that point and searched down.
(5) Target moving toward the gun position. If the

Employment and Gunnery
(1) Flanks invisible. If the flanks of the target are

target is moving rapidly toward the gun positions, both guns are laid on the near end with the range to that point and searched up. The element of the fire command for covering a rapidly approaching or receding target is BOTH GUNS: NEAR (FAR) END; SEARCH. b. By Section (Minus) Using Four Machine Guns. A section (minus) of four guns uses the same method as a pair of guns, each squad (pair of guns) engaging the target as if it were acting alone. In case it becomes necessary to switch the fire of one squad of guns to another target, the original target is still covered by the remaining squad. c. Subdivision of a Deep Target. A deep target need never be subdivided since the elevating mechanism of either the medium or heavy gun allows enough search to cover any deep target within the maximum usable range for direct laying (2,000 meters). d. Using a Single Gun. The single gun is laid on the near end of the target with a range to the midpoint, its fire adjusted on the near end, and then searched up and down covering the entire target. When a reference point within the target area is used, the single gun is laid on the announced reference point with the range to the reference point, its fire adjusted on this point, searched down to the near end, and then searched up and down covering the entire target, until cease firing is given.

not easily identifiable by the gunner, the target may be designated in the same manner as described earlier in this chapter. A reference point within the target area; however, is not used as an initial aiming point because of the difficulty in describing the obliquity of the target.
(2) By section (minus) using four guns. A section

(minus) of four guns uses the same method as a squad of guns, each squad engaging the target as if it were acting alone. In case it becomes necessary to switch the fire of one squad of guns to another target, the original target is still covered by the remaining squad.
(3) Using a single gun. The single gun is laid ini-

tially on the near flank, and then traversed and searched back and forth, covering the entire target until cease firing is given.

6705. Oblique Targets
Using a squad of guns, oblique targets are engaged with combined traversing and searching fire (see figure 6-18). The gunner employs enough search while firing to keep the center of impact of the beaten zone on the target. The range announced in the initial fire command is determined in the same manner as for a deep target. Figure 6-19. Sample Fire Command. b. Fire Commands. Examples of fire commands used for oblique targets are: When the target is not wide enough to necessitate subdivision, is 200 meters or less in depth, and is to be engaged by a squad of guns (or by a single gun):

6-34

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery
FIRE MISSION RIGHT FRONT TROOPS EXTENDING FROM BLACK STUMP - RIGHT TO LONE PINE SEVEN HUNDRED (midrange) TRAVERSE AND SEARCH AT MY SIGNAL

MCWP 3-15.1 traversing and searching fire (as in the case of oblique targets) are called area targets. The area which can be covered effectively by a squad of guns or by a section (minus) of four guns is small because of the time and ammunition required for this type. a. Using a Squad of Guns
(1) Flanks visible. When the flanks of the target are

(Signal to fire given after gunners announce UP.) When the target measures 100 mils or less in width, is 200 meters or less in depth, and is to be engaged by a section (minus) of four guns:
SQUAD 1, SQUAD 2 FIRE MISSION FRONT TROOPS TO THE RIGHT OF RED BANK SEVEN HUNDRED (midrange) TRAVERSE AND SEARCH AT MY SIGNAL

visible to the gunners, the guns are laid just outside their corresponding flanks. Each gun then fires traversing fire across its assigned portion of the target, changes elevation the total amount prescribed in the initial fire command, traverses back to the flank from which traversing fire was started, and ceases firing. A typical manipulation element of the fire command would be TRAVERSE, SEARCH UP 4 (MILS) or SEARCH UP 100 (METERS). Further firing over the area is on the leader’s orders.

(Signal to fire given after gunners announce UP.) When the target is wide enough to necessitate subdividing, is over 200 meters in depth, and is to be engaged by a squad of guns or by a section (minus) of four guns:
FIRE MISSION FRONT TROOPS EXTENDING FROM TRUCK - RIGHT TO BRIDGE NUMBER 1 (and 3 if section [minus] of four guns is

engaging the target),
SEVEN HUNDRED

(and 4 if section [minus] of four guns is engaging the target),
NUMBER 2 ONE THOUSAND NUMBER 1 (and 3), RIGHT HALF NUMBER 2 (and 4), LEFT HALF TRAVERSE AND SEARCH AT MY SIGNAL

(Signal to fire given after gunners announce UP.)

6706. Area Targets
Targets which cannot be covered by either traversing fire or searching fire alone, or by combined Figure 6-21. Moving Target Aiming Points.
6-35

MCWP 3-15.1
(2) Flanks invisible. When the flanks of the target are invisible to the gunners, the leader indicates their location and the point at which each gun fires its initial burst, either by firing one gun, by laying both guns, by firing a gun or rifle, or by use of a reference point. When the location of the flanks or the reference point (which may be the initial aiming point) have been announced, the procedure to cover the area is the same as when the flanks are visible.
FIRE MISSION FRONT

Employment and Gunnery

(Lays each gun on the right and left flank, respectively)
AREA: TROOPS IN GREEN PATCH NINE HUNDRED TRAVERSE SEARCH UP THREE MILS (or up so many meters) AT MY COMMAND FIRE (Given after gunners announce UP.)

b. By Section (Minus) Using Four Guns. A section (minus) of four guns uses the same method as a squad of guns, with each squad of guns within the section (minus) engaging the target as if it were acting alone. c. Using a Single Gun. The single gun uses the same method of engaging an area target as described previously for either gun of a squad. d. Fire Commands. Figure 6-19 is a sample fire command. Examples of fire commands used for area targets are: When there is no reference point along the near or far edge of the target, the leader must lay the guns for the initial burst and complete the fire command orally.

Using a reference point at the far edge of the target:
FIRE MISSION FRONT

Section 8

Overhead Fires
REFERENCE: BLACK STUMP TARGET: TROOPS IN AREA EXTENDING RIGHT TWO ZERO MILS; LEFT THREE ZERO MILS EIGHT HUNDRED (range to reference point) TRAVERSE: SEARCH DOWN THREE MILS (or down

so many meters)
AT MY COMMAND FIRE (Given after gunners

announce UP.)

6707. Moving Targets
The engagement of moving targets with the MK-19 poses special problems because of the slow velocity of the round compared to most machine guns. In general, leads must be increased by four times when using the MK-19 as opposed to the M2 .50 cal. For additional information on tracking and leading moving targets see paragraph 41113 in chapter 4. The fundamentals used to hit moving targets are the same as those needed to hit stationary targets. However, the procedures to engage moving targets vary as the angle, speed, and range of the target vary. Targets moving directly at the gunner are engaged the same as a stationary target; there is no change in the application of the fundamentals. But fast-moving targets at varying ranges and angles do require
6-36

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery changes in the application of steady position and aiming. For aerial target engagement, see section 14 in this chapter. a. Leads. To hit a moving target, the gun must be aimed ahead of the target a sufficient distance to cause the bullet and target to arrive at the same time at the same point. This distance is measured in target lengths. One target length as seen by the gunner is one lead. Leads are measured from the center of mass. The sample lead table in Figure 6-20 gives the amount of lead needed to hit a moving target moving at right angles to the gunner at speed and ranges indicated. The gunner makes adjustments as conditions change. If target speed is 7 1/2 miles per hour, the amount of lead is half that shown on the table; at 30 miles per hour, double that shown. The angle the target moves also changes the lead. If the target is moving on an oblique angle, only half the lead is required. For a target moving directly at the gunner, the aiming point is below the center base of the target depending on range and slope of the ground. For a target moving directly away from a gunner, the aiming point is above the center base of the target (see figure 6-21). Too much lead is better than too little because the target moves into the beaten zone, and observation of the strike of the rounds is easier in relation to the target.
SPEED IN MPH
15

MCWP 3-15.1 An individual with a combat load can run as fast as 8 miles per hour for short periods on the battlefield. b. Tracking Techniques. The gunner aims at a point ahead of the target equal to the estimated number of leads, maintains this lead by tracking the target (manipulates the weapon at the same angular speed as that of the target), and then fires. Tracking puts the gunner in position for a second burst if the first one misses. c. Trapping Techniques. The gunner establishes an aiming point forward of the target and along the target path. He presses the trigger as the target reaches the appropriate point in regard to lead. d. Bipod Techniques. For targets moving directly away or at the gunner using a bipod, the same procedures are used. From a prone position, the gunner may be required to adjust his position quickly depending on range, angle, and speed of the target.
(1) Steady position. If appropriate lead cannot be

RANGE OF TARGET
300 M ½ target length 500 M 1 target length 900 M 2 target lengths

Figure 6-20. Vehicle Lead Table. NOTE

achieved by shifting your shoulders right or left (traverse) or by moving your elbows closer or farther apart (search), redistribute your weight to your elbows and toes and raise your body off the ground. Using your toes, shift your body right or left in the opposite direction of the target and pivot on your elbows until you are well ahead of the target. Rapidly assume a steady position, obtain the sight picture, lead and engage the target. Trapping is the preferred technique. In order to apply this method, the bipod legs must move freely. When firing from a fighting position, you must be flexible enough to track any target in your sector. If lead cannot be achieved, slide the bipod legs in the appropriate direction (left

Figure 6-22. Components of Minimum Clearance.
6-37

MCWP 3-15.1

Employment and Gunnery

Figure 6-23. Theory Behind the Gunner’s and Leader’s Rule. or right) ahead of the target and continue as in the prone position. Trapping is still the preferred technique. If the terrain does not permit sliding the weapon left or right, lift the bipod legs off the ground and place them where you can aim ahead of the target, reestablish a steady position, and continue as before.
(2) Aim. You must determine angle, speed, and range quickly; acquire the appropriate lead; and engage the target. Align the front sight post in the proper relationship to lead the target. For targets

moving directly away, place the front sight post above center of mass. For targets moving directly at you, align the front sight post below center of mass. For all other targets, align the front sight post with center base of the target with the appropriate lead.
(3) Breath control. There are no changes except that

you must hold your breath quickly because of the fleeting nature of moving targets.
(4) Trigger control. There is no change in the appli-

cation of this fundamental.

Figure 6-24. Application of the Gunner’s and Leader’s Rules.
6-38

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

Figure 6-25. Gunner's Rule. A margin of safety equal to the vertical distance which extends a 5-mil angle at the gun or 3 meters, whichever is greater. An additional allowance to compensate for a 15-percent error in range determination. To obtain this minimum clearance, the gun is elevated so that the center of the cone of fire is raised from the feet of the friendly troops, to minimum clearance above their heads. The amount of the elevation change to give this minimum clearance is known as the safety angle and is the difference between the angle of elevation to hit the troops and the angle of elevation for troop safety.

Overhead fire is fire delivered over the heads of friendly troops. A machine gun on a tripod is capable of delivering this type of fire because of the small and uniform dispersion of the cone of fire. In the attack, the use of overhead fire permits the machine gun to support the advance of rifle units. NOTE Overhead fire is not delivered when the gun is mounted on the bipod, unless the vertical interval of the troops below the gun target line is such as to make safety obvious. The center of the cone of fire must clear the heads of the friendly troops by a prescribed distance. See figure 6-22. This distance, known as minimum clearance, is found by adding together the following elements: The height of a man, standing, taken as 1.8 meters. Half the vertical dimension of the 100 percent cone of fire at the range to the troops.

6801. Rules
a. Corresponding Range on Level or Uniformly Sloping Ground. When the gun is fired from the tripod with the required safety angle, the center of impact determines the shortest range at which fire can be delivered over the heads of friendly troops. The range from the gun to the point of strike is called the corresponding range. When the ground
6-39

MCWP 3-15.1 is level or uniformly sloping between the gun and the target, the corresponding range for the safety angle used is obtained by converting the angle of elevation for troop safety, which is expressed in mils, into range. For example, with the M240G, the angle of elevation for troop safety for troops at a range of 600 meters, with 7.62 ball ammunition, is 23.2 mils (see appendix A, firing tables for 7.62 ball ammunition, table II). In table II (firing table for 7.62 ball ammunition), the range for 23.2 mils is 1,175 meters (even figure to the nearest 25 above the exact figure of 1,162 meters), which is the corresponding range when troops are 600 meters in front of the gun. Thus, no target at a closer range than 1,175 meters can be engaged over level or uniformly sloping ground when the troops are 600 meters from the gun. The same data can be determined for the M2 machine gun by using table II of appendix B. b. Uneven Terrain. Level or uniformly sloping ground between the gun and target will seldom be found in the field. This prevents the use of standard overhead firing tables in all but a few cases. The problem presented to the gunner or leader planning the fires of guns is the determination of the exact point on the ground to which it is safe for friendly troops to advance without being hit by friendly overhead fire. The exact point on the ground where the

Employment and Gunnery lowest bullet hits in any given burst depends on the terrain, the gun position, and the target location. This exact point is impossible to practically calculate because of the infinite number of combinations possible. So, in order to fire over the heads of friendly troops in these instances, calculations must be based on other criteria. In figure 6-23 a line is shown that extends from the gun position to a point lower than the target by one half of the vertical cone height and the height of a standing man. A man could safely stand anywhere on or below the line between points “A” and “B.” Point “A” is the point where the man’s head touches the line of sight and point “B” is the point underneath the target. If a safety distance is added by drawing the line to point “C,” as shown in figure 6-24, clearance is provided above the troop’s heads even if they are standing directly under the target. Safety can be guaranteed at any point on or below that line regardless of the terrain profile. The line between “A” and “C” in figure 6-24 is the safety line. The line angle between the line of sight and the safety line is the safety angle. The point where the line intersects the terrain is the safety limit. When friendly troops reach the safety limit they begin to rise above the safety line because the terrain slopes upward toward the target.

Figure 6-26. Leader's Rule.
6-40

1 Figure 6-27. This point is the safety limit. The gunner’s and leader’s rules allow the determination of the safety limit by setting the safety angle on the gun and looking across the gun’s sights. overhead fire must be ceased or shifted.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. The range to target must be determined with the most accurate means available. The safety limit is determined by the intersection of the new line of aim and the ground. It is not safe to continue firing when friendly troops have passed this point. Look through the sights and note the point where this new line of aim strikes the ground. When the feet of the friendly troops reach this point the fire must be lifted or shifted. M240G Gunner's and Leader's Rule Data. set the sight on 1. set the line of aim.500 meters. set the sight on 1. Without disturbing the lay of the gun. The gunner’s rule is used to de- termine the safety limit when the range to the target is 850 meters or less and friendly troops are at least 350 meters in front of the gun position (see figure 6-25). The gunner applies this rule unless the safety limit has been determined and announced by the platoon or section leader. The rule is as follows: Lay the gun on the target with the sights set to hit the target. (1) Gunner’s rule.50 cal. For the M240G. 6-41 . When the feet of the friendly troops pass this point. For the M2 .600 meters.

whichever is greater. (2) Leader’s Rule. The leader may want to identify a new terrain feature if one is closer to the line of aim than the first feature selected. If the line of aim intersects the selected terrain feature. while gunners on the safety limit using an identifiable terrain feature. if the application of the gunner’s rule results in a safety limit that. Friendly troops could advance to those trees without rising above the safety line. If friendly troops did advance to (A) they would be well above the safety line and could possibly be hit by the machine gun’s fire.600 meters or the range to the target plus 500 meters. Set the line of aim for the M240G. Under no conditions should the sight be set less than 1. The range to the target must be determined with the most accurate means available.” If the line of aim intersects the ground above the selected terrain feature then the selected feature is safe to use as a safety limit. giving his machine guns more time to engage the enemy. in the leader’s opinion. For example. The leader may want to orient his Employment and Gunnery Section 9 Techniques of Predetermined Fire because the line of aim intersects the ground at that point and is.50 cal. The rule is as follows: The leader selects an easily identifiable terrain feature to which he believes friendly troops can advance safely.1 Gunners report SAFE (friendly troops are not past the safety limit) or NOT CLEAR (friendly troops are past the safety limit) to indicate whether or not it is safe to fire. Set the line of aim for the M2 . is too restrictive. Example: Target range = 1. Set the sight on 1. It provides a very large margin of safety for friendly troops. therefore. The gunner(s) lays the gun on the target with the sights set to hit the target. Note the point where the new line of aim strikes the ground.MCWP 3-15. a terrain feature may be below the line of aim on the gunner’s rule and deemed unsafe as a safety limit. Leave the sight set to the target range. Example: If the unit leader selected the center of the open area between the clumps of trees (A and B) in figure 6-26 as the terrain feature that he wanted to use as the safety limit then he could use that feature 6-42 . The leader’s rule is used to determine if that terrain feature selected by the leader can be used as the safety limit. Depress the muzzle by 11 mils (one mil equals one click on the elevating hand wheel) and then depress the muzzle another 20 mils for a total of 31 mils. Using the T&E depress the muzzle of the gun by a number of mils equal to the range to target in hundreds of meters. Example: If the unit leader had selected the single tree (A) in figure 6-26 as the terrain feature he wanted to use for a safety limit he would see that it cannot be used because the line of aim intersects the ground below it. the “actual safety limit. Example: If the unit leader had selected the pair of trees (B) in figure 6-26 as the terrain feature that he wanted to use for a safety limit then he could use them because they are located below the point where the line of aim intersects the ground. When the leader’s rule is applied that same terrain feature may be on or above the line of aim and therefore would be safe to use as the safety limit. The gunner’s rule. Relay the gun back on to the target ensuring that the proper range to the target has been reset on the sights. At ranges under 850 meters the leader’s rule can be used to override the gunner’s rule. The gunner will report the location of the safety limit to the squad leader. plus an extra 20 mils. The leader’s rule is more complicated and allows the leader to “fine tune” the safety margin. the selected feature is safe to use as the safety limit. is quick and simple. If the line of aim is below the selected terrain feature. using sight settings to determine the safety angle. then a new terrain feature must be selected that is on or above the line of aim.100 meters.400 meters.

care being taken not to change the laying of the gun on the target. the gunner moves the sight back to the range to the target in order to check. the gunners report SAFE or NOT CLEAR to indicate whether or not it is safe to fire. Figure 6-27 illustrates the M240G’s safety margins allowed by both rules and demonstrates the safety of the leader’s rule at ranges under 850 meters. Elevation Reading. Procedure Before Friendly Troops Reach the Limit of Safety (1) Safety limit identified on the ground. still affording a high degree of safety to friendly troops. while firing. 6-43 . (3) Checking laying while firing. the limit is indicated with the rear sight of each gun. 6802. In case safety has been determined by the platoon or section leader. After the safety limit has been determined. the laying on the target. After determining or noting the safety limits. he announces the limit of safety so that the gunners and squad leaders are able to identify it.1 Figure 6-28. When the gunner’s rule is Figure 6-29. c. Use of Binocular in Applying Safety Rules Figure 6-30. the gunners and all leaders note some terrain feature by means of which the limit may be identified on the ground. Direction Reading.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Firing for Effect on a Predetermined Target. (2) Report by gunners. applied. When necessary.

The gunner’s and leader’s rules are applied with the inverted sight leaf in the binocular in a manner similar to that with the rear sight on the gun. Field Expedient–Base Stake Method. the safety is checked with the gun sights. and target are about the same elevation. Do not use worn barrels or barrels that show evidence of previous overheating. Figure 6-31.50 cal: Use depression stops to prevent the muzzle of the gun from being accidentally lowered below the limit of safety. tripod must be firmly emplaced. Do not deliver overhead fires without use of tripod and T&E mechanism. refer to the appropriate overhead fire table. Troop Safety Zones At times it may be imperative to deliver overhead fire even though the gunner’s or the leader’s rule indicates that it is not safe to fire. Do not fire overhead fire through trees which are likely to deflect bullets into friendly troops. troops. Employment and Gunnery 6803. Field Expedient–Aiming Stake Method.MCWP 3-15. After the guns are emplaced.1 It is frequently desirable to determine safety for overhead fires before guns are placed in position. do not deliver overhead fire if the range Figure 6-32. Such conditions will usually exist when the target is at a long range and the guns. Unless the terrain or firing tables provide obvious safety. To cover such cases. Safety may be approximately determined by means of the inverted sight leaf in the binocular. 6-44 . Observe the following additional precautions when firing overhead fires with the M240G and the M2 .

. Methods of Laying the Machine Gun Mounting the machine gun on the tripod provides a stable platform from which the gun can be fired and enables the crew to engage targets utilizing both direct and indirect fire. Field Expedient–Notched Stake Method.1 Figure 6-34. In all cases.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery from the gun to target is less than 350 meters or exceeds 850 meters. do not use tracer ammunition for overhead fires beyond this range. 6901. Field Expedient–Horizontal Log Method. When the friendly troops reach the safety limit. Do not allow cones of fire to cross over the heads of friendly troops. MCWP 3-15. Application of gunner’s and leader’s rules requires that the guns be accurately zeroed. care must be taken not to disturb the mount once initial readings have been taken from the T&E mechanism. Ensure that all members of the gun crew are aware of the safety limit. firing ceases. as this will 6-45 Figure 6-33. These capabilities provide the means by which accurate data can be collected to enable the gunner to engage targets under all conditions of visibility. Since the trajectories of the M240G tracer ammunition are unpredictable beyond 750 meters (which results from the round becoming unstable as the tracer material burns out). The commanders of troops required to move beneath overhead fires must be informed that such fires are planned.

this data should be determined to the nearest mil. In order to engage targets.1 provide inaccurate data and may endanger friendly troops.MCWP 3-15. Using the T&E Mechanism Proper utilization of the T&E mechanism is what principally distinguishes the machine gun from the Figure 6-35. M2 Compass Method The most accurate method of engaging targets is to utilize the M2 compass method. a. the section or squad leader determines the quadrant elevation angle (see section 11). In order to engage the desired target. This can be accomplished either by use of the T&E mechanism or one of the field expedient methods. Employment and Gunnery automatic rifle. he duplicates that angle prior to firing. 6903. Direction and elevation readings constitute the data necessary to engage a predetermined target. When pos- 6902. the gunner must be able to lay the machine gun on predetermined targets. These readings are taken from the traversing bar and the T&E mechanism. T&E Method. Use of Auxiliary Aiming Point. This method enables the gunner to measure the horizontal and vertical angles and thereby place the proper elevation on the T&E mechanism to engage the desired target without adjusting onto the target and revealing the gun position. View Through Binocular. Determine direction to the nearest mil is determined by reading the mil setting on the traversing bar and either adding or subtracting the mil setting on the traversing handwheel. Determine elevation by reading the upper elevating screw and the elevating handwheel. 6-46 . Section 10 Final Protective Lines sible. See figure 6-29. and by placing the M2 compass on the flat portion of the feed tray cover. See figure 6-28 and paragraph 6501.

or some other suitable material is needed to use this technique. This technique is used the simplest and most useful field expedient. Maintaining the same positions and grip. Method of Laying When the Ground is Level or Uniformly Sloping. If. In this case. the following procedure is used. field expedients are used to supplement the T&E method. for some reason. targets can be made predetermined by the use of notched or forked stakes. Normally. raise the rear sight slide to its uppermost position and manipulate the gun until the correct sight picture is obtained. See figure 6-32. bursts are fired 2 mils to the right and left of center. record it on the range card for future use. Stakes are used to define the sector limits and the FPL. the bipod mount is being used instead of the tripod. Align the stake so that the two pieces of luminous material are adjacent (aligned for direction) and the top edges of both pieces of material are level (aligned for elevation). thus. The base stake method is MCWP 3-15. Raise the rear sight slide to its uppermost position. The stakes are driven into the ground so that the butt stock rests in the notches Figure 6-36. luminous paint. searching fire will not be necessary because of the length of the beaten zone. (1) Base stake method.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery After the direction and elevation has been determined. but it requires some light at the gun position. One stake is set out for each target. b. (2) Aiming stake method. Field Expedients. traverse 2 mils in one direction and fire. Luminous tape. The T&E method is more accurate. Note that the T&E mechanism is still in use. See figure 6-33. (3) Horizontal log method. the guns are allowed 2 mils of traverse in each direction (see figure 6-30). After firing the first burst. This field expedient in particular will seriously limit the ability to quickly and effectively engage targets outside the sector. A stake is driven into the ground under the gas cylinder to pick up the elevation needed to fire the FPL (see figure 6-31). direct the assistant gunner to drive the stake into the ground about 1 meter in front of the gun. To hit a target when it cannot be seen. therefore. After the gun has been laid to hit the target. 6-47 . Field expedients include the use of stakes and other devices to engage predetermined targets. When firing. then 4 mils in the other direction (firing a burst after each 2 mil change). the tripod is used. A log or board is placed between the sector stakes in such a way that the barrel will be at the proper elevation to obtain grazing fire across the front. to define sector limits and fields of grazing fire. but not the T&E mechanism. unless the target is being engaged with plunging fire. (4) Notched stake method.1 Place a strip of luminous tape or paint at least halfway up the rear of the front sight post and on the top of a stake. Move the head slightly to the right so that the front sight post appears in the left corner of the rectangle formed by the rear sight slide and the rear sight lead. The FPL would be located along one of the sector stakes.

The heavy machine gun may be laid by using an auxiliary aiming point that is not more than 20 mils off the gun-target line (10 mils with the medium machine gun). or aiming stake) which the gunner is always able to see. he aligns on the target that graduation which corresponds with the range to the target (1. The gun is first laid on the target with the correct sight setting to hit the target. for example. the gunner lays on the object selected as the auxiliary aiming point and fires. fire may often be directed by use of an auxiliary aiming point. the leader announces these settings in his fire command and orders the gunner to lay on the auxiliary aiming point.350 sight right 20. the initial lay is verified by firing. Using the inverted sight leaf. distributing the fire as ordered by the unit leader. when fire is to be placed on the target.050). range 1. securing data by one of the two methods given below. and when the tactical situation permits. 6-48 . An example of a fire command is: FIRE MISSION FRONT AUXILIARY AIMING POINT BLACK STUMP 1. See figure 6-34. Dead Space. See figure 6-35. Shallow trenches or grooves are dug for the bipod feet. bush. (5) Auxiliary aiming point method. The settings on the rear sight and the windage gauge are recorded. Using these readings as the sight setting and deflection. the deflection is read on the horizontal mil scale of the binocular.1 when the gun is laid to hit the target. without disturbing the lay of the gun. may be determined by means of the rear sight slide and windage scale on the gun. (6) Binocular method. no matter what the visibility conditions may be. When the target Employment and Gunnery (7) Gun method. Data for auxiliary aiming points is invisible to the gunner or is exceptionally difficult to see. The leader selects a clearly defined object in the vicinity of the target (see figure 6-35). When the auxiliary aiming point is not on the gun-target line. Keeping the binocular in that position. he reads the graduation on the scale opposite the auxiliary aiming point. the rear sight is manipulated so that the line of aim is directed at some clearly defined object (stump. Figure 6-38.350 SIGHT RIGHT 20 FIXED AT MY COMMAND FIRE Figure 6-37. Then. Method of Laying When There is a Break in the Uniform Slope (For Ranges Less Than 600 Meters). Then.MCWP 3-15.

62mm. because of irregularities in the terrain. The gunner selects an aiming point on the FPL or zero line at a range of approximately 600 meters (see figure 6-36). The length of the forward half of the beaten zone (50 meters) is added to the range (600 meters) in computing the total possible danger space on level or uniformly sloping ground. Sectors of Fire In the defense. Upon determining along which limit of the sector the FPL is to lie. a. However. the gun is laid on the FPL. He then lifts the rear legs of the tripod and aligns the muzzle in the approximate direction of the line. (2) Medium machine guns on tripods 61001. the gunner sets the traversing slide toward that end of the traversing bar which is opposite the direction of the FPL. Except when targets are being engaged. (a) Direction. the gunner centers the traversing slide at zero on the traversing bar scale. For all readings of the traversing bar scale. The entire cone of fire does not rise more than 1. the left edge of the traversing slide is used as an index. with the M240G) the center of the cone of fire does not rise above 1 meter. level ground or ground that slopes uniformly for 600 meters is not often available. machine gun squads are assigned sectors of fire. When the sector of fire does not include an FPL.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. The assistant gunner measures the angle of quadrant elevation by means of an M2 compass or gunner’s quadrant. approximately 650 meters. The sector of fire should not exceed 800 mils (45 degrees). (b) Elevation. (7. and that it points toward a clearly defined landmark in the area. He then lifts the rear legs of the tripod and aligns the gun on the designated line. the bands of grazing fire placed along the FPL. a zero line is used. the inner limits of which are usually. If a zero line is used instead of an FPL. The gunner centers the traversing handwheel mechanism and zeroes the traversing micrometer. The machine gun fire unit is responsible for engaging the enemy within its sector.8 meters. subjecting him to fire as he approaches. The gunner lays the gun on an aiming point on the FPL or zero line at a range of 6-49 61002. It is desirable that the zero line approximately bisect the sector. Two cases are given in the following paragraphs to . (b) Elevation. The gunner lays the gun in the direction of the FPL or zero line and zeroes the dial. By doing this. and vice versa. Level or Uniformly Sloping Ground (1) Heavy gun An FPL is a predetermined line along which grazing fire is placed to stop an enemy assault. The fire is usually fixed as to direction and elevation and can be fired under all conditions of visibility. and finally Section 11 Range Cards forcing him to pass through coordinated bands of grazing fire before he can make his assault. When fixed fire is incapable of producing the maximum effective grazing fire. (a) Direction. he obtains the maximum angle of traverse away from the FPL in the direction of the targets in his sector. Methods of Laying Final Protective Lines On level or uniformly sloping ground up to a range of 600 meters. NOTE Directional laying of the gun to the left requires that the traversing slide be set to the right of the zero mark on the traversing bar.1 illustrate the different types of terrain on which FPLs may be placed and the methods of laying the gun for elevation and direction to get the maximum amount of grazing fire in each case. some searching fire may be used in conjunction with the fire of other weapons to ensure that all of the FPL is covered. but not always. The traversing bar reading of zero is indicated on the range card.

MCWP 3-15. Standard Range Card Form. 6-50 .1 Employment and Gunnery Blank Form Figure 6-39.

Standard Range Card Form—Continued. 6-51 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Sample With a Final Protective Line Figure 6-39.

MCWP 3-15.1 Employment and Gunnery Figure 6-40. Range Card With a Principal Direction of Fire. 6-52 .

The gunner lays the gun by sighting MCWP 3-15. the gunner immediately begins firing on the FPL at the rapid rate for 2 minutes. (See appendix G for more detail. Partial Defilade. as previously described. Dead Space. unless otherwise directed. Dead space exists any time the center mass of a man’s chest drops below the line of aim. This can be done by walking the trace of the FPL. is that portion of the FPL that cannot be covered by grazing fire. This dead space 61003. If personnel are unable to move beyond the gun position.) d. ravines. Minimum and Maximum Position Defilade. Irregularly Sloping Ground (1) Direction. From the 2-minute mark until the signal to cease fire is given. and Direct Lay Areas. (2) Elevation. 6-53 . in the desired direction. when replaced on the gun. Specific details concerning laying in an FPL are contained in appendix G. The location of dead space along the FPL should be accurately determined. c. allows the gun to be laid for the same elevation. The gunner selects an aiming point on the ground and near the break in the uniform slope. Laying in the FPL. Figure 6-41. See figure 6-37. b. observation of fire both from behind the gun and from the flank will assist in the location of dead space. then obtains the number on the elevating micrometer dial toward which the indicator is pointing. Rates of Fire on the Final Protective Line When the signal to fire the FPL is received. He notes the sign and the first number whose graduation is visible above the elevating handwheel on the elevating screw scale. as discussed in this section. the gunner fires at the sustained rate of fire. lays the gun on that point and elevates it 2 mils by means of the elevating handwheel. A combination of these numbers.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery approximately 600 meters. and with a sight setting of the range to the selected point. and small depressions in the ground may allow passage under the grazing fire along the FPL. Dead space. Streams.1 must be covered by other weapons (see figure 6-38).

who use it to organize the defense and prepare a fire plan sketch. A separate range card is made for an alternate position. no higher unit designation than the company is shown. A range card is a rough sketch or drawing which serves as both a record of firing data and a document for defensive fire planning. Although the range cards are not required to be drawn to scale. then the data obtained must be recorded. and the range is recorded to the near end of the avenue of approach. To construct a range card. Figure 6-40 depicts a range card with a PDF and data recorded using a combination of traversing and elevating and field expedient methods (stakes). The PDF is drawn as a solid line with an arrow. indicating either primary or alternate position. Laying the Gun for a Principal Direction of Fire To engage a PDF. the range card is signed by writing 6-54 . In the event that a gun crew does not have this standard form. The range is recorded to the near and far ends of the dead space and to the maximum extent of graze along the FPL.1 Employment and Gunnery down the gun number. The firing data needed to engage this target and the magnetic azimuth (measured with a compass) is written on the range card. The gun is then fired employing traverse and search to cover the entire target. The gunner uses the card to recall the data to fire on predetermined targets and as an aid in estimating ranges to other targets during good visibility. Revisions and improvements are made later as necessary. Orientation A dot is drawn to signify the position of the gun. Lay the gun on the near end of the PDF and take the direction reading. Finally. 61101. and date. preparation of a range card begins immediately. The firing data is recorded. the magnetic azimuth will aid the higher headquarters to do so if necessary. either the FPL or the PDF. using any combination of the methods previously described. Regardless of the length of time the gun crew expects to occupy a position. the range card should be drawn on any material available. 61102. See figure 6-39. The gun position can be positively located by an 8-digit grid coordinate. For security reasons. Particular attention is paid to the final protective fires. The other copy is sent to the next higher headquarters (usually the company). See figure 6-40. Laying for elevation is accomplished by firing the PDF and adjusting the center of impact onto the near end of the avenue of approach. It is shown in figure 6-34. Recording Information As the firing data is obtained. the sketch is oriented (see figures 6-39 and 6-40). shaded to signify grazing fire (see figure 6-39). unit designation. the sketch first must be oriented. so the PDF is generally in the center of the sector.MCWP 3-15. you are allowed to traverse and search over the entire dangerous avenue of approach. An FPL is drawn as a heavy line. whichever is assigned. The elevation data for the field expedient method is based on the placement of the stakes and is not recorded on the card. The firing data and a magnetic azimuth are also written in. Sector limits are designated by dashed lines and named either the right or left sector limit. The elevation reading from the T&E is recorded when using the T&E method. Each gun makes a range card in duplicate using the available Standard Range Card form (DA Form 5517-R). Gaps are left in the heavy line to indicate dead space. Figure 6-39 shows a range card with an FPL and firing data recorded using the T&E method only. 61004. The cards are clearly marked. In order that higher headquarters can determine where the gun is located on the ground. This is the single most important piece of information of concern to superiors. One copy remains at the gun position as a record of firing data. The sector limits in this example are also based on the limiting stakes. The number of mils of traverse and search necessary to cover the target should be recorded on the range card and a firing sequence established. it is recorded on the range card.

However. See figure 6-41. at times the tactical situation may make it desirable to employ a machine gun from a defilade position. targets are numbered starting from either side. then sketched and recorded on the range card. the trajectory of the round. The FPL is always target number 1. . 6-55 Section 12 Firing From Defilade Position To achieve maximum accuracy and effective fire. a machine gun must be employed using direct lay. When a principal direction of fire is assigned.1 Figure 6-42. Aiming Point Method. A defilade position is one in which the gun and crew are hidden from enemy observation by an intervening land mass called a mask.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. A position offers partial defilade when the mask offers some protection against direct fire but the gunner can engage targets using direct lay. The physical factors that effect the ability to bring fire to bear on a target from a defilade position are the range to the target. Partial defilade positions are desirable when the mission cannot be accomplished from a defilade position. The targets are numbered consecutively from the FPL. Other targets of tactical significance are predetermined. and the height of the mask between the gun and target. The MK-19. with its relatively high trajectory.

Advantages. A defilade position has the following disadvantages: Rapidly moving ground targets are not easily engaged because adjustment of fire must be made through an observer. Upon the squad leader’s signal. The smoke and flash of the gun may be concealed. To engage a target from defilade positions. sighting from the same height. Direct Alignment Method. 61203. is the best-suited machine gun for employment from a defilade position. He marks this point as the gun position. Defilade Position a. the squad leader. While the squad leader selects the position. Firing from a defilade position is often most effective in a defensive situation in which the gun or guns can be carefully laid and fires registered on likely targets. Use of an Aiming Point. directed by the observer. on which the correct sighting height has been noted. The gun crew must know direction. He then moves down the slope. Laying the Gun for Direction a. elevation. moves the gun right or left until it is aligned on the target. To select a position in minimum position defilade. as an aid in selecting the position and to make the selected position. and mask clearance. Selecting a Firing Position The platoon or section leader indicates the approximate location of the gun. b. In this manner. He aligns the gun approximately by having the gunner shift the tripod. he has the target in view above the mask. The gunner then loosens the traversing slide and. A prominent landmark visible to the gunner through his sights is selected as an aiming point (see figure 6-42). moves up the slope until. the target must be identified and the fire adjusted by an observer who sees the target. Disadvantages. knowing the approximate height above the ground of the gunner’s eyes when the gunner is in position behind the gun. the MK-19 can be employed effectively in a reverse-slope defense. 6-56 . The crew has some freedom of movement in and around the position. sighting from that height. The observer posts himself on the gun-target line and in a position where he can see the target. Control and supply are facilitated. 61202.1 Employment and Gunnery b. Map and Compass Method. the crews move the guns to the selected firing positions. The squad leader selects the exact position. An aiming point on the gun-target line and at an equal or 61201. the gun crew examines equipment and mounts the gun under cover. He may use a cleaning rod. Targets close to the mask often cannot be engaged. A defilade position offers the following advantages: The gun and crew have cover and concealment. to the point at which the target is again masked.MCWP 3-15. Figure 6-43.

6-57 . Angles of Elevation.1 Figure 6-44. Angle of Site. and Quadrant Elevation.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

An aiming point from the gun position is selected. The magnetic azimuth indicated by the compass index is announced to the guns as the direction of lay (see figure 6-43). lay the gun on the aiming point. See appendices E and H and paragraph 61207 in this chapter for detailed instructions. measure the deflection by means of binocular or compass. When the aiming point is not on the gun-target line. measures the vertical angle in mils from the aiming point to the base of the target. It is called the angle of site. The leader. d. For example: The range to a target is 1. The quadrant elevation is the algebraic sum of the angle of elevation and angle of site. and directs the gunner to 6-58 not at the same elevation. if the angle of site is positive. The angle of quadrant elevation is the angle formed by the line extending through the axis of the bore toward the target and a horizontal line through the gun (see figure 6-44). because of the action of gravity and air resistance. Thus. an additional angle must be taken into consideration. b. Orient the map to the terrain and place the line of sight of the compass along the gun-target line drawn on the map. When the gun and target are 61204. The range to the target is determined. is constant for any given range. preferably at a point at a greater range and higher elevation than the target. thereby aligning it on the target. He then lays the gun on the aiming point with the sight setting to hit the target. an aiming point on the mask can be used. See figure 6-44. and negative (minus) whenever the gun is aimed below the horizontal.MCWP 3-15. The bullet begins its flight in prolongation of the axis of the bore. Aiming Stake Method. The vertical angle above the line of site through which the axis of the bore is raised so that the bullet will carry to the target is called the angle of elevation.300 meters and the gun is laid on the aiming point. The quadrant elevation is positive (plus) whenever the gun is aimed above the horizontal. a. The sight is set at 1. For example: to hit a target at a range of 1. This angle is the vertical angle formed by the line of site and a horizontal line through the chamber of the gun. the angle of elevation is always positive (plus). Using the Firing Tables (1) Angle of elevation (A&E). the angle of site is negative (minus). Employing this method in conjunction with the infantry plotting board and terrain profiling techniques permits the machine gun to be employed from maximum defilade positions delivering indirect fire and allows the observer to move off the gun-target line. As a result. it is added to the angle . an aiming stake may be set out. Map and Compass Method. However. (2) Angle of site (AS). it falls in a gradual curve. c.000 meters with the M240G. the angle of site is positive (plus). elevate the gun so that the bore forms an angle of +17 mils with the line of site. that is.1 greater range than the target is desirable. When no natural aiming point is available. The angle read from the aiming point down to the base of the target is 12 mils. Laying the Gun for Elevation The gun can be laid for elevation using the aiming point method or by using the appropriate firing tables. using binoculars. (3) Quadrant elevation (QE). When the aiming point is on the gun-target line.300 meters. and increases as the range increases. This measured deflection is laid off with the gun. however. Aiming Point Method. Employment and Gunnery manipulate the gun through the number of mils measured. which includes the computed and measured quadrant elevation methods. When the target is lower than the gun. it is necessary to elevate the axis of the bore above the line of site to hit a target at a given range. and the gun aligned on the target as described in the preceding paragraph. A straight line be- tween the chamber of the gun and the target is called the line of sight (see figure 6-44). When the target is at a higher elevation than the gun. Locate the gun position and target on a map and draw a line between the two points. The muzzle is then depressed 12 mils.

Figure 6-46.) The angle of sight is 0.000 meters and on the same horizontal plane as the gun. Therefore.1 (See fig. therefore. elevate the gun to form an angle of 16 mils with the line of site (since +16 mils is the angle of elevation for a range of 1.000 meters and at greater elevation than the gun Figure 6-45. (a) Quadrant of Elevation When Gun and Target are on the Same Horizontal Plane. 6-59 . (b) Quadrant of Elevation When the Target is Higher Than the Gun. the quadrant elevation is +16 mils (the algebraic sum of the angle of elevation [+16] and the angle of site [0]).Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery of elevation. MCWP 3-15.000 meters). because the line of site coincides with the horizontal. The target is at a range of 1. it is subtracted from the angle of elevation. if the angle of site is negative. Profile Example. The target is a range of 1. 6-44 [1]. Profile Line (Map Contour Interval is 10 Feet).

MCWP 3-15. assume the distant horizon to be at an angle of site of zero.000 meters and the angle of site is -20 mils. lay the gun with a quadrant elevation of +16 and -5. Determine the angle of site by use of the aiming circle or the binocular. To hit the target. Computed Quadrant Elevation Method (Heavy Gun) Determine the range to the target by the most accurate means available and obtain the corresponding angle of elevation from the firing tables. or a total of +21 mils. The target is at a range of 1. Determine the angle of quadrant elevation by algebraically adding this data. d. Marking of Elevation. In estimating the horizontal. The angle of site is -5 mils. or a total of +11 mils. or an algebraic sum of -4 mils. or at the same elevation as the gun position. fire the gun at an angle equal to the angle of elevation for the range (+ 16 mils) minus the angle of site. When the binocular is used. determine the angle of site by measuring in mils the vertical interval between the target and the estimated horizontal. the quadrant elevation is the combination of +16 mils and -20. The angle of site is +5 mils. To hit the target. (c) Quadrant of Elevation When the Target is Lower Than the Gun. lay the gun with a quadrant elevation of +16 and +5. Measured Quadrant Elevation Method (Heavy Gun) NOTE Figure 6-47. but may be encountered on certain types of terrain. Since the angle of elevation is +16 mils. 6-60 . therefore. Employment and Gunnery c. fire the gun at an angle equal to the angle of elevation for the range (+ 16 mils) plus the angle of site. Negative or minus angles of quadrant elevation are not common. therefore. Figure 6-44 illustrates a case where the target is at a range of 1.000 meters but at a lesser elevation than the gun (see figure 6-44 [3]).1 (see figure 6-44 [2]). Place the quadrant elevation on the gun with the M2 compass.

The range to the mask is determined and the corresponding angle of 6-61 . a. These methods may also be used with the medium and general purpose machine guns with slight variation. 61205. Locate the gun in partial defilade and lay it on the target by direct laying methods. By Use of Firing Tables.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. If the sight taken clears the mask.000 meters. it is necessary to determine whether or not the entire cone of fire will clear the mask. b.1 Figure 6-48. mask clearance exists. Mask clearance can be checked after the gun has been laid on the target by depressing the muzzle of the gun 2 mils and sighting along the lower edge of the barrel in line with the axis of the bore. add 1 mil to the quadrant elevation when firing at a range of 1.000 meters. When the range to the mask is not more than 300 meters. Move the gun into position defilade and place the measured quadrant elevation on the gun. mask clearance will exist when the axis of the bore is elevated 2 mils or more above the gun-mask line. etc. Terrain Profiling. For each meter difference in elevation between the position in partial defilade and the firing position. if mask clearance is not obvious. Then measure the quadrant elevation with the M2 compass. Visual Method. 1/2 mil when firing at 2. Determining Mask Clearance After the gun has been laid.

and continuous. The initial burst of fire should be long enough to ensure that the observer sees it. By locating himself on or near the gun-target line. When not located on the gun-target line. the gun or guns are registered on one or more likely targets and the data from the T&E mechanism recorded. Range adjustments for the guns are more difficult. and C. Creeping fire should be avoided. elevation for mask clearance is found in the firing tables. Adjustment of fire must be bold. In adjusting fires. The observer makes all corrections in mils. since one click on the T&E mechanism equals 1 mil of adjustment. Rapid adjustment of fire on target is essential. Figure 6-49. using the WERM formula as necessary (see paragraph 61302).1 Employment and Gunnery not normally result in an initial burst on target. Lateral adjustments for the gun are simple. making all corrections as if he were on the gun-target line. Adjustment of Fire Figure 6-50. aggressive. Sample Terrain Profile. the observer can shift from one of these known targets. fires can be adjusted using a plotting board and the firing tables contained in appendices A. If the line of aim through the sights clears the mask. The Mil. When possible. mask clearance exists. requiring experience to know the proper mil corrections. even the most practical methods of quickly laying the gun on the target will 6-62 . the observer simplifies adjustments. When time permits. The range corresponding to this angle of elevation is set on the gun sight. See appendices E and F for more on the use of the M17 plotting board and its use for adjusting machine gun fire. 61206. B. the observer uses the visual method. Under field conditions.MCWP 3-15.

In short. where dead space is located. 6-63 . All points of known elevation are tick marked on the edge of the paper. Estimating Mask Clearance. the points of known elevation are the contour lines.e. Place the edge of a lined piece of paper along the profile line (direction of fire). etc. To construct a terrain profile. where to place the guns to obtain grazing fire. constructing a Figure 6-51.. or profile line. flanking enfilade. i. Constructing a Terrain Profile A profile or side view (cross section) of the ground along a selected line or direction can be used to determine where friendly and enemy forces can see each other. and determine the direction of fire.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. first locate your position on the map. It can also be used to plan fires. Estimating Range Using Known Width. A terrain profile is also useful when employing machine guns to deliver indirect fire on a target (see figure 6-45). grazing fire. such 61207. See figure 6-46. Figure 6-52.1 terrain profile will enable the gunner to obtain that fixed. Figure 6-53. (Any paper with evenly spaced horizontal lines. Estimating Distance Between Two Objects.

take several profile lines and apply the data to the map. Employment and Gunnery Section 13 Machine Gunner's Mathematics 61301. Conversely. grazing fire out to maximum effective range by placing a machine gun squad at about 80 meters of elevation. See figure 6-47. the mil is used for calculating firing data. is measured by constructing an angle which has imaginary lines from the flanks of the target to the gunner’s position (observer’s position). and identify the high and low points along the profile. Angles can be measured in degrees. flanking-enfilade.8 mils in 1 degree. If a profile of the entire frontage is required.MCWP 3-15. however. for example. this does not affect the information. In most cases. Based on the terrain profile in figure 6-49. and other units. The last step is to connect all the points with a smooth curve.) See figure 6-47. The rest of the defense can now be laid in on this anchor point. it is possible to obtain fixed. 1 mil equals . may be used. The Mil (A Unit of Angular Measure) The machine gunner bases much of his work on the measurement and application of angles. mils.400 mils in a circle or approximately 17. See figure 6-48. Profiles for the other guns are constructed in the same manner. The wider the spacing of the line the greater the vertical exaggeration in the profile. Draw perpendiculars down across the horizontal lines for each marked point. 6-64 .1 as graph or notebook paper. The width of a target. There are 6.05625 degrees. The mil is a subdivision of a complete circle.

Diagram Showing Midpoint.50 Cals (Added).Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Approaching Leg. and Receding Leg.1 Figure 6-54. 6-65 . March Column with Four M2 . Figure 6-55.

the mil is particularly useful in determining lateral distance when range is known and in 61406determining range when the lateral distance is known.MCWP 3-15. the gunner may use binoculars. a compass. the distance between B and C will be 1 unit (meters.000 meters and the position measures 25 mils wide. etc. etc. a useful equation called the WERM formula has been developed.). Target Course Names. Because a constant mathematical relationship exists between angles and sides in a right-angled triangle.000 units (meters. For example. it follows that the enemy position is 25 meters wide. or by using the hand/finger method. 61302. The Mil Formula (WERM Formula) Combining the above principles. For example. if the range to an enemy position is 1. yards. yards. in figure 6-50.). It should be remembered that the number of mils in an angle can be determined in several ways. feet. While the mil is not an exact mathematical calculation. the distance from B to C measures 1 mil. the traversing and deviating mechanism.1 Employment and Gunnery Figure 6-56. in angles less than 350 mils. feet. the degree of error involved. Width = Range x Mils 6-66 . section 4. is considered negligible. If the range from A to B and C is 1. As previously discussed in chapter 5.

Lead Angle. 6-67 .1 Figure 6-57. Aerial Target. Lead Angle. Figure 6-58. Moving Ground Target.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

by knowing any two of the three variables in the WERM formula. W=? or Substituting in the formula: W = 1. an observer desires to know the distance between two objects (A and B).200/1. lowperformance aircraft. the following rules for engagement apply: Attack aircraft identified as hostile.1 Employment and Gunnery Any one of the elements of the formula can be determined knowing the other two.2 (thousands of meters) M = 40 mils. The machine guns are not components of an integrated and coordinated air defense system. in figure 6-51. an observer desires to determine the range to a target without the use of a map. Section 14 Antiaircraft Gunnery Individual M2 . and he reads the angle AOB with his binocular to be 40 mils. For example. and determine the height in meters by using the formula W = R x M. Attack aircraft committing a hostile act. To determine if there is mask clearance. measure the height of the obstacle in mils. We know the following: R = 1.200 meters. He estimates the range to be 1. The target is an armored personnel carrier known to be 10 meters long. The gunner measures the width of the vehicle to be 4 mils and determines the range by using the formula. R = W/M.MCWP 3-15. the third may be calculated.50 cals can provide units with a selfdefense capability against hostile low-flying. 6-68 . In figure 6-53. the gunner would estimate the range to the obstacle. These guns are employed in the air defense role as part of the unit’s local defense. an object is on the line of fire between the gun and the target. In figure 6-52.2 x 40 W = 48 This may be expressed in several different ways mathematically. The most useful are: W=RxM R= W/M where: W = Width in meters R = Range in thousands of meters M = Mils meters As stated previously. Normally.000=1.

unless a forced route of aircraft approach exists. low-performance aircraft. 6-69 . engineer. Defense design should weigh those routes of approach which are likely to be used. Midpoint Leads. Weapon crews maintain constant vigilance in their primary sectors of fire. Surveillance.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Each gun is assigned a primary and secondary sector of fire. and liaison aircraft. Issue is determined by tactical considerations and type of unit (artillery. hostile aircraft within range of the gun (approximately 800 meters maximum effective range) should be engaged. infantry) concerned. Unless otherwise directed. Machine guns used to defend march columns should be interspersed in the convoy. Machine gun defenses are designed to combat low-flying. armor. Defense design should produce an equally balanced defense that is effective in all directions. Machine guns should be sited so that the maximum number of targets can be engaged. helicopters and drones are typical targets. with emphasis on the lead and rear elements. The sites selected for the guns must provide maximum observation and unobstructed sectors of fire. and the most likely routes of approach are covered. Visual Aircraft Recognition. see FM 44-80. continuous fire can be delivered. regardless of the sector in which the guns are actually engaged. reconnaissance. troop carriers. See figure 6-54. For detailed coverage of aircraft recognition and identification. Target selection and engagement control depend upon visual means.1 Figure 6-59. The M2 . Employment Employment of machine guns used for air defense is guided by the following defense design factors: The mission of air defense machine gun defense is to impose maximum attrition upon the attacking enemy. Units furnished M2 . 61401.50 cal is provided to forward area units on a table of allowance basis.50 cals in sufficient numbers should site them within mutual support distances of 90 to 360 meters.

the target is flying with altitude decreasing. An incoming course is one in which the target will fly directly over the gun. Target Course Names. despite the fact gun. (3) Climbing. Illusion of Curvature. The angle formed by the 61403. General. See figure. The angle of approach at midpoint is always 1. Requirements for a Hit To engage enemy aircraft effectively. In a climbing course. the gunner must accurately estimate the future position of the target and point his gun in such a manner that the fired rounds and the aircraft will arrive at the estimated point at the same time. and the course line. b.600 mils.1 Employment and Gunnery Figure 6-61. (7) Directly at the gun. This type of course is one get at which the target is nearest the gun position. 6-55. Aircraft may fly any of the following types of courses (see figure 6-56): (1) Level. 6-70 . (5) Angle of approach. The line along the course in which (4) Incoming. (1) Course line. Superimposition. In figure 6-57. (2) Diving. The problem can be compared to that of a machine gun firing up a hill. A crossing course is any course not the target is flying. the target is flying away from midpoint. the target is flying at a constant altitude. That part of the course in which the target is flying toward midpoint. the target is fly- ing with altitude increasing. In a diving course. (5) Outgoing. Laying the gun in elevation is accomplished by tracking the target. That part of the course in which in which the target is flying toward the pintle center of the gun. An outgoing course is one in which the target is flying away from the gun. Target Course Definitions a.MCWP 3-15. present position of the target. In a level course. (6) Crossing. 61402. The point along the course of any tar- incoming or outgoing. Figure 6-62. (3) Approaching leg. (2) Midpoint. (4) Receding leg.

The magnitude of this angle Figure 6-64. the machine gunner concerns himself with only a one-lead angle measured along the slope of the hill. that the vehicle is moving along the side of a hill. 6-71 . The line requirement demands that the gunner cause the round to intersect the target course line. The vertical mass of the target affords the gunner a small angular (elevation) tolerance in fulfilling the line requirement. Line and Lead Information. Based on Tracer Sensings.) To hit a.1 the target. Angular tolerance in fulfilling the lead requirement is provided by the horizontal mass of the target. Lead Requirement for a Hit. The lead requirement demands that the gunner cause the round to intersect the target. Line Requirement for a Hit.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. If the vehicle is replaced by air space (see figure 6-58). The size of this angle varies directly with the diameter of the fuselage and inversely with the range to the target. Figure 6-63. b. Localized Vision. the gunner must fulfill two requirements–line and lead. it is apparent that the gunner’s problem in figure 6-58 is identical to that in figure 6-57. (There is a faster speed in the case of the aircraft.

1 varies directly with the length of the target fuselage and the sine of the angle of approach. The discussion in this paragraph presents the magnitude of leads in antiaircraft firing. 61404. traveling 600 miles per hour. Off-Line Tracer Sensings for Incoming. It varies inversely with the range to the target. the lead required to hit the target at midpoint is 360 mils. A speed of 600 miles per hour is approximately 275 meters per second. with a range of 460 meters and 165 meters as the distance traveled by the aircraft. (The time of flight for a caliber . the gunner aims and fires his weapon at a point on the target course line 165 meters ahead of the target. 6-72 . the target will have traveled 0. target range. and angle of approach. Employment and Gunnery meters is 0.) Using the mil relation rule. Lead The gunner has no sighting devices for setting initial leads on the M2 . flies a crossing course that causes it to pass at a midpoint range of 460 meters from the gun position. Prior to opening fire. a target.6 second.50 round for a range of 460 Figure 6-65.6 x 275 or 165 meters. For example. the gunner estimates the amount his gun will lead the target. Directly at the Gun. During the time of flight of the projectile. and Very Steep Diving Course.50 cal on the M3 or vehicle mount. Outgoing. This estimate is based upon an understanding of the magnitude of the lead required under varying conditions of target speed.MCWP 3-15. To hit the aircraft at this midpoint.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Digging T-Shaped Position. the midpoint lead required is 60 mils or 27 meters for each 100 miles per hour of target speed. The length of the target is a convenient unit of measure in establishing initial leads. mils. and midAs the angle of approach increases up to midpoint. The amount of lead necessary at midpoint is called full lead. A Hit. Figure 6-69. and apparent target lengths for selected targets. For a midpoint range of 460 meters. Figure 6-59 is based on targets at or near midpoint. Midpoint leads expressed in meters. Figure 6-66. T-Shaped Position. Figure 6-60 gives the fraction of full lead necessary for various angles of approach. target speeds. Lead for specific midpoint ranges may be calculated on the basis of target speed. When the target passes midpoint and continues on the receding leg.1 Figure 6-67. Firing Primary Sector. the following rules may be used as a guide in determining initial leads: 6-73 Figure 6-68. Firing Secondary Sector. The estimated lead is divided by the length of the target to determine the number of apparent target lengths which the gunner will lead the target. To simplify the lead problem. the amount of lead decreases. the amount of lead necessary also increases. . while the angle of approach continues to increase.

Horseshoe-Shaped Machine Gun Position. Directly at the gun course: Open fire with no lead. Amount of Lead Necessary for Various Angles of Approach. open fire with a full estimated lead. All courses: Observe tracers and make corrections accordingly. The following are the gunner’s actions to bring the target under fire: Estimate the necessary lead. ANGLE OF APPROACH IN MILS 0 – 100 (Approaching Leg) 100 – 500 (Approaching Leg) 500 – 800 (Approaching Leg) 800 – 1600 (Approaching Leg) 1600 – 2400 (Approaching Leg) LEAD 0 ½ ¾ Full ½ Figure 6-71. 6-74 Figure 6-60.MCWP 3-15. No Secondary Section (L-Shaped Position). Elevate the weapon until the axis of the bore is aligned with the target-course line and apply the estimated lead. 61405. When the target is at midpoint. . Target Engagement a. Sequence of Events. open fire with a three-fourths full esti- Figure 6-72. mated lead. Two-Hole Machine Gun Position.1 Employment and Gunnery Figure 6-70. Crossing courses: When the target is on the approaching or receding leg.

he shifts his feet and moves around the mount. Tracer Observation To make adjustments during firing. Installation of the Wire Loop. Principles Figure 6-74. Since the large amount of smoke created by continuous fire tends to restrict visibility. the gunner must be trained to observe tracers correctly to produce a hit. and once established. the gunner stands erect and makes changes in elevation by moving his hands and arms up and down. If his initial lead is too great. Where target courses and target speeds can be fixed. valid lead data is obtained from a tracer observer located down course from the gun (see FM 44-2. Figure 6-73. Air Defense Artillery Employment Automatic Weapons M42/M55). It is important that the gunner initially opens fire with an adequate lead. the gunner seizes the grips firmly with both hands and braces the gun with his body. using tracer observation. a. his tracking is not reversed. To offset this. When there is doubt as to the tracers positions. valid sensings are obtained only if the tracer observer is stationed as close to the gun as possible. Tracer ammunition provides this information. Elevate or depress the gun until line shots are obtained. 6-75 . the tracking rate is slowed and he allows the target to catch up with his tracers. Correct the lead until hits are obtained. the gunner keeps his head and eyes high above the gun to observe the tracers. However. For a change in azimuth. When firing from the vehicle mount. b. the gunner must know the location of the round with respect to the Wire Communications Open fire and observe only the tracers in the vicinity of the target. The gunner fires continuously throughout the engagement. target. Under normal conditions. Techniques. The dispersion cone is excessive when the gun is fired as a free weapon. Connection of the Wire Loop.1 Section 16 61406.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. he increases his lead.

By aligning the tracer with the target. In figure 6-60. the gunner compares the range from his eye to the target and from his eye to the tracer. it moves in a straight line directly away from the gun. The gunner must focus his attention on the immediate vicinity of the target. In actual practice. the first basic principle of tracer observation must be stressed. does the round move to the left or right. In certain types of target (1) Superimposition. Here. This apparent curvature of the tracer path is called the illusion of curvature. particularly incoming and outgoing.MCWP 3-15. the tracer path appears to curve sharply into a 6-76 . moving directly away from the gunner’s eye. In figure 6-61.1 Employment and Gunnery direction opposite from that in which the target is moving. Gravity causes the trajectory to curve down toward the earth. but under no conditions. Connection of Other Telephones to the Wire Loop. As the tracer moves along its path. The gunner’s (observer’s) vision must be localized to the immediate vicinity of the target. other than wind or drift. Because of the common tendency of gunners to attempt to judge lead when tracers are not aligned with the target. the tracer is shown as a single spot in the sky. the target. Once a round is fired. (2) Localized vision. (3) Read nose-to-tail. the gun- ner utilizes the principle of superimposition. The point of maximum apparent curvature is referred to as the tracer hump. the tracer does not appear as a fixed spot. The illusion of curvature occurs because the gunner is concentrating upon a moving reference point. In observing tracers. compare the range to the tracer and the range to the target as long as the two are superimposed. Fulfill the line requirement before attempting to judge lead. he can courses. The illusion of curvature then takes place. just as if he were looking through a telescope with a restricted field of view (see figure 6-63). Lead can be judged on the basis of these comparisons. the tracer may intersect the gunner’s line of vision to the Figure 6-75. the distance between the target and the tracer is reduced to the point that the eye relates the two separate motions. it can be seen that regardless of the range to the target. but rather as a curved path (see figure 6-62).

if a portion of the tracer’s path is hidden by the target the round is ahead. machine gun crews prepare primary. observe and fire into the crew’s primary and alternate sectors of fire.) (2) Other Courses. This line might be described as the gunner’s line of vision through the target to infinity (see figures 6-64C and 6-64D). based upon a sensing of a tracer that appears to pass the target in this direction. the lead is too great. Lowering the gun reduces the height of frontal cover needed. is invalid. the gunner sees this passage when the tracer appears to float by the target in a nose-to-tail direction. a hit. (b) Low. (2) Astern. the two positions are connected by a crawl trench. the term line is omitted. di- 61501. offline sensings change from high or low to left and right. and 6-69. See figure 6-64A.e. Because of the illusion of curvature. (c) Line. Line Information (1) Level and nonlevel crossing courses MCWP 3-15. i.. If the tracer path terminates in the target it- self. See figure 6-65. the sensing is lead correct. The primary sector of fire is usually to the oblique so the gun can fire lengthwise across the unit’s front. the gunner first sees the tracer passing the target in a tail-to-nose direction. If the tracer intersects the gunner’s line of vision beyond the target. For incoming. T-Shaped Position The T-shaped position is the preferred type of firing position. When the tracer is below the target course line. and supplementary firing positions that provide cover and concealment without restricting effective fire. the ammunition bearer digs a 1-man fighting position to the flank where he can provide security for the gun. When the tracer is above the target course line. See figures 6-67.1 Section 15 Firing Positions As time permits. the tripod is used on the side that covers the primary sector of fire and the bipod legs are used on the side that covers the secondary sector of fire. See figure 6-64B. The platforms must not be so low that the gun cannot be traversed across its sectors of fire. When the tracer intersects a line from the gunner’s eyes. the machine gun is moved but the tripod stays in place. outgoing. Lead when the tracer passes the target nose-to-tail. 6-77 . See figure 6-64C. With the M240G. Lead Information (1) Ahead. 6-68. (a) High. the gun is lowered by digging firing platforms where the gun will be placed. and very steep diving courses. Lead information. Here. When possible. (The tracer must be aligned with the target before a lead sensing can be made. The target actually crosses the tracer path only once. In a 3-man crew. The ammunition bearer’s position must be close enough to the gun position to allow him to bring ammunition or replace one of the gunners. c. the sensing is astern or too little lead. b. See figure 6-66. When changing from primary to secondary sectors. rectly at the gun. If the tracer passes between the gunner’s eye and the target. and also see the gunner and assistant gunner. In any of the positions described in this section. This position provides primary and alternate sectors of fire and cover to the front. See figure 6-64D. (3) Hit. alternate.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery target in two places. and only the lead sensing is mentioned. In referring to a tracer that is aligned with the target. through the target to infinity. entering the path nose first and leaving tail last.

one each (as required). See figure 6-73. the spoilage is used to build flank and rear cover. Go to each position and pick up the wire. See figure 6-72. Installing a Field Wire Loop Perform the following steps to install a field wire loop: Lay out the field wire from position A to each position in turn. The firing platform is located within the horseshoe. When frontal cover is high and thick enough. 61602. Horseshoe-Shaped Position The open end of the horseshoe is toward the enemy. While wiremen and/or other communications personnel may be available to assist in wiring the gun positions. especially with the individual with authority to order the firing of the final protective fires. one each (as required). until all positions are connected. four each. one each. See figure 6-71. Then. Machine gun positions. machine gunners should know how to conduct this task on their own. near each position and leave enough slack in the wire for connections. Two-Hole Position This position uses two one-man fighting holes at 90-degree angles. See figure 6-74. as key elements in the defense. Connect the two-wire tactical telephone at position A to the wire loop. Operational 2-wire tactical field telephone. Spoilage is used to provide cover all around the position. Stake.1 Employment and Gunnery the defense has been set and the guns positioned. When only one sector of fire is assigned. When switching from the primary to the alternate sector of fire. Each hole is dug as a standard one-man hole. Site where field wire can be laid. 61502. pre-prepared. or stake. Reel unit (RL-31E or CE-11). Grenade sumps should be located at the end of each leg of the position. Cut the insulation on one conductor without cutting the wire In the defense. Hammer. Tag. Connect the other telephones to the wire loop. four each. connect one of the wires from each end of the wire loop to one binding post of this telephone and the other wire from each end of the loop to the other binding post. four each (as required). 61503.MCWP 3-15. Tie the wire to a fixed object. TE-33. the gunner and the assistant gunner switch roles. the gun section should be wired in immediately. The hole is dug about armpit deep. This position provides excellent protection for the gunner and assistant gunner but allows for only limited traverse of the gun. 61601. Equipment The following is a list of the gear and equipment normally required to do this: WD-1/TT or WD-1A on reel. strip 1/2 inch of insulation off the two wires at each end of the wire loop. This type of position allows for easy 180-degree traverse across the front but provides less frontal cover than the T-shaped position and less protection against indirect fire than the 2-hole position. complete the loop by returning to position A. Once 6-78 . Tool equipment. wire communication is preferred over the use of radios in controlling defensive fires because it is more secure and less vulnerable to the problems associated with the electro-magnetic spectrum such as interruption or degradation as a result of weather conditions. should be connected to leaders in the chain of command. Keep the wire behind the individual positions. only half the position is dug. See figure 6-70. First.

Use the TL-13-A pliers or TL-29 knife.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery strands. If any position does not then the connections need to be checked and the line tried again. 6-75. and are able to answer and be heard. If all positions ring. 6-79 . Use any telephone connected to the wire loop to ring down the circuit. Repeat these steps until each telephone is connected in the wire loop. Slide an exposed 1/2 inch section of one conductor into one binding post of the telephone. Conduct a communications check. MCWP 3-15. See figure. Slide the exposed 1/2 inch section of the other conductor into the other binding post of the telephone. Grasp the insulation on either side of the cut and pull the insulation apart to expose 1/2 inch of wire strands on each conductor.1 Repeat these steps on the other conductor. the wire loop is installed correctly.

The vertical 100 percent cone.3 mils or 3. Example: the range to the target is 1.2 meters.000 meters is 3. and Drift—How to Use The angle of elevation required to engage a target on flat or uniformly sloping ground is listed for the indicated ranges.Appendix A M60E3/M240G Firing Tables Table I Angles of Elevation. Angles of Fall. and time of flight are listed to assist in determining effect on target.1 mils. . effective 82 percent beaten zone. Times of Flight. The angle of elevation is 16. For ranges not in even hundreds and for ranges not tabulated. The effective 82 percent beaten zone is 2 mils and 2 meters wide as well as 50 meters long.11 seconds. The vertical 100 percent cone is 3. angle of fall.2 mils. Dimension of Cone and Beaten Zone. The difference between the AE of 900 meters and 1. The mil difference between two successive angles of elevation has been calculated to permit subsequent changes in the quadrant elevation without recalculation. The angle of fall is 33 mils and the time of flight to the target is 2. the desired information must be determined by interpolation.000 meters.

MCWP 3-15. and Drift A-2 . Time of Flight. Dimension of Cone and Beaten Zone.1 M60E3/M240G Firing Tables Table I Angles of Elevation. Angles of Fall.

Note: The current sight only displays a range up to 1. Angle of elevation (corresponding to troop distance). A-3 . the procedures outlined in appendix F should be utilized. For ranges beyond 1. The safety angle varies with the range. The gun is laid to hit the target. the rear sight is set at 1. The quadrant elevation required to strike the ground upon which the troops stand. When troops to be fired over are visible. Example: Friendly troops are visible and at a distance of 700 meters from the gun. In order that it be safe to fire. plus a definite angle of safety gives the minimum quadrant elevation which can be fired. Both the exact and even figures to the nearest 25 meters above are given. over the troops. The safety angle plus the angle of elevation constitutes the minimum angle of elevation which can be fired over the heads of troops at the given troop distance. Angle of site. without danger.1 Table II Overhead Fire—How to Use Troop distance in column 1 is the distance in meters from the gun to the friendly troops over whose heads it is desired to fire.800 meters. Corresponding range in column 3 is the minimum range expressed in graduations on the rear sight that will give the required clearance. The minimum quadrant elevation which can be fired with safety over the heads of friendly troops comprises the following factors: Safety angle (corresponding to troop distance). the line of aim must clear the troops. the safety angle can be measured by setting the corresponding range (even figures should be used).225 meters.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.800 meters. Without disturbing the lay of the gun. Minimum angles of elevation are listed in column 2.

1 M60E3/M240G Firing Tables Table II Overhead Fire A-4 .MCWP 3-15.

A new sight is currently under development. When the mask is visible. For ranges beyond 1. A-5 . Angle of site to mask. the required mask clearance can be measured by setting the corresponding range on the rear sight. Note: The current sight only displays a range up to 1. the procedures outlined in appendix F should be utilized.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Angle of elevation (corresponding to mask distance). Example: The mask is visible and is at a distance of 700 meters from the gun. Corresponding range in column 3 is the mil angle of required mask clearance expressed in graduations on the rear sight. The angle of clearance plus the angle of elevation constitute the minimum angle of elevation which will afford clearance at any given mask distance. clearance exists. it is practicable to fire. The angle of clearance is based on the lower onehalf of the verticle dimension of the cone. If the line of aim clears the mask.1 Table III Mask Clearance—How to Use Mask distance in column 1 is the distance in meters from the gun to the highest point of the mask. the rear sight is set at 810. The minimum quadrant elevation which will clear a mask is such that the lowest shot in the cone will just graze the highest point on the mask. without disturbing the lay of the gun.800 meters. Such a quadrant elevation comprises the following factors: Angle of clearance (corresponding to mask distance).800 meters. If the quadrant elevation to the target equals or exceeds the minimum quadrant elevation. Minimum angles of elevation are listed in column 2. The gun is laid to hit the target.

MCWP 3-15.1

M60E3/M240G Firing Tables

Table III Mask Clearance

A-6

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

Table IVa Target Above Gun—How to Use

A-7

MCWP 3-15.1

M60E3/M240G Firing Tables

Table IVa Quadrant Elevation in Mils, Knowing Range, and Vertical Interval in Meters—Target Above Gun

A-8

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

Table IVb Target Below Gun—How to Use

A-9

MCWP 3-15.1

M60E3/M240G Firing Tables

Table IVb Quadrant Elevation in Mils, Knowing Range, and Vertical Interval in Meters—Target Below Gun

A-10

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

Table V Ordinates in Meters—How to Use

A-11

MCWP 3-15.1

M60E3/M240G Firing Tables

Table V—Part 1 Ordinates in Meters

A-12

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

MCWP 3-15.1

Table V—Part 1 Ordinates in Meters (Continued)

A-13

Appendix B M2 .50 Cal Firing Tables Table I Angles of Elevation. Times of Flight. Dimension of Cone and Beaten Zone. Angles of Fall. and Drift—How to Use .

Dimension of Cone and Beaten Zone. Angles of Fall.1 M2 .50 Cal FiringTables Table I Angles of Elevation.MCWP 3-15. Time of Flight. and Drift B-2 .

1 Table II Overhead Fire—How to Use B-3 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

MCWP 3-15.1 M2 .50 Cal FiringTables Table II Overhead Fire B-4 .

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Table II Overhead Fire (Continued) B-5 .

MCWP 3-15.1 M2 .50 Cal FiringTables Table III Mask Clearance—How to Use B-6 .

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Table III Mask Clearance B-7 .

50 Cal FiringTables Table III Mask Clearance (Continued) B-8 .1 M2 .MCWP 3-15.

1 Table IVa Target Above Gun—How to Use B-9 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

50 Cal FiringTables Table IVa Quadrant Elevation in Mils.MCWP 3-15. and Vertical Interval in Meters—Target Above Gun B-10 . Knowing Range.1 M2 .

1 Table IVb Target Below Gun—How to Use B-11 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

Knowing Range.50 Cal FiringTables Table IVb Quadrant Elevation in Mils. and Vertical Interval in Meters—Target Below Gun B-12 .MCWP 3-15.1 M2 .

1 Table V Ordinates—How to Use B-13 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

50 Cal FiringTables Table V—Part 1 Ordinates in Meters B-14 .1 M2 .MCWP 3-15.

1 Table V—Part 2 Ordinates in Meters B-15 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

MCWP 3-15.50 Cal FiringTables Table V—Part 3 Ordinates in Meters B-16 .1 M2 .

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Table V—Part 4 Ordinates in Meters B-17 .

50 Cal FiringTables Table V—Part 5 Ordinates in Meters B-18 .MCWP 3-15.1 M2 .

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Table V—Part 6 Ordinates in Meters B-19 .

MCWP 3-15.50 Cal FiringTables Table VI Searching Reverse Slopes—How to Use B-20 .1 M2 .

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Table VI Searching Reverse Slopes B-21 .

50 Cal Trajectory Chart—How to Use B-22 .MCWP 3-15.50 Cal FiringTables Table II M2 .1 M2 .

1 B-23 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

Dimensions of Cone and Beaten Zone. Angles of Fall. Times of Flight.Appendix C MK-19 MOD 3 Firing Tables Table I Angles of Elevation. and Drift—How to Use .

Angles of Fall. and Drift C-2 .MCWP 3-15. Dimension of Cone and Beaten Zone.1 MK-19 MOD 3 Firing Tables Table I Angles of Elevation. Time of Flight.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Table II Overhead Fire—How to Use C-3 .

1 MK-19 MOD 3 Firing Tables Table II MK-19 MOD 3 Direct Fire Table (Provisional Data) C-4 .MCWP 3-15.

1 Table III Indirect Overhead—How to Use C-5 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

MCWP 3-15.1 MK-19 MOD 3 Firing Tables Table III MK-19 MOD 3 M430 Indirect Fire Table (Provisional Data) C-6 .

1 Table IVa Target Above Gun—How to Use C-7 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

and Vertical Interval in Meters—Target Above Gun C-8 . Knowing Range.1 MK-19 MOD 3 Firing Tables Table IVa Quadrant Elevation in Mils.MCWP 3-15.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.1 Table IVb Target Below Gun—How to Use C-9 .

Knowing Range.MCWP 3-15. and Vertical Interval in Meters—Target Below Gun C-10 .1 MK-19 MOD 3 Firing Tables Table IVb Quadrant Elevation in Mils.

1 Table V Trajectory Charts—How to Use C-11 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

Disassemble as completely as time per- mits. Smash the extractor. snow. cover group. By placing a thermite grenade on the cover assembly. with the gun material on the tripod. receiver group. Using the barrel or some other heavy equipment. or latrines. Composition 4 (C4) molded inside the receiver and around the mount. Disassemble as completely as time permits. Disassembly and Smashing (1) M2. as appropriate. With the barrel extension shank protruding. mud. Bury the disassembled weap- on in suitable holes or dump parts into streams. will render the machine gun inoperable. Use the barrel as a sledge. when exploded. c. sumps. General The decision to destroy the gun to prevent its capture and use by the enemy is a command decision and will be ordered and carried out only on authority delegated by the major unit (battalion and above) commander. Bend the tripod legs. (4) Disposal of parts. Destruction must be as complete as circumstances permit. Thermite Grenade. place the striker in the hole in the face of the bolt and bend it until broken. smash the cover. Smash the backplate group. (2) M240G. Smash the top cover assembly using the bolt and backplate assembly or some other heavy object. only those parts essential to operation of the gun are destroyed. shank by striking it with the barrel at the sideplate corners nearest the feedway. The mount 2. Raise the cover and smash the cover forward and down. knock off the . Methods of Destruction a. and gas cylinder. toward the barrel support. Remove the firing pin from the bolt. operating group. Place the barrel extension in the rear of the receiver. The machine gun and mount are destroyed only when they are subject to capture or abandonment. buffer. Demolitions. b. Smash and bend the breech lock depressors. Lacking time for complete destruction. stock. Remove the bolt and backplate assembly and smash it against the receiver assembly. The same parts of each gun are destroyed to prevent the reconstruction of a complete gun from several damaged guns. beginning with those parts most difficult for the enemy to duplicate. feedtray. (3) MK-19. and traversing and elevating mechanism can be destroyed by smashing them with the machine gun barrel or other heavy objects. the gun and mount will be destroyed. Remove the barrel buffer tube lock assembly from the barrel buffer body group and bend and deform it. (5) Mounts and traversing mechanism. Disassemble as completely as time per- mits. or top cover. disfiguring the bolt and backplate assembly to a point where it will no longer fit into the receiver assembly.Appendix D Destruction of Machine Guns 1. Component parts should be placed near the grenade to ensure their destruction.

) It is sturdy. there are still many M10 infantry plotting boards in use. The base (see figure E-2) is square on one side and semicircular on the other. therefore. (See figure E-1. It is carried in a durable canvas case. Each small grid square is. accurate. and easily adaptable to use in the field. To the left of the index line are figures Figure E-1. In addition to the M17 plotting board. simple to operate. The M10 and the M17 are almost identical. Description The M17 plotting board is a fire-control instrument designed to help the operator in computing and plotting firing data. a. . Note the red base index line with the arrow. Both the M17 and M10 plotting boards can be used in executing the procedures outlined in this appendix and in appendix F. The index line is graduated outward from the center (pivot point) from 0 to 20 in hundreds of meters. the only difference being that the triple map scale displayed on the bottom right of the base is in meters on the M17 and in yards on the M10. Base. Printed on the base and directly under the disk is a circular area marked with a rectangular grid printed in red. It consists of a transparent. M17 Plotting Board.Appendix E Infantry Plotting Board M17 1. rotatable plotting disk attached to a flat base. 50 meters on a side. These numbers are spaced at every second horizontal fine line.

Base. Besides the grid scales. The red arrow of the base index line points to a red “0” and a fine red line which extends to the edge of the plotting board (through the center of the vernier scale). Use these scales to transfer data to or from a map or firing chart which has one of these scales. These scales are: At the bottom of the base is a triple map scale in meters (yards with the M10) with its legend above it. However. with representative fractions of 1/50. At the right side is a scale of inches in 10ths. or of a firing position. each small grid scale is 100 meters on a side. E-2 .000. and 1/5. giving double values for the grid squares. These representative fractions refer respectively to the top.MCWP 3-15. 1/25. The pivot point.1 Infantry Plotting Board M17 Figure E-2.000. and lower scales. there are printed on the base three scales for measuring and a vernier scale for greater accuracy in using the mil scale on the disk. The base is oriented when the red arrow of the index line is at the top (pointing away from the operator) and the square side is to the operator’s right.000. as desired. any value may be assigned to the small grid square which best suits the problem at hand. At this scale. represents the location of the observation post. middle. numbered from 0 to 7 inches and having an extension divided into 20ths. designated by the letters OP. This fine red line is the index mark on the base at which all deflections or azimuths are read.

to lay off an azimuth of 6.263 mils: Set the graduation on the mil scale which represents 6.) To add the final 3 mils. Four scales and a fine black line are printed on the disk.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. A complete mil scale (referred to later as the mil scale) in printed in black. Note the line on the mil scale which lies next inside it (toward the 0 line of the vernier scale). The plotting disk (see figure E-4) is made of a plastic material that is roughened on the upper surface to receive pencil marks. three lines to the left from the 0 line. For example.260 mils opposite the 0 line of the vernier scale. Opposite the red arrow of the index line is a vernier scale for use with the mil scale on the disk. At the top is a scale in centimeters. Example of Use of Vernier Scale. and rotate the top disk until the two lines coincide. Plotting Disk. (See figure E-3A. it is possible to lay off an azimuth reading with great accuracy by using the method illustrated below.1 Figure E-3. E-3 (reverse blank) . b. divided into millimeters. and numbered from 1 to 9. count. By means of this scale. The desired azimuth is now directly opposite the point of the index line as shown in figure E-3B. on the vernier scale. running around the outer edge in a clockwise direction to conform to the compass for plotting azimuth angles. This scale is divided in 10-mil increments and numbered in hundreds of mils from 0 to 6400.

MCWP 3-15. dots must be made as small as possible. Since the size of the dots placed on the board affects the accuracy of the data determined. Operations With Plotting Board a. they may be encircled. Any arbitrary point on the disk may be selected as the machine gun position or the OP. and targets. To make it easier to locate these small dots. 2. and the accuracy of the E-4 . running counterclockwise from 0 to 3200 and 3200 to 500. This scale is numbered in hundreds of mils from 0 to 3200. It is used in computing angles of site for weapons other than mortars. In computing the data. It is used in computing angles of site for weapons other than mortars. The theory of operation of the plotting board is basically simple. and to determine the direction and distance between these points. Whenever possible. A second supplementary mil scale (the inner scale) is printed in black and runs clockwise. General. Rotatable Plotting Disk. be careful to use the dot and not the circle. the center (pivot point) of the board is used to represent the machine gun position. results obtained is limited by the exactness of the operator. The plotting board is used to plot accurately the relative positions of the machine guns. This middle scale is numbered in hundreds of mils.1 Infantry Plotting Board M17 Figure E-4. The 0 of this scale appears under the 3200 on the mil scale. A supplementary scale (the middle scale) is printed in red. registration points.

The result is the number of squares on the base between the two points. proceed as follows: Use the pivot as the first point. Sample Problem Two. Count off the number of squares or fractions of squares thus determining from the first point toward the top of the plotting board.600 meters. When two or more points have been placed on the plotting board in this manner. The azimuth GUN-TGT is then read at the index mark on the base as 6110 mils. Rotate it in such a direction that the dot representing the location of the target (TGT) is toward the top of the board. every vertical line on the grid is pointing along the same azimuth. depending on which scale on the base is used. c.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery To plot a point with a given azimuth and distance from another point. Machine gun position at the center (pivot point) of the disk. Machine gun position to target: Azimuth 5. using one of the range scales on the base.400 meters above the horizontal grid line passing through the pivot plus 200 meters below) is the range GUN-TGT: 1. Rotate the disk until 5750 mils is read over the index on the base. and plot the second point.500 meters. depending on which scale on the base is used. distance 550 meters. Mark the disk with a pencil dot over the index line at the 550-meter graduation. To find the azimuth of a given point with respect to another.750 mils. This means also that the azimuth of any of the vertical lines of the grid is read at the index mark. To determine the distance on the plotting board from the first point to the second point. The total number of meters between the pencil dots when in the parallel position (1. using the range scale along the index line (where the smallest grid graduation represents 50 meters). Mark the disk with a pencil dot over the index line at the 1500-meter graduation. rotate the disk until the two pencil dots lie along one of the vertical lines on the grid base or until they are the same distance from the same vertical line with the given dot (target) toward the top of the plotting board. proceed as follows: Rotate the disk until 4150 mils is read over the index on the base. (2) Procedure.150 mils. Therefore. the operator must remember that all parallel lines have the same azimuth.1 b. To determine the azimuth and range from the new machine gun position to the target. The range can also be determined by measuring the distance. To determine the azimuth between two plotted points. divide the stated distance by 50 or 100. Machine gun position to new position: Azimuth 4. This problem involves the solving of survey notes: E-5 (reverse blank) . Rotate the disk until the stated azimuth is indicated over the index line. This dot represents the location of the new mortar position. The azimuth may then be read on the mil scale at the index on the base. Sample Problem One. Rotate the disk until an imaginary line connecting the two pencil dots becomes parallel with the index line. MCWP 3-15. This problem determines the azimuth and range from a new machine gun firing position to the target: (1) Given. it is possible to determine the distance between any two given points and the azimuth from one point to the other. The second point may be plotted also by measuring off the stated distance from the first point toward the top of the plotting board using the range scales on the base. distance 1. This dot represents the location of the target. Determine the range between the dots in meters by counting the number of small grid graduations separating them when in this position and multiplying this number by 50 or 100. when a particular azimuth is rotated over the index.

1 Infantry Plotting Board M17 (1) Given . to follow azimuths for various paced distances. The registration data (GUN-TGT range and corrected magnetic azimuth) determined by adjusting on the registration point are then used to plot the location of the registration point with respect the firing position. and as a firing chart to compute firing data for one or more indirect fire weapons. team with reference to the first team. count up to 250 meters and make a pencil dot. (2) Procedure. Plot the location of OPs when their location is known or desired.800. This is the location of the second team.120 mils and the distance is 425 meters. distance 200 meters. A traverse of two legs is made to the second team from the first team as follows: First leg: Azimuth 4. In addition to the examples illustrated above. To determine the azimuth and direction from the first team to the second team. the plotting board can be used to compare angles of size. to make simple sketches which require azimuths and pacing. The observed firing chart is used to: Plot the location of the registration point with respect to the firing position (base machine gun). The pivot point of the plotting board is arbitrarily selected as the location of the base machine gun (usually left flank gun) in the firing position. The second team is located (surveyed) with reference to the first team by compass and pacing. to indicate the friendly frontline. Other Uses for Plotting Board. From the pencil dot just plotted. The first team is plotted at the pivot point of the plotting board. proceed as follows: Use the range scale along the index line. A machine gun squad is placed in position by team. Determine the GUN-TGT range and direction. An observed firing chart permits accurate firing at night or under conditions of poor visibility on any target whose chart location is known. Plot new targets reported by OPs with respect to reference points (such as reference points. d. distance 250 meters. Count up 200 meters along the red index line and make a pencil dot. Second leg: Azimuth 5. or previously fired targets) whose chart locations are known. To plot the location of the second 3. Rotate the disk until azimuth 4800 is at the index. rotate the disk until the plotted location of the second team is toward the top of the plotting board and is on the same vertical line or the same distance from the same vertical line as the first team plot (in this case on the red index line).400.MCWP 3-15. The azimuth is 5. Plotting Board Used as an Observed Firing Chart The plotting board is used as an observed firing chart on which the locations of the registration points are plotted in relation to the firing position from data obtained by registration firing (fire adjustment). The same procedure would be used to locate the other machine gun teams of the section. E-6 . Rotate the disk until azimuth 5400 is at the index. Plot new targets by polar coordinates when the observer’s location is known. Determine special corrections for each machine gun to fit a target of special shape. or OP locations) whose chart locations are known. each team in a different location. Plot new targets by grid coordinates when the observer has a map. New targets reported by OPs are plotted on the firing chart with respect to the registration points or other reference points (such as targets previously adjusted upon.

the latter target (reference point) is replotted on the plotting board for this particular fire mission. 4. Plot the location of friendly forward elements (front line troops). If a new target is reported with reference to a previous target whose chart location is known and whose plot has been removed from the plotting board. the firing data (range and direction) is determined with the plotting board. When a new target is reported with reference to a target previously fired upon and plotted on the firing chart. if too many targets are plotted on the plotting board. Plotting Board Used for Indirect Fire For detailed information concerning utilization of the infantry plotting board in computing data for indirect fire.1 Mass fires of the section on any target whose chart location is known. Frequently the observer requesting indirect machine gun fire support does not have a map to determine coordinates. The data for replotting this target (reference point) on the plotting board is obtained from the target data worksheet. E-7 (reverse blank) . Maps and photomaps may be used to plot targets on the firing chart which are located and reported by map or photomap coordinates. it is desirable to plot on the plotting board only those targets that are likely to be used by observers as reference points for reporting the location of new targets. see appendix F. the target is replotted using the adjusted fire data (data for replot). A protractor and ruler or a compass are used in determining initial firing data from a map. Therefore.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. the chart (plotting board) becomes so cluttered with detail that it hampers the conduct of subsequent fire adjustments. His target designation is usually made with reference to a point whose chart location is known. Firing data (range and deflection) is determined on the plotting board with respect to the previously plotted point. When the fire mission is completed. However.

control instruments. b. and troop safety.Appendix F Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire 1. The observer occupies an observation post (OP) from which he can see the gun position (if possible). Proficiency in this is acquired by practice in solving indirect laying problems. and the initial aiming point (IAP). friendly troops. It is explained in greater detail in paragraph 2. b. The M17 plotting board provides a rapid and convenient means of calculating and plotting TOG data. Draw lines connecting the gun positions with the appropriate target and from the single gun or base gun of the squad or section to the IAP. mask clearance. Map Method. Four essential factors must be considered in indirect laying. Quadrant elevation (QE) for target. c. Procedure (1) Adjustment or Correction to Machine Gun Indirect Fire. The data obtained are recorded. and firing tables. using a compass to determine their magnetic azimuths and a map to determine their distance from the OP. To do this requires a knowledge of the characteristics of fire. machine gun drill. 3. The map method is also explained in paragraph 2. The map method is more practical and is more applicable to rapid field utilization. Technique a. b. Fundamentals a. These data are obtained from a map. or by the terrainobserver-gun (TOG) method. TOG Method. and the targets. The plotting board will usually be maintained by the machine gun section leader (fire direction NCO) or other personnel as designated by the weapons company commander. General. the mask. Obtain ranges by applying the map scale and vertical intervals (VIs) by means of the map contour lines. Since indirect machine gun fire is very difficult to adjust. Plot accurately on the map the positions of single guns or of the flank guns of a battery. The section leader/fire direction noncommissioned officer (NCO) computes direction changes from the plotting board and then conducts a map inspection. mil formula. Accuracy. friendly troops if present. elevation. Essential Factors of Indirect Laying. section XII. The TOG method is the more accurate but is more complex to compute. The observer draws a diagram to scale of these various positions in relation to the OP. He also measures the angle of site to targets. This technique is further explained in paragraph 3b. guns. Adjustment or correction to machine gun indirect fire is a factor of both deflection or direction (traverse right or left) and elevation (range). The fire direction NCO should be located at the gun position and have positive communications (radio or wire) with the observer. The adjustment or correction for deflection is taken from 2. and mask. Source of Firing Data. clearance. and safety are extracted from the appropriate table IVa or IVb. it is imperative that firing data be obtained and computed accurately. target flanks. Locate the probable mask by inspection or as described in chapter 6. General a. Adjustment of indirect machine gun fire can be accommodated by a combination of data from both the M10/M17 plotting board and information extracted from the appropriate firing tables contained herein. The computation of firing data demands exactness and close attention to detail. These are direction. terrain measurement. .

400 meters. A mark ( 1 ) is then made on this line. is as depicted in figure F-1. 4. guns #2. Guns 50 meters apart. further corrections on searching-traversing will be in unison. The base gun (all guns) are laid on the gun-target (GUN-TGT) azimuth. The fire direction NCO rotates the disk until the azimuth read over the index on the base is the same as the azimuth on which the guns are laid. Range to target is 1. #3. regardless of machine gun type. Once adjusted. In order to maximize the effects of indirect fire. Figure F-3 shows a GUNTGT direction of 1400 mils at a range of 1. (Machine guns are normally positioned 50 meters apart.400 meters.4 meters 50 meters = 70 mils F-1. The beaten zone for the four guns now corresponds to that depicted in figure F-2.4 meters *100 meters = 140 mils R WM = 1. left 140. and #4 must be adjusted so their beaten zone will correspond to that of gun #1.400 meters or 1. the other three guns are laid on the same GUN-TGT azimuth which result in four parallel sheafs. Adjustment for gun #4: Command: Gun #2. four-gun sheaf as depicted in figure F-2 is accomplished through application of the width equals range times mils (WERM) rule. Parallel Sheaf. left 210. left 70. Corrections or adjustment to range are dependent upon the specific ballistics characteristics of the type round and must be extracted from the appropriate firing table. The pivot point of the Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire plotting board becomes the location of the base gun. (2) Use of Plotting Board. Note: Only gun #1 (base gun) is laid on the true GUN-TGT line. All guns set zero deflection to correspond to the GUN-TGT azimuth. The GUN-TGT line at the appropriate range. Figure F-2. each laid on the GUN-TGT line with a range to target of 1. Adjustment for gun #3: R WM = 1. Adjustment for gun #2: R = WM 1. F-2 . Example: A reconciliation of the problem depicted in figure F-1 to that shown in figure F-2 is accomplished as follows: 1. Single Sheaf (After Application of the WERM Rule). The searching and traversing commands will now be the same for all guns. A single.1 the plotting board.) The beaten zone for four machine guns. All guns laid on GUN-TGT azimuth. 5.400 meters.4 meters 150 = 210 mils *Gun #3 is 100 meters from gun #1. Command: Gun #3.MCWP 3-15. 3. 2. Gun #1 is laid on the true GUN-TGT line. Command: Gun #4.

Figure F-4 shows the plot of the observer’s subsequent correction of: RIGHT TWO HUNDRED.1 Figure F-3. the fire direction NCO marks with an OP symbol ( ) the graduation on the mil scale of the plotting board which corresponds to the O-T direction reported by the observer. the machine gun section leader alerts the observer that they are prepared to fire an initial burst. moving from the location of the previously plotted point (target location). The range at which the next volley is fired is determined by referring to the range scale along the index line. GUN-TGT Azimuth (GUN-TGT Azimuth of 1400 Mils.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.) F-3 . Figure F-3 shows an O-T direction of 950 mils. The fire direction NCO plots subsequent corrections reported by the forward observer (FO) by moving right or left as directed by the observer from the previous plot along a grid line perpendicular to the index line on the base and adding or dropping as directed by the observer along the index line or one of the grid lines parallel to it. The direction is then read on the base. Subsequent corrections throughout an adjustment are plotted in a similar manner for each volley fired.to 50-round burst is fired by gun #1 and the observer is informed that the rounds are on the way. Range 1. A 40.400 Meters) . After orienting the plotting board on the O-T direction. As soon as the observer reports the observer-target (O-T) direction. and a deflection correction announced to the guns. (See figure F-5. ADD TWO HUNDRED. the fire direction NCO rotates the disk of the plotting board until the pencil dot representing the last correction from the observer is directly over the index line on the base. After plotting the forward observer’s corrections.

To obtain the quadrant elevation of the guns to the target. and marks initial registration point with a pencil dot ( 1 ). Evaluation or target distance data is computed in accordance with the instructions contained in the following paragraphs. Overhead fire (troop safety. it is necessary to know ranges and the vertical interval (relative vertical location of the target in relation to the gun. Regardless of the weapon. target located above or below gun location) of the guns to the target. or appendix C (MK-19). (3) Correction for Range. Plotter moves from initial plotted point (#1) right four small grid graduations (200 meters). (4) Elevation Data.. By means of a map.1 Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire Correction: RIGHT 200 METERS.50 cal). Mask is any terrain feature or object that screens the target from the gun. Once height relationship of the gun is dependent upon the specific weapon system and must be extracted from the various tables contained in appendix A (M240G). ADD 200 METERS. appendix B (M2 . The correction for range Mask clearance (may not be a factor). These requirements include: Quadrant elevation (always required). Figure F-4. i.MCWP 3-15.e. Determine the elevation of both and the distance (height) the target is above or below the guns. the correction in elevation to account for the new range must be determined. F-4 . Observer’s Corrections. After the deflection change is given. up four small grid graduations. may not be a factor). three requirements must be considered. plot the locations of both the guns and target.

460 mils and a range of 1.) F-5 . Table IVa (target above gun). Set the announced elevation on the clinometer. Deflection Correction. B. substituting range to mask and/or troops for range to target. place the M2 compass on a flat surface on the feed cover. Command for deflection change: RIGHT 60 MILS. the target is located on an elevation that is 10 meters higher than the gun.1 Corrections show a deflection of 1. to target has been established. (See figure F-6.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Figure F-5. in this case 10.650 meters. then raise or lower the gun using the elevation handwheel on the traversing and elevating mechanism. and moving across until the corresponding QE is obtained. and the range to target is 1. requirements for the rounds clearing any terrain elevation (mask) between the guns and target and friendly troop safety must be considered and calculations made to determine if the current QE will provide sufficient height to accommodate mask clearance and troop safety. The resulting figure is the QE in mils. or C) is used to determine QE.50 cal Firing Tables) is used. table IVa or table IVb (in appropriate appendix A. Once the QE to target is determined. The QE’s for mask and/or troop safety may be obtained by determining VI and range to mask and/or troops from a map. (5) Mask Clearance and Troop Safety . and using the appropriate table IVa or IVb. The table is entered at the appropriate VI. For example. The weapon being utilized is the caliber . (See figure F-6). and is read across until the horizontal distance corresponds to target range. The correct QE for the above example is 22 mils. The elevation is placed on the machine gun by utilizing the clinometer contained in the M2 compass.200 meters.50 machine gun. appendix B (M2 .

the procedure is similar. mask. or at 1.1 Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire Figure F-6. F-6 . If the line of sighting thus established clears the mask. set the sight at the range to mask plus 300. If the line of sighting thus established clears the mask (or troops). If the range to mask is 500 meters or greater. Quadrant Elevation. Obtain required mask clearance for the range (gun to mask) from the appropriate table III (mask clearance). VI’s to target. equals the angle of mask or troop clearance. The sight is set at the range to the troops plus 650. Without moving the piece. set the sight at the corresponding range for troop safety or mask clearance as given in tables II and III. the mask will be cleared and the troops will be safe. and a worksheet explaining data computation. and when the troops and/or mask can easily be identified.525. and troops. If there are friendly troops. The following examples of the map method are provided as sample problems and offer opportunity to gain proficiency in working with the various tables. and see if this line of sighting clears the mask. Target Above Gun. If the angles of mask or troop clearance equal or exceed the required mask clearance or troop safety. If no tables are available. whichever is the greater. clearance can be determined by use of the rear sight as explained as follows: Lay the gun to hit the target. For shorter ranges. The QE gun to target. it is practicable to fire. set the sight at the range to the mask plus 425. and the required safety angle for the range gun to troop from the appropriate table II (overhead fire). This gives results which are sufficiently accurate for all practical purposes. appropriate ranges. minus the QE gun to mask and/or troops. Each example (figures F-7 through F-15) contains a schematic of the problem to include type weapon. the procedure is as follows: If the range to the mask is less than 500 meters. the cone of fire will clear. Table IVa. respectively.MCWP 3-15.

1 Figure F-7. F-7 . Example 1.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

Example 2. F-8 .MCWP 3-15.1 Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire Figure F-8.

Example 3.1 Figure F-9. F-9 .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

F-10 . Example 4.MCWP 3-15.1 Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire Figure F-10.

Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. F-11 .1 Figure F-11. Example 5.

F-12 .MCWP 3-15. Example 6.1 Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire Figure F-12.

F-13 .1 Figure F-13. Example 7.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15.

Example 8.1 Adjustment of Indirect Machine Gun Fire Figure F-14. F-14 .MCWP 3-15.

Example 9.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. F-15 .1 Figure F-15.

enfilade fire is highly desirable for the FPL. 2. Figure G-1. Figure G-2. Terrain and obstacles should be used to force enemy formations into positions where the fires of the FPL will be flanking and enfilade. Using Obstacles to Enhance the Effectiveness of the FPL. every attempt should be made to position guns toward the flank of the defense and align FPLs along the enemy side of tactical wire (see figure G-2). General Machine gun final protective lines (FPLs) are usually fired at a rapid rate for the first 2 minutes and a sustained rate thereafter. When the attacking enemy encounters the wire and slows or stops to negotiate it. Example of the Increased Effect of Flanking Fire. enfilade fire from machine guns effectively engages them. Characteristics Effective FPLs are characterized by three major features: Flanking fire Interlocking fire Grazing fire FPLs should provide as much flanking fire as possible (see figure G-1). For example. Flanking.Appendix G Final Protective Lines 1. it provides mutual support between adjacent units. FPLs should also be interlocking (see figure G-3). these fires should be located at least 50 meters forward of the battle position. This adds to the effectiveness of the fire plan by eliminating gaps in the FPLs and maximizing the coverage by fire across as much of the frontage as possible. Additionally. In order to keep the enemy beyond hand grenade range. . flanking.

it must be remembered that while we lay the gun for 600 meters. Since terrain is seldom uniformly sloping. Interlocking Machine Gun Fires. between an advancing enemy and friendly positions. on uniformly sloping ground. It should be noted that the effectiveness of a machine gun’s fire may not be completely cancelled by sections of dead space. two clicks of elevation (either up or down) of searching manipulation with the traversing and Figure G-3.4 meters (55 inches) and would occur at half of that range (350 meters). This ensures that the lower bound of the cone of fire is as close to the ground as possible to minimize the enemy’s opportunity to move underneath it without being hit. impede his movement. Sections of dead space are drawn to scale showing the exact width of the gap on the FPL. any depressions in the ground along the FPL will aid the enemy in moving underneath it more quickly. called dead space. Danger space is essentially a measure of the entire “kill zone” created by the cone of fire which will hit a standing man at a prescribed range. although the FPL is a “fixed” firing mission. and with the gun sighted at 600 meters. The concept of grazing fire is to place a wall of bullets. Finally. This is why dead space in the FPL must be identified and marked. and it requires the assignment of other weapons systems to cover the space. is critical. See figure G-5. Dead space indicates areas on the FPL that cannot be adequately engaged by the machine gun’s fires. G-2 Figure G-4. which would seriously impede the enemy’s momentum in the attack.8 meters (31 inches) (it would occur at approximately 300 meters). with grazing fire in mind. continuous firing of the FPL will keep the enemy confined to the areas of dead space. fire plan sketches. The grazing fire measurement of 600 meters is used as the maximum range for a FPL instead of the 700 meter measurement of effective danger space since the 31 inch maximum dead space encountered when sighted at 600 meters is far more restrictive to enemy movement than the 55 inch maximum dead space encountered when sighted at 700 meters. on uniformly sloping ground. Identification of gaps in the FPL. the maximum dead space on an FPL would be . the maximum dead space would be 1. Secondly. not just the center as with grazing fire. the Final Protective Lines danger space is diminished.8 meters) out to a range of 700 meters. This is done by sighting the weapon on the farthest range possible where the center of the cone of fire will remain approximately 1 meter above the ground. The FPL is indicated on maps. In perfect conditions.MCWP 3-15. enemy personnel who try to advance standing upright could still be hit at any point along the 700 meter long line of fire. .1 FPLs should also be located to obtain maximum grazing fire (see figure G-4). and allow other weapons systems time to engage him. This space would be difficult to move under without resorting to a low crawl. and dead space occurs (see figure G-6). Although this dead space could allow the enemy to move under the FPL. or overlays by drawing a wide black line to indicate grazing fire and effective danger space. in the form of the cone of fire. This is important in determining the type of weapon that will be used to cover the dead space. First. The M240G’s cone of fire does not rise above the height of a standing man (1. At this range. Grazing Fire Plotted to Scale. A thin line is drawn whenever grazing fire is lost. Danger space takes the entire cone of fire into consideration. Six hundred meters is the maximum range whereby grazing fire can be maintained with the M240G. another consideration is that a danger space exists along that entire distance.

Considerations in Measuring Dead Space. determine the extent of the grazing fire and danger space available. He then gets into a good firing 3. PDFs and FPLs. This technique maintains a fixed line of fire while continually changing the height of the cone of fire and the location of the beaten zone. machine guns are immediately set in firing positions to cover assigned sectors of fire and principal direction of fire (PDF) or FPLs. Dead Space in FPL. When a FPL is assigned. Walking the FPL Once the machine gun unit leader has ensured that positions are occupied properly. Walking the FPL allows the team to Figure G-6. and to locate and mark any dead space in the FPL. better covering the area along the line. elevating mechanism is permitted and encouraged during firing. The squad leader points out definitive terrain features to each machine gun team when prescribing sectors of fire.1 Figure G-5.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. G-3 . the gunner ensures that the gun is positioned correctly and locked into place on the tripod as it will be when firing the FPL. Prior to walking the FPL. including any sections of dead space. it should be walked whenever practicable.

5. Once the gunner sees the walker’s body below the center mass of his chest. MARK 5 to MARK 6 equals 84 4. each of which can fire one barrage. Normally. The use of the center mass of the chest as the measuring point for dead space is a compromise between these two considerations. and they fire the same FPL. Thus. One copy of the range card. there is the capability to fire nine 60mm and eight 81mm mortar barrages for a total of 17 barrages. along with the pace card. in conjunction with the section leader. The walker once again records the number of paces that he took to reach that spot. the maximum effect must be obtained from all weapons of the rifle company to fill in gaps on the FPL. when added to its three organic 60mm mortar barrages. he shouts out MARK.) When the gunner can no longer observe the walker below the center mass of his chest. sets 600 meters on the rear sight. Each 81mm and 60mm mortar barrage covers an area 50 meters wide by 50 meters deep. however. a company normally has five to six mortar barrages at its disposal. In positioning the barrages. thus. The squad FPL is the combined effect of both machine gun teams. and maximum dead space. and aims in on a point along the FPL that he estimates to be 600 meters away. NOTE Using the center mass of the chest as the point where dead space begins to take into consideration the measure of grazing fire. Pace counts recorded in this manner show how far away each section of dead space is from the gun position and how wide the dead space is from near side to far side (see figure G-7). Positioning of Mortar Barrages Each rifle company contains three 60mm mortars. each FPL is a double band of machine gun fire. MARK 1 to MARK 2 equals 38 meters. determines the amount of dead space within each team FPL. This procedure is continued until the walker reaches the limits of grazing fire (600 meters). Within the infantry battalion. approximately 35 to 50 meters apart. A rifle company will be allocated 81mm mortar barrages by the battalion commander. If both teams of the squad are positioned properly. If. The squad leader. Preparation of Range Cards Each team leader prepares two range cards containing information on the extent of dead space and grazing fire along the FPL and location of likely targets (see figure 6-39). (For accuracy the length of the individual’s pace must be measured. and the number of companies assigned forward battle positions. The individual then continues to walk the FPL. In some instances. is given to the squad leader who. The person walking the FPL then records the number of paces that he took to that point on a pace card. but not exactly alike. it may be impractical to use a barrage to cover dead space. Both teams of the machine G-4 . then a significant amount of dead space would have been overlooked and unmarked prior to that point (based on the measure of maximum dead space at 600 meters). The infantry battalion weapons company contains eight 81mm mortars. danger space. The team leader or ammunition bearer then walks out along the FPL using a standard pace. Using the gunner’s view of a person’s waist (an approximate measure of the 1 meter height of grazing fire) as the point at which dead space begins is too limiting as a tactical measurement of fire over actual terrain and disregards the effective danger space created by the lower portion of the cone of fire. The number allocated depends on the terrain in front of each company.1 position behind the gun. the enemy avenues of approach into each company’s battle position. there are three areas of dead space in the FPL. a rifle company is allocated two to three 81mm mortar barrages. both team range cards will be similar. MARK 3 to MARK 4 equals 76 meters. maximum ordinate.MCWP 3-15. Final Protective Lines gun squad normally are assigned the same sector of fire. he shouts out MARK again. dead space is not marked until only a person’s head is visible to the gunner. determines the number and position of mortar barrages required to cover the dead space in the squad FPL. from the information provided. each of which can fire one barrage. Barrages should only be positioned where they are required to fill in gaps in the FPL of the machine gun squad. In figure G-7.

Figure G-7.37 (inches per meter) equals .Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. G-5 .76 meters. 30 ÷ 39. For example.76 meters. to find the distance to MARK 1.1 1 The distance in meters to the MARKS is arrived at by multiplying the paces at that MARK by the length of the pacer’s stride. 2 To determine the length of each area of dead space along the FPL. the distance between the machine gun and MARK 6 is 441 meters. For example. Thus the length of the dead space between MARK 5 and MARK 6 is 84 meters (441 meters – 357 meters = 84 meters). multiply 12 paces by . LCpl Smith’s average pace is 30 inches. The table below is provided for quick reference. subtract the distance (in meters) between the machine gun and the near edge of the dead space from the distance (in meters) between the machine gun and the far edge of the dead space. Walking the FPL. the distance between the machine gun and MARK 5 is 357 meters.

because of the coverage provided by the second team of the first squad. Figure G-9. The platoon commander will submit the first squad’s FPL barrage recommendation to the company commander for approval. This would use all or most of the barrages at the company’s disposal. C=2 barrages). This dead space. In discussing the mortar barrage requirements with the first squad leader. Figure G-8. The section leader then discusses the barrage requirements of all three squads with the platoon commander who.MCWP 3-15. first squad’s FPL. Determining Dead Space. is wide enough (76 meters) to warrant coverage by two mortar barrages. (See figure G-10). B. To cover these three areas with 50-meter by 50-meter barrages would take five barrages (A=1 barrage. The Final Protective Lines coverage of dead space area B by the second team. can be covered adequately by a fire team sector of fire with the automatic rifle PDF firing into the dead space. its proximity to friendly troops. after reviewing the first squad’s range and pace cards. Dead Space Covered by Direct Fire. These areas of dead space are shown in figure G-8 as A. reducing the first squad’s mortar barrage requirement to two. and C of the first team. although also covered by an automatic rifle PDF. the section leader sees that dead space area C is covered by the FPL of the second squad (see figure G-9). decides that dead space A. G-6 . respectively. first squad is better than that provided by the first squad. B=2 barrages.1 meters. and its relatively small size.

1 Figure G-10.Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery MCWP 3-15. Positioning of Mortar Barrages. G-7 .

MCWP 3-15.1 Final Protective Lines G-8 .

..................... weapons................................... biological. lubricant.....................................................individual served weapon sight LMG ............... lubricant oil.... night vision goggle OP .......... multipurpose wheeled vehicle IAL ............................. composition 4 DODAC .... sabot light armor penetrator SLAP-T ...... gun-target HE ........................ and preservative cm ................... centimeter C4 ........................... final protective line GUN-TGT ..... miles per hour NATO ... heavy machine gun HMMWV ...................................... and chemical NCO .... infrared aim light IAP .. observer-target PDF ............... millimeter MMG ........... liquid solvent agent with TeflonTM LAW ... battlesight zero CAAT ...... observation post OT .......... angle of site BFA ......... rifle bore cleaner SAW ........................caliber CLP ......................... noncommissioned officer NVE .... squad automatic weapon SLAP ........ forward observer FPL ................................................................. medium machine gun mph ........ sabot light armor penetrator-tracer ........ quadrant of elevation RBC ....................................................... initial aiming point ISWS ... semi-fluid LSA-T ............ nuclear. blank firing adapter BZO ........ ....................... principal direction of fire QE ... cleaner............................. high explosive dual purpose HMG ............................................. Department of Defense Ammunition Code FEBA ................................................................................................................................ lubricating oil arctic weapons m ...... high explosive HEDP .............meter mm .. forward edge of the battle area FO ....................................... high mobility........ light machine gun LSA .. North Atlantic Treaty Organization NBC ......angle of elevation AS ..........................night vision equipment NVG ...................................................... combined antiarmor teams cal........Appendix H Acronyms and Abbreviations AE ....................................................................... liquid solvent agent LSA ...................

.....MCWP 3-15.1 T&E ..........vertical interval WERM ........................... terrain-observer-gun Acronyms and Abbreviations VI ......width equals range times mils H-2 .................................................traversing and elevating TGT ..........................target TOG .........................

40-MM Grenade Machine Gun MOD 3 Browning Machine Gun. Organizational. Caliber . Machine Gun 1005-774-6861. Browning. M2.62mm (1005-01-359-2714) Supplement _1 08686A-13&P/1 Machine Gun Mount MK64 9-1005-201-10 9-1005-213-10 Operator's Manual for Machine Gun. Caliber . M2 NBC Decontamination Air Defense Artillery Employment Automatic Weapons M42/M55 Visual Aircraft Recognition Technical Manuals (TMs) 08521A-10/1A 08670A-10/1A Machine Gun 40mm MK19 MOD 3 M240 Machine Gun 7.50. TO 11W2-6-3-161. W/E (NSN 1005-00-322-9715) (EIC: 4AG) M48 Turret Type (1005-00-957-3893) (EIC: 4BB) Soft Mount (1005-LL-H11-5877) (Navy) Fixed Type Right Hand Feed (1005-00-122-9339) (Navy) Fixed Type Left Hand Feed (1005-00-122-9368) (Navy) Mounts. M3 Tripod W/E (1005-00-322-9716) (EIC: 4EA) M63 Antiaircraft W/E (1005-00-673-3246) (EIC: 4EC) (TM 02498A-10/1. 9-1005-245-14 .Appendix I References and Related Publications Field Manuals (FMs) 23-14 23-27 23-65 3-5 44-2 44-80 M249 Light Machine Gun in the Automatic Rifle Role. 1005-01-127-7510) (EIC: 4BG) (TM-08671A-10/1) M249 W/Equipment (NSN Operator's Manual for Machine Guns. Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists (Including Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools) Various Machine Gun Mounts and Combinations Used on Tactical and Armored Vehicle Mounts.56MM. Caliber . MK19.62 mm (with change 1-3) 08670B-23&P/2 M240G Machine Gun 7.50 HB. 5. SW361-AB-MMO-010) Operator.50. Heavy Barrel Flexible. 1005-854-4463 (M142). Machine Gun.

Winter of 1950-51 History of the U.62MM (TO 11W2-8-32-4.S. Gun Ring Machine Gun 1005-317-2425 (M36). 1005-654-0733. New York.. Victory at High Tide: The Inchon-Seoul Campagin..MCWP 3-15. MOD 8 (1010-01-179-7615). J. 1005-317-2428 (M66). Henry. Marine Corps Operations in Word War II: Pearl Harbor to Guadalcanal. MOD 6 (1010-01-179-7616). SW 363-D4-MMM-010/MK 64 TM 08686A-13&P1) 11-5855-214-10 11-5855-238-10 Operator's Manual for Night Vision Sight. 1005-834-6119.. Marine Corps Historical Center. Where Ya Been? Living Memories of the U. 1005-783-5494 (M548 Carrier). Mounts. Washington D. 1992 I-2 . Marine Corps Operations in Word War II: Pearl Harbor to Guadalcanal. 1005-736-0400 (M31A1). 7. MK 64. St. Crew Served Weapon.B. Marines in the Korean War. 1005-659-0045. Gun Mounts 1005-419-7041 (m4). 1005-702-8676 (M68). Robert Debs. Used with Machine Gun. 1968 Shaw.62MM Machine Gun. Machine Gun M48 Tank Cupola 1005-736-4875. Machine Gun. Organization and Intermediate Maintenance with Repair Parts List and Components List Mount. MOD 7 (1010-01-179-7616). Volume III Miscellaneous Berry. 1005-797-6451 (M68E1). Marines in World War II Commemorative Series. AN/TVS-5 (NSN 5855-00-629-5327) Operator's Manual for Night Vision Goggles Ground Use: AN/PVS-5 and AN/PVS-5A (NSN 5855-00-150-1820) (EIC: IPD) AN/PVS-5B (5855-01-228-0938) (EIC: IPV) AN/PVS-5C (5855-01-288-0936) (EIC: IPU) Aviation Use Fleet Marine Force Reference Publications (FMFRPs) 12-2 12-6 12-34-I 12-34-III Infantry in Battle Infantry Operations and Weapons Usage in Korea. 1005-706-8880. MOD 5 (1010-01-126-9063). 1005-836-7286. M60E3 7. Volume I History of the U. 1005-797-6450 (M68E1 w/supports). 40MM Machine Gun. 1005-706-9767 (M31C). M2.C. 1005-774-6836 (M548 Carrier) (Reprinted w/Basic Incl C1) 9-1010-231-13&P (O) Operator's. MOD 4 (NSN 1010-01-128-4934).S. MK19 MOD 3. First Offensive: The Marine Campaign for Guadalcanal. Hey Mac.1 References and Related Publications 1005-704-6650. Pedestal. Caliber . Henry I. M60. Lippincott Company.50 Machine Gun. Martin's Press.S. 1005-317-2427 (M36A1). 1988 Heinl. Mounts. 1005-219-8135 (M81). Jr. Philadelphia and New York.

Notify organizational maintenance. Carbon buildup in gas system. PROBABLE CAUSE Lack of lubricant. Burred parts. Piston assembly sear notch worn. Clean and lubricate bolt and slide assembly.MALFUNCTION Sluggish operation. Malfunctions. . Notify organizational maintenance. and cylinder. Notify organizational maintenance. CORRECTIVE ACTION Lubricate. Notify organizational maintenance. Broken. worn. piston. and cylinder. Sear stuck in trigger housing. Carbon buildup in gas system. Failure to cock or a runaway weapon. Clean gas regulator. piston. Figure 2-26. or burred sear. Clean gas regulator. Short recoil.

Clean ammunition. and cylinder. Push safety to left. Obstruction in receiver. Damaged round. . Clean gas regulator. Damaged ejector or spring. Unlatched cover. Eject round. Clean gas cylinder. Failure to chamber. If problem still exists. Figure 2-27. Replace ammunition. Dirty ammunition Carbon buildup in gas cylinder. Damaged or weak driving spring. Failure to eject. Latch cover. Defective ammunition. notify organizational maintenance. Carbon buildup in gas system. Clean gas regulator. Broken or damaged firing pin. Remove and reinstall link belt properly. Defective ammunition link. Safety on. Short recoil. Notify organizational maintenance. Clean and lubricate slide and bolt assembly. Stoppages. Reinstall link belt with open end of link facing down. Damaged extractor or spring. Dirty chamber. Remove obstruction. Clean chamber or bolt and slide assembly. Clean receiver. If problem continues. Failure to fire. Broken or weak driving spring. Align rounds in link belt. Insufficient gas pressure. Long or short rounds. exposing red ring. Clean chamber. Faulty ammunition. and piston. Link belt improperly loaded. Remove and replace ammunition. Carbon buildup in gas system. Clean gas regulator. Inverted link belt. PROBABLE CAUSE Insufficient lubrication. Notify organizational maintenance. or worn operating parts. Notify organizational maintenance. piston and cylinder. Notify organizational maintenance. CORRECTIVE ACTION Lubricate as required.STOPPAGE Failure to feed. Failure to extract. cylinder. Dirty chamber or bolt and slide assembly. Notify organizational maintenance. Damaged gas regulator. notify organizational maintenance. Damaged. Carbon buildup in receiver. Notify organizational maintenance. Notify organizational maintenance. piston. Remove round and recock weapon. weak.

0 0 1004.5 2706.8 348. .9 mm -018.5 mm 12.4 -11.1 700 Meters 183.4 190.3 2411.1 3013.2 480.859 Figure 2-43.8 -4.0 mm -07.75 mm 325 meters 300 meters 150 meters HORIZONTAL RANGE WEAPON UNITS Energy (ft) M249 SAW Energy (joules) Velocity (ft/sec) Bullet Drop (ft) 100 0 Meters Meters 1245.5 248.4 800 Meters 140.0 -0.0 mm 4.7 mm -0-0- ARMOR PENETRATION AT SOME R50 RANGES 50 meters 5.976 -28.7 -7.3 1606.6 643.5 -2.690 -17.8 1156.0 2128. .2 1082.8 -0.205 200 Meters 798.6 1859.R50 RANGES FOR SPECIFIED ARMOR PENETRATION AMMO WEAPON B A M16A2/ M249 M16A2/ M249 7.5 mm 500 meters 3.7 1689.0 mm 300 meters 4.4 mm -09.0 mm 7.165 400 Meters 474.3 1011.7 843.886 300 Meters 621.8 1362.215 500 Meters 354.275 600 Meters 256.3 1368.

Windage and Elevation Correction Chart.Range (Meters) 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 Sight Adjustment One click moves strike 5 cm (2 inches) One click moves strike 10 cm (4 inches) One click moves strike 15 cm (6 inches) One click moves strike 20 cm (8 inches) One click moves strike 25 cm (10 inches) One click moves strike 30 cm (12 inches) One click moves strike 35 cm (14 inches) One click moves strike 40 cm (16 inches) One click moves strike 45 cm (18 inches) Figure 2-53. .

Prone Position and Fighting Position. * Indicates qualification tasks. Figure 2-60. Bipod-Supported Practice and Qualification TASK 1 2 3X 4 *5 *6X *7 Basic (10-Meter) Firing TYPE Ball Ball Ball Ball Ball Ball Ball TIME No limit No limit No limit No limit 20 sec 40 sec 40 sec RDS 12 6 15 24 12 24 15 TARGET Pasters 1 and 2 Pasters 3 and 4 Pasters 5 through 6 Pasters 7 through 8 Pasters 1 through 4 Pasters 7 through 8 Pasters 5 through 6 TYPE FIRE 3 single-round shot group 3-round burst each paster 3-round burst each paster traverse and search 3-round burst each paster traverse and search 3-round burst each paster traverse and search 3-round burst each paster traverse and search 3-round burst each paster traverse and search NOTE: X Indicates tasks fired with protective mask and gloves as a minimum. Firing Table I. .

Tasks 4. 3-round burst Fixed. 5. Bipod-Supported Practice and Qualification TASK 1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 Transition Firing TARGET Single E Single E Double E Single E Single E Single E Single E Double E Single E Single E Double E TIME No limit 5 sec 10 sec 10 sec 15 sec 20 sec 20 sec RDS 12 6 6 6 6 12 12 TYPE X 4:1 X 4:1 X 4:1 X 4:1 X 4:1 X 4:1 X 4:1 X 4:1 RANGE 300 200 400 100 300 100. 3-round burst Fixed. . 3-round burst Fixed. Figure 2-61. * Indicates qualification tasks. 3-round burst Fixed. 3-round burst (field zero) Fixed. 3-round burst Fixed. Firing Table II. 3-round burst Fixed. and 6 are fired with protective masks and gloves at a minimum. 3-round burst NOTE: Unit commander determines the firing position. 3-round burst *8 25 sec 18 X 4:1 X 4:1 X 4:1 Fixed. 300 200 400 100 200 400 TYPE FIRE Fixed. X Indicates ball and tracer 4:1 mix. 3-round burst Fixed.Prone Position and Fighting Position.

V.3 0.3 ARMOR PENETRATION (MM) 300M 4 7 500M 3 5 CARTRIDGE DIMENSIONS L D WT (MM) (MM) (GM) 70 70 12 12 25 25 Maximum range : 4400 meters.7 0. Figure 3-53.PROJ PROJ PROJ M.7 2810 2750 0.42 TGT TOF(S) MEAN 500M RAD(MIL) 0.62MM Cartridge Performance Data. 7.7 9.6 9.7 0. CARTRIDGE . TOF(S) TYPE DIA(MM) WT(GM) (FPS) 300M M80 M61 Ball AP 7.6 7.42 0.

Defective extractor. USUAL CAUSES Defective ammunition belt. Failure to unlock. Causes of Stoppages.NATURE OF STOPPAGE Failure to feed. Incorrect timing. Thick or thin rim. Failure to cock. Broken sear. bulged round. Defective ejector. Burred T-slot. Faulty breech lock cam adjustment. Barrel breech lock cam. Failure to extract. Worn sear notch. Failure to lock. Short round. or adjustment. Worn or faulty breech lock cam. Defective feed mechanism. Defective cartridge case. Broken cocking lever. Defective parts in firing mechanism. Defective ammunition. Worn hooked notch on firing pin extension. Separated (ruptured) case. . Battered breech lock. Weak sear spring. OTHERS CAUSES Improperly loaded belt. Failure to chamber. Broken parts in receiver. set back primer. Broken parts. Dirty chamber. Failure to eject. Failure to fire. Figure 4-66. Incorrect headspace. Broken part or obstruction in T-slot or chamber.

free of grease or dirt. . lightly lubricated. See that it is cleaned. Headspace and timing d. Rear sight and windage knob 2. Inspect to see that they are clean and lightly oiled. SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS 4. and the sight should be down. Replacement parts should be requisitioned and newly drawn parts examined.UNIT 1. clean. Elevation should be set at 1000. c. Operate the retracting slide handle and bolt latch release several times to see that the parts function without excessive friction. See that spare parts kits are complete and in good condition. See that ammunition is properly stored and that boxes and ammunition are in good condition and not oiled. It should function properly and be complete. M66. GUN a. See that it is clean. Check with the gauges to ensure that headspace and timing are correct. and that both handwheels work properly. and lightly oiled. Ensure that the sight is in good condition. MK64. T&E 5. Moving parts INSPECTION Inspect the bore and chamber for rust. See that they are clean and lightly oiled. MOUNT (M3. or M4) 3. and that all clamps are securely tightened. windage zero. lightly lubricated. AMMUNITION Figure 4-80. See that they are clean and lightly oiled. Barrel b.

and in good condition. Protect from sun. Watch for bulged cases to prevent a Check adjustment. windage at zero. Clean. Have an adequate supply. Moving parts. Keep correctly aligned with the feedway. Keep properly set. and dirt. remove it and readjust headspace. Oil lightly and test for worn or Lubricate working parts. Ammunition. Clean and oil. store carefully. Rear sight and See that the sight is clean and windage knob. They should function function of the gun to anticipate without excessive friction. DURING FIRING OR TEMPORARY CESSATION AFTER Clean and lightly oil. broken parts. functions properly. and replenish supply. windage at zero. Figure 4-79 . DO NOT OIL. Examine newly drawn parts. ruptured (separated) case. Clean and oil. Spare parts and tools. Observe the Check adjustment. BEFORE Make sure it is clear and clean. Set at 1000. moisture.WEAPON PART Bore. If a separated case occurs. Check resupply. Check and replace damaged or missing parts. Clean and oil spare parts and tools. clean. Watch for link stoppage. correct if necessary. Headspace and Check adjustment by guage and timing. Check kits for completeness. Keep available. Set sight at 1000. failures. correctly loaded.

Tip is painted red. No bullet. Blue plastic bullet and case. Plain metal bullet. Tip is painted black. Plastic Practice (M680) Dummy (M2) DODAC NO. Round is a Tungsten penetrator in a redtinted sabot. Tip is aluminum or tip is painted blue with an aluminum ring. Tip is painted red with an aluminum ring. Tip is painted blue. 4-81. Tip is painted brown. 1305-A552 1305-A555 1305-A591 1305-A571 1305-A526 1305-A562 1305-A531 1305-A542 1305-A518 N/A 1305-A598 1305-A603 1305-A595 1305-A560 IDENTIFICATION Plain metal bullet. Round is a Tungsten penetrator in an ambertinted sabot. . Three holes are drilled in the cartridge case and there is no primer.CARTRIDGE TYPE Ball (M2) Ball (M33) Tracer (M1) Tracer (M17) Armor Piercing (M2) Incendiary (M1) Armor-Piercing Incendiary (M8) Armor-Piercing Incendiary Tracer (M20) Saboted Light Armor Penetrator (M903) Saboted Light Armor Penetrator-Tracer (M962) Blank (M1A1) Ball. Plastic Practice (M858) Tracer. Blue plastic bullet with red tip and plastic case.

Figure 4-83.7 TGT PROJ M.8 45.2 7.7 12.7 7.6 2810 2810 2910 2910 4000 2.8 3.7 12.9 41.4 0. Caliber .2 0.7 12.7 7.8 42.3 22.7 6.6 2.4 0.5 0.V.4 0. CARTRIDGE .5 2.6 2.PROJ TYPE M33 M2 M8 M20 M903 (SLAP) Ball AP API APIT APDS PROJ DIA (MM) 12.7 ARMOR PENETRATION (MM) 500M 8 19 16 21 34 CARTRIDGE DIMENSIONS L D WT 1200M (MM) (MM) (GM) 4 10 8 11 23 137 137 137 137 137 21 21 21 21 21 119 119 114 111 98 Maximum Range : 7600 Meters.50 Cartridge Performance Data.9 7. TOF(S) TOF(S) MEAN WT(GM) (FPS) 1200M 2500M RAD(MIL) 45.7 1.

0 0. TARGET SPEEDS IN MPH 7½ 15 30 TARGET SPEEDS IN INCHES PER SECOND CORRESPONDING TO— 300 M 6 12 24 500 M 4 8 15 900 M 2 4 9 Figure 4-110. INCHES AT: MATERIAL Sand (100 lb dry wt/cu ft) Clay (100 lb dry wt/cu ft) Concrete 200 M 14 28 2 600 M 1500 M 12 26 1 6 21 1 Figure 4-84.5 12 27 1500 M 0.3 0.9 14 28 0.2 16 21 Figure 4-83.7 0.INCHES AT: MATERIAL Armor plate (homogeneous) Armor plate (face-hardened) Sand (100 lb dry wt/cu ft) Clay (100 lb dry wt/cu ft) 200 M 600 M 1. .

Have an adequate supply on hand. Watch for link stoppage. DURING FIRING Lubricate working parts. SPEED IN MPH 15 RANGE OF TARGET 300 M ½ target length 500 M 1 target length 900 M 2 target lengths Figure 6-20. clean. store carefully. and oil lightly. Ensure all ogives are tight. Top cover Line of fire Figure 5-42. sun. AFTER FIRING Clean and oil lightly. They should function without excessive friction. Keep closed and locked down. . Observe the functioning of the gun to anticipate failures. Inspect for dents or damage. Ensure correct type is used and that it is clean and dent free.WEAPON PART Bore Moving parts BEFORE FIRING Ensure it is clear and clean. Cease fire if any obstruction appearts in the line of fire. Check resupply. Inspect. Ammunition Keep correctly aligned in the feed Clean. Ensure line of fire is clear of all obstructions. and dirt. Oil lightly and test for worn or broken parts. moisture. tray. Protect from and replenish supply. Lube properly after cleaning.

9 14.9 18.1 16.7 60.1 Heigth Over a Man (meters) 7.3 Figure 6-27.3 32.5 30. M240 Gunner's and Leader's Rules Data.7 31.4 46.3 33.9 40.7 16.6 16.7 20.7 19.0 21.3 40.5 18.3 10.1 11.8 29.1 55.6 28.3 Safety Angle (mils) 36.5 Safety Distance (meters) 13. .0 35.2 48.1 13.5 52.GUNNER'S RULE RANGE (M) 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 Sight Set@ (mils) 40.0 44.1 38.8 14.3 40.3 40.3 40.7 51.2 19.8 26.6 35.4 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Safety Distance (meters) 9.9 57.9 18.2 42.4 22.5 21.5 62.2 34.2 LEADER'S RULE Heigth Over a Safety Angle Man (meters) (mils) 11.2 24.

Figure 6-59. Midpoint Leads.6 12 13.MIDPOINT LEADS (BASED UPON FTA 0.6 7.3 * Drop all fractions in estimating lead in target lengths. . ANGLE OF APPROACH IN MILS 0 – 100 (Approaching Leg) 100 – 500 (Approaching Leg) 500 – 800 (Approaching Leg) 800 – 1600 (Approaching Leg) 1600 – 2400 (Approaching Leg) LEAD 0 ½ ¾ Full ½ Figure 6-60.7 3.50—H—1) MIDPOINT LEAD AIRCRAFT AVERAGE LENGTH (TYPE) AIRCRAFT (METERS) SPEED (MPH) Fighter Fighter Fighter Fighter Fighter Fighter Transport Transport Liaison Liaison 7 7 7 7 7 7 21 21 7 7 600 600 400 400 200 200 200 200 100 100 MIDPOINT RANGE (METERS) 920 460 920 460 920 460 920 460 920 460 Meters 378 165 252 109 126 54 126 54 62 27 Mils 414 360 276 240 138 120 138 120 69 60 Apparent Target Lengths* 414 18 27.8 6 6 2.

Tip is painted black. Round is a tungsten penetrator in an amber tinted sabot. Tip is painted red. Plastic Practice (M860) Dummy (M2) DODAC 1305-A552 1305-A555 1305-A591 1305-A571 1305-A526 1305-A562 1305-A531 1305-A542 1305-A518 CHARACTERISTICS/TIP COLOR Plain metal bullet. 3 holes are drilled in the cartridge case. Plain metal bullet. Tip is painted blue. Tip is aluminum. There is no primer. Caliber . Tip is painted red with an aluminum ring. Tip is painted brown. No DODAC issued yet. Blue plastic bullet and case.TYPE OF CARTRIDGE Ball (M2) Ball (M33) Tracer (M1) Tracer (M17) Armor Piercing (M2) Incendiary (M1) Armor-Piercing-Incendiary (M8) Armor-Piercing-Incendiary-Tracer (M20) Saboted Light Armor Penetrator (M903) Saboted Light Armor Penetrator-Tracer (M962) Blank (M1A1) Ball. Plastic Practice (M858) Tracer. Round is a tungsten penetrator in a red tinted sabot. Blue plastic bullet with red tip and plastic case.50 Ammunition Markings . 1305-A598 1305-A603 1305-A595 1305-A560 No bullet. or tip is painted blue with an aluminum ring.

The round is Dispose of bad round as directed by current defective if the primer is deeply indented. 2) If primer is not indented. 1) Examine the round. All worn. Remove round from bolt face. CORRECTIVE ACTION Follow instructions for immediate action. Short recoil. IMMEDIATE ACTION: Slide belted rounds out of feeder. Lube. Remove deformed round from chamber. slowly release bolt to forward position. broken. 3) Dirty gun. firing pin could be defective. Figure 5-33. Pull bolt to rear. Pin must be replaced by armorer. Female link first. Inspect. or burred bolt assembly parts after removal of the bolt and backplate assembly. or defective parts must be repaired by the armorer. If same problem occurs. replace ammunition belt. female link first. Bad ammunition. 6) Bad timing. Clean. Clean bore and chamber with bore cleaner and brush. Field strip gun. 4) Loose. procedures and attempt to fire next round. All worn. Armorer must adjust timing. burred.) Broken links. remove link rounds. (If bolt is forward. or defective parts must be repaired by the armorer. then check for— 1) Carbon buildup in the chamber. 5) Loose. Lubricate or clear obstruction. Rounds aligned straight. Perform immediate action. broken. Round is deformed and/or partially chambered. replace with new linked ammunition. burred. Align rounds. Ammunition jammed. CHECK FOR Misfire. Clear jam. 2) Dry or obstructed receiver rails. or burred feeder or feed slide assembly parts.PROBLEM Gun won't fire. If male-end of link is first. If links are broken. . pull back slightly on one charging handle as the round is removed from the bolt. Replace ammunition with other end of belt. CAUTION Before proceeding.

Continued . Clean. Remove bolt and backplate assembly. 2) Firing pin dirty. Report defects to the armorer. 1) Examine cocking lever (left side of bolt) for wear or damage. 2) Feed slide assembly binding. Lube. Lube. Report defects to the armorer. Report defects to the armorer. Defective feeder or feed slide assembly. Bad firing pin. 2) Check extractors: – Dirt clogged. 1) Firing pin tip fails to spring forward. Report defect to the armorer. Clean and lube bolt face. 1) Weak/damaged bolt fingers or extractors. CAUTION Reassemble bolt and backplate with cocking lever in the forward position. 1) Press pawls to determine if they are weak or broken. Remove case. Report defect to the armorer. Report defects to the armorer. Dispose of dropped live round as required by current directives. Figure 5-33 . 3) Link guide badly worn. CHECK FOR CORRECTIVE ACTION Check the firing pin if the primer on the round is not indented. Inspect. Report defects to the armorer. 3) Firing pin chipped or broken.PROBLEM Gun won't fire— Continued. Clean. Bad cocking lever. Bolt won't pick up round. especially on sides. Bolt drops round before firing. Remove feed slide assembly and tray. 1) Spent case in chamber. – Weak or damaged. Scrape out dirt.

and check sear components. Remove chargers. Bent guide rods. Gun fires too soon out of battery. Runaway gun (uncontrolled automatic fire). Timing needs adjustment. Sluggish or erratic firing. Weak recoil springs. Dirty bore or chamber. Clean bore and chamber. CHECK FOR Receiver rails binding. Damaged sear. Report burns or bent rails to the armorer. Binding rails. WARNING Do not operate weapon until it has been checked out and repaired by an armorer. CORRECTIVE ACTION Test by pulling the bolt to the rear.PROBLEM Gun won't fire— Continued. Recharge and attempt to fire one time.Trigger feels loose or doesn't Have the armorer check the trigger operate. If gun is mounted on tripod. Go to stoppage table. mechanism. Continued . Figure 5-33. Clean and lube rails. Defective trigger. Remove receiver sear housing The armorer must repair defects. IMMEDIATE ACTION: Keep gun (when operated as free gun) pointed down range until ammunition is exhausted. Report bent guide rods to the armorer. Report weak spring to the armorer. 1) Pull out bolt and backplate assembly until it clicks. 2) Push against springs to test for weakness. hold weapon on target while lowering one charging handle. Gun ceases to fire. Ease it forward (hold on to one charging handle while you press the trigger). Inspect receiver rails for dirt or burrs. The weapon could be dangerous. Gun will stop firing. Report defect to armorer. Note if rods are bent.

4 (55") 560 680 760 figure G-5.Sighted Range (m) 500 600 700 Maximum Ordinate (m) 0. .75 1.8 (31") 1.2 1.4 (15") .8 Maximum Maximum Dead Space (m) Coverage (m) .

84 0.71 0.61 0.99 1.69 0.27 1.02 1.3 1.64 0.96 0.81 0.17 1.19 48 49 50 51 52 53 Meters 1.91 0.09 1.76 0.22 1.66 0.LCpl SMITH Mark 1 2 3 4 5 6 DEAD SPACE CARD 1 Pace = 30 Inches = .94 0.76 Meters Paces 125 175 210 310 470 580 Meters 951 133 160 236 357 441 84 76 382 PACE CONVERSION FROM INCHES TO METERS Inches 24 25 26 27 28 29 Meters Inches 0.25 1.32 1.86 0.74 30 31 32 33 34 35 Meters Inches 0.14 1.12 1.07 1.04 42 43 44 45 46 47 Meters Inches 1.7 0.35 appendix G figure G-7 .89 36 37 38 39 40 41 Meters Inches 0.